final eia of 500 kv t l lakhra pp

Final Report June, 2015

ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT CONSULTANTS 503, Anum Estate, Opp. Duty Free Shop, Main Shahrah-e-Faisal, Karachi. Phones(+) 9221- 34311466, 34382860, Fax: (+) 9221-34311467. E-mail: [email protected], [email protected]

Website: www.emc.com.pk

Environmental Impact Assessment

500 kV Transmission Lines for Lakhra Coal Fired Thermal Power Plant Construction Project

In The Name of Allah, The Most Beneficent, The Most Merciful

August,

Environmental Impact Assessment of proposed 500 kV Transmission Lines for Lakhra Coal Fired Thermal Power Plant Construction Project

Final Report

Environmental Management Consultants (EMC) Executive Summary Page 1 of 11

Executive Summary

Environmental Management Consultants (EMC) has been commissioned by JICA Survey Team (JST) to conduct the Environmental Impact Assessment study of proposed “Four 500 kV Transmission Lines” for local regulatory approval from the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) of Sindh Province, and to meet the requirements of the specified reference framework as follow:

o Applicable national laws and regulations in Pakistan; o World Bank/Safeguard Policy OP 4.01 Annex B; o World Bank/Safeguard Policy OP 4.12 Annex A, Resettlement Plan; o World Bank/Involuntary Resettlement Sourcebook; o JICA Guidelines for Environmental & Social Considerations (April 2010) o JICA Environmental Checklists and Monitoring Form for Power Transmission and Distribution o ILO Conventions and recommendations.

In 2011, according to World Bank Report “estimated production loss to the economy is two percent of the GDP per annum, and may be more”‘. The State Bank of Pakistan has reported that the peak shortfall for the system of the Pakistan Electric Power Company (PEPCO) rose from 2,645 MW in 2007 to 8,398 MW in 2012 which indicates a deepening of the energy crisis in the country. It was estimated that the national demand of electricity would keep on growing rapidly, at about 10 per cent annually, owing to growing population and economic activities. The energy crisis was generated by variety of reasons, in particular, widening demand-supply gap, increased shift to oil-based expensive energy mix, and lack of integrated energy strategy and energy governance.

According to the National Electric Power Regulatory Authority’s (NEPRA) ‘State of the Industry Report 2012’ the gap between supply and demand in 2011-2012 was well above 5,000 MW mark and remained between 4,000 MW and 5,000 MW for most part of the year. The country has therefore an urgent requirement to generate additional power to feed into the national grid.

The main objective of the proposed Project is to respond to the Energy Policy 2013 which has set the goals at 1) “Ensuring the generation of inexpensive and affordable electricity for domestic, commercial, and industrial use by using indigenous resources such as coal (Thar coal) and hydel”, 2) adopt such strategy that meets this goal and also focuses on shifting Pakistan’s energy mix towards cheaper fuel and conservation of gas for power, and 3) utilize coal for power generation and thus provide energy security to the Country.

The main objectives of the Project are to:

o Respond to the urgent need to close the yawning gap between power generation and demand. o Provide an economically viable and environmentally acceptable power generation system to make the coal

available for use in power production, in view of the wide gap between supplies of fossil fuel and demand, o Ensure stable power production system for the Country o Respond to the need of improvement in quality of life through sustainable Energy Resource development.

The no-development option simply means that the Government of Pakistan does nothing to address the purpose and need for the power generation and transmission. The most significant outcomes of this approach would be a negative impact on current electricity supplies, and the possibility of complete blackouts at times of high demand. The power generation capacity of Pakistan meets only 40 percent of the current demand and if the “No Project” is to have its way, the Country will have to slow down the growth rate of its economy and all its development projects will come to a standstill. At present additional pressure is being put on already deficient electricity generation capacity by the urban and industrial demand. The present shortfall is estimated at 3,000 MW and the power outage has gone up from 6 to 8


Final Report


hours in urban areas and 10 to 12 hours in rural areas. Government of Pakistan is desperately looking for all options to bridge this gap.

It is the professional opinion of the EIA Team that the no-development option is unrealistic, and, indeed, following this approach would result in the stagnation or cessation of many Government strategies that have been planned and implemented. Due to the negative consequences of the no-development option, it has been discarded from further consideration in this EIA.

The following safety considerations issued by the Design Directorate of National Transmission and Despatch Company (NTDC) are kept in view while selecting the sites for T/L route and grid station sites.

Environmental Safety Considerations

o Operations in environmentally sensitive areas with special respect for fragile ecosystems and their inherent bio-diversity are avoided to the possible extent.

o The Right of Way (ROW) for T/L through natural features like high mountains, hilly terrain susceptible to landslides, large lakes, reservoirs, marshes, human habitations and reserved forests/national parks are avoided to the possible extent, for insuring reliability, security and economy.

o ROW is selected duly considering the location of telecommunication lines and railway circuits to avoid electrical interference due to mutual induction.

o Adoption of innovative technologies/latest equipments to abate pollution in construction activities and operations.

Social Safety Considerations

o Residential structures are kept 12 m out from the plumb line of the outer conductor in ROW. However, in the absence of an alternative alignment, an exception can be made for farm buildings and single store factory buildings, provided neither is used as a residence.

o T/L routes through area of cultural or historical importance and religious places are avoided to the possible extent. o Alternative route alignments are used if any school, rural dispensary, mosque or local shrine (ziarat) comes within

200 m of the centerline of a planned route o Brick kilns are kept at least 30 m outside the centerline of the ROW o Tube wells and open wells using a surface pump are not permitted under the high voltage conductors. This due

to the reason that piping and cranes used to recondition such wells could come in contact with the high voltage conductors.

o Existing open wells including Persian or artesian wells are allowed to remain under the high voltage conductors, as are hand pumps. Existing open wells in the ROW will be capped.

o Existing orchards can remain within the ROW although towers are kept out of orchards wherever possible. Orchards are over sailed by a clearance of 6 meters above the height of a mature orchard whereas all the other trees are removed.

o The alignment of the T/L and the selection of grid station sites are made by proponent after discussion with the key persons of the area, avoiding properties, infrastructures and religiously sensitive areas, such as shrines and graveyards to the possible extent.

o Selection of the sites for construction of tower foundation and tower erection is made consciously on stable surfaces ignoring sites prone to erosion/slip.

o The spacing between the towers/poles may not be uniform and range variously for physical and other considerations such as crossing of main roads, residential areas and trees and for avoiding graveyards and big ditches in between the two towers/poles.

o The route alignment of the T/L, location of the towers/poles and the corridors are identified by proponent.


Final Report


Public Safety Parameters

o The main consideration relating to the public safety relates to the safe horizontal and vertical distances of the conductor from the ground level to avoid the electrocution of the living beings under the T/L. In view of public safety, a corridor having a width of minimum 30 m, clear of all obstructions is adopted for Extra High Voltage (EHV) 500 and 220 kV T/L (half on either side from the center line). However, general farming within this corridor is allowed and the tree plantations that do not exceed a height of 1.5 m are also allowed to remain under the lines. Similarly, open wells, including Persian wheels are allowed to remain under the T/L. Tube wells and Peter pumps are not permitted under the high voltage conductors. This is for the reason that piping and cranes used to refurbish such wells may come in contact with the lines.

o No residential or other public buildings like factory, school, hospital, mosque except for the graves / graveyards are permitted within the corridor. However, farm buildings which are used for residential purposes are allowed to remain under the extra high voltage lines, provided 8 m vertical clearance is maintained. The height of the towers can be increased to accommodate such buildings.

Conductor to Ground Clearance

o The conductor to ground clearance is desirable to be worked out based on over voltage due to switching surge. Safe clearance is required to provide for moving objects under the line with a height of 4.5 m, withstanding switching surge of 3-sigma margin with 99.7 % probability under adverse atmospheric conditions. This is to keep off the maximum voltage gradient at ground level and maximum current induced in person less than internationally allowable values. As such, conductor to ground clearance shall in no way be less than 9 m. This is in accordance with the regulations of GOP/ WAPDA.

o WAPDA/NTDC have accepted current international standards for conductor to ground clearance for the construction of EHV T/L Projects. The specific standards accepted are that of the National Electrical Safety Code (ANSCI C2), currently applicable in the United States.

Selection of the preferred alternative is based on the severity of impact of a range of environmental & social aspects. The severity has been quantified by a sampling scaling procedure according to which the route option 1 (shown below) is the preferred alternative. It has a short route, is cost effective and has least environmental and social footprint. Such being the case it is conforms to the sustainability principles. The proposed route is recommended since it is environment friendly as impacts are minor & case be properly addressed by taking appropriate mitigation measures.

The Project area forms part of Deh Kohistan. The land here is a barren, flat to mildly hilly tract, consisting of outlying spurs of the Kirthar Range. Cultivation is carried out wherever alluvial soil exists and near or along the numerous depressions where rain water carried by hill streams (nallas) can be stored. Cattle grazing, stone quarrying, gravel and sand collection and transportation, besides wood cutting are the main occupation. The vegetative growth in this area is limited to short grasses, shrubs and scrubs along with a few drought resistant trees. Soil cover in Deh Kohistan area is very thin due to severe wind erosion on land and soil erosion in the drainage basin. Natural vegetation has almost disappeared from the surface plain. The soils of the area in this region are shallow, strongly calcareous silt loam with weak structure. The slope of the stony waste land and the hilly region is towards the syncline of river Indus and its tributaries.

There are clear evidences of deflation by wind as a common natural process in the proposed Project area. Evidence for this process is the ubiquitous gravel covered surfaces occurring throughout Deh Kohistan (e.g. the stony wastes). However, there is also evidence of high contemporary rates of wind erosion. This is shown by the elevated mounds of fine sand that occur around shrubs on the Plains Unit. These mounds provide evidence of windblown sand, but they also demonstrate that the surface has been deflated by tens of centimetres during the life of the plants.

Manzoorabad


Final Report


Source: Environmental Management Consultants (EMC) Plain with stone lag (known locally as stony wastes).

These surfaces are evidence of deflation.

The microenvironment of the Project is located in what is a piedmont zone of the Khirthar Range with N55 Indus Highway separating it from the Indus river flood zone. The concerned area has no industrial activity worth the name except the existing Lakhra Fluidized Bed Combustion Power Station and the Coal Mine. As such the air quality corresponds to that of an arid environment. The Habibullah Mor, Hussain Rind Goth, Murid Khan Rind Goth and Bhora Khan Goth are the only populated conglomerations that comprise the living area in the surrounding.

GENCO Holding Company Limited (GHCL) is developing a 660 MW Lakhra Cola Fired Thermal Power Plant (Lakhra Coal Power Plant; LCPP) utilizing imported and Thar Coal, which is located in Manjhhand Taluka, Jamshoro District, geographically situated at 25° 26’ 55.23” N 68° 17’ 00.59” E, about 175 km northeast of Karachi and about 40 km northwest of Hyderabad. The location is shown in Figure EX-1 and EX-2.

The existing Lakhra Power Station in the east and vehicular traffic on Indus Highway Link road in the north, Indus Highway N55 in the east are the only point sources that are adding the exhaust emissions. There is otherwise no other point sources. The vehicular traffic operating on the link road as well as N-55 comprises mainly the large trucks that transport coal mined at the Lakhra coal mines. These trucks usually carry the content uncovered and as such the roads do have larger particulate matter emissions. Additionally the solid waste comprising mainly the fly ash are subject to wind aeolian erosion due to which the air quality has particulate matter emissions above acceptable level in the environment.


Final Report


Source: Environmental Management Consultants (EMC) Location of proposed Lakhra Coal Power Plant

Source: Environmental Management Consultants (EMC) Proposed T/L routes and the microenvironment

Manzoorabad


Final Report


The microenvironment is mostly rocky wasteland. It is characterized by very low vegetation cover. Patches of vegetation are localized in areas of riparian habitats where water accumulates during the rainy season. A deep gorge or water nullah passes through the mid of the project area. The road from the coal deposit area to the existing Lakhra Power Station also passes through the Project Area. There are small dry water courses/ nullahs in the Project Area which are active in the rainy season. Some livestock grazing takes place in the area but at a very low scale. There are dry ash deposits in the close by area.

Cassia italic Convolvulus spinosis

The microenvironment encompasses the specific site of activity i.e. the existing Lakhra Power Station site on Indus Highway, N55. The project site is accessed easily from Super Highway M-9 to Indus Highway N-55. It is adjacent to which leads to railway crossing at main Jamshoro market. People of this district are pre-dominantly Sindhi speaking but Urdu, Balochi and Brohi are also spoken in the district. Bhutto, Rind, Syed, Talpur, Chandio, Magsi, Soomro, Memon and Kalhoro are the major clans of this district. Islam is the religion of majority in this district followed by a minority of Hindu community. Economically active population comprises the persons of either sex who are engaged in some work for pay or profit including un-paid family helpers, persons not working but looking for as well as laid off, during the reference period i.e., last year. Economically active population in the district is 20.64% of its total population and 37.37% of the population aged 10 years and above. The %age of children below 10years is 32.03 while 7.54% are students and 8.22% are all others. Among the inactive population 31.57% are domestic workers including 63.75% housewives/ females in the district.

The proposed Transmission Line Project will be developed as an add-on infrastructure facility in an undeveloped rural socio-economic context with the existing Lakhra Power Station as the only industrial unit and the Lakhra Coal Mine as the only employment provider for un-skilled and semi-skilled manpower of the area. It is understood that another major coal fired power plant is in the planning / establishment stage in the Jamshoro district.

The stakeholders were in total support of the proposed project and offered full support to JICA and the Government of Pakistan in proceeding with the development of Lakhra Coal Power Plant and associated facilities including the four Transmission Lines, without any delay because the current energy supply and demand gap in the country is rapidly growing and has adversely affected the economic and social well-being of the people of the country. Participants offered their all-out support for the project, however, they were expecting installation of a water purification plant, electricity and employment for their able bodied persons.

Impoverishment of resources in the environmentally degraded land has, according to the residents of Villages, led to desertification which in turn has induced poverty, and the vicious circle is completing when poverty induces further desertification. It was surmised from the discussions at Villages, that the major cause for environmental degradation is both a cause and a consequence of impoverishment.


Final Report


Screening is the first step in EIA Study. It identifies the processes that may influence the project environments. Level of the assessment is also determined by application of this technique. Through quick initial evaluation considering location, size, scope, importance, sensitivity and expected environmental and social impacts, the proposed four transmission lines from Lakhra Coal Power Plant project falls under Schedule II of the Sindh Environmental Protection Agency (Review of IEE/EIA) Regulations, 2014 and Category A under the JICA guidelines for Environmental & Social Considerations (April 2010) for which a detailed environmental and social impact assessment is required i.e. mitigation measures are workable.

According to NTDC current practice, no private or public land will be acquired permanently, as none of the towers will be constructed in an established urban or a developing housing area, and access under the tower will be maintained as the towers provide sufficient clearance for unhindered access by tractors, and thus, it allows continuous use and cultivation of the land. To accommodate the PAPs needs, i) compensating at market rates all land occupied by Towers in urban areas; ii) by avoiding land impacts in rural areas through the use of Towers with sufficient vertical clearance to allow the continuation of unrestricted farming and animal grazing; and iii) if the construction of such Towers is impossible, by compensating the land occupied by Tower bases land also in rural areas.

In any case, the land under and around towers are temporarily affected in terms of the loss of crops/fruit trees/plantations during a 3-tier process of tower construction, namely: (i) construction of foundations, (ii) erection of towers, and (iii) stringing of power cables, any affects will be compensated. Thereby causing losses during the whole process will be accordingly compensated by cash.

In this Project, the land survey by this study team with the help of the Revenue Staff determined that the land under ROW and footings of towers are unregistered land that falls under the ownership of the provincial government The concerned land is non-productive and unoccupied barren waste land. In any case, the towers will be installed without any formal land acquisition and no compensation will be paid based on existing practice of NTDC.

The potential environmental aspects of establishment of the T/L have been identified for the different stages of the Project and the results summarized in following Table.

Table EX-1: Result of Environmental Impact Assessment (Transmission Line)

No. Item

Assessment of Scoping

Assessment of Survey Result

Results

Pre/

Cons

tructi

on

Oper

ation

Pre/

Cons

tructi

on

Oper

ation

Pollution Control 1 Air Quality B- D D D [Construction Phase]

- Temporary dust generated from construction will be negligible.

- Exhaust emissions generated from stand-by diesel generator, vehicle, construction machinery, etc. will be negligible.

[Operation Phase] - No specific air pollution is expected.

2 Water Quality B- C- D D [Construction Phase] - No negative impact on water quality is expected.

Because transmission routes are selected avoiding any


Final Report


step sloping land, and any slopes would be reinforced with concrete or other means to minimize soil runoff and turbid water generation.

[Operation Phase] - No negative impact is expected. Because the oil and

chemicals would be stored at designated sites and treated appropriately.

3 Soil Quality B- B- D D [Construction Phase] - No negative impact on soil quality is expected. Because

generated wastes would be stored at designated sites. [Operation Phase] - No negative impact is expected. Because the oil and


4 Wastes B- D B- D [Construction Phase] - Solid wastes and hazardous wastes might be generated

from construction sites. [Operation Phase] - No waste would be generated.

5 Noise and Vibration B- D D D [Construction Phase] - Noise may be generated from heavy machinery, haulage

of construction materials and tower materials to and around construction sites, and site construction activities including concrete mixing, excavation and blasting. But since there is no house near the ROW, no impact is predicted.

[Operation Phase] - No noise and vibration would be generated.

6 Subsidence D D D D [Construction & Operation Phase] - No subsidence would occur.

7 Odor B- D D D [Construction & Operation Phase] - No odor would be expected by appropriately disposing

of solid and liquid wastes at designated sites and being collected by licensed company regularly.

Natural Environment 8 Protected Areas D D D D [Construction & Operation Phase]

- ROW does not pass through any protected areas including National Parks and no impact will result in displacement of wildlife and loss of habitat.

9 Ecosystem C- C- D B- [Construction Phase] - No negative impact on ecosystem is expected.

Transmission line route was selected so as to avoid any protected areas.

[Operation Phase] - Birds striking the lines and other impacts are expected to

be least significant. 10 Hydrology D D D D [Construction & Operation Phase]


Final Report


- As there is no major water body, no adverse impact is expected.

11 Topography and Geology

D D D D [Construction & Operation Phase] - No large-scale topographical and geological change is

expected. Social Environment

12 Resettlement (Land Acquisition)

C- C- D D [Pre-construction Phase] - The concerned land is non-productive and

unoccupied barren waste land. As a result of the land survey by this study team with the help of the Revenue Staff, the land under ROW and footings of towers are determined to be unregistered. Under Pakistani land laws, any unregistered land falls under the ownership of the provincial government. In any case, the towers will be installed without any formal land acquisition and no compensation will be paid based on existing practice of NTDC.

13 People below the Poverty Line

C-/C+ C-/C+ D D [Pre-construction and Operation Phase] - No settlement of people was identified along the T/L

route and therefore will not be disturbed. [Construction Phase] - No significant adverse impact on the major occupation

(cattle grazing, stone quarrying, gravel and sand collection and transportation, besides wood cutting) of neighboring people since these practices are limited to the areas beyond the Highway N-55 on the east of the area.

14 Ethnic, Minorities and Indigenous People

C- C- D D [Pre-construction and Operation Phase] - No ethnic minority groups or indigenous people were

identified along the transmission line route. 15 Living and Livelihood C-/C+ C-/C+ B+ D [Pre-construction and Construction Phase]

- No productive land use was observed along the T/L route.

[Construction Phase] - Project can contribute on the local economy by employ

non-skilled workers from local communities and procuring goods/materials from local communities as much as possible.

16 Use of Land and Resources

C- C- D D [Pre-construction Phase] - The land covered under the project alignment is a

barren, flat to mildly hilly tract, consisting of outlying spurs of the Kirthar Range.

- The land will remain as its natural condition. 17 Water Use C- D D D [Construction and Operation Phase]

- T/L route was selected so as to avoid any steep sloping land.

- Any slopes shall be reinforced with concrete, plantation


Final Report


or other means to minimize soil runoff and turbid water generation.

18 Infrastructure and Social Services

B- D B- A+ [Construction Phase] - The proposed T/Ls will be connected to the existing

ones; therefore, there is a chance of power outage. - Since the volume of construction traffic will be small, no

significant impact is anticipated on existing traffic. [Operation Phase] - The proposed T/Ls will increase the capacity of the

existing power of the system. 19 Social Capita,

Institutions & ConflictsC- D D D - No specific impact is predicted concerning social

infrastructure and local decision making institutions. 20 Heritage C- D D D [Construction Phase]

- No cultural, historical and archaeological heritage sites and structures were found along the proposed T/Ls.

[Operation Phase] - No specific impact is predicted concerning cultural

heritage. 21 Landscape B- B- D D [Construction and Operation Phase]

- T/L route was selected so as to avoid any protected and scenic areas to the maximum extent.

22 Gender C- C- D D - No specific negative impact is expected. 23 Child Right C- C- D D - No specific negative impact is expected. 24 Infectious Diseases B- D B- D [Construction Phase]

- Local people will be recruited for simple work as much as possible and there is a low risk of infectious diseases being transmitted by external workers.

[Operation Phase] - No specific negative impacts are expected.

25 Working Condition and Accident

B- B- B- B- [Construction Phase] - The construction of civil works poses an inherent risk of

injury to workers from accidents and hazardous working environments.

[Operation Phase] - Operation and maintenance (O&M) of elevated high

tension (EHT) lines can pose an inherent risk to workers. O&M is currently undertaken by NTDC staff adequately trained and experienced in EHT line maintenance.

Others 26 Trans-boundary of

Waste Treatment and Climate Change

B- D D D - No specific negative impact is expected.

A+/-: Significant positive/negative impact is expected. B+/-: Positive/negative impact is expected to some extent. C+/-: Extent of positive/negative impact is unknown. (Further examination is needed, and the impact may be clarified as the study progresses.) D: No impact is expected.


Final Report


Source: Environmental Management Consultants

The EMP will serve as a principal execution module of the project that would not only mitigate adverse environmental impacts during the construction and the operation phase of the project but also ensures that environmental standards and good housekeeping is maintained. Continuous environmental monitoring is exercised to ensure that preventive measures are in place and effective to sustain environmental integrity. Some of the key objectives of EMP are to:

o Outline mitigation measures recommended in the EIA & define the responsibility & timing for the implementation of these measures;

o To outline functions and responsibilities of responsible persons. o To state and implement standards and guidelines which are required under environmental legislations particular

in context to the project. o Facilitates the implementation of the mitigation measures by providing the technical details of each project impact,

and proposing implementation schedule of the proposed mitigation measures. o Define a monitoring mechanism and identify monitoring parameters to ensure that all proposed mitigation

measures are completely and effectively implemented. o Identify training requirements at various levels and provide a plan for the implementation of training sessions.

The EIA process finds that the impacts of the project activities at the pre-construction, construction and operation stages have been adequately addressed and mitigation measures duly proposed wherever needed. Adoption of mitigation measures will ensure reduction of impact on the micro and macroenvironment as well as socio-economic conditions to acceptable levels. The development of this project will be compatible with the requirements of the Sindh Environmental Protection Act 2014, Pakistan Environmental Protection Act 1997, and JICA Guidelines for Environmental & Social Considerations as well as other regulatory requirements of Government of Sindh and Government of Pakistan. The issue of environment, health & safety has been duly incorporated in the design & operations phases of the project.

On the basis of the findings of the EIA Study, it is possible to conclude that:

o Operation of T/Ls will, on adoption of the mitigation measures, have no significant impact on the physical as well as socio-economic composition of the microenvironment and macroenvironment of the project area in Jamshoro.

o The likely impact of construction and operation of the T/Ls and associated infrastructure will be appropriately mitigated through proven technologies, careful planning and landscaping.

o The proposed T/Ls Project will when commissioned become an integral part of the microenvironment of Taluka Manjhand and a friendly component of its macroenvironment.

It is envisaged that the current commitment of the proponent to maintain the quality of life in and around the project area through implementation of the environmental management plan and Manpower engagement/employment plan, specifically developed for the project would mitigate the likely adverse impacts. Furthermore the Project will achieve the prime objectives of utilizing the indigenous resources by providing the much-needed fuel to the current energy-deficient scenario of Pakistan.

The Project will thus respond to all aspects of sustainability: Economic, social and environmental and will thus be a sustainably viable project.


Final Report

Environmental Management Consultants (EMC) Table of Contents Page 1 of 8

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Acronyms List of Tables List of Figures Executive Summary

Chapter 1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 1 of 14 1.1 Background & Objective of the Survey ............................................................................................. 1 of 14

1.2 Study Area ...................................................................................................................................... 5 of 14

1.3 Objectives of Project ....................................................................................................................... 8 of 14

1.4 Categorization of the Project ........................................................................................................... 8 of 14

1.5 Objectives of EIA .......................................................................................................................... 10 of 14

1.6 Methodology Adopted for EIA ........................................................................................................ 10 of 14

1.6.1 Scoping .................................................................................................................................. 10 of 14

1.6.2 Review of Legislation and Guidelines ....................................................................................... 11 of 14

1.6.3 Baseline Data Collection ......................................................................................................... 11 of 14

1.6.4 Identification of Aspects ........................................................................................................... 12 of 14

1.6.5 Impact Assessment & EMP ..................................................................................................... 12 of 14

1.6.6 Documentation & Review ........................................................................................................ 13 of 14

1.8 EIA Study Team ............................................................................................................................ 14 of 14

1.7 Organization of the EIA Report ...................................................................................................... 14 of 14

Chapter 2 Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework ........................................................ 1 of 26 2.1 Policy Framework ........................................................................................................................... 2 of 26

2.2 Statutory Framework ....................................................................................................................... 4 of 26

2.3 Sindh Environmental Protection Act, 2014 ....................................................................................... 5 of 26

2.4 Environment & Alternate Energy Department ................................................................................... 6 of 26

2.5 Sindh EPA (Review of IEE and EIA) Regulations 2014 ..................................................................... 7 of 26

2.6 Pakistan Environmental Assessment Procedures ............................................................................. 7 of 26

2.7 Sindh & National Environmental Quality Standards ........................................................................ 11 of 26

2.8 The Forest Act, 1927 ..................................................................................................................... 15 of 26

2.9 Cutting of Trees (Prohibition) Act, 1975 and The Protection of Trees and Bush wood Act, 1949 ...... 15 of 26

2.10 Sindh wildlife Protection Ordinance, 1972 ...................................................................................... 15 of 26

2.11 Biodiversity Action Plan ................................................................................................................. 16 of 26

2.12 Archaeological Relics .................................................................................................................... 16 of 26

2.13 The Land Acquisition Act, 1894 ..................................................................................................... 16 of 26

2.14 (Draft) National Resettlement Policy (2002) ................................................................................... 18 of 26


Final Report


2.15 West Pakistan Water and Power Development Authority Act, 1958 ................................................ 18 of 26

2.16 NTDC Safety Considerations on selection of T/L Routes and Grid Station Sites .............................. 18 of 26

2.16.1 Environmental Safety Considerations ...................................................................................... 18 of 26

2.16.2 Social Safety Considerations ................................................................................................... 19 of 26

2.16.3 Public Safety Parameters ........................................................................................................ 19 of 26

2.16.4 Conductor to Ground Clearance .............................................................................................. 20 of 26

2.16.5 Corridor Clearance .................................................................................................................. 20 of 26

2.17 The Telegraph Act, 1885 ............................................................................................................... 20 of 26

2.18 Regulation of Generation, Transmission and Distribution of Electric Power Regulation Act, 1997 ... 21 of 26

2.19 NEPRA Power Policy, 2002........................................................................................................... 21 of 26

2.20 Electricity Act, 1910 ...................................................................................................................... 22 of 26

2.21 Employment of Child Act, 1991 ...................................................................................................... 22 of 26

2.22 JICA Guidelines for Environmental & Social Considerations ........................................................... 22 of 26

2.23 World Bank Guidelines and IFC General EHS Guidelines on Environment ...................................... 26 of 26

2.24 ILO Conventions ........................................................................................................................... 26 of 26

Chapter 3 Analysis of Alternatives ........................................................................................... 1 of 37 3.1 No Project Alternative........................................................................................................................... 1 of 37 3.2 Technology Alternatives ....................................................................................................................... 1 of 37 3.3 Comparison between Towers and Poles .............................................................................................. 2 of 37 3.4 Alternative Routing ............................................................................................................................... 3 of 37

3.4.1 NTDC Safety Considerations on Selection of T/L Routes & Grid Station Sites ............................... 3 of 37 3.4.2 Route Option 1 ................................................................................................................................ 5 of 37 3.4.3 Route Option 2 ................................................................................................................................ 5 of 37

3.5 Screening of Environmental & Social Aspects of Alternatives ............................................................ 13 of 37 3.6 Conclusion .......................................................................................................................................... 14 of 37

Chapter 4 Project Description ................................................................................................... 1 of 52 4.1 Materials & Standards ..................................................................................................................... 1 of 52

4.1.1 Tower Steel ..................................................................................................................................... 1 of 52 4.1.2 Conductor and Shield wire .............................................................................................................. 2 of 52 4.1.3 OPGW and Associated Hardware ................................................................................................... 2 of 52 4.1.4 Insulators and Hardware ................................................................................................................. 2 of 52 4.1.5 Accessories and Dampers .............................................................................................................. 3 of 52 4.1.6 Transmission Line Construction ...................................................................................................... 3 of 52

4.2 Cleaning and Galvanizing................................................................................................................ 4 of 52 4.3 Inspection ....................................................................................................................................... 4 of 52

4.3.1 Material ............................................................................................................................................ 4 of 52 4.3.2 Fabrication & Manufacturing Process .............................................................................................. 5 of 52


Final Report


4.3.3 Electrical Requirements .................................................................................................................. 5 of 52 4.3.4 Testing and Quality Control ............................................................................................................. 6 of 52

4.4 Steel Towers................................................................................................................................... 6 of 52 4.4.1 Type of Towers ................................................................................................................................ 6 of 52 4.4.2 Connection Details ........................................................................................................................ 11 of 52 4.4.3 Structural Steel .............................................................................................................................. 11 of 52 4.4.4 Nut, Bolts and Washers ................................................................................................................. 11 of 52 4.4.5 Workmanship ................................................................................................................................ 12 of 52 4.4.6 Bending ......................................................................................................................................... 12 of 52 4.4.7 Punching & Drilling ........................................................................................................................ 12 of 52 4.4.8 Welding ......................................................................................................................................... 13 of 52 4.4.9 General Requirements for Fabrication .......................................................................................... 13 of 52 4.4.10 Allowance for Galvanizing ............................................................................................................. 13 of 52 4.4.11 Blocking ......................................................................................................................................... 13 of 52 4.4.12 Angle Laps .................................................................................................................................... 13 of 52 4.4.13 Marking .......................................................................................................................................... 13 of 52 4.4.14 Tolerances ..................................................................................................................................... 14 of 52 4.4.15 Drawings ....................................................................................................................................... 14 of 52 4.4.16 Sign Plates .................................................................................................................................... 14 of 52 4.4.17 Barbed Wire .................................................................................................................................. 15 of 52 4.4.18 Tests for Tower Steel, Associated Hardware and Accessories ..................................................... 15 of 52

4.5 Optical Fibre Equipment ................................................................................................................ 15 of 52 4.5.1 General .......................................................................................................................................... 16 of 52 4.5.2 Optical Fibre Ground Wire (OPGW) .............................................................................................. 16 of 52

4.6 Conductor ..................................................................................................................................... 18 of 52 4.6.1 Conductors Characteristics ........................................................................................................... 18 of 52 4.6.2 Conductor Wires ............................................................................................................................ 19 of 52 4.6.3 Joints ............................................................................................................................................. 19 of 52 4.6.4 Stranding ....................................................................................................................................... 19 of 52 4.6.5 Fabrication ..................................................................................................................................... 20 of 52 4.6.6 Testing ........................................................................................................................................... 20 of 52 4.6.7 Type Tests on Complete Conductor .............................................................................................. 21 of 52 4.6.8 Sample Tests on Complete Conductor during Fabrication ............................................................ 21 of 52 4.6.9 Markings & Packing ....................................................................................................................... 22 of 52

4.7 Pre-Construction and Construction Phase ..................................................................................... 23 of 52 4.7.1 Clearing Right-of-Way ................................................................................................................... 23 of 52 4.7.2 Engineering and Surveying ........................................................................................................... 23 of 52 4.7.3 Sub Soil Investigation .................................................................................................................... 25 of 52 4.7.4 Foundation Requirements ............................................................................................................. 27 of 52


Final Report


4.7.5 Backfill for Tower Footings ............................................................................................................ 36 of 52 4.7.6 Pile Foundations ............................................................................................................................ 37 of 52 4.7.7 Execution of Piles .......................................................................................................................... 38 of 52 4.7.8 Tower Erection .............................................................................................................................. 39 of 52 4.7.9 Installation of Insulators and Hardware ......................................................................................... 43 of 52 4.7.10 Stringing Conductors, Overhead EHS Shield Wire and OPGW .................................................... 43 of 52 4.7.11 Installation of Dampers .................................................................................................................. 51 of 52

4.8 Pre Commissioning and Commissioning Tests ............................................................................... 51 of 52 4.8.1 Pre Commissioning Tests ............................................................................................................. 51 of 52 4.8.2 Commissioning Tests .................................................................................................................... 52 of 52

Chapter 5 Description of the Environment .............................................................................. 1 of 41 5.1 The Macroenvironment: District Jamshoro ............................................................................................ 1 of 41

5.1.1 Geography .................................................................................................................................... 1 of 41 5.2 The Microenvironment ........................................................................................................................... 1 of 41

5.2.1 Power Plant Site ........................................................................................................................... 1 of 41 5.3 Topography ........................................................................................................................................... 3 of 41 5.4 Geology ................................................................................................................................................. 4 of 41 5.5 Soil Types .............................................................................................................................................. 6 of 41 5.6 Earthquake Hazard ................................................................................................................................ 6 of 41 5.7 Climate ................................................................................................................................................ 12 of 41 5.8 Air Quality ............................................................................................................................................ 16 of 41 5.9 Noise ................................................................................................................................................... 21 of 41 5.10 Water Resources ................................................................................................................................. 21 of 41

5.10.1 Surface Water ............................................................................................................................... 21 of 41 5.10.2 Ground Water ................................................................................................................................ 22 of 41 5.10.3 Hydro-geological Studies of Jamshoro District .............................................................................. 22 of 41

5.11 Flood / Drainage Water ....................................................................................................................... 25 of 41 5.12 Biological Environment ........................................................................................................................ 27 of 41

5.12.1 Macroenvironment ......................................................................................................................... 27 of 41 5.12.2 Microenvironment .......................................................................................................................... 28 of 41

5.13 Socioeconomic Environment ............................................................................................................... 34 of 41 5.13.1 History ........................................................................................................................................... 34 of 41 5.13.2 Culture (Ethnicity, Religion and Politics) ........................................................................................ 34 of 41 5.13.3 Economically Active Population..................................................................................................... 34 of 41 5.13.4 Infrastructure Facilities Available in Villages ................................................................................. 35 of 41 5.13.5 Drinking water ............................................................................................................................... 35 of 41 5.13.6 Transportation ............................................................................................................................... 36 of 41 5.13.7 Power Supply ................................................................................................................................ 37 of 41 5.13.8 Diseases ........................................................................................................................................ 37 of 41


Final Report


5.13.9 Health Facilities ............................................................................................................................. 37 of 41 5.13.10 Literacy Rate and Education Facilities .......................................................................................... 38 of 41 5.13.11 Professional Affiliations ................................................................................................................. 38 of 41 5.13.12 Source of Livelihood ...................................................................................................................... 38 of 41 5.13.13 Food & Nutrition ............................................................................................................................ 40 of 41 5.13.14 Monthly household income and expenditure ................................................................................. 40 of 41 5.13.15 Indebtedness ................................................................................................................................. 40 of 41 5.13.16 Poverty .......................................................................................................................................... 40 of 41 5.13.17 Gender Issues ............................................................................................................................... 41 of 41 5.13.18 Community Expectations from Proponent ..................................................................................... 41 of 41 5.13.19 Archaeological and Historical Record............................................................................................ 41 of 41

Chapter 6 Consultation and Information Disclosure .............................................................. 1 of 22 6.1 Stakeholders Engagement .................................................................................................................... 1 of 22 6.2 Objectives of the Process of Stakeholder Engagement ........................................................................ 1 of 22 6.3 Consultation Framework ........................................................................................................................ 2 of 22

6.3.1 JICA Guidelines for Environmental and Social Considerations (April 2010) ................................... 2 of 22 6.3.2 Sindh Environmental Protection Act 2014 ....................................................................................... 2 of 22

6.4 Consultation Methodology ..................................................................................................................... 4 of 22 6.4.1 Stakeholder Identification and Analysis ........................................................................................... 4 of 22 6.4.2 Feedback Consultation .................................................................................................................... 4 of 22 6.4.3 Future Consultations ....................................................................................................................... 5 of 22

6.4.3.1 Consultation during the EIA Process ............................................................................................ 5 of 22 6.4.3.2 Consultation beyond the EIA Process .......................................................................................... 5 of 22

6.5 Consultation Process ............................................................................................................................. 5 of 22 6.5.1 Consultation at Scoping Stage ........................................................................................................ 5 of 22

6.5.1.1 Outcome of Consultation with Institutional Stakeholders ............................................................. 8 of 22 6.5.1.2 Outcome of Focus Group Discussions (FGDs) .......................................................................... 10 of 22

6.5.2 Feedback Consultation .................................................................................................................. 12 of 22 6.5.2.1 Focus Group Discussions (FGDs) .............................................................................................. 12 of 22 6.5.2.2 Institutional Stakeholders ........................................................................................................... 12 of 22

Chapter 7 Environmental Impact Assessment & Proposed Mitigation Measures…………..1 of 29 7.1 Methodology of Environmental Impact Assessment .............................................................................. 1 of 29

7.2 Assessment of Environmental Impact ................................................................................................... 2 of 29

7.2.1 Identification of Interactions between Activities and Environmental Receptors ..................................... 2 of 29

7.2.2 Identification of potentially significant environmental impacts ............................................................... 3 of 29

7.2.3 TOR for Environmental and Social Considerations Survey ................................................................... 6 of 29

7.3 Evaluation of Significant Environmental Impacts ................................................................................... 8 of 29

7.3.1 Preconstruction Phase (Siting) Impacts and Mitigation Measures .................................................. 8 of 29


Final Report


7.3.1.1 Land Acquisition and Resettlement .............................................................................................. 8 of 29

7.3.1.2 Sensitive Receptors and Existing Infrastructure ........................................................................... 9 of 29

7.3.1.3 Physical Cultural Resources......................................................................................................... 9 of 29

7.3.1.4 National Parks .............................................................................................................................. 9 of 29

7.3.1.5 Impediment to Movement of Wildlife/Livestock/People ................................................................ 9 of 29

7.3.1.6 Incidence of Natural Hazards ....................................................................................................... 9 of 29

7.3.1.7 Temporary Borrow, Disposal Pits & Quarries ............................................................................. 10 of 29

7.3.2 Construction Phase Impacts and Mitigation Measures ................................................................. 11 of 29

7.3.2.1 Ambient Air Quality ..................................................................................................................... 11 of 29

7.3.2.2 Surface and Ground Water Quality and Hydrology .................................................................... 12 of 29

7.3.2.3 Solid Waste Management .......................................................................................................... 13 of 29

7.3.2.4 Noise .......................................................................................................................................... 14 of 29

7.3.2.5 Impacts on Flora ......................................................................................................................... 15 of 29

7.3.2.6 Impacts on Fauna ....................................................................................................................... 16 of 29

7.3.2.7 Erosion from Borrow and Spoil Pits, and Sourcing of Aggregates ............................................. 16 of 29

7.3.2.8 Living and Livelihood of the Neighbouring Community .............................................................. 17 of 29

7.3.2.9 Physical Cultural Resources....................................................................................................... 17 of 29

7.3.2.10 Water Consumption and Conservation ....................................................................................... 17 of 29

7.3.2.11 Occupational Health and Safety ................................................................................................. 18 of 29

7.3.2.12 Heat Stress to Construction Worker ........................................................................................... 19 of 29

7.3.3 Operation Phase Impacts and Mitigation Measures ...................................................................... 19 of 29

7.3.3.1 Impact on migratory bird flyways ..................................................................................................... 19 of 29

7.3.3.2 Health Impacts ................................................................................................................................ 21 of 29

7.3.3.3 Wind, Fire and Earthquake Hazards ............................................................................................... 23 of 29

7.3.3.4 Electromagnetic Interference .......................................................................................................... 24 of 29

7.3.4 Positive Socio-economic and Environmental Impacts ................................................................... 24 of 29

7.4 Overall Assessment of Potential Impacts and Mitigation ............................................................... 25 of 29

Chapter 8 Environmental Management & Monitoring Plan……………………………….1 of 278.1. Introduction ..........................................................................................................................................1 of 27

8.1.1. General ................................................................................................................................................1 of 27

8.1.2. Objectives ............................................................................................................................................1 of 27

8.1.3. Legislation and Guidelines ..................................................................................................................2 of 27

8.2. Environmental Management Plan (EMP) ............................................................................................2 of 27

8.2.1. Institutional Framework for the Implementation of EMP ......................................................................2 of 27

8.2.1.1. Project Management Unit (PMU) .........................................................................................................2 of 27

8.2.1.2. Construction Supervision Consultants (CSC) .....................................................................................2 of 27

8.2.1.3. Environmental Specialist (ES) .............................................................................................................3 of 27


Final Report


8.2.1.4. Contractor ............................................................................................................................................3 of 27

8.2.1.5. Independent Monitoring Consultant (IMC) ...........................................................................................3 of 27

8.2.1.6. NTDC and O&M Staff ..........................................................................................................................3 of 27

8.2.1.7. Japan International Cooperation Agency (JICA) .................................................................................3 of 27

8.2.2. Grievance Redress Mechanism ..........................................................................................................3 of 27

8.2.3. Integrating EMP with Project Phases ..................................................................................................4 of 27

8.2.3.1. Design and Pre-Construction Phase ...................................................................................................4 of 27

8.2.3.2. Land Acquisition and Resettlement .....................................................................................................4 of 27

8.2.3.3. Loss of land for borrow pits .................................................................................................................4 of 27

8.2.3.4. Encroachment on precious ecology ....................................................................................................5 of 27

8.2.3.5. Impediment to Movement of Wildlife/Livestock/People .......................................................................5 of 27

8.2.3.6. Incidence of Natural Hazards ..............................................................................................................5 of 27

8.2.3.7. Location and Management of Construction Camp ..............................................................................5 of 27

8.2.3.8. Encroachment on Historical/Cultural/Archeological Sites ....................................................................5 of 27

8.2.3.9. Enhancement and Maintenance of Vegetation /Plantation ..................................................................5 of 27

8.2.4. Construction Phase .............................................................................................................................5 of 27

8.2.4.1. Borrow Pit Management and Topsoil Conservation ............................................................................5 of 27

8.2.4.2. Contamination to ground and water resources ....................................................................................6 of 27

8.2.4.3. Dust formation .....................................................................................................................................6 of 27

8.2.4.4. Management of Site Drainage System ................................................................................................6 of 27

8.2.4.5. Protection of Cultural and Community-Owned Assets.........................................................................6 of 27

8.2.4.6. Noise and Vibration .............................................................................................................................7 of 27

8.2.4.7. Heat Stress to Construction Worker ....................................................................................................7 of 27

8.2.5. Maintenance and Operation Phase .....................................................................................................7 of 27

8.2.5.1. Electrocution and Induced Currents ....................................................................................................7 of 27

8.2.5.2. Community Safety Risk .......................................................................................................................7 of 27

8.3. Environmental Monitoring Plan (EMoP) ..............................................................................................8 of 27

8.4. Environmental Training ........................................................................................................................8 of 27

8.5. Monitoring Form ................................................................................................................................19 of 27

8.6. Total Budget Estimations ...................................................................................................................27 of 27

Chapter 9 Conclusion and Reccommendations ........................................................................ 1 of 1


Final Report


ANNEXURES I. Draft Land Acquisition and Resettlement Action Plan (LARAP) II. Sindh Environmental Protection Act, 2014 III. Sindh Environmental Protection Agency (Review of IEE and EIA) Regulations, 2014 IV. National Environmental Quality Standards (NEQS) V. JICA Guidelines for Environmental and Social Considerations VI. Detailed Log of Scoping Consultations VII. Detailed Log of Feedback Consultations


Final Report

Environmental Management Consultants (EMC) Acronyms Page 1 of 2

ACRONYMS

AAAC All Aluminum Alloy Conductors ACS Aluminum Clad Steel ACSR Aluminum Conductor Steel Reinforced AOI Area of Influence APHA American Public Health Association APs Affected Persons ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers BM Bench Marks BOD Biochemical Oxygen Demand C&RPF Compensation & Resettlement Policy Framework CBD Convention on Biological Diversity CSC Construction Supervision Consultant DG Director General DPs Displaced Persons EC Erosion Control ECA Employment of Child Act EHS Environmental Health and Safety EHT Elevated High Tension EHV Extra High Voltage EIA Environmental Impact Assessment EMC Environmental Management Consultants EMF Electro Magnetic Fields EMMP Environmental Management & Monitoring Plan EMP Environmental Management Plan EPC Environmental Protection Council EPT Environmental Protection Tribunal ES Environment Specialist ESC Environmental and Social Cell ESU Environmental and Social Unit FGDs Focus Group Discussions GDP Gross Domestic Product GHG Green House Gas GoP Government of Pakistan GRC Grievance Redressal Committee GRM Grievance Redressal Mechanism HSD High Speed Diesel Oil ICNIRP International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection IFC International Finance Corporation ILO International Labor Organization IMC Independent Monitoring Consultants IUCN International Union for Conservation of Nature JICA Japan International Cooperation Agency JST JICA Survey Team KMC Karachi Metropolitan Corporation KPAC Khirthar Protected Area Complex KTJ Karachi Triple Junction LAA Land Acquisition Act LARAP Land Acquisition and Resettlement Action Plan LCPP Lakhra Coal Power Plant LVCs Land Valuation Committees MC Monitoring Consultants


Final Report

Environmental Management Consultants (EMC) Acronyms Page 2 of 2

MTDF Mid-Term Development Framework MW Mega Watt NCS National Conservation Strategy NEAP National Environment Action Plan NEAP-SP National Environmental Action Plan-Support Program NEPRA National Electric Power Regulatory Authority NEQS National Environmental Quality Standards NGOs Non-Government Organizations NRP National Resettlement Policy NTDC National Transmission and Dispatch Company Limited O&M Operation and maintenance OHSP Occupational Health and Safety Plan OPGW Optic Overhead Ground Wire PAPs Project Affected Persons Pak EPA Pakistan Environmental Protection Agency PCRs Physical Cultural Resources PEPA Pakistan Environmental Protection Act PEPC Pakistan Environmental Protection Council PEPO Pakistan Environmental Protection Ordinance PEPCO Pakistan Electric Power Company PMU Project Management Unit PPE Personal Protective Equipment RAP Resettlement Action Plan RFO Residual Fuel Oil RoW Right of Way RP Resettlement Plan RSP Respirable Suspended Particulates S.R.O Statutory Regulatory Order SCR Social Complaint Register SEPA Sindh Environmental Protection Agency SEQS Sindh Environmental Quality Standards SMART Self-Monitoring and Reporting Tool SRSP Sindh Rural Support Program SWD Sindh Wildlife Department TA Telegraph Act TD Temporary Drainage TDS Total Dissolved Solids TL Transmission Line TSP Total Suspended Particulates TSS Total Suspended Solids TTN Transmission and Transformation Network UNCED United Nations Conference on Environment and Development UNCLOS UN Convention on laws on Seas UNDP United Nations Development Program UNEP United Nations Environment Program UNESCO United Nations Educational, Scientific, and Cultural Organization UNIDO United Nations Industrial Development Organization USEPA United States Environmental Protection Agency USFDA United States Food and Drug Administration WAPDA Water and Power Development Authority WHO World Health Organization WWF World Wildlife Fund


Final Report

Environmental Management Consultants (EMC) List of Figures Page 1 of 3

LIST OF TABLES

Table 1.1 Projected Supply and Demand in NTDC Systems Table 2.1 Sector - Wise Legislation Table 2.2 National Environmental Quality Standards Table 2.3 Sindh Environmental Quality Standard for Ambient Air Table 2.4 The Motor Vehicle Ordinance (1965) and Roles (1969) Table 2.5 Proposed National Environmental Quality Standards for Noise Table 2.6 National Environmental Quality Standard for Municipal & Liquid Industrial Effluents Table 2.7 National Environmental Quality Standards for Drinking Waters (mg/l) Table 2.8 Summary of Land Acquisition Act (1894) Table 2.9 Conductor to Ground Clearance Table 2.10 JICA Classification Criteria for Projects Table 3.1 Comparison between Underground and Overhead T/L Table 3.2 Conductor to Ground Clearance Table 3.3 The Route Alignment under Option 1 (Preferred Alternative) Table 3.4 The Route Alignment under Option 2 Table 3.5 Assessment of Environmental & Social Impacts Related to T/L in the Project Area Table 4.1 Tower Utilization Data Table 4.2 Proposed Tower Alignment Table 4.3 Conductors Characteristics Table 4.4 Water Quality Requirements for Mixing Concrete Table 5.1 Epicenter, Depth, Magnitude & Intensity of Earthquakes Near Jhimpir Table 5.2 Peak Ground Acceleration for Each Zone Table 5.3 Mean Wind of the Study Area Table 5.4 Climatic Data of District Jamshoro Table 5.5 Potential Impacts Associated with Air Contaminants Table 5.6 Ambient Air Quality at Lakhra Power Plant Microenvironment Table 5.7 Noise Level at Lakhra Power Plant Microenvironment Table 5.8 Ground Water Samples Table 5.9 Surface Water Samples Table 5.10 List of Mammals recorded Table 5.11 List of Birds recorded Table 5.12 List of Reptiles recorded Table 5.13 List of Vegetation recorded Table 5.14 % age of population by Economic categories, sex and rural/urban areas in district Jamshoro Table 5.15 Infrastructure Facilities Available in Villages Table 5.16 Drinking Water Quality Table 6.1 Consultation Framework Table 6.2 Summary of Main Concerns by Stakeholders Table 6.3 List of Stakeholders Consulted Table 7.1 Impact Rating Assessment Matrix Table 7.2 Impact Significance Assessment Matrix Table 7.3 Result of Scoping Table 7.4 Terms of Reference Table 7.5 Typical noise levels of construction equipment (noise level in dB (A) at 15 m) Table 7.6 Result of Environmental Impact Assessment (Transmission Line) Table 8.1 Environmental Management Plan Table 8.2 Environmental Monitoring Plan Table 8.3 Environmental Checklist for Transmission Line Table 8.4 Summary of Costs for Environmental Management and Monitoring


Final Report


LIST OF FIGURES

Figure 1.1 Comparative Transmission-distribution Losses in % (2011) Figure 1.2 Comparative Efficiency of Thermal Power Plants in % (2011) Figure 1.3 Pakistan Historic and Projected Energy Mix Figure 1.4 Connection Method of 500kV Transmission Lines from Lakhra Power Station Figure 1.5 Right of Way (RoW) of the Transmission Line Figure 1.6 EIA/IEE Process in Sindh Figure 1.7 Baseline survey for field data collection Figure 1.8 EIA Methodology Figure 2.1 IEE Review and Approval Procedure Figure 2.2 EIA Review and Approval Procedure Figure 3.1 Connection Method of 500kV T/Ls from Lakhra Power Station as Option 1 (Preferred Alternative) Figure 3.2 Connection Method of 500kV Transmission Lines from Lakhra Power Station as Option 2 Figure 3.3 Tower No. 2 (Existing – Blue Line) Figure 3.4 Tower No. 9 (Existing – Red Line) Figure 3.5 Tower No. 5 (Existing – Blue Line) Figure 3.6 Tower No. 5 (Existing – Red Line) Figure 3.7 Plain with stone lag Figure 3.8 Blue Line (4.5km from Tower No.2) – Towers No.2 (Existing) and BD-14 (Proposed) Figure 3.9 Blue Line (4.5km from Tower No.2) – Towers BD-13 (Proposed) and BD-12 (Proposed) Figure 3.10 Blue Line (4.5km from Tower No.2) – Towers BD-11 (Proposed) and BD-10 (Proposed) Figure 3.11 Blue Line (4.5km from Tower No.2) – Towers BD-09 (Proposed) and BD-08 (Proposed) Figure 3.12 Blue Line (4.5km from Tower No.2) – Towers BD-07 (Proposed) and BD-06 (Proposed) Figure 3.13 Blue Line (4.5km from Tower No.2) – Towers BD-05 (Proposed) and BD-04 (Proposed) Figure 3.14 Blue Line (4.5km from Tower No.2) – Towers BD-03 (Proposed) and BD-02 (Proposed) Figure 3.15 Blue Line (4.5km from Tower No.2) – Tower BD-01 (Proposed) Figure 3.16 Red Line (1.9km from Tower No.5) – Towers No.5 (Existing) and AD-06 (Proposed) Figure 3.17 Red Line (1.9km from Tower No.5) – Towers AD-05 (Proposed) and AD-04 (Proposed) Figure 3.18 Red Line (1.9km from Tower No.5) – Towers AD-03 (Proposed) and AD-02 (Proposed) Figure 3.19 Red Line (1.9km from Tower No.5) – Towers AD-01 (Proposed) Figure 3.20 Blue Line (4.7km from Tower No.5) – Towers No.5 (Existing) and BJ-14 (Proposed) Figure 3.21 Blue Line (4.7km from Tower No.5) – Towers BJ-13 (Proposed) and BD-12 (Proposed) Figure 3.22 Blue Line (4.7km from Tower No.5) – Towers BD-11 (Proposed) and BD-10 (Proposed) Figure 3.23 Blue Line (4.7km from Tower No.5) – Towers BD-09 (Proposed) and BD-08 (Proposed) Figure 3.24 Blue Line (4.7km from Tower No.5) – Towers BD-07 (Proposed) and BD-06 (Proposed) Figure 3.25 Blue Line (4.7km from Tower No.5) – Towers BD-05 (Proposed) and BD-04 (Proposed) Figure 3.26 Blue Line (4.7km from Tower No.5) – Towers BD-03 (Proposed) and BD-02 (Proposed) Figure 3.27 Blue Line (4.7km from Tower No.5) – Tower BD-01 (Proposed) Figure 3.28 Red Line (1.4km from Tower No.9) – Towers No.9 (Existing) and AJ-05 (Proposed) Figure 3.29 Red Line (1.4km from Tower No.9) – Towers AJ-04 (Proposed) and AJ-03 (Proposed) Figure 3.30 Red Line (1.4km from Tower No.9) – Towers AJ-02 (Proposed) and AJ-01 (Proposed) Figure 4.1 500kV Transmission System: Large Angle Type/Heavy Angle Type Figure 4.2 500kV Transmission System: Light Angle Type/Tension Type Figure 4.3 500kV Transmission System: Suspension Type Figure 5.1 Location of Proposed Lakha Power Plant Figure 5.2 Microenvironment of the proposed Transmission Lines Figure 5.3 Geological Map of Sindh Figure 5.4 Soil Map of Sindh with Project Site Figure 5.5 Seismicity & Natural Disasters - Pakistan, 1990-2000 Figure 5.6 Fault Map of Pakistan Figure 5.7 Seismic Map of Pakistan Figure 5.8 Temperature of the Study Area


Final Report


Figure 5.9 Rainfall of the Study Area Figure 5.10 Wind Rose for 2011 Figure 5.11 Ambient Air and Noise Monitoring Locations Figure 5.12 Sources of Particulate Emissions Figure 5.13 Noise Monitoring Locations Figure 5.14 Sampling Sites of Ground water and Surface Water Figure 5.15 Vulnerability to Floods Figure 5.16 Site Survey by Ecologist Figure 5.17 Shrub Vegetation at Project Site Figure 5.18 Rickshaw service in the project area Figure 5.19 Zainab Habib Hospital (Trust) Figure 5.20 Mosque Figure 5.21 Livestock herding Figure 6.1 Consultations with Stakeholders Figure 7.1 Earthquake zone map Figure 7.2 Wild shrubs growth along the project corridor Figure 7.3 Central Asian, East Asian-Austrasian and West Pacific migratory bird flyways Figure 7.4 Sociable Lapwing tracking June 2010-August 2011 Figure 8.1 The Organizational setup of Environmental Management Plan and Environmental Monitoring Plan


Final Report

Environmental Management Consultants (EMC) Chapter – 1: Introduction Page 1 of 14

Chapter 1 Introduction

GENCO Holding Company Limited (‘GHCL’) is developing a 660 megawatt (MW) Lakhra Coal Fired Thermal Power

Plant utilizing imported and Thar Coal. The project comprises the following associated facilities including the main

power plant including ash pond, water intake & discharge pipeline, water pump station and, two access roads. The

Project also includes 500kV Transmission Lines [T/Ls] (1.2 km x 2 and 4.2 km x 2) connecting to the existing

transmission lines. The executing organization for the T/Ls is National Transmission & Despatch Company (‘NTDC’)

[hereinafter referred as Project Proponent].

GHCL is seeking project finance from Japan International Cooperation Agency (JICA) and hence require the project to

comply with the applicable JICA and World Bank guidelines relating to the environment, social issues and

occupational health and safety matters, in addition to complying with local laws and regulations.

The Government of Japan, under bilateral agreement with Government of Pakistan, has initiated a Preparatory Survey

through JICA Survey Team comprising Nippon Koei Co., Ltd and Mitsui Consultants Co., Ltd (hereinafter referred as

“JST”).

Environmental Management Consultants (EMC) has been commissioned by JST to conduct the Environmental Impact

Assessment study of proposed “Four 500 kV Transmission Lines” for local regulatory approval from the Environmental

Protection Agency of Sindh Province, & to meet the requirements of the specified reference framework as follow:

o Applicable national laws and regulations in Pakistan;

o World Bank/Safeguard Policy OP 4.01 Annex B;

o World Bank/Safeguard Policy OP 4.12 Annex A, Resettlement Plan;

o World Bank/Involuntary Resettlement Sourcebook;

o JICA Guidelines for Environmental & Social Considerations (April 2010)

o JICA Environmental Checklists and Monitoring Form for Power Transmission and Distribution

o ILO Conventions and recommendations.

1.1 Background & Objective of the Survey

Pakistan’s energy infrastructure is not well developed, rather it is considered to be underdeveloped and poorly

managed. The country is currently facing serious energy crisis resulting in frequent and long power breakdowns,

shutting down of industrial units, affecting economic growth and creating social chaos and political instability. Despite

of strong economic growth and rising energy demand during past decade, no serious efforts have been made to install

new capacity of generation. Moreover, rapid demand growth, transmission losses due to outdated infrastructure,

power theft, and seasonal reductions in the availability of hydropower have worsened the situation. Consequently, the

demand exceeds supply and hence load-shedding is a common phenomenon through power shutdown.

In 2011, according to World Bank Report “estimated production loss to the economy is two percent of the GDP per

annum, and may be more”‘. The State Bank of Pakistan has reported that the peak shortfall for the system of the

Pakistan Electric Power Company (PEPCO) rose from 2,645 MW in 2007 to 8,398 MW in 2012 which indicates a

deepening of the energy crisis in the country. It was estimated that the national demand of electricity would keep on

growing rapidly, at about 10 per cent annually, owing to growing population and economic activities. The energy crisis

was generated by variety of reasons, in particular, widening demand-supply gap, increased shift to oil-based

expensive energy mix, and lack of integrated energy strategy and energy governance.

Pakistan faces huge transmission-distribution losses in electricity sector. These losses in some other countries such

as Germany, Japan and South Korea are very low. Figure 1.1 shows comparative transmission distribution losses in

percent for year 2011.


Final Report


Figure 1.1: Comparative Transmission-distribution Losses in % (2011)

Source: Energy Efficiency Indicators‖ by World Energy Council,

www.worldenergy.org/data/efficiency-indicators

Figure 1.2: Comparative Efficiency of Thermal Power Plants in % (2011)

Source: Energy Efficiency Indicators‖ by World Energy Council,

www.worldenergy.org/data/efficiency-indicators

At present, the people are facing severe load shedding/blackout problems due to shortage of 5-7 GW power supply.

The natural gas demand grows beyond the transmission/supply capacity and large users mainly industries, power

plants, cement industries and transport sector (CNG stations) are curtailed specially during winter months to ensure

supplies to domestic, commercial and small industries or fertilizer. The energy crisis in the country has forced

thousands of industries to shut down operations, affecting industrial production and the livelihoods of thousands of

families. It has been a major drag on the economy and a serious impediment to growth with an estimated cost of 10%

of the GDP over the past 5 years. Pakistan‘s energy crisis, if not tackled at both operating and strategic level in the

immediate future, might become a national security threat.

According to the National Electric Power Regulatory Authority’s (NEPRA) ‘State of the Industry Report 2012’ the gap

between supply and demand in 2011-2012 was well above 5,000 MW mark and remained between 4,000 MW and


Final Report


5,000 MW for most part of the year. The country has therefore an urgent requirement to generate additional power to

feed into the national grid.

Table 1.1 shows the projections of power supply and demand in the NTDC‘s systems indicating that the gap between

supply and demand is likely to persist over next few years. The gap represents about one-third of the total demand in

National Transmission and Dispatch Company (NTDC) system resulting in as much as 12 hours of load shedding in

urban areas and at times more than 18 hours of load shedding in rural areas. Any slippage in the addition of new

generation capacity or fuel availability will further widen the gap between supply and demand.

Chronic power shortages in Pakistan are the most serious constraints to the country’s economic growth and job

creation. The energy crisis continues to drag down the country’s economic performance and spark social instability.

Increasing an unpredictable load shedding is estimated to constrain annual gross domestic product (GDP) growth by

at least 2%. Hardest hit are the small- and medium-sized enterprises that employ the most number of people but

cannot afford back-up electricity generators and fuel. In addition to the economic impact, the shortage has

environmental and social consequences as well. Other than complaints of general discomfort, students have

complained of effects of the load shedding on their studies. It has resulted in deterioration of health care services. The

environmental impact of the shortage has not been studied but potential impacts include increased use of firewood,

kerosene, biomass and their effects on deforestation and air quality. As there are no regulatory control over the

emission from these small generators, widespread use of generators in the cities results in emissions of nitrogen

oxides, particulate matter and sulfur dioxide (from diesel generators) from generator exhaust and hence contributing to

the urban air pollution. These generators are also a major source of noise.

Table 1.1: Projected Supply and Demand in NTDC Systems

Financial Year ending

30th June

Planned Generation Capability

as per NTDC (MW)

NTDC Projected

Demand Growth Rate

NTDC Projected Demand

during peak hours (MW)

Surplus/

(Deficit) (MW)

NTDC

2012 (actual) 13,733 - 20,058 -6,325

2013 21,299 7.4% 24,126 -2,827

2014 21,668 7.4% 25,918 -4,250

2015 30,510 7.7% 28,029 2,481

2016 20,352 5.5% 24,018 -3,666

2017 24,075 5.5% 25,352 -1,277

Source: NEPRA’s State of Industry Report, 2012

The power shortage cannot be attributed to any single cause. Failures in a number of areas have led to the current

chaotic conditions. One factor which significantly contributed in increasing the shortages to such staggering levels is

the fuel. Shortage of natural gas has resulted in increased power generation on High Sulfur Fuel Oil (HSFO). As

shown in Figure 1.3, for the last ten years about one-third of the power generation has been on HSFO. A continuing

high level of generation on HSFO combined with rising oil prices in the international market have contributed

significantly to increase in electricity tariff which has increased from PKR 5.50/kWh in 2008 to PKR 11.81/kWh in 2012.

As the Government of Pakistan (GoP) subsidizes the electricity by about PKR 3.17/kWh, the increasing dependence

on HSFO has resulted in widening the budget deficit. The deficit is also making it difficult for the GoP to eliminate

power subsidy due to political considerations. This, in turn, has affected the availability of cash to public sector power

generation, and distribution companies.


Final Report


Figure 1.3: Pakistan Historic and Projected Energy Mix


Final Report


In addition to increasing the generation capacity, it is essential to lower the generation cost. Generation costs depend

on the thermal fuel source, residual fuel oil (RFO), high speed diesel oil (HSD), and RFO mixed with gas (or simply

“mixed”) are the largest sources for thermal electricity generation. Generation costs are Rs 12/kWh for mixed, Rs

17/kWh for RFO, and Rs 23/kWh for HSD, which the latter is considered tremendously expensive (National Power

Policy 2013 -“3. Challenges”, Ministry of Water and Power). The dependence for such expensive sources has forced

Pakistan to impose electricity rates that are not affordable to the nation and its populace. On the other hand, levelized

upfront tariffs for the coal-fired thermal power range from Rs 7.3/kWh to Rs 9.4/kWh, depending on the size of unit

capacity (200 MW, 600 MW, or 1,000 MW), type of coal (local or import), and financing (local or foreign).

It is in this background that coal offers a promising option in the medium as well as long-term to provide affordable

power and diversify the energy mix. The GoP aims to increase the share of coal-based generation from nearly none in

2012 (0.07%) to about 22% in 10 years. This will require converting existing HSFO generation units, replacing old

inefficient units, and constructing new plants. Electricity generated from coal, with long-term fuel supply contracts, will

also add stability to the power price.

According to the National Power Policy 2013 published by the Government of Pakistan in September 2013, the

government is working on developing coal-fired thermal power plants utilizing the coal reserve in the Thar coalfield.

This will help meet the demand and diversify Pakistan’s energy mix by promoting the use of local energy resources.

Under such condition, the Japan International Cooperation Agency (JICA) implemented the “Data Collection Survey

on Thar Coal Field in Pakistan,” which recommended the construction of the Thar coal-fired thermal power plant for

Pakistan’s energy mix and safety. Accordingly, JICA decided to implement the “Preparatory Survey on Lakhra Coal

Fired Thermal Power Plant Construction Project” (hereafter referred to as “the Survey”). The objective of the Survey is

to identify the location for the construction of a new coal-fired thermal power plant and its relevant infrastructure such

as water supply and transmission line, as well as to conduct a feasibility study.

1.2 Study Area

The ‘Study Area’ for the EIA refers to the microenvironment comprising the physical, biological and socioeconomic

environs along the proposed Transmission Lines as shown in the figure 1.4. The study has taken due cognizance of

the following guidelines1:

o Operation in environmentally sensitive areas with special respect for fragile eco-systems and their inherent

biodiversity are to be avoided to the extent possible;

o ROW for a T/L through natural features like mountains, hilly terrain susceptible to landslides, large lakes,

reservoirs, marshes, human habitations and reserved forests or national parks are to be avoided to the extent

possible;

o ROW is selected after due consideration for location of telecommunication lines and railway circuits to avoid

electrical interference due to mutual induction;

o Residential structures are kept a minimum of 12m out from the plumb line of the outer conductor in the ROW.

However, in the absence of an alternative alignment, an exception can be made for farm buildings and single floor

factory buildings, provided neither is used for purposes of residence;

o Innovative technologies and latest equipment must be adopted or used to abate pollution in construction activities

and operations;

o Routes of T/Ls are avoided to the maximum extent through areas of cultural or historical importance and religious

places;

o Tube-wells and open wells using a surface pump are not permitted under high voltage conductors as piping and

cranes used to recondition such wells could make contact with high voltage conductors;

1 "National Transmission and Dispatch Company Safety Considerations" issued by the Design Directorate of NTDC (Source: "Thar - Matiari LARP Vol-1 & Vol-2 December 31, 2012" / Page 6-9 of the Vol-1, the main report state)


Final Report


o Existing orchards can remain within the ROW although Towers are kept out of orchards wherever possible.

Orchards are to be over-sailed by a clearance of 6m above the height of a mature orchard whereas all other trees

are to be removed;

o Brick kilns should be kept at least 30m outside the centre line of ROW;

o Alternative route alignments should be used if any school, rural dispensary, mosque or local shrine (ziarat) falls

within 200m of the centre line of a planned route;

o Existing open wells and hand pumps can remain under high voltage conductors, provided open wells are capped;

o Selection of sites for Tower foundation and Tower erection are made consciously on stable surfaces and by

rejecting sites susceptible to erosion, slips and landslides;

o Alignment of the T/L is made by NTDC after discussions with key persons of the area and by avoiding properties

and infrastructure to the extent feasible;

o Spacing between Towers may not be uniform and ranges variously for physical & other considerations, such as

crossing of main roads, residential areas, streams and canals and trees and for avoiding graveyards and big

ditches in between Towers;

o The route alignment of the T/L, location of the Towers and the corridors are identified by NTDC;

o The main consideration relating to public safety is a safe horizontal and vertical distance of conductor from

ground level to prevent electrocution of people or animals under the T/L.

o A corridor having a minimum width of 30m, clear of all obstructions, is provided for EHV (500 KV and 220 KV)

T/Ls (half on either side from the centre line). However, general farming within this corridor is allowed and tree

plantations that do not exceed a height of 1.5m are also allowed to remain under the lines. Similarly, open wells,

including Persian wheels, can remain under T/Ls. Tube-wells and pumps are not permitted under high voltage

conductors, because piping and cranes used to refurbish such wells may come into contact with the lines and

o No residential or other public buildings such as factory, school, hospital and mosque, except for

graves/graveyards, are permitted within the corridor. However, farm buildings which are not used for residential

purposes may remain under EHV lines, provided vertical clearance of at least 8m is maintained. The height of

Towers can be increased to accommodate such buildings.

The Right of Way (ROW) of the Transmission Lines as per the above guidelines is shown in Figure 1.5.


Draft Final Report


Figure 1.4: Connection Method of 500kV Transmission Lines from Lakhra Power Station


Final Report


Treeplantations less than

1.5m height

Clear aｌｌ obstructions. No residential or public buildings (E.g. factory, school, hospital, mosque or local shrine)

Hand pumps, Open wells,Persian wheels

Min.30m Min.30m

FarmingGraves

Farming buildings with vertical clearance of min. 8m

Clearance Min. 8 m

Right of Way = ROW (Direct Impacted Area)Corridor of Impact = COI

(Non-direct Impacted Area)

Min. 200 m Min. 200 m

Figure 1.5: Right of Way (RoW) of the Transmission Line

Source: JICA Study Team

1.3 Objectives of Project

The main objective of the proposed Project is to respond to the Energy Policy 2013 which has set the goals at 1)

“Ensuring the generation of inexpensive and affordable electricity for domestic, commercial, and industrial use by

using indigenous resources such as coal (Thar coal) and hydel”, 2) adopt such strategy that meets this goal and also

focuses on shifting Pakistan’s energy mix towards cheaper fuel and conservation of gas for power, and 3) utilize coal

for power generation and thus provide energy security to the Country.

The main objectives of the Project are to:

o Respond to the urgent need to close the yawning gap between power generation and demand.

o Provide an economically viable and environmentally acceptable power generation system to make the coal

available for use in power production, in view of the wide gap between supplies of fossil fuel and demand,

o Ensure stable power production system for the Country

o Respond to the need of improvement in quality of life through sustainable Energy Resource development.

1.4 Categorization of the Project

The Sindh Environmental Protection Agency (Review of EIA/IEE) Regulations 2014 (Sindh EIA/IEE Regulations 2014)

defines Schedules (I & II) of projects falling under the requirement of IEE or EIA. This EIA Study has taken account of

the requirements of the Sindh EIA/IEE Regulations 2014 which defines the projects requiring an IEE or EIA.

According to Sindh EIA/IEE Regulation 2014, a proponent of a project falling in any category listed in Schedule II shall

file an EIA with the Sindh Environmental Protection Agency, since the listed projects are generally major projects and

have the potential to affect a large number of people. “Transmission lines (11 KV and above) and distribution projects”

are placed in Schedule II thus requiring an EIA. The EIA/IEE approval process in Sindh is shown in Figure 1.6.

JICA Guidelines for Environmental & Social Considerations (April 2010) also classifies the categories viz. A & B.

Category A projects generally include: i) sensitive sectors, such as transportation, having sensitive characteristics, or

ii) projects located in/around sensitive areas. Moreover, a project causing large-scale involuntary resettlement is

classified under Category ‘A’ project. A project is classified as Category B if their potential adverse impacts on the

environmental and society are less adverse than those of Category A projects by JICA Guidelines. Keeping in view the

nature of project, the proposed Project would be classified as a Category A project.


Final Report


Figure 1.6: EIA/IEE Process in Sindh


Final Report


1.5 Objectives of EIA

According to the United Nations Environment Programme’s Division of Technology, Industry and Economics, an EIA is

a tool used to identify the environmental, social and economic impacts of a project prior to decision-making. It aims to

predict environmental impacts at an early stage in project planning and design, finding ways and means to reduce the

adverse impacts, shaping projects to suit the local environment, and presenting options to decision-makers.

An EIA can bring about both environmental and economic benefits, such as reduction in costs and time taken for

implementation and design of a project and lesser intervention of legalities and regulations. A properly conducted EIA

lessens conflicts by promoting community participation, informs decision-makers, and helps lay the base for

environmentally sound projects

The main purpose of this EIA Study is to provide and analyze information on the nature and severity of environmental

aspects of the above issues and propose mitigation measures in case of negative impacts arising from the

construction and operation of the project and related activities that would take place concurrently or subsequently. The

EIA study will in fact respond to the provision of Sindh Environmental Protection Act 2014, JICA Guidelines for

Environmental & Social Considerations (April 2010) and its associated rules and regulations. The Study will:

o Identify all major and minor impacts, negative as well as positive, on the environment (physical and ecological)

during its different stages viz. pre-construction, construction and operation of Project

o Propose mitigation measures for negative impacts through specified design and construction procedures

o Identify Socioeconomic aspects, and

o Devise Environmental Management Plan (EMP) for sustainable operation of the Project

1.6 Methodology Adopted for EIA

This environmental impact assessment was conducted in the following manner:

1.6.1 Scoping

A scoping exercise was undertaken to identify the potential issues that are to be considered in the environmental

impact assessment. The scoping exercise included the following tasks:

o Data Compilation: A generic description of the proposed activities relevant to this environmental assessment was

compiled with the help of the Project proponent.

o Review of Published literature: All available published and unpublished information pertaining to the micro and

macro environment of the study area was obtained and reviewed. It included the earlier studies conducted in the

study area, environmental and social baseline and impact assessment studies conducted by different consultants

in past. Secondary data was very helpful in understanding the issues that were identified by other consultants.

o Review of applicable Legislation: Information on relevant legislation, regulations, guidelines, and standards was

reviewed and compiled.

o Identification of potential impacts: The information collected in the above procedures was reviewed and potential

environmental issues identified.

o Initial site visit: An initial site visit was conducted to get an overview of site conditions and the surrounding areas.

o Stakeholder consultation: A stakeholder consultation was undertaken to document the concerns of the local

community and other stakeholders, and to identify issues that may require additional assessment in order to

address these concerns. Stakeholder consultation was conducted during the survey with following objectives:

o To inform the Stakeholders, Communities and Project Affected Persons about the project

o To gather feedback from primary and secondary stakeholders on proposed project


Final Report


o To identify relevant potential issues, including the socioeconomic impact of the project, and

corresponding mitigation measures.

During the stakeholder consultation process for the project, following key considerations were focused:

o Identification of PAPs in perspective of ROW of the Project

o Identification of required land to be acquired for the Project and identification of its location on the

project map.

o Identification of PAPs to be marked on the project map

o Identification of the affected structures, landmarks, facilities, vegetative cover, etc. removed to be

marked on the project map.

1.6.2 Review of Legislation and Guidelines

National legislations, international agreements, environmental guidelines, and best industry practices were reviewed to

set environmental standards that NTDC will be required to follow during different stages of the project. Sindh

Environmental Protection Act 2014, Sindh EIA/IEE Regulations 2014 and JICA Guidelines for Environmental and

Social Considerations (April 2010) were the basic guiding documents used during the study.

Review of legislations included but not limited to the following:

o Policies and Legislation relevant to T/L projects.

o Complementary legislation applicable to T/L project for sustainable management of the environment

covering land, water resources and water quality, solid waste management, emissions.

o Administration: identification of relevant organization with its role and responsibility and make clear the

approval process with its average time schedule though visit to relevant organization and reviewing

documents.

o Gap analysis on land acquisition and resettlement.

1.6.3 Baseline Data Collection

Detailed environmental baseline surveys were conducted to collect primary data on the Project Area to help identify

sensitive receptors. The primary data were examined and compared with secondary data available from earlier

environmental studies in the region. The scope of survey included collection of information on following key aspects:

(1) To confirm baseline data including Biophysical of the Project Area including the following items with their seasonal

variability:

o Climate and Rainfall

o Air Quality

o Noise Quality

o Topography

o Soil

o Geomorphology

o Geology

o Hydrology

o Vegetation

o Agriculture

o Livestock

o Fauna

(2) To confirm baseline data including Socio Economic Environment of the Project Area including the following items

with their seasonal variability

o Administrative Division

o Demography and Settlement

o Socio-Economic Activities

o Land use and National Resources Management in the Project area


Final Report


o Existing Infrastructure and Social Services

o Current Resettlement Issues

Figure 1.7: Baseline survey for field data collection

(3) Preliminary Groundwork Investigations: To carry out preliminary groundwork investigations for having an over view

of the project area, existing infrastructure socio-economic activities. Interview and/or stakeholder meeting will be

conducted to confirm the followings:

o Use of land along the ROW

o Type of infrastructures that would be affected

o Ecological conditions

o Type of crops grown

o Type of socio-economic activities

(4) PAP: Based on 3) above, identification of following:

o Identification of ROW for the Project

o Identification of required land to be acquired for the Project with identification of its location on the map.

o Identification of PAPs with identification of individuals to be shown its location on the map

o Identification of the affected structures and trees, etc. to be shown its location on the map

1.6.4 Identification of Aspects

Identification of environmental aspects and their significance is fundamentally important for determination of severity of

incidence of impacts at different stages of the project. This step is aimed at obtaining an inventory of the aspects. The

aspects identified during this step cover all activities during construction, installation and operation, in order to

determine those which have or can have significant impact on the environment.

1.6.5 Impact Assessment & EMP

Environmental experts at EMC analyzed and assessed the anticipated impacts that are likely to arise due to the

identified aspects. Each of the potential impacts identified during the scoping session was evaluated using the

environmental, socioeconomic, and project information collected. Air quality Modeling was undertaken to forecast the

impact of gaseous emissions. In general, the impact assessment discussion covers the following aspects:

o Present baseline conditions

o Potential change in environmental parameters likely to be affected by Project- related activities

o Prediction of potential impacts

o Evaluation of the likelihood and significance of potential impacts

o Defining of mitigation measures to reduce impacts to as low as practicable


Final Report


o Prediction of any residual impacts, including all long- and short-term, direct and indirect, and beneficial

and adverse impacts

o Monitoring of residual impacts.

An environmental management plan (EMP) was developed to oversee the environmental performance of the project

and adoption of proposed mitigation measures. A monitoring plan has also been incorporated in the EMP to monitor

impact of all activities and performance of mitigation measures and to identify the residual impact if any, and also the

positive/negative changes in the physical, and socioeconomic environment.

Figure 1.8: EIA Methodology

1.6.6 Documentation & Review

This is the final step of the EIA study. The data generated during and for the study are compiled and examined by

experts of the respective field. Sections of this report were prepared as the study progressed, by EMC office staff in

consultation with experts. The report was finally reviewed by Team Leader, who analyzed the information, assessed

the potential environmental impacts in the light of national and international guidelines, examined the alternatives in

the light of observations on the field as well as meetings with the stakeholders, before organizing the Report in the

present form.

1.7 Organization of the EIA Report

o Section 2 (Policy, Legal & Administrative Framework) briefly discusses existing national policy and resulting

legislation for sustainable development and environmental protection, and then presents the legislative

requirements that need to be followed while conducting the EIA.

o Section 3 (Analysis of Alternatives) presents the project alternatives that were considered, and the reasons for

their selection or rejection highlighted.

o Section 4 (Project Description) describes the proposed Project.

o Section 5 (Description of Environment) documents in detail the existing physical, biological, and socioeconomic

conditions at the microenvironment and macroenvironment of the Project.

o Section 6 (Consultation and Information Disclosure) presents the objectives and outcomes of the public

stakeholder consultation that was conducted during the present study.

o Section 7 (Screening of Potential Environmental Impacts & Proposed Mitigation Measures). It also presents an

assessment of the Potential Environmental Impacts on the physical, biological, and socioeconomic environment,

besides the measures required to mitigate the negative impacts.


Final Report


o Section 8 (Environmental Management & Monitoring Plan) presents the measures proposed for implementation of

the environmental mitigation measures, and

o Section 9 (Conclusion and Recommendations) presents the findings, conclusions and recommendations of this

EIA Study

1.8 EIA Study Team

JICA study Team commissioned Environmental Management Consultants (EMC) for conducting the Environmental

Impact Assessment (EIA) study of the Proposed Project to assess the likely environmental and social impacts that

may result from Project activities and to identify measures to mitigate negative impacts, if any.

EMC formulated the following team of officials and experts for conducting the EIA study and preparing the report:

S. No. Name of Expert Position in EIA Team

1 Mr. Syed Nadeem Arif Project Manager

2 Mr. Saquib Ejaz Hussain Environmental Specialist, Project Team Leader

3 Dr. Mirza Arshad Ali Beg Senior Environmentalist

3 Dr. Badar Ghauri Air Quality Expert

4 Dr. Syed Ali Ghalib Ecologist

5 Ms. Tasneem Bhatti Sociologist

6 Mr. Mushtaq Mirani Resettlement Specialist

7 Mr. Sultan Mehmood Zaman Soil Scientist

8 Ms. Farhat Shaheen Environmental Scientist


Final Report

Environmental Management Consultants (EMC) Chapter – 2: Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework Page 1 of 26

Chapter 2 Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework

This section describes the current legal responsibilities of the proponent in the context of the environment and

sustainable development, and the institutions that exist in the country that may influence the environmental

management of the proposed Project.

NTDC will comprehensively follow the relevant requirements of the policy documents and legislative framework shown

in Table 2.1 as well as recommendations as described in the national and international guidelines in relevance to the

proposed project. Provisions of many of these guidelines have been incorporated in the mitigation measures and the

Environmental Management & Monitoring Plan (EMMP) which have been formulated for the better management of

environmental and social impacts.

Table 2.1: Sector - Wise Legislation

Serial Sector Legislation

1 Environmental protection Sindh Environmental Protection Act, 2014

Pakistan Environmental Protection Act (PEPA), 1997

The Pakistan Penal Code (1860)

2 Land use The Land Improvement Loans Act (1883)

The West Pakistan Agricultural Pests Ordinance (1959) and Rules (1960)

The Sindh Local Government Ordinance

The Sindh Salinity Control and Reclamation Act (1988).

The Regulation of Mines and Oil-Fields and Mineral Development

(Government Control) Act, 1946.

3 Water quality and resources The Pakistan Penal Code (1860)

The Canal and Drainage Act (1873)

The Factories Act (1934)

The Sindh Local Government Ordinance (1979/80)

On-Farm Water Management and Water Users’ Associations Ordinance

(1981)

Indus River Water Apportionment Accord (1991)

4 Air quality The Pakistan Penal Code (1860)


The Motor Vehicles Ordinance (1965) and Rules (1969)


5 Noise The West Pakistan Regulation and Control of Loudspeakers and Sound

Amplifiers Ordinance (1965)

The Motor Vehicle Ordinance (1965) and Rules (1969)

National Environmental Quality Standards, 2000

6 Toxic or hazardous substance The Pakistan Penal Code (1890)

The Explosives Act (1884)


The Agricultural Pesticides Ordinance (1971) and Rules (1973)

7 Solid wastes and effluents The Factories Act (1934)

The Sindh Local Government Ordinance (1979/80)Pakistan Environmental

Protection Act, 1997


Final Report


Table 2.1: Sector - Wise Legislation

Serial Sector Legislation

8 Forest conservation The Forest Act (1927)

The West Pakistan Firewood and Charcoal (Restrictions) Act (1964)

The Cutting of Trees (Prohibition) Act (1975)

The Sindh Management of Protected Forests Rules (1975)


The Sindh Forest Development Corporation Ordinance (1980)

9 Parks and wildlife conservation

protection

The West Pakistan Ordinance (1959)

The Sindh Wildlife (Protection Preservation Conservation and Management)

Act (1975) and Rules (1976)

Sindh Local Government Ordinance (1979/80)Export and Control Order

(1982)

10 Cultural environment The Antiquities Act (1975)

11 Livestock West Pakistan Goats (Restriction) Ordinance (1959)

The Grazing of Cattle in the Protected Forests (Range Lands)

Rules (1978)

Pakistan Animal Quarantine (Import and Export of Animals and Animal

Products) Ordinance (1979/80)


12 Public health and safety The Pakistan Penal Code (1860)

The Boilers Act (1923)

The Public Health (Emergency Provisions) Ordinance (1944)

The West Pakistan Factories Canteen Rules (1959)

The Sindh Local Government Ordinance (1979/80).

The West Pakistan Epidemic Diseases Act (1979/80)

2.1 Policy Framework

The Pakistan National Conservation Strategy (NCS), which was approved by the Federal Cabinet in March 1992, is

the principal policy document for environmental issues in the country. The NCS signifies the country’s primary

approach towards encouraging sustainable development, conserving natural resources, and improving efficiency in

the use and management of resources. The NCS has 68 specific programs in 14 core areas in which policy

intervention is considered crucial for the preservation of Pakistan’s natural and physical environment. The core areas

that are relevant to the proposed project are biodiversity conservation, restoration of rangelands, pollution prevention

and abatement, and the preservation of cultural heritage.

Pakistan is a signatory to the Convention on Biological Diversity, and is thereby obligated to develop a national

strategy for the conservation of biodiversity. The Government of Pakistan constituted a Biodiversity Working Group,

under the auspices of the Ministry of Environment, to develop a Biodiversity Action Plan for the country, which was

completed after an extensive consultative exercise. The plan, which has been designed to complement the NCS and

the proposed provincial conservation strategies, identifies the causes of biodiversity loss in Pakistan and suggests a

series of proposals for action to conserve biodiversity in the country. The Pakistan Environmental Protection Council

(PEPC) has approved the action plan and steering committees at the federal and provincial levels have been formed

to implement it.


Final Report


Mid-term Review of NCS: Key Findings: An overview of the key environmental issues facing Pakistan is as follows:

o Per capita water availability in Pakistan has been decreasing at an alarming rate. In 1951, the per capita

availability was 5300 cubic meter which has now decreased to 1105 cubic meter just touching water scarcity level

of 1000 cubic meter.

o Almost all fresh water resources are severely polluted due to discharge of untreated industrial and municipal

wastes. Pollution of coastal waters due to waste discharges and oil spills coupled with reduced freshwater flows is

resulting in declining fish yields.

o About 55 percent of population has access to a relatively safe drinking water source. Potable water quality,

assessed against WHO standards, fails to meet all the specified criteria, confirming evidence of extremely high

pollutant loads.

o Approximately 35 percent of population has access to adequate sanitation facilities.

o Air pollution is on the rise, especially in urban areas. Recent surveys conducted by Pakistan Environmental

Protection Agency revealed presence of very high levels of suspended particulate matter (about 6 times higher

than the World Health Organization's guidelines). 'Smog' also seriously affects almost entire Punjab during

December and January every year.

o Noise pollution has become a serious issue in major urban centers.

o Of about 54,850 tons of solid waste generated daily in urban areas, less than 60 per cent is collected. No city in

Pakistan has proper waste collection and disposal system for municipal, hazardous or healthcare wastes.

o The deforestation rate has been estimated at 0.2-0.5 percent per annum. Forest cover, which was 4.8 percent of

total land area in 1992, could hardly be increased substantially despite all efforts.

o Degradation and encroachment of natural forests, rangelands and freshwater and marine ecosystems are

resulting in loss of biodiversity. At least four mammal species, including tiger, swamp deer, lion and Indian one-

horned rhinoceros, are known to have become extinct from Pakistan while at least 10 ecosystems of particular

value for the species richness and uniqueness of their floral and faunal communities are considered to be

critically threatened.

o Desertification affects over 43 million hectares of land annually.

o Pakistan is a highly energy in-efficient country. It uses approximately same amount of energy to generate 1 dollar

of GNP as the USA.

The situation just mentioned is the result of a number of constraining factors including high population growth rate,

prevailing poverty, unplanned urban and industrial expansion, insufficient emphasis on environmental protection in the

government policies, lack of public awareness and education and above all the ailing economy which has caused

deficiencies in institutional capacity and resources for effective environmental management.

The mid-term review of the NCS led the Government of Pakistan (GOP) and United Nations Development Program

(UNDP) to jointly initiate an umbrella support program called the National Environmental Action Plan-Support Program

(NEAP-SP) that was signed in October 2001 and implemented in 2002. The development objective supported by

NEAP-SP is environmental sustainability and poverty reduction in the context of economic growth. The primary

objective of NEAP is to initiate actions and programs for achieving a state of environment that safeguards public

health, promotes sustainable livelihood, and enhances the quality of life of the people in Pakistan. The NEAP identifies

four primary areas, (1) Clean air (2) Clean water (3) Management of solid waste (4) Ecosystem management. The

plan also presents five additional areas of concern (i) Management of fresh water resources (ii) Marine pollution (iii)

Toxic and hazardous substances handling and disposal (iv) Energy conservation and management (v) Compliance

with international treaties and protocol.

Studies conducted by GOP and Donor Agencies in Pakistan have identified a number of environmental concerns with

regard to energy, water and air pollution, waste management, irrigated agriculture, and biodiversity. These studies


Final Report


suggest an overall degradation in the quality and impoverishment of renewable natural resources such as water,

forests and other flora as well as key biological habitats. The GOP, private sector and civil society have, with few

exceptions, not responded positively to meet the challenges from these concerns.

The Mid-Term Development Framework: 2005-2010 (MTDF 2005-10) of the Planning Commission has been

developed in line with the National Environment Action Plan (NEAP) objectives, and focuses on four core areas i.e.,

clean air, clean water; solid waste management, and Ecosystem management. The Plan has been prepared keeping

in mind Pakistan’s experience with such initiatives in the last decade; the current capacity to undertake planning,

implementation and oversight and the identified needs for improvement in such capacity. The MTDF clearly specifies

issues in environment which need to be addressed.

2.2 Statutory Framework

The constitution of Pakistan contains provision for environmental protection and resource conservation. The

constitution mentions environmental pollution and the ecology as a subject in the concurrent legislative list, meaning

that both the provincial and federal government may initiate and make legislation for the purpose. Article 9 of the

Constitution defines the right to life as a “fundamental right” in these words “No person shall be deprived of life or

liberty save in accordance with law”. The Supreme Court of Pakistan in its judgment in the case Shehla Zia and others

vs WAPDA (1994) declared that the right to a clean environment is part of the fundamental constitutional right to life.

Several laws exist for the protection of the environment. Some of these laws are Federal and the rest Provincial in

character. The promulgation of the Pakistan Environmental Protection Ordinance (PEPO) 1983 was the first codifying

legislation on the issue of environmental protection. This was indeed a consolidated enactment to plug the gaps and

remove defects/deficiencies in the legislation. The promulgation of this ordinance was followed, in 1984, by the

establishment of the Pakistan Environmental Protection Agency, the primary government institution dealing with

environmental issues. Significant work on developing environmental policy was carried out in the late 1980s, which

culminated in the drafting of the Pakistan National Conservation Strategy. Provincial environmental protection

agencies were also established at about the same time. The National Environmental Quality Standards were

established in 1993.

The Pakistan Environmental Protection Act (PEPA) 1997 was enacted to replace the PEPO. PEPA conferred broad-

based enforcement powers to the environmental protection agencies. This was followed by the publication of the

Pakistan Environmental Protection Agency Review of Initial Environmental Examination and Environmental Impact

Assessment Regulations 2000 which provided the necessary details on the preparation, submission, and review of

initial environmental examinations (IEE) and environmental impact assessments (EIA).

Prior to the 18th Amendment to the Constitution of Pakistan in 2010, the legislative powers were distributed between

the federal and provincial governments through two ‘lists’ attached to the Constitution as Schedules. The Federal list

covered the subjects over which the federal government had exclusive legislative power, while the ‘Concurrent List’

contained subjects regarding which both the federal and provincial governments could enact laws. The subject of

‘environmental pollution and ecology’ was included in the Concurrent List and hence allowed both the national and

provincial governments to enact laws on the subject.

However, as a result of the 18th Amendment this subject is now in the exclusive domain of the provincial government.

The main consequences of this change are as follows: i) The Ministry of Environment at the federal level has been

abolished. Its functions related to the national environmental management haves been transferred to the provinces.

The international obligations in the context of environment will be managed by various ministries and departments of

the federal government, ii) PEPA is technically no longer applicable to the provinces. The provinces are required to

enact their own legislation for environmental protection.


Final Report


2.3 Sindh Environmental Protection Act, 2014

Legislative assembly of Sindh province of Pakistan passed the bill on 24th February 2014 to enact Sindh

Environmental Protection Act 2014 (Sindh Act 2014). The Act envisages protection, improvement, conservation and

rehabilitation of environment of Sindh with the help of legal action against polluters and green awakening of

communities.

It equally lays emphasis for the preservation of the natural resources of Sindh and to adopt ways and means for

restoring the balance in its eco-system by avoiding all types of environmental hazards.

Environmental Protection Council (EPC): It has been formed consisting of Chief Minister as Chairman with Minister

in charge of Environment Protection Department, Addl. Chief Secretary, Planning & Development Department,

Government of Sindh and Secretaries of Environment, Finance, Public Health Engineering, Irrigation, Health,

Agriculture, Local Government, Industries, Livestock & Fisheries Forest & Wildlife, Energy, Education Departments

Government of Sindh and Divisional Commissioners of Sindh. Non-official members are also included (i.e.

representatives of Chamber of Commerce & Industry and from medical or legal professions etc.) along with DG, EPA

& two Members of Provincial Assembly also form part of EPC.

The functions and powers of EPC include coordination & supervision of provisions of Act, approving provincial

environmental & sustainable development policies & SEQS, provide guidance for protection & conservation, consider

annual Sindh Environmental Report, deal with interprovincial and federal provincial issues, provide guidance for bio

safety and assist Federal Government in implementation of various provisions of UN Convention on laws on Seas

(UNCLOS).

Sindh Environmental Protection Agency (SEPA): SEPA would be headed by Director General (DG) with the aim to

exercise the powers and perform the functions assigned to it under the provisions of this Act and the rules and

regulations made there under. The Agency shall have technical and legal staff and may form advisory committees.

The Agency shall administer and implement the provisions of this Act and rules and regulations. It shall also prepare

environmental policies, take measures for implementation of environmental policies, prepare Sindh Environment

Report and prepare or revise Sindh Environmental Quality Standards. SEPA shall also establish systems and

procedures for surveys, surveillance, monitoring, measurement, examination, investigation research, inspection and

audit to prevent and control pollution and to estimate the costs of cleaning up pollution and rehabilitating the

environment and sustainable development. SEPA would also take measures for protection of environment such as to

promote research; issues licenses for dealing with hazardous substances, certify laboratories, identify need for or

initiate legislation, specify safeguards etc. SEPA would also encourage public awareness and education regarding

environmental issues.

SEPA would have powers to enter or inspect under a search warrant issued by Environmental Protection Tribunal or a

Court search at any time, any land or building etc. where there are reasonable grounds to believe that an offence

under this Act has been or is being or likely to be committed. SEPA may also take samples, arrange for testing or

confiscate any article in discharge of their duties.

This act has also provided for Sindh Sustainable Fund derived from various sources such as voluntary contributions or

fees generated etc. This fund is utilized for protection, conservation or improvement of environment. It is appendices in

this EIA report.


Final Report


Salient Features

Section-11: No person shall discharge or emit or allow the discharge or emission of any effluent waste, pollutant,

noise or adverse environmental effects in an amount, concentration or level which is in excess to that specified in

Sindh Environmental Quality Standards.

Section-12 & 13: No person shall import hazardous waste into Sindh province and handle hazardous substances

except under licenses etc.

Section 14: No person shall undertake any action which adversely affects environment or which lead to pollute or

impairment of or damage to biodiversity, ecosystem, aesthetics or any damage to environment etc.

Section 15: This section deals with regulation of motor vehicles banning emission of air or noise pollutants being

emitted from them in excess of allowable standards.

Section 17: This section states that no proponent of a project shall commence construction or operation unless he

has filed with the Agency an initial environmental examination or environmental impact assessment and has obtained

from Agency approval in respect thereof. SEPA shall review the IEE & EIA and accord approval subject to such terms

and conditions as it may prescribe or require. The agency shall communicate within four (04) months its approval or

otherwise from the date EIA is filed failing which the EIA shall deemed to have been approved.

Section 21: Where agency is satisfied that the discharge or emission has occurred in violation of any provision of this

act or rules etc. then it may, after giving an opportunity to person responsible, by order direct such person to take such

measures within specified period. The agency under this section has been empowered to immediately stop, prevent

or minimize emission, disposal etc. for remedying adverse environmental effects.

Section 22: The person who fails to comply with section 11, 17, 18 and 21 shall be punishable with a fine which may

extend to five million rupees, to the damage caused to environment and in the case of a continuing contravention or

failure, with an additional fine which may extend to one hundred thousand rupees for every day during which such

contravention or failure continues. And, where a person convicted under sub-sections 1&2 had been previously

convicted for any contravention of this Act, the Environmental Protection Tribunal (EPT) may, in addition to

punishment, award imprisonment for a term that may extend up to three years, or order confiscation or closure of

facility etc.

Section 23: Where any violation of this Act has been committed by any of employee of any corporate body, then, that

employee shall be considered to be guilty of environmental pollution.

Section 25: This section allows for establishment of Environmental Protection Tribunals.

2.4 Environment & Alternate Energy Department

Environment and Alternate Energy Department is functioning as a department of the Government of Sindh since 2002.

Sindh EPA operates under this department. It is a monitoring and regulating agency with the following main functions:

o Enforcement of PEPA 1997

o Enforcement of National Environmental Quality Standards (NEQS)

o Implementation of Self-Monitoring and Reporting Tool (SMART)

o Review of EIAs and IEEs

o Providing advice to the government on issues related to environment


Final Report


o Coordination of pollution prevention and abatement measures between government and non-governmental

organizations

o Assistance to provincial and local governments in implementation of schemes for proper disposal of wastes to

ensure compliance with NEQS

o Undertake measures to enhance awareness on environment among general public

o Conduct research and studies on different environmental issues

o Attend to public complaints on environmental issues.

o Carry out any other task related to environment assigned by the government.

Sindh Environmental Protection Agency (SEPA) will be responsible for the review and approval of the EIA of Project

500 kV Transmission Line Project.

2.5 Sindh EPA (Review of IEE and EIA) Regulations 2014

The Sindh Environmental Protection Agency (Review of EIA/IEE) Regulations 2014 defines Schedules (I & II) of

projects falling under the requirement of IEE or EIA. This EIA Study has taken account of the requirements of the

Sindh EIA/IEE Regulations 2014 which defines the projects requiring EIA or IEE.

According to Sindh EIA/IEE Regulations 2014, a proponent of a project falling in any category listed in Schedule II

shall file an EIA with the Sindh Environmental Protection Agency, since the listed projects are generally major projects

and have the potential to affect a large number of people. “Transmission lines (11 KV and above) and distribution

projects” are placed in Schedule II thus requiring an EIA.

2.6 Pakistan Environmental Assessment Procedures

The Federal EPA has prepared a set of guidelines for conducting environmental and social assessments. The

guidelines derive from much of the existing work done by international donor agencies and NGOs. The package of

regulations, of which the environmental and social guidelines form a part, includes the PEPA 1997 and the NEQS.

These guidelines are listed below followed by comments on their relevance to proposed project:

Policy and Procedures for Filing, Review and Approval of Environmental Assessments, Pakistan Environmental

Protection Agency, September 1997: These guidelines define the policy context and the administrative procedures

that govern the environmental assessment process from the project pre-feasibility stage to the approval of the

environmental report. The section on administrative procedures has been superseded by the Sindh IEE/EIA

Regulations 2014.

The submission and approval procedure for the EIA is summarized below:

o The EIA report shall be submitted, together with a review fee and form included as Schedule-IV of the Sindh

IEE/EIA Regulations 2014.

o The SEPA shall conduct a preliminary scrutiny and reply within 15 working days of the submittal of the report a)

confirming completeness, or b) asking for additional information, if needed, or c) returning the report requiring

additional studies, if necessary.

o The SEPA is required to make every effort to complete the EIA review process within four months of the issue of

confirmation of completeness.

o SEPA shall call for a Public Hearing for the project to invite all the concerned persons to raise concerns on the

project.

o Following the Public Hearing, SEPA shall constitute a Committee of Experts to assist the agency in review of the

EIA.

o The approval granted at the end of the review process is valid for three years for start of construction.


Final Report


o Once project construction has been completed, the proponent is required to submit a request to the SEPA for

confirmation of compliance. An environmental management plan for the operation phase is to accompany the

request.

o The SEPA is required to communicate its decision within four months of receipt of the request. The project can

commence operation only after it has received approval from the SEPA.

The overall flow of obtaining the approval of IEE and EIA is shown in figure 2.1 and 2.2.

� Guidelines for the Preparation and Review of Environmental Reports, Pakistan Environmental Protection Agency,

1997: The guidelines on the preparation and review of environmental reports target project proponents and

specify:

o The nature of the information to be included in environmental reports

o The minimum qualifications of the EIA conductors appointed

o The need to incorporate suitable mitigation measures at every stage of project implementation

o The need to specify monitoring procedures.

The terms of reference for the reports are to be prepared by the project proponents themselves. The report must

contain baseline data on the study area, detailed assessment thereof, and mitigation measures.

� Guidelines for Public Consultation, Pakistan Environmental Protection Agency, May, 1997: These guidelines

support the two guidelines mentioned above. They deal with possible approaches to public consultation and

techniques for designing an effective program of consultation that reaches out to all major stakeholders and

ensures the incorporation of their concerns in any impact assessment study.

� Guidelines for Sensitive and Critical Areas: The guidelines identify officially notified protected areas in Pakistan,

including critical ecosystems, archaeological sites, etc., and present checklists for environmental assessment

procedures to be carried out inside or near such sites. Environmentally sensitive areas include, among others,

archaeological sites, biosphere reserves and natural parks, and wildlife sanctuaries and preserves.


Final Report


Source: JICA Survey Team

Figure 2.1: IEE Review and Approval Procedure


Final Report



Figure 2.2: EIA Review and Approval Procedure


Final Report


2.7 Sindh & National Environmental Quality Standards

One of the functions of the Pakistan EPA (Pak EPA) under the provision of Pakistan Environmental Protection

Ordinance, 1983 was to issue NEQS for municipal and liquid industrial effluent, industrial gaseous emissions and

motor vehicle exhaust and noise. The Pak EPA issued a statutory regulatory order (S.R.O) in 1994. It required all units

coming into production after 1st July 1994 to comply immediately with the new standards. Those already in production

at the time of S.R.O were required to comply starting 1st July 1996. The Pak EPA was not able to implement the

NEQS effectively for many reasons, including lack of implementation capacity and resistance from industry.

With the PEPA, 1997 the Pak EPA revised the NEQS with full consultation of the private sector, industrialist, trade and

business associations and NGOs. The municipal and liquid industrial effluent standards cover 32 parameters. The

standards for industrial gaseous emissions specify limits for 16 parameters, and the standards for motor vehicles

prescribe maximum permissible limits for smoke, carbon monoxide and noise. Revised standards cover discharges

limits of effluents into inland water, sewage treatment plant and the sea. The NEQS are primarily concentration based.

Unfortunately, the limits on industrial effluents are neither industry specific nor do they have any relationship with the

quantum of production. The NEQS prohibit dilution, but this can be easily circumvented.

On the other hand, following the promulgation of Sindh Act 2014, Sindh has notified its own ambient air quality

standard. It is understood that the NEQS issued prior to Sindh Act 2014 remain in force in Sindh unless they are

expressly amended, as is the case with the ambient air quality standards. As the Sindh Act 2014 does not have the

provision for a national standard and PEPA 1997 is no longer applicable in Sindh, the term ‘Sindh Environmental

Quality Standards’ (SEQS) is understood to include the NEQS (except ambient air quality standards) issued under

PEPA 1997. However, the term NEQS is still used in this document where reference is made to older standards.

NTDC is committed to comply with the applicable NEQS and SEQS in letter and spirit.

The chronological list of NEQS is shown in Table 2.2.

Table 2.2: National Environmental Quality Standards

Date Number Scope

1993 742(I)/1993 Liquid Industrial Effluent

Industrial Gaseous Emission

Vehicle Exhaust and Noise

1995 1023(I)/1995 Industrial Gaseous Emission from Power Plants operating on coal and oil (added)

2000 549(I)/2000 Liquid Industrial Effluent (amended)

Industrial Gaseous Emission (amended)

2010 1062(I)/2010 Ambient Air

2010 1063(I)/2010 Drinking Water Quality

2010 1062(I)/2010 Noise

Source: Environmental Management Consultants (EMC)


Final Report


Table 2.3 shows SEQS for ambient air.

Table 2.3: Sindh Environmental Quality Standard for Ambient Air

Pollutant Time-weighted

average

Concentration in Ambient Air Method of measurement

Sulfur Dioxide

(SO2)

Annual Average* 80 µg/m3 Ultraviolet Fluorescence Method

24 hours** 120 µg/m3

Oxides of Nitrogen as

(NO)

Annual Average* 40 µg/m3 Gas Phase Chemiluminescence


Oxides of Nitrogen as

(NO2)

Annual Average* 40 µg/m3 Gas Phase Chemiluminescence


O3 1 hour 130 µg/m3 Non dispersive UV absorption

method

Suspended Particulate

Matter (SPM)

Annual Average* 360 µg/m3 High volume Sampling, (Average

flow rate not less than

1.1m3/minute)


Respirable

Particulate Matter

(PM10)

Annual Average* 120 µg/m3 Β Ray absorption method


Respirable Particulate

Matter (PM2.5)

Annual Average* 40 µg/m3 *** Β Ray absorption method


1 hour 15 µg/m3

Lead (Pb) Annual Average* 1 µg/m3 ASS Method after sampling using

EPM 2000 or equivalent Filter

paper

24 hours** 1.5 µg/m3

Carbon Monoxide (CO) 8hours** 5 mg/m3 Non Dispersive Infra Red (NDIR)

method 1hours 10 mg/m3

*Annual arithmetic mean of minimum 104 measurements in a year taken twice a week 24 hourly at uniform interval.

**24 hourly / 8 hourly values should be met 98% of the in a year. 2% of the time, it may exceed but not on two

consecutive days.

*** or 9 µg/m3 plus baseline, whichever is low


Table 2.4 shows the standards for motor vehicle noise.

Table 2.4: The Motor Vehicle Ordinance (1965) and Roles (1969)

Parameter Standards (maximum permissible limit) Measuring method

Noise 85dB(A) Sound-meter at 7.5meter from the source



Final Report


Table 2.5 shows the proposed national environmental quality standard for noise.

Table 2.5: Proposed National Environmental Quality Standard for Noise

S. No. Category of Area /

Zone

Effective from 1st January,

2009

Effective from 1st January, 2010

Limit it in dB(A) Leq*

Day Time Night Time Day Time Night Time

1 Residential area (A) 65 50 55 45

2 Commercial area (B) 70 60 65 55

3 Industrial area (C) 80 75 75 65

4 Silence Zone (D) 55 45 50 45

Note: 1 Day time hours: 6.00 a. m to 10.00 p. m

2 Night time hours: 10.00 p. m to 6.00p. m

3 Silence zone; Zone which are declared as such by competent authority. An area comprising not less than

100 meters around hospitals, educational institutions and courts.

4 Mixed categories of areas may be declared as one of the four above-mentioned categories by the

competent authority.

*dB(A)Leq Time weighted average of the level of sound in decibels on scale A which is relatable to human hearing.


The NEQS for effluents are shown in Table 2.6

Table 2.6: National Environmental Quality Standard for Municipal & Liquid Industrial Effluents

S.

#

Parameter Into Inland

Waters

Into Sewage

Treatment

Into Sea unit

1 Temperature or Temp. increase <3 <3 <3 oC

2 pH value (H+) 6-9 6-9 6-9

3 Biological Oxygen Demand (BOD)5 at 20oC 80 250 80 mg/l

4 Chemical Oxygen Demand (COD) 150 400 400 mg/l

5 Total Suspended Solids (TSS) 200 400 200 mg/l

6 Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) 3500 3500 3500 mg/l

7 Oil and Grease 10 10 10 mg/l

8 Phenolic Compounds (as Phenol) 0.1 0.3 0.3 mg/l

9 Chloride (as Cl-) 1000 1000 SC mg/l

10 Fluoride (as F-) 10 10 10 mg/l

11 Cyanide (as CN-)total 1.0 1.0 1.0 mg/l

12 An-ionic detergents (as MBAS) 20 20 20 mg/l

13 Sulphate(SO42-) 600 1000 SC mg/l

14 Sulphide (S2-) 1.0 1.0 1.0 mg/l

15 Ammonia (NH3) 40 40 40 mg/l

16 Pesticides 0.15 0.15 0.15 mg/l

17 Cadmium 0.1 0.1 0.1 mg/l

18 Chromium (trivalent and hexavalent) 1.0 1.0 1.0 mg/l

19 Copper 1.0 1.0 1.0 mg/l

20 Lead 0.5 0.5 0.5 mg/l

21 Mercury 0.01 0.01 0.01 mg/l

22 Selenium 0.5 0.5 0.5 mg/l


Final Report


Table 2.6: National Environmental Quality Standard for Municipal & Liquid Industrial Effluents

S.

#

Parameter Into Inland

Waters

Into Sewage

Treatment

Into Sea unit

23 Nickel 1.0 1.0 1.0 mg/l

24 Silver 1.0 1.0 1.0 mg/l

25 Total toxic metals 2.0 2.0 2.0 mg/l

26 Zinc 5.0 5.0 5.0 mg/l

27 Arsenic 1.0 1.0 1.0 mg/l

28 Barium 1.5 1.5 1.5 mg/l

29 Iron 8.0 8.0 8.0 mg/l

30 Manganese 1.5 1.5 1.5 mg/l

31 Boron 6.0 6.0 6.0 mg/l

32 Chlorine 1.0 1.0 1.0 mg/l


The NEQS for drinking water are shown in Table 2.7.

Table 2.7: National Environmental Quality Standards for Drinking Waters (mg/l)

S.# Properties / Parameters Standard Values for

Pakistan


Pakistan

Bacterial Chemical

1 All water intended for

drinking (E.Coli or

Thermo tolerant Coliform

bacteria)

Must not be detectable

in any 100 ml sample

Essential Inorganics (mg/liter)

3 Aluminum (Al)

mg/l

≤ 0.2

4 Antimony (Sb) ≤ 0.005

2 Treated water entering

the distribution system

(Ecoli or thermo tolerant

coliform and total coliform

bacteria)

Must not be detectable

in any 100 ml sample

5 Arsenic (As) ≤ 0.05

6 Barium (Ba) 0.7

7 Boron (B) 0.3

3 Treated water in the

distribution system

(E.coli or thermo tolerant

coliform and total coliform

bacteria)

Must not be Detectable

in any 100 ml sample. In

case of large supplies,

where sufficient

samples are examined,

must not be resent in

95% of the samples

taken throughout any

12 month period.

8 Cadmium (Cd) 0.01

9 Chloride (Cl-) < 250

10 Chromium (Cr) ≤ 0.05

11 Copper (Cu) 2

Organic (mg/L)

12 Phenolic compounds <0.0002

Toxic Inorganics (mg/liter)

13 Cyanide (CN)- ≤ 0.05

14 Fluoride (F) ≤ 1.5

15 Lead (Pb) ≤ 0.05

16 Manganese (Mn) ≤ 0.5

Physical 17 Mercury (Hg) ≤ 0.001

4 Color < 15 TCU 18 Nickel (Ni) ≤ 0.02

5

Taste

Non objectionable/

Acceptable

19

Nitrate (NO3)-

≤ 50

6 Odor Non objectionable/ 20 Nitrite (NO2)- ≤ 3


Final Report


Table 2.7: National Environmental Quality Standards for Drinking Waters (mg/l)


Pakistan


Pakistan

Bacterial Chemical

Acceptable

7 Turbidity < 5 NTU 21 Selenium (Se) ≤ 0.01

8 Total Hardness as CaCO3 < 500 mg/l 22 Residual

Chlorine

0.2-0.5

At consumer

end

0.5-1.5 at source

9 TDS <1000

10 pH 6.5-8.5

Radioactive

11 Alpha Emitters bq/L 0.1 23 Zinc (Zn) 5.0

12 Beta emitters 1


2.8 The Forest Act, 1927

The Forest Act deals with the matters related with protection and conservation of natural vegetation/habitats. In that

regard it empowers the concerned agency to declare protected and reserved forest areas and maintaining the same.

In spite of the fact that it recognizes the right of people for access to the natural resources for their household use, it

prohibits unlawful cutting of trees and other vegetation. The permission is required prior to undertaking any tree cutting

from the area under the charge of Forest Department of Sindh. The proposed Transmission Line Project does not

encompass any reserve/protected forest area.

2.9 Cutting of Trees (Prohibition) Act, 1975 and The Protection of Trees and Bush wood Act, 1949

The Cutting of Trees Act prohibits cutting or chopping of trees without prior permission of the Forest Department.

Section 3 of this Act states “No person shall, without the prior written approval of the local formation commander or an

officer authorized by him in this behalf, cut fell or damage or cause to cut, fell or damage any tree.”

Similarly, the Protection of Trees and Bush wood Act, 1949 prohibits cutting of trees and bush wood without

permission of the Forest Department. The Act was enforced to prevent unlawful removal /clearing of trees and green

areas for any reason without the consent of the Forest Department.

2.10 Sindh wildlife Protection Ordinance, 1972

This ordinance provides for the preservation, protection, and conservation of wildlife by the formation and

management of protected areas and prohibition of hunting of wildlife species declared protected under the ordinance.

The ordinance also specifies three broad classifications of the protected areas: national parks, wildlife sanctuaries and

game reserves. Activities such as hunting and breaking of land for mining are prohibited in national parks, as are

removing vegetation or polluting water flowing through the park. Wildlife sanctuaries are areas that have been set

aside as undisturbed breeding grounds and cultivation and grazing is prohibited in the demarcated areas. Nobody is

allowed to reside in a wildlife sanctuary and entrance for the general public is by special dispensation. However, these

restrictions may be relaxed for scientific purpose or betterment of the respective area on the discretion of the

governing authority in exceptional circumstances. Game reserves are designated as areas where hunting or shooting

is not allowed except under special permits. The project area down does not include any protected area or Game

Reserve etc.


Final Report


2.11 Biodiversity Action Plan

The key to protect the biological heritage of Pakistan lies in the involvement of local people and in the support

provided by competent institutions for conservation and sustainable use. The Government of Pakistan has recognized

the importance of these measures in the preparation of the National Conservation Strategy and in becoming a

signatory to, and ratifying, the Convention on Biological Diversity (CBD) in 1994. Developing the Biodiversity Action

Plan for Pakistan, 2000 has been the most significant direct step towards addressing the biodiversity loss.

2.12 Archaeological Relics

The Antiquities Act, 1975 ensures the protection of Pakistan’s cultural resources. The Act defines “antiquities” as

ancient products of human activity, historical sites or sites of anthropological or cultural interest, national monuments,

etc. The Act is designed to protect these antiquities from destruction, theft, negligence, unlawful excavation, trade, and

export. The law prohibits new construction in the proximity of a protected antiquity and empowers the GoP to prohibit

excavation in any area that may contain articles of archaeological significance. Under the Act, the Project proponents

are obligated to ensure that no activity is undertaken within 61 m (200 ft) of a protected antiquity, and to report to the

GoP’s Department of Archaeology any archaeological discovery made during the course of the project.

The federal Department of Archaeology maintains a master register containing basic and vital information on the

protected monuments and sites including full measurements of the protected area, description, location and

Government Notification number with date of protection. The central directorate general of Archaeology has a

separate list which is continuously updated as and when new sites are declared as protected.

In Pakistan at present there are 387 notified sites which are covered by Federal Antiquities Act. Karachi alone has

over 200 buildings declared as “Protected Heritage” by the Government of Sindh. Up to date copies of this protected

area list will be sought by the proponent to avoid confusion at any later stage in development; as it is an on-going

process to bring new sites within official notification. For this reason contact with the relevant Provincial or Federal

Department of Archaeology should be sought by the proponent early during the feasibility/conceptual stage of project

development.

The Sindh Cultural Heritage (Preservation) Act, 1994 is the provincial law for the protection of cultural assets. Its

objectives are similar to those of the Antiquity Act.

No protected antiquity/cultural heritage site was identified in the vicinity of the proposed Project. Sindh Antiquities

department is onboard.

2.13 The Land Acquisition Act, 1894

The 1894 Land Acquisition Act (LAA) with its successive amendments is the main law regulating land acquisition for

public purpose in Pakistan. The LAA has been variously interpreted by local governments, and some province has

augmented the LAA by issuing provincial legislations. The LAA and its Implementation Rules require that following an

impacts assessment/valuation effort, land and crops are compensated in cash at market rate to titled landowners and

registered land tenants/users, respectively.

The LAA mandates that land valuation is to be based on the latest 5-3 years average registered land sale rates,

though, in several recent cases the median rate over the past year, or even the current rates, have been applied. Due

to widespread land under-valuation by the Revenue Department, current market rates are now frequently used with an

added 15 per cent Compulsory Acquisition Surcharge as provided in the LAA.

1) Based on the LAA, only legal owners and tenants registered with the Land Revenue Department or possessing

formal lease agreements are eligible for compensation or livelihood support.


Final Report


2) It is also noted that the LAA does not automatically mandate for specific rehabilitation / assistance provisions

benefiting the poor, vulnerable groups, or severely affected PAPs, nor it automatically provides for rehabilitation of

income/livelihood losses or resettlement costs. This however it is often done in many projects in form of ad hoc

arrangements based on negotiations between a specific EA and the PAPs.

3) Exceptions to the rule are intrinsic to the fact that the law is elastic and are broadly interpreted at provincial level

depending on operational requirements, local needs, and socio-economic circumstances. Recourse is often taken to

ad hoc arrangements, agreements and understandings for resettlement in difficult situations. The above is also

influenced by the fact that an amendment of the LAA has been considered necessary by the Ministry of Environment.

Accordingly, a National Resettlement Policy (NRP) and a Resettlement Ordinance have been drafted to broaden LAA

provisions and current practices so as to widen the scope of eligibility and tightening up loopholes (i.e. regarding

definitions of malpractices, cut-off dates, political influence on routing, etc.). But both these documents are still

awaiting government’s approval for implementation.

The Act would apply for all the situations during the project when land area for the purpose of the project is needed to

be acquired.

Table 2.8: Summary of Land Acquisition Act (1894)

Sections of the Act Description

Section 3(b) Persons Interested

The LAA does not recognize any adverse effect on APs for purposes of compensation. The

APs cannot claim compensation as "persons interested", because as per Section 3(b), an

"interested person" is a person claiming an interest in compensation to be made on account of

the acquisition of land and a person shall be deemed to be interested in land if he is interested

in an easement affecting the land. It does not cover the categories of “affected persons" for

compensation purposes.

Sections 5(a) and 24 Compensation and Objections

In determining compensation, the Act leaves discretion in the hand of decision-making

authority, which is contrary to the interests of APs including "preference of their informed

choice". The LAA only allows payment of compensation valued on the date of the notification

and not on the value at the time of actual acquisition.

Sections 6-10 Acquisition, Valuation, Entitlements and Compensation

These are inconsistent to meet resettlement principles and requirements of foreign donors and

international agencies, emphasizing on community involvement and consultation, taking into

account adverse sociocultural losses; and rehabilitation of vulnerable affected groups. To

ensure compliance of resettlement principles, the mechanism for making valuation and

applying various measures to ensure its fairness, has to be there, based on the principle of

compensating the APs at replacement cost, and rehabilitation of the lost incomes and

livelihoods up to the pre -project level.

Section 11 Persons Entitled to Compensation:

The award should mention the compensation for "persons in knowledge or believed to be

interested in the land", and the Collector can make payment of the compensation to the

"persons interested" entitled thereto. This does not cater for the "affected persons".

Sections 16 and 17 Land Acquired

These do not differentiate between lands acquired for developmental or non-developmental

purposes; and also between two types of land acquisition: that which causes involuntary

displacement and that which does not


Final Report


Table 2.8: Summary of Land Acquisition Act (1894)

Sections of the Act Description

Section 28 Valuation of Compound Interest

For determining compensation values and interests/premium for land acquisition, the Land

Valuation Committees (LVCs) are necessary but recommendations made by the LVCs are not

binding on the Collector, as these committees have no legal basis under the Act. In order to

facilitate the APs to decide about agreeable entitlements, the role of LVCs needs to be

strengthened


2.14 (Draft) National Resettlement Policy (2002)

The laws and regulations regarding Resettlement Action Plan (RAP) in Pakistan are provided in the National

Resettlement Policy, 2002 (NRP), as a draft form from the Pakistan Environment Protection Agency. This covers not

only the Affected Persons (APs) subject to resettlement but also ensures an equitable and uniform treatment of

resettlement issues. This policy states the following policy objectives:

o Avoid or minimize adverse social impacts in a project wherever possible and where adverse impacts cannot be

avoided, the mitigation measures and resettlement activities should be conceived and executed as development

programs and the affected persons be provided opportunity to share the project benefits;

o APs should be provided with sufficient compensation and assistance for lost assets, that will assist them to

improve or at least restore their living standards, income earning or production capacity to the pre-project level;

o Provide a development opportunity to all vulnerable groups. The vulnerable populations should receive special

assistance to bring them at least to a minimum living standard at par with the pre-project level; and

o All population adversely affected by the project, should be eligible for sharing the social and economic benefits,

envisaged after completion of the project.

The draft NRP is further supplemented by "Project Implementation and Resettlement of the Affected Persons

Ordinance, 2002" that has to be adopted by state and local governments. This ordinance provides a comprehensive

and detailed procedures and definitions for land acquisition and resettlement of the APs. As of August 2015, the draft

NRP has not yet approved in Pakistan.

2.15 West Pakistan Water and Power Development Authority Act, 1958

This Act authorizes WAPDA to construct and operate electrical T/L with powers and obligations of a licensee under

the Telegraph Act of 1910. It establishes policy for land acquisition and compensation, as well as the degree of liability

of WAPDA for damages sustained by landowners or others.

2.16 NTDC Safety Considerations on selection of T/L Routes and Grid Station Sites

The following safety considerations issued by the Design Directorate of NTDC are kept in view while selecting the

sites for T/L route and grid station sites.

2.16.1 Environmental Safety Considerations

o Operations in environmentally sensitive areas with special respect for fragile ecosystems and their inherent bio-

diversity are avoided to the possible extent.


Final Report


o The ROW for T/L or sites for sub-stations through natural features like high mountains, hilly terrain susceptible to

landslides, large lakes, reservoirs, marshes, human habitations and reserved forests/national parks are avoided

to the possible extent, for insuring reliability, security and economy.

o ROW is selected duly considering the location of telecommunication lines and railway circuits to avoid electrical

interference due to mutual induction.

o Adoption of innovative technologies / latest equipment to abate pollution in construction activities and operations.

2.16.2 Social Safety Considerations

o Residential structures are kept 12 m out from the plumb line of the outer conductor in ROW. However, in the

absence of an alternative alignment, an exception can be made for farm buildings and single store factory

buildings, provided neither is used as a residence.

o T/L routes through area of cultural or historical importance and religious places are avoided to the possible extent.

o Alternative route alignments are used if any school, rural dispensary, mosque or local shrine (ziarat) comes within

200 m of the centerline of a planned route

o Brick kilns are kept at least 30 m outside the centerline of the ROW

o Tube wells and open wells using a surface pump are not permitted under the high voltage conductors. This due

to the reason that piping and cranes used to recondition such wells could come in contact with the high voltage

conductors.

o Existing open wells including Persian or artesian wells are allowed to remain under the high voltage conductors,

as are hand pumps. Existing open wells in the ROW will be capped.

o Existing orchards can remain within the ROW although towers are kept out of orchards wherever possible.

Orchards are over sailed by a clearance of 6 meters above the height of a mature orchard whereas all the other

trees are removed.

o The alignment of the T/L and the selection of grid station sites are made by NTDC after discussion with the key

persons of the area, avoiding properties, infrastructures and religiously sensitive areas, such as shrines and

graveyards to the possible extent.

o Selection of the sites for construction of tower foundation and tower erection is made consciously on stable

surfaces ignoring sites prone to erosion/slip.

o The spacing between the towers/poles may not be uniform and range variously for physical and other

considerations such as crossing of main roads, residential areas and trees and for avoiding graveyards and big

ditches in between the two towers/poles.

o The route alignment of the T/L, location of the towers / poles and the corridors are identified by NTDC.

o The parameters relating to public safety as adopted by the NTDC for the planning and design of transmission

systems are provided in Annexure 3 and the main features are discussed as follows:

2.16.3 Public Safety Parameters

o The main consideration relating to the public safety relates to the safe horizontal and vertical distances of the

conductor from the ground level to avoid the electrocution of the living beings under the T/L. In view of public

safety, a corridor having a width of minimum 30 m, clear of all obstructions is adopted for Extra High Voltage

(EHV) 500 and 220 kV T/L (half on either side from the center line). However, general farming within this corridor

is allowed and the tree plantations that do not exceed a height of 1.5 m are also allowed to remain under the lines.

Similarly, open wells, including Persian wheels are allowed to remain under the T/L. Tube wells and Peter pumps

are not permitted under the high voltage conductors. This is for the reason that piping and cranes used to

refurbish such wells may come in contact with the lines.

o No residential or other public buildings like factory, school, hospital, mosque except for the graves /graveyards

are permitted within the corridor. However, farm buildings which are used for residential purposes are allowed to


Final Report


remain under the extra high voltage lines, provided 8 m vertical clearance is maintained. The height of the towers

can be increased to accommodate such buildings.

2.16.4 Conductor to Ground Clearance

o The conductor to ground clearance is desirable to be worked out based on over voltage due to switching surge.

Safe clearance is required to provide for moving objects under the line with a height of 4.5 m, withstanding

switching surge of 3-sigma margin with 99.7 % probability under adverse atmospheric conditions. This is to keep

off the maximum voltage gradient at ground level and maximum current induced in person less than

internationally allowable values. As such, conductor to ground clearance shall in no way be less than 9 m. This is

in accordance with the regulations of GOP/ WAPDA.

o WAPDA/NTDC have accepted current international standards for conductor to ground clearance for the

construction of EHV T/L Projects. The specific standards accepted are that of the National Electrical Safety Code

(ANSCI C2), currently applicable in the United States.

The permissible conductor clearance (at a maximum temperature of 65.5oC) is given in Table 2.9.

Table 2.9: Conductor to Ground Clearance

Serial Item 220 kV (m) 500 kV (m)

1 Cultivated land traversed by vehicles 7.92 9.45

2 • Communication and Power Lines

• Power Lines up to 132kV

7.92

5.00

6.70

3 Highways 7.92 9.45

4 Railroads 8.84 9.14

5 River at high flood level 9.14 9.14

6 Places accessible to pedestrians only 8.84 9.14

7 Building roofs 7.62 9.14

8 Top of trees (Orchards) 6.00 6.00

9 Canals 9.14 9.14

10 Lightening Protection Wires 5.00 6.70


2.16.5 Corridor Clearance

In Pakistan, EHV T/L are exclusively sited in rural areas, where they connect with ex-urban grid stations. The high

voltage lines situated within urban areas are routed along canal banks or non-residential corridors. NTDC/Wapda’s

overall policy on horizontal clearances is to keep all buildings and other obstructions out of the ROW of a high voltage

T/L. Horizontal clearance of 30 m is adopted for 220 kV and 500 kV T/L.

2.17 The Telegraph Act, 1885

The Telegraph Act (TA) was conceived in the British era for telegraphic poles and then was passed to post-

independence Pakistan with a broader application covering also electric poles and towers. The original provision of

this law was that the land occupied by telegraph poles was not to be compensated (only crops destroyed during the

erection of the pole were compensated). This was based on the logic that a pole, covering only a negligible land area,

does not cause substantial impacts to land users. This however is no longer applicable with the 220 or 500 KV

transmission lines where the average area of impact is 900 sq. meters.

In case of impacts caused by the poles and towers for public facilities and transmission lines, land acquisition is not

regulated by the LAA but instead by the Telegraph Act, 1885 (amended in 1975).


Final Report


The Act (section 11) confers powers to the NTDC to enter private lands and (section 10) construct/maintain electricity

towers and transmission lines without the need to acquire the land affected and paying compensation for it. However

sub-section 10 (d), provides that the NTDC is required to avoid causing unnecessary damages to the affected land

and associated assets. Finally Sub Section 10 (d) and Section 16 provides that if any such damage occurs (i.e.

damages to crops, irrigation facilities, and land quality or land income) the project proponent has to provide just

compensation for the damages caused.

The Telegraph Act also requires the proponents to: (i) properly inform the affected people through written notices and

onsite public meetings; (ii) compensate at market rates all the lands occupied by towers in urban areas, or replace the

broad-based conventional towers by narrow-based tubular poles to minimize impact on land; (iii) avoid land impacts in

rural areas through the use of towers with sufficient vertical clearance to allow the continuation of unrestricted farming

and animal grazing; and, (iv) if the construction of such towers is impossible, compensate the land occupied by tower

bases also in rural areas. In addition, the proponent will compensate by default all the crops, trees and other assets

expected to be affected by the Transmission Line construction phases including (i) construction of tower bases; (ii)

tower erection; and (iii) stringing of power cables.

This Act makes provision of installing towers without acquiring any land. However, provision is there for temporary

acquisition of land during the construction period. During the proposed Transmission Line project, it will be ensured

that land under the transmission lines is accessible and can be used productively.

2.18 Regulation of Generation, Transmission and Distribution of Electric Power Regulation Act, 1997 (NEPRA Act)

In order to promote fair competition in the electricity industry and to protect the rights of consumers as well as

producers and sellers of electricity, the GOP has enacted the Regulation of Generation, Transmission and Distribution

of Electric Power Regulation Act, 1997 (NEPRA Act). Under this Act, the National Electric Power Regulatory Authority

(NEPRA) has been established for regulation of electric power generation, transmission and distribution in Pakistan. In

performing its functions under this Act, NEPRA shall, as far as practicable, protect the interests of consumers and

companies providing electric power services.

2.19 NEPRA Power Policy, 2002

NEPRA Power Policy is a comprehensive document stating NEPRA’s stance over power production, transmission and

distribution in the country and other related matters. This Policy offers maximum incentives and assurances for the

investors in the power sector. The scope of the Policy covers:

o Private sector projects;

o Public sector projects;

o Public-private partnership projects; and

o Projects developed by the public sector and then divested.

Protection of environment is one of the key objectives of the Power Policy to which all the project owners who are

engaged with NEPRA for power generation are supposed to adhere. The Policy requires the investors/project owners

to ascertain that all requirements of the PEPA, relating to environmental protection, environmental impact and social

soundness assessment, have been met while they undertake the project.


Final Report


2.20 Electricity Act, 1910

This Act provides a legal base for power distribution. A “licensee” under this Act is enabled to operate for the supply of

electricity. This Act obligates licensee to pay compensation for any damages caused during the constructions and

maintenance of any power distribution facilities.

2.21 Employment of Child Act, 1991

Article 11 (3) of the constitution of Pakistan prohibits employment of children below the age of 14 years in any factory,

mines or any other hazardous employment. In accordance with this Article, the Employment of Child Act (ECA) 1991

disallows the child labor in the country. The ECA defines a child to mean a person who has not completed his/her

fourteenth years of age. The ECA states that no child shall be employed or permitted to work in any of the occupation

set forth in the ECA (such as transport sector, railways, construction and ports) or in any workshop wherein any of the

processes defined in the Act is carried out. The processes defined in the Act include carpet weaving, bidi (kind of a

cigarette) making, cement manufacturing, textile, construction and others). NTDC and its constructors will be bound by

the ECA to disallow any child labor at the project sites or camp sites.

2.22 JICA Guidelines for Environmental & Social Considerations

JICA Guidelines for Environmental and Social Considerations 2010 (hereinafter referred to as the "JICA Guidelines")

applies to the project. It is a requirement as per the JICA’s policy that the borrower country is required to carry out its

Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA). In addition, the borrower is obliged to implement measures to mitigate

anticipated environmental impacts, to prepare an environmental management, monitoring and institutional

strengthening plan. These guidelines lay down procedures for conducting EIA, highlight aspects to be considered

including public consultation, grievance redressal, environmental management plan, capacity development, training,

information disclosure procedures, etc. As JICA is financing the project, the mechanisms / procedures for public

consultations, monitoring, grievance redressal, etc., will be framed as per requirements of these guidelines.

JICA establishes and makes public JICA Guidelines with the objective of contributing to efforts by the international

community, particularly developing regions, towards sustainable development, through consideration of the

environmental and social aspects in all projects (hereinafter referred to as "project" or "projects") subject to lending or

other financial operations (hereinafter collectively referred to as "funding") by JICA. Environmental and social

considerations refer not only to the natural environment, but also to social issues such as involuntary resettlement and

respect for the human rights of indigenous people (hereinafter collectively referred to as "environment"). The

Guidelines apply commonly to JICA's International Financial Operations and Overseas Economic Cooperation

Operations.

The objectives of the guidelines are to encourage Project proponents etc. to have appropriate consideration for

environmental and social impacts, as well as to ensure that JICA’s support for examination of environmental and

social considerations are conducted accordingly. The guidelines outline JICA’s responsibilities and procedures, along

with its requirements for project proponents etc., in order to facilitate the achievement of these objectives. In doing so,

JICA endeavors to ensure transparency, predictability, and accountability in its support for examination of

environmental and social considerations.

Category A projects defined by the JICA Guidelines generally include i) sensitive sectors, such as transportation,

having sensitive characteristics, or ii) projects located in/around sensitive areas. Moreover, a project causing large-

scale involuntary resettlement is classified under ‘Category A’ project.


Final Report


A Project falls in Category B if its potential adverse impacts on the environment and society are less adverse than

those of Category “A” projects by JICA Guidelines. Generally, Category B projects are site-specific; few if any are

irreversible; and in most cases, normal mitigation measures can be designed more readily.

Table 2.10: JICA Classification Criteria for Projects

Category A o Projects which are likely to have significant adverse impacts on the environment and society. o Projects in sensitive sectors, projects that have characteristics that are liable to cause adverse

environmental impacts, and projects located in or near sensitive areas.

Category B o Projects having less adverse impacts on the environment and society than those of Category A projects.

o Generally, they are site-specific; few if any are irreversible; and in most cases, normal mitigation measures can be designed more readily.

Category C o Projects which are likely to have minimal or little adverse impact on the environment & society.

Category FI o Projects are classified as Category FI if they satisfy all of the following requirements: o JICA’s funding of projects is provided to a financial intermediary or executing agency; o The selection and appraisal of the sub-projects is substantially undertaken by such an

institution only after JICA’s approval of the funding, so that the sub-projects cannot be

specified prior to JICA’s approval of funding (or project appraisal); and

o Those sub-projects are expected to have a potential impact on the environment.

Source: JICA Guidelines 2010

A. Basic principle regarding environmental and social consideration

JICA recognizes the following Seven Basic Principles to be very important regarding Environmental and Social

Considerations.

o A wide range of impacts must be addressed: The types of impacts addressed by JICA cover a wide range of

environmental and social issues.

o Measures for environmental and social considerations must be implemented from an early stage to a monitoring

stage: JICA applies a Strategic Environmental Assessment (SEA) when conducting Master Plan Studies etc., and

encourages project proponents etc. to ensure environmental and social considerations from an early stage to a

monitoring stage.

o JICA is responsible for accountability when implementing cooperation projects: JICA ensures accountability and

transparency when implementing cooperation projects.

o JICA asks stakeholders for their participation: JICA incorporates stakeholder opinions into decision-making

processes regarding environmental and social considerations by ensuring the meaningful participation of

stakeholders in order to have consideration for environmental and social factors and to reach a consensus

accordingly. JICA replies to stakeholders’ questions. Stakeholders who participate in meetings are responsible for

what they say.

o JICA discloses information: JICA itself discloses information on environmental and social considerations in

collaboration with project proponents etc., in order to ensure accountability and to promote the participation of

various stakeholders.

o JICA enhances organizational capacity: JICA makes efforts to enhance the comprehensive capacity of

organizations and operations in order for project proponents etc., to have consideration for environmental and

social factors, appropriately and effectively, at all times.

o JICA makes serious attempts at promptness: JICA addresses request of acceleration for the prompt

implementation of projects while undertaking environmental and social considerations.


Final Report


B. JICA Guidelines outline scope of impacts to be assessed

The JICA guidelines clearly define the impacts to be assessed with regard to environmental and social considerations.

Environmental Assessment should assess the impacts on human health and safety, as well as on the natural

environment, that are transmitted through air, water, soil, waste, accidents, water usage, climate change, ecosystems,

fauna and flora, including trans-boundary or global scale impacts.

These also include social impacts, including migration of population and involuntary resettlement, local economy such

as employment and livelihood, utilization of land and local resources, social institutions such as social capital and local

decision-making institutions, existing social infrastructures and services, vulnerable social groups such as poor and

indigenous peoples, equality of benefits and losses and equality in the development process, gender, children’s rights,

cultural heritage, local conflicts of interest, infectious diseases such as HIV/AIDS, and working conditions including

occupational safety. Items to be addressed in the specific project are narrowed down to the needed ones through the

scoping process.

In addition to the direct and immediate impacts of projects, the derivative, secondary, and cumulative impacts as well

as impacts associated with indivisible projects will also be assessed with regard to environmental and social

considerations, so far as it is rational. The life cycle impact of a project period is also considered.

Various kinds of relevant information are needed in order to assess impacts on the environment and local

communities. There are, however, uncertainties in predicting such impacts caused by the incomplete understanding of

impact mechanisms and the limited information available. Therefore, if the scale of uncertainty is considered to be

large, project proponents etc. provide environmental and social considerations that include preventive measures as

much as possible.

C. JICA Guidelines do to take into account opinions of local residents affected by the project

JICA incorporates stakeholder opinions into decision-making processes regarding environmental and social

considerations by ensuring the meaningful participation of stakeholders in order to have consideration for

environmental and social factors and to reach a consensus accordingly. JICA guidelines emphasize consultation with

stakeholders and defined stakeholder as “Local stakeholders” means affected individuals or groups (including illegal

dwellers) and local NGOs. “Stakeholders” are individuals or groups who have views about cooperation projects,

including local stakeholders.

Consultation with local stakeholders through means that induce broad public participation to a reasonable extent, in

order to take into consideration the environmental and social factors in a way that is most suitable to local situations,

and in order to reach an appropriate consensus. JICA assists project proponents etc. by implementing cooperation

projects as needed.

In an early stage of cooperation projects, JICA holds discussions with project proponents etc. and the two parties

reach a consensus on frameworks for consultation with local stakeholders. In order to have meaningful meetings,

JICA encourages project proponents etc. to publicize in advance that they plan to consult with local stakeholders, with

particular attention to directly affected people.

In the case of Category A or B projects, JICA encourages project proponents etc. to consult with local stakeholders

about their understanding of development needs, the likely adverse impacts on the environment and society, and the

analysis of alternatives at an early stage of the project, and assists project proponents as needed.


Final Report


D. JICA Guidelines showed concerns about Social Environment and Human Rights

JICA will assess the social environment as an indispensable factor in environmental and social considerations. JICA

will thus consider human rights as a constituting factor of the social environment. In particular, special consideration

must be taken for cooperation projects when disclosing information and holding consultations with local stakeholders,

after obtaining understanding from the host governments in countries and areas affected by conflict or where basic

freedoms, including freedom of expression and the right to receive legal remedy, are restricted.

JICA respects the principles of internationally established human rights standards such as the International

Convention on Human Rights, and gives special attention to the human rights of vulnerable social groups including

women, indigenous peoples, persons with disabilities, and minorities when implementing cooperation projects. JICA

obtains country reports and information widely about human rights that are issued by related institutions, and seeks to

understand local human rights situations by disclosing information about cooperation projects. Thus, JICA integrates

local human rights situations into decision-making processes that relate to environmental and social considerations.

E. JICA Guidelines showed premium Concern on Involuntary Resettlement

Involuntary resettlement and loss of means of livelihood are to be avoided when feasible by exploring all viable

alternatives. When, after such an examination, avoidance is proved unfeasible, effective measures to minimize impact

and to compensate for losses must be agreed upon with the people who will be affected.

People who must be resettled involuntarily and people whose means of livelihood will be hindered or lost must be

sufficiently compensated and supported by project proponents etc. in a timely manner. Prior compensation, at full

replacement cost, must be provided as much as possible. Host countries must make efforts to enable people affected

by projects and to improve their standard of living, income opportunities, and production levels, or at least to restore

these to pre-project levels. Measures to achieve this may include: providing land and monetary compensation for

losses (to cover land and property losses), supporting means for an alternative sustainable livelihood, and providing

the expenses necessary for the relocation and re-establishment of communities at resettlement sites.

Appropriate participation by affected people and their communities must be promoted in the planning, implementation,

and monitoring of resettlement action plans and measures to prevent the loss of their means of livelihood. In addition,

appropriate and accessible grievance mechanisms must be established for the affected people and their communities.

For projects that will result in large-scale involuntary resettlement, resettlement action plans must be prepared and

made available to the public. In preparing a resettlement action plan, consultations must be held with the affected

people and their communities based on sufficient information made available to them in advance. When consultations

are held, explanations must be given in a form, manner, and language that are understandable to the affected people.

It is desirable that the resettlement action plan include elements laid out in the World Bank Safeguard Policy, OP 4.12.

F. Monitoring under guidelines

After projects begin, project proponents will monitor whether any unforeseeable situations occur and whether the

performance and effectiveness of mitigation measures are consistent with the assessment’s prediction. They then take

appropriate measures based on the results of such monitoring.

In cases where sufficient monitoring is deemed essential for appropriate environmental and social considerations,

such as projects for which mitigation measures should be implemented while monitoring their effectiveness, project

proponents etc. must ensure that project plans include feasible monitoring plans.


Final Report


Project proponents etc. should make efforts to make the results of the monitoring process available to local project

stakeholders.

When third parties point out, in concrete terms, that environmental and social considerations are not being fully

undertaken, forums for discussion and examination of countermeasures are established based on sufficient

information disclosure, including stakeholders’ participation in relevant projects. Project proponents etc. should make

efforts to reach an agreement on procedures to be adopted with a view to resolving problems.

G. JICA Guidelines Require Compliance with Local Laws, Standards and Plans on Social and Environmental

Consideration.

JICA examines compliance with the laws, ordinances, and standards related to environmental and social

considerations established by the governments that have jurisdiction over project sites (including both national and

local governments). Project must also conform to the environmental and social consideration policies and plans of the

governments that have such jurisdiction. Protected areas that are specifically designated by laws or ordinances for the

conservation of nature or cultural heritage (excluding projects whose primary objectives are to promote the protection

or restoration of such areas) must be considered before commencement of project. Projects are also not to impose

significant adverse impacts on designated conservation areas.

2.23 World Bank Guidelines and IFC General EHS Guidelines on Environment

JICA confirms that projects do not deviate significantly from the World Bank’s Safeguard Policies, and refers as a

benchmark to the standards of international financial organizations; to internationally recognized standards, or

international standards, treaties, and declarations, etc.; and to the good practices etc. of developed nations including

Japan, when appropriate. When JICA recognizes that laws and regulations related to the environmental and social

considerations of the project are significantly inferior to the aforementioned standards and good practices, JICA

encourages project proponents etc., including local governments, to take more appropriate steps through a series of

dialogues, in which JICA clarifies the background of and reasons for the inferior regulations and takes measures to

mitigate the adverse impacts when necessary.

2.24 ILO Conventions

Pakistan has been a member of the ILO since 1947 and has thus far ratified 36 conventions. Of these, 33 are in force,

whereas 3 have been denounced. The fundamental conventions which are being implemented across Pakistan

through applicable labor laws include:

o C029 - Forced Labor Convention, 1930 (No. 29);

o C087 - Freedom of Association and Protection of the Right to Organize Convention, 1948 (No. 87);

o C098 - Right to Organize and Collective Bargaining Convention, 1949 (No. 98);

o C100 - Equal Remuneration Convention, 1951 (No. 100);

o C105 - Abolition of Forced Labor Convention, 1957 (No. 105);

o C111 - Discrimination (Employment and Occupation) Convention, 1958 (No. 111);

o C138 - Minimum Age Convention, 1973 (No. 138)Minimum age specified: 14 years;

o C182 - Worst Forms of Child Labor Convention, 1999 (No. 182).


Final Report

Environmental Management Consultants (EMC) Chapter – 3: Analysis of Alternatives Page 1 of 37

Chapter 3 Analysis of Alternatives

Identification and assessment of feasible alternatives to project design and implementation is among the main

components of Environmental & Social Impact Assessment procedures. Alternatives illustrate and contrast the

environmental implications and consequences of different options available to achieve the proposed objective. In this

way, both the proponent and the authorities who must consider granting the authorization, are put in a position where

all involved are able to make informed choices or decisions.

Selection of preferred alternative is based on scores of factors including cost, schedule of delivery, environmental and

social impact and the cost for their redressal. The drivers that affect potential alternative options and scenarios

include: availability of project sites, current technologies; design changes that need to be introduced, operational

situation, capital & recurrent costs, environmental & social issues, their potential impacts, and costs of mitigation.

The “No Project” alternative situation is taken into account to demonstrate the need of the Project. In consideration of

the different drivers, potential alternatives within the Project are restricted to the following aspects:

o No Project option;

o Different alignments or sections of alignment for the Transmission Line (TL);

o Different locations of towers and other key infrastructure, within operational constraints;

o Different construction methods, timings and other construction-related modifications, including those needed

for minimizing potential avian risks.

3.1 No-Project Alternative

The no-development option simply means that the Government of Pakistan does nothing to address the purpose and

need for the power generation and transmission. The most significant outcomes of this approach would be a negative

impact on current electricity supplies, and the possibility of complete blackouts at times of high demand. The power

generation capacity of Pakistan meets only 40 percent of the current demand and if the “No Project” is to have its way,

the Country will have to slow down the growth rate of its economy and all its development projects will come to a

standstill. At present additional pressure is being put on already deficient electricity generation capacity by the urban

and industrial demand. The present shortfall is estimated at 3,000 MW and the power outage has gone up from 6 to 8

hours in urban areas and 10 to 12 hours in rural areas. Government of Pakistan is desperately looking for all options

to bridge this gap.

It is the professional opinion of the EIA Team that the no-development option is unrealistic, and, indeed, following this

approach would result in the stagnation or cessation of many Government strategies that have been planned and

implemented. Due to the negative consequences of the no-development option, it has been discarded from further

consideration in this EIA.

3.2 Technology Alternatives

As technology alternatives of transmission lines applied to the Project, the following two types of technologies were

assessed in respect of technical, cost effectiveness and environmental & social acceptability..

(1) Underground Cable: involving construction of underground cable system.

(2) Overhead Transmission lines: involving construction of traditional overhead T/L

Table 3.1 shows the comparison between two alternatives.


Final Report


Table 3.1 Comparison between Underground and Overhead T/L alternatives

Aspect Underground Cable Overhead T/L

Technical This mode of transmission is technically

challenging, since its maintenance is difficult and

expensive; currently no trained manpower is

available with the NTDC to trouble shoot the

system in the event of failure

This option is simple as compared to

underground cable system as trained

manpower is available. As regards selection

of towers or poles, even though towers

occupy more space and poles leave a small

footprint, towers are economical especially

when there is no space constraint. The

overhead T/L is a simple, cost effective and

most appropriate technical option for which

technology has been well grounded in

Pakistan.

Cost Effectiveness Underground cables are not cost effective; their

laying and life-cycle cost are threefold. This is

because: i) limitations are posed by the physical

properties of the insulation material that has to

be placed during positioning; ii) underground

cables require continuous conduits, thus

involving a large construction activity; iii)

constraints are posed in maintenance, since

underground repairs can take days or weeks, iv)

operations are more difficult since the high

reactive power of underground cables produces

large charging currents and makes voltage

control more difficult.

Overhead T/L system is cost effective

because the construction, operation &

maintenance costs are economically

competitive. Overhead T/L system are

simple and easy to implement and

maintenance costs are lower, less land is

affected and there is no threat to

subterranean infrastructure.

Environmental &

Social

Acceptability

The adoption of this alternative has high

environmental and social acceptance in terms of

threat to the existing utilities during the

excavation-positioning-backfilling processes,

traffic disturbance, dust and smoke emission,

constraints on access of the residents to their

residences and place of work during the period

of construction.

Overhead T/L system is less problematic

because it has: i) least impact on the social

and environmental footprint, ii) insignificant

impact on the existing utilities (water supply,

telephone lines, gas lines etc), and iii) no

large scale excavation.


With due consideration of the cost implications, technical complexities and environmental impacts associated with

underground T/Ls, this alternative has been discarded from further consideration in this EIA.

As a result, the overhead T/L has been selected as an appropriate technology for the Project.

3.3 Comparison between Towers and Poles

Poles: Poles have small footprint; they are more appropriate for urban areas but less cost effective as it costs four

times more compared with conventional towers.

Towers: The conventional towers occupy more space. These are recommended for the present project in the open

environment of the Project site.


Final Report


3.4 Alternative Routing

In linear projects, such as T/Ls, the shortest/direct route is cheaper in that it offers a compromise between issues of

direct cost, topography, rock and soil type and a range of other factors which include proximity to existing

infrastructure and environmental and social factors.

There are three guiding principles for selection of the most suitable T/L route: i) the route should be the shortest, ii) it

should avoid existing settlements as far as possible, and iii) it should not pass through the environmentally sensitive

localities/reserved parks.

3.4.1 NTDC Safety Considerations on Selection of T/L Routes & Grid Station Sites

The following safety considerations issued by the Design Directorate of NTDC are kept in view while selecting the

sites for T/L route and grid station sites.

Environmental Safety Considerations

o Operations in environmentally sensitive areas with special respect for fragile ecosystems and their inherent bio-

diversity are avoided to the possible extent.

o The Right of Way (ROW) for T/L or sites for sub-stations through natural features like high mountains, hilly terrain

susceptible to landslides, large lakes, reservoirs, marshes, human habitations and reserved forests/national parks

are avoided to the possible extent, for insuring reliability, security and economy.

o ROW is selected duly considering the location of telecommunication lines and railway circuits to avoid electrical

interference due to mutual induction.

o Adoption of innovative technologies/latest equipments to abate pollution in construction activities and operations.

Social Safety Considerations

o Residential structures are kept 12 m out from the plumb line of the outer conductor in ROW. However, in the

absence of an alternative alignment, an exception can be made for farm buildings and single store factory

buildings, provided neither is used as a residence.

o T/L routes through area of cultural or historical importance and religious places are avoided to the possible extent.

o Alternative route alignments are used if any school, rural dispensary, mosque or local shrine (ziarat) comes within

200 m of the centerline of a planned route

o Brick kilns are kept at least 30 m outside the centerline of the ROW

o Tube wells and open wells using a surface pump are not permitted under the high voltage conductors. This due

to the reason that piping and cranes used to recondition such wells could come in contact with the high voltage

conductors.

o Existing open wells including Persian or artesian wells are allowed to remain under the high voltage conductors,

as are hand pumps. Existing open wells in the ROW will be capped.

o Existing orchards can remain within the ROW although towers are kept out of orchards wherever possible.

Orchards are over sailed by a clearance of 6 meters above the height of a mature orchard whereas all the other

trees are removed.

o The alignment of the T/L and the selection of grid station sites are made by NTDC after discussion with the key

persons of the area, avoiding properties, infrastructures and religiously sensitive areas, such as shrines and

graveyards to the possible extent.

o Selection of the sites for construction of tower foundation and tower erection is made consciously on stable

surfaces ignoring sites prone to erosion/slip.

o The spacing between the towers/poles may not be uniform and range variously for physical and other

considerations such as crossing of main roads, residential areas and trees and for avoiding graveyards and big

ditches in between the two towers/poles.


Final Report


o The route alignment of the T/L, location of the towers/poles and the corridors are identified by NTDC.

Public Safety Parameters

o The main consideration relating to the public safety relates to the safe horizontal and vertical distances of the

conductor from the ground level to avoid the electrocution of the living beings under the T/L. In view of public

safety, a corridor having a width of minimum 30 m, clear of all obstructions is adopted for Extra High Voltage

(EHV) 500 and 220 kV T/L (half on either side from the center line). However, general farming within this corridor

is allowed and the tree plantations that do not exceed a height of 1.5 m are also allowed to remain under the lines.

Similarly, open wells, including Persian wheels are allowed to remain under the T/L. Tube wells and Peter pumps

are not permitted under the high voltage conductors. This is for the reason that piping and cranes used to

refurbish such wells may come in contact with the lines.

o No residential or other public buildings like factory, school, hospital, mosque except for the graves / graveyards

are permitted within the corridor. However, farm buildings which are used for residential purposes are allowed to

remain under the extra high voltage lines, provided 8 m vertical clearance is maintained. The height of the towers

can be increased to accommodate such buildings.

Conductor to Ground Clearance

o The conductor to ground clearance is desirable to be worked out based on over voltage due to switching surge.

Safe clearance is required to provide for moving objects under the line with a height of 4.5 m, withstanding

switching surge of 3-sigma margin with 99.7 % probability under adverse atmospheric conditions. This is to keep

off the maximum voltage gradient at ground level and maximum current induced in person less than

internationally allowable values. As such, conductor to ground clearance shall in no way be less than 9 m. This is

in accordance with the regulations of GOP/ WAPDA.

o WAPDA/NTDC have accepted current international standards for conductor to ground clearance for the

construction of EHV T/L Projects. The specific standards accepted are that of the National Electrical Safety Code

(ANSCI C2), currently applicable in the United States.

The permissible conductor clearance (at a maximum temperature of 65.5oC) is given in following Table:

Table 3.2: Conductor to Ground Clearance

Serial Item 220 kV (m) 500 kV (m)

1 Cultivated land traversed by vehicles 7.92 9.45

2 • Communication and Power Lines

• Power Lines up to 132kV

7.92

5.00

6.70

3 Highways 7.92 9.45

4 Railroads 8.84 9.14

5 River at high flood level 9.14 9.14

6 Places accessible to pedestrians only 8.84 9.14

7 Building roofs 7.62 9.14

8 Top of trees (Orchards) 6.00 6.00

9 Canals 9.14 9.14

10 Lightening Protection Wires 5.00 6.70



Final Report


Corridor Clearance

o In Pakistan, EHV T/L are exclusively sited in rural areas, where they connect with ex-urban grid stations. The high

voltage lines situated within urban areas are routed along canal banks or non-residential corridors.

NTDC/Wapda’s overall policy on horizontal clearances is to keep all buildings and other obstructions out of the

ROW of a high voltage T/L. Horizontal clearance of 30 m is adopted for 220 kV and 500 kV T/L.

Four potential route alignments are being investigated in this EIA. Following the JICA guidelines, the undermentioned

routes were examined:

3.4.2 Route Option 1

Red Line:

a) The 1.9 km route starts from the Power Plant and goes straight to the Tower No. 5 of the existing 500 kV Dadu New

S/S; it has six proposed Towers, and

b) The 1.4 km route starts from the Power Plant and goes straight to the Tower No. 9 of the existing 500 kV Jamshoro

S/S; it has five proposed Towers.

Blue Line:

a) The 4.5 km route starts from the Power Plant and goes straight to the Tower No. 2 of the existing 500 kV Dadu New

S/S; it has fourteen proposed Towers, and

b) The 4.7 km route starts from the Power Plant and goes straight to the Tower No. 5 of the existing 500 kV Jamshoro

S/S; it has fourteen proposed Towers.

The proposed route option 1 is shown in Figure 3.1.

3.4.3 Route Option 2

Red Line:

a) The 2.1 km route starts from the Power Plant and goes to the Tower No. 4 of the existing 500 kV Dadu New S/S; it

has seven proposed Towers, and

b) The 1.6 km route starts from the Power Plant and goes to the Tower No. 10 of the existing 500 kV Jamshoro S/S; it

has five proposed Towers.

Blue Line:

a) The 4.8 km route starts from the Power Plant and goes to the Tower No. 1 of the existing 500 kV Dadu New S/S; it

has fourteen proposed Towers, and

b) The 4.5 km route starts from the Power Plant and goes to the Tower No. 5 of the existing 500 kV Jamshoro S/S; it

has fourteen proposed Towers.

The proposed route option 2 is shown in Figure 3.2.

Table 3.3: The Route Alignment under Option 1 (Preferred Alternative)

Route Alignment Tower LAT LONG

Red Line (1.9 km) Tower 5 (Existing) 25.711240° 68.261460°


Final Report


Table 3.3: The Route Alignment under Option 1 (Preferred Alternative)


Existing 500 kV

(Dadu New S/S)

AD-6 (Proposed) 25.709867° 68.261500°

AD-5 (Proposed) 25.708542° 68.264632°

AD-4 (Proposed) 25.707331° 68.267483°

AD-3 (Proposed) 25.706042° 68.270613°

AD-2 (Proposed) 25.704754° 68.273731°

AD-1 (Proposed) 25.703429° 68.276780°

Blue Line (4.5 km)

Existing 500 kV

(Dadu New S/S)

Tower 2 (Existing) 25.710269° 68.233925°

BD-14 (Proposed) 25.709736° 68.234359°

BD-13 (Proposed) 25.710176° 68.237145°

BD-12 (Proposed) 25.709560° 68.240596°

BD-11 (Proposed) 25.708960° 68.243886°

BD-10 (Proposed) 25.708368° 68.247183°

BD-09 (Proposed) 25.707775° 68.250496°

BD-08 (Proposed) 25.707224° 68.253652°

BD-07 (Proposed) 25.706641° 68.256970°

BD-06 (Proposed) 25.706011° 68.260433°

BD-05 (Proposed) 25.705405° 68.263797°

BD-04 (Proposed) 25.704790° 68.267042°

BD-03 (Proposed) 25.704217° 68.270363°

BD-02 (Proposed) 25.703643° 68.273695°

BD-01 (Proposed) 25.703118° 68.276769°

Blue Line (4.7 km)

Existing 500 kV

(Jamshoro S/S)

Tower 5 (Existing) 25.700533° 68.235453°

BJ-14 (Proposed) 25.704292° 68.234813°

BJ-13 (Proposed) 25.704432° 68.237588°

BJ-12 (Proposed) 25.704460° 68.240586°

BJ-11 (Proposed) 25.704594° 68.244085°

BJ-10 (Proposed) 25.704392° 68.247176°

BJ-09 (Proposed) 25.704217° 68.250280°

BJ-08 (Proposed) 25.704040° 68.253355°

BJ-07 (Proposed) 25.703808° 68.256713°

BJ-06 (Proposed) 25.703675° 68.259949°

BJ-05 (Proposed) 25.703493° 68.263163°

BJ-04 (Proposed) 25.703287° 68.266718°

BJ-03 (Proposed) 25.703084° 68.270129°

BJ-02 (Proposed) 25.702937° 68.273443°

BJ-01 (Proposed) 25.702779° 68.276730°

Red Line (1.4 km)

Existing 500 kV

(Jamshoro S/S)

Tower 9 (Existing) 25.698710° 68.265210°

AJ-5 (Proposed) 25.700123° 68.265222°

AJ-4 (Proposed) 25.700723° 68.268262°

AJ-3 (Proposed) 25.701344° 68.271343°

AJ-2 (Proposed) 25.701907° 68.274082°

AJ-1 (Proposed) 25.702408° 68.276722°


Table 3.4: The Route Alignment under Option 2


Final Report



Red Line (2.12 km)

Existing 500 kV

(Dadu New S/S)

Tower 4 (Existing) 25.713544° 68.260114°

AD-7 (Proposed) 25.712020° 68.262481°

AD-6 (Proposed) 25.710340° 68.263935°

AD-5 (Proposed) 25.708542° 68.264632°

AD-4 (Proposed) 25.707331° 68.267483°

AD-3 (Proposed) 25.706042° 68.270613°

AD-2 (Proposed) 25.704754° 68.273731°

AD-1 (Proposed) 25.703429° 68.276780°

Blue Line (4.8 km)

Existing 500 kV

(Dadu New S/S)

Tower 1 (Existing) 25.713833° 68.232553°

BD-14 (Proposed) 25.712911° 68.235881°

BD-13 (Proposed) 25.710176° 68.237145°

BD-12 (Proposed) 25.709560° 68.240596°

BD-11 (Proposed) 25.708960° 68.243886°

BD-10 (Proposed) 25.708368° 68.247183°

BD-09 (Proposed) 25.707775° 68.250496°

BD-08 (Proposed) 25.707224° 68.253652°

BD-07 (Proposed) 25.706641° 68.256970°

BD-06 (Proposed) 25.706011° 68.260433°

BD-05 (Proposed) 25.705405° 68.263797°

BD-04 (Proposed) 25.704790° 68.267042°

BD-03 (Proposed) 25.704217° 68.270363°

BD-02 (Proposed) 25.703643° 68.273695°

BD-01 (Proposed) 25.703118° 68.276769°

Blue Line (4.5 km)

Existing 500 kV

(Jamshoro S/S)

Tower 5 (Existing) 25.700533° 68.235453°

BJ-14 (Proposed) 25.702594° 68.236601°

BJ-13 (Proposed) 25.704432° 68.237588°

BJ-12 (Proposed) 25.704460° 68.240586°

BJ-11 (Proposed) 25.704594° 68.244085°

BJ-10 (Proposed) 25.704392° 68.247176°

BJ-09 (Proposed) 25.704217° 68.250280°

BJ-08 (Proposed) 25.704040° 68.253355°

BJ-07 (Proposed) 25.703808° 68.256713°

BJ-06 (Proposed) 25.703675° 68.259949°

BJ-05 (Proposed) 25.703493° 68.263163°

BJ-04 (Proposed) 25.703287° 68.266718°

BJ-03 (Proposed) 25.703084° 68.270129°

BJ-02 (Proposed) 25.702937° 68.273443°

BJ-01 (Proposed) 25.702779° 68.276730°

Red Line (1.6 km)

Existing 500 kV

(Jamshoro S/S)

Tower 10 (Existing) 25.695472° 68.265269°

AJ-5 (Proposed) 25.697723o 68.266584o

AJ-4 (Proposed) 25.700723° 68.268262°

AJ-3 (Proposed) 25.701344° 68.271343°

AJ-2 (Proposed) 25.701907° 68.274082°

AJ-1 (Proposed) 25.702408° 68.276722°



Final Report



Figure 3.1: Connection Method of 500kV T/Ls from Lakhra Power Station as Option 1 (Preferred Alternative)

Dadu New S/S

Existing 500 kV

Dadu New S/S

Existing 500 kV

Jamshoro S/S

Existing 500 kV Jamshoro S/S

Existing 500 kV


Final Report



Figure 3.2: Connection Method of 500kV T/Ls from Lakhra Power Station as Option 2

Dadu New S/S

Existing 500 kV

Dadu New S/S

Existing 500 kV

Jamshoro S/S

Existing 500 kV Jamshoro S/S

Existing 500 kV


Final Report



Figure 3.3: Tower No. 2 (Existing – Blue Line)


Figure 3.4: Tower No. 9 (Existing – Red Line)


Final Report



Figure 3.5: Tower No. 5 (Existing – Blue Line)


Figure 3.6: Tower No. 5 (Existing – Red Line)

The microenvironment of Project area also forms part of Deh Kohistan. The land here is a barren, flat to mildly hilly

tract, consisting of outlying spurs of the Kirthar Range. Cultivation is carried out wherever alluvial soil exists and near

or along the numerous depressions where rain water carried by hill streams (nallas) can be stored. Cattle grazing,

stone quarrying, gravel and sand collection and transportation, besides wood cutting are the main occupation. This

land area in the form of semi-arid/arid sand desert is also present in the upper half of the wind corridor in small

patches. The vegetative growth in this area is limited to short grasses, shrubs and scrubs along with a few drought

resistant trees. Soil cover in Deh Kohistan area is very thin due to severe wind erosion on land and soil erosion in the

drainage basin. Natural vegetation has almost disappeared from the surface plain. The soils of the area in this region

are shallow, strongly calcareous silt loam with weak structure. The slope of the stony waste land and the hilly region is

towards the syncline of river Indus and its tributaries.

There are clear evidences of deflation by wind as a common natural process in the proposed Project area. Evidence

for this process is the ubiquitous gravel covered surfaces occurring throughout Deh Kohistan (e.g. the stony wastes).

However, there is also evidence of high contemporary rates of wind erosion. This is shown by the elevated mounds of

fine sand that occur around shrubs on the Plains Unit. These mounds provide evidence of windblown sand, but they

also demonstrate that the surface has been deflated by tens of centimetres during the life of the plants.


Final Report



Figure 3.7: Plain with stone lag

The reconnaissance survey conducted by EIA Team has identified the Corridor of Impact (CoI) that corresponds with

the routing followed by the existing linear infrastructure and maintains the flexibility within such range as to adjust

infrastructure siting and alignment of the TL to avoid/minimize potential impacts on the microenvironment of the CoI.

The above routes were identified by JICA Survey Team (technical and environmental) and the EIA Team based on the

criteria listed below:

o The minimization of visual impacts, especially over high terrain such as hills and mountains;

o Optimizing alignments over difficult terrain, providing sufficient space for the supporting towers;

o As far as possible, the avoidance of sudden changes in topography and altitude;

o The avoidance of unstable geological and soil areas with potential slip zones and other forms of substrate

instability.

o Avoidance of areas with a high potential for erosion and overgrazed areas with fragile soils.

Avoidance of sensitive bird areas including foraging, nesting and roosting sites.

o Avoidance of sensitive natural areas including protected areas, nature reserves and wildlife areas.

o The avoidance of wetlands including rivers, streams, and seepages.

o Avoidance, where possible, of human habitation, including farm houses, rural homesteads, tourist destinations,

places of religious worship, educational facilities, health facilities, settlements, villages and towns.

o Avoidance of sand mining areas


Final Report


3.5 Screening of Environmental & Social Aspects of Alternatives

The screening process has adopted a sampling scaling procedure to estimate the environmental and social

acceptability of the two alternatives T/L routes: Option 1 and Option 2. For evaluation of severity Numerals of +3, +2,

+1 have been assigned for major, moderate and minor positive impact, respectively, while numerals –3, –2 and –1

were assigned to negative impacts. The numeral “0” was assigned to unaffected aspects, meaning thereby that the

route has no significant impact from the Project activity.

The potential environmental aspects of establishment of the T/L have been identified for the different stages of the

Project and the evaluation summarized in following Table.

Table 3.5: Assessment of Environmental & Social Impacts Related to T/L in the Project Area

S.# Environmental & Social Issues T/L Route Assessment

Option 1 Option 2

1 Environmental aspects due to project location at pre-construction stage

Impediment to movement of

wildlife/livestock/people

0 0 -

Encroachment into Wetland 0 0 -

Special area protecting biodiversity 0 0 -

Incidence of natural hazards -2 -2 No difference. Birds striking the lines and other

impacts are expected to be of little significance.

Impairment of natural habitats 0 0 -

Important Bird Area (IBA) 0 0 -

Stream bed erosion -1 -2 Construction activities for the T/L including

installation of towers, construction of new

access roads and cleaning of tower bases have

the potential to cause soil erosion and

landslides. Option 2 route includes stream bed.

Wind erosion -1 -1 No difference. Strong wind will have some

impacts on the tower bases.

Heat Stress -3 -3 No difference. There is strong likelihood of

sunlight causing heat stress to workers during

summer season. The project corridor is barren

and no vegetative cover is available.

Land Acquisition 0 0 -

Involuntary Resettlement 0 0 -

Archaeological and historical

resources

0 0 -

Cultural Concerns -1 -1 There is possibility that Physical Cultural

Resource sites exists in the project area.

TOTAL -8 -9

2 Environmental Impacts Associated With Construction Stage

Clearing of Right of Way (ROW) 0 0 -

Construction of Access Road -1 -2 To bring the construction materials, access

roads are needed. In case there is no

appropriate road, some construction works are

required. Option 2 requires more access roads

than Option 1.

Resource Utilization -1 -2 Construction works of tower base requires

gravels. Option 2 requires more materials more

than Option 1.

Transportation of Material -1 -2 Option 2 requires more materials than Option 1.

Waste Generation -1 -2 Option 2 with one more tower generates more

wastes than Option 1.

Air pollution due to movement of

vehicles and machinery

-1 -2 Road condition of Option 2 is worse than that of

Option 1.

Noise and vibration due to -1 -1 No difference


Final Report


Table 3.5: Assessment of Environmental & Social Impacts Related to T/L in the Project Area

S.# Environmental & Social Issues T/L Route Assessment

Option 1 Option 2

movement of heavy machinery

Deterioration of surface water

quality due to sanitary wastes from

workers camps

-1 -1 No difference

Disruption of traffic for prolonged

period due to movement of heavy

machinery

0 0 -

Sewage and solid waste disposal

from work sites

-1 -2 Option 2 has more work sites than Option 1.

Damage to land use 0 0 -

Loss of standing crops / trees 0 0 -

Short-term soil erosion and silt run-

off due to construction activities

-1 -2 The geological condition of Option 2 has more

hill and valley which might bring about more

soil erosion and silt run-off during construction

activities.

Pollution of surface water by

dumping of construction wastes

-1 -1 No difference

Risk of oil spills from vehicles and

machinery

-1 -1 No difference

Vulnerability to seismic shocks -1 -1 No difference

Vulnerability to Floods -2 -2 No difference

Jobs during construction +3 +3 No difference

TOTAL -14

+3

-21

+3

3 Environmental Aspects Related To Project Operation Stage

Impact on airway 0 0 -

Electric and Magnetic Fields -1 -1 No difference

Impact on migratory bird flyways -1 -1 No difference

Operation and maintenance (O&M)

of T/L

-1 -1 No difference

Landscape and scenic values of

ROW

-1 -1 No difference

Operation and maintenance (O&M)

cost of Transmission system

-1 -1 No difference

Reliability and stability of electric

supply

+3 +3 No difference

Jobs during operation +1 +1 No difference

TOTAL -5

+4

-5

+4

GRAND TOTAL -20 -28


3.6 Conclusion

Selection of the preferred alternative is based on the severity of impact of a range of environmental and social aspects.

The severity has been quantified by a sampling scaling procedure according to which the route option 1 is the

preferred alternative. It has a short route, is cost effective and has least environmental and social footprint. Such being

the case it is conforms to the sustainability principles. The proposed route is recommended since it is environment

friendly as impacts are minor and case be properly addressed by taking appropriate mitigation measures.


Final Report


Blue Line – 4.5 km – Connected to Tower No. 02

Tower No. 2 (Existing)

Coordinates N25.71082, E068.23331

Elevation 135m

Tower No. BD-14 (Proposed)

Elevation 132m

Vegetation Very Poor

Topography Slope

Surface Condition Fragmented Limestone


Figures 3.8: Towers No.2 (Existing) and BD-14 (Proposed)


Final Report




Elevation 123m

Vegetation No Vegetation

Topography Slope

Surface Condition Calcarious silty lome with pieces of limestone


Elevation 109m


Topography Slope



Figures 3.9: Towers BD-13 (Proposed) and BD-14 (Proposed)


Final Report




Elevation 107m


Topography Slope



Elevation 105m


Topography Slope





Final Report




Elevation 95m

Vegetation Very poor

Topography Slope



Elevation 83m


Topography Slope





Final Report




Elevation 72m


Topography Slope



Elevation 62m


Topography Slope





Final Report




Elevation 62m


Topography Slope



Elevation 54m


Topography Slope





Final Report




Elevation 47m


Topography Slope



Elevation 47m


Topography Slope





Final Report




Elevation 49m


Topography Slope



Figures 3.15: Towers BD-01 (Proposed)


Final Report


Red Line – 1.9 km – Connected to Tower No. 05


Coordinates N25.71097,E068.26106

Elevation 54m

Tower No. AD-06 (Proposed)

Elevation 55m


Topography Slope



Figures 3.16: Towers No.5 (Existing) and AD-06 (Proposed)


Final Report




Elevation 53m


Topography Slope



Elevation 52m


Topography Slope



Figures 3.17: Towers AD-05 (Proposed) and AD-04 (Proposed)


Final Report




Elevation 47m


Topography Slope

Surface Condition Fly Ash


Elevation 46m


Topography Slope



Figures 3.18: Towers AD-03 (Proposed) and AD-02 (Proposed)


Final Report




Elevation 49m


Topography Slope



Figures 3.19: Tower AD-01 (Proposed)


Final Report





Elevation 137m

Tower No. BJ-14 (Proposed)

Elevation 137m


Topography Slope



Figures 3.20: Towers No.5 (Existing) and BJ-14 (Proposed)


Final Report




Elevation 136m


Topography Slope



Elevation 128m


Topography Slope



Figures 3.21: Towers BJ-13 (Proposed) and BJ-12 (Proposed)


Final Report




Elevation 119m


Topography Slope



Elevation 108m


Topography Slope





Final Report




Elevation 100m


Topography Slope



Elevation 103m


Topography Flat





Final Report




Elevation 86m


Topography Slope



Elevation 79m


Topography Slope





Final Report




Elevation 66m


Topography Slope

Surface Condition Gravel


Elevation 57m


Topography Slope





Final Report




Elevation 51m


Topography Slope



Elevation 46m


Topography Slope





Final Report




Elevation 49m


Topography Slope



Figures 3.27: Tower BJ-01 (Proposed)


Final Report





Elevation 55m

Tower No. AJ-05 (Proposed)

Elevation 54m


Topography Slope



Figures 3.28: Towers No.9 (Existing) and AJ-05 (Proposed)


Final Report




Elevation 48m


Topography Slope



Elevation 49m


Topography Slope

Surface Condition Sly Ash


Figures 3.29: Towers AJ-04 (Proposed) and AJ-03 (Proposed)


Final Report




Elevation 48m


Topography Slope



Elevation 49m


Topography Flat



Figures 3.30: Towers AJ-02 (Proposed) and AJ-01 (Proposed)


Final Report

Environmental Management Consultants (EMC) Chapter – 4: Project Description Page 1 of 52

Chapter 4 Project Description

This section describes the description of the project including the technical specifications, methodology for undertaking

the Transmission Lines laying works and the necessary procedures to be followed per applicable guidelines and

standards.

4.1 Materials & Standards

All materials shall be of the highest grade, free from defects and imperfections, of recent manufacture and unused,

shall have suitable corrosion resistant characteristics and of the classification and grades designated, conforming to

the requirements of the latest issue of the appropriate specifications cited herein. All necessary tests shall be

performed to ensure that technical requirements are fulfilled.

Unless otherwise specified in these Specifications or in the drawings, the Contractor shall conform to the applicable

requirements of the latest revisions of the following standards or equivalent as approved by the Project Manager. The

latest applicable standards shall be those which are enforced thirty (30) days prior to the date of Bid opening and the

same shall be provided on request of the Engineer.

4.1.1 Tower Steel

o ASTM A6: General Requirements for Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling and Bars for Structural use.

o ASTM A36: Standard Specification for Structural Steel.

o ASTM A572: Grade 60 Standard Specification for High Strength Low-Alloy Columbium Vanadium Steels of

Structural Quality.

o EN 10025: EURONORM Standard Specification for Structural Steel; Rolled Steel, Steel Sheets and Plates etc.

o ASTM A123: Zinc (Hot Galvanized) coatings on products fabricated from rolled, pressed, and forged steel shapes,

plates, bars and strip.

o ASTM A143: Safe-guarding against embrittlement of hot-dip galvanized structural steel products and procedure

for detecting embrittlement.

o ASTM A563M: Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.

o ASTM A153: Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.

o ASTM A239: Standard Method of Test for Locating the Thinnest Spot in Zinc (Galvanized) Coating on Iron or

Steel Articles by the Preece Test (Copper Sulphate Dip).

o ASTM A325: High-strength bolts for structural steel joints including suitable nuts and plain hardened washers.

o ASTM A370: Standard test methods and definitions for mechanical testing of steel products.

o ASTM A384: Standard practice for safe-guarding against warpage and distortion during Hot dip Galvanizing of

Steel Assemblies.

o ASTM A394: Standard specification for Steel Transmission Tower Bolts, Zinc-coated and Bare.

o ASTM F436: Standard specification for hardware steel washers.

o ASTM B201: Chromatic treatment test.

o ASTM E 94: Radiographic Testing.

o ASTM E109: Dry powder magnetic particle inspection.

o ISO 898-1: Mechanical Properties of Fasteners made of carbon steel and alloy steel.

o DIN 267: Fasteners technical delivery conditions steel spring washers for bolt/nut assemblies.

o DIN 7990: Hexagon head bolts for structural steel bolting for supply with nut.

o DIN 555: M5 to M100 x 6 hexagon nuts.

o DIN 127: Spring lock washers with square ends or tang ends.

o DIN 128: Spring lock washers curved and wave.

o ASCE Manual No. 74: “Guidelines for Transmission Line Structural Loading” prepared and published by the

American Society of Civil Engineers in 2010 (3rd Edition).


Final Report


o ASCE Standard 10-97: “Design of Latticed Steel Transmission Structures”.

4.1.2 Conductor and Shield wire

o ASTM A90: Standard Method of Test for Weight of Coating on Zinc Coated (galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles.

o ASTM A153: Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.

o ASTM B230: Standard Specification for Aluminum Wire, EC-H19 for Electrical Purposes.

o ASTM B232: Standard Specification for Aluminum Conductor Concentric-Lay-Stranded Coated Steel Reinforced

(ACSR).



o ASTM A363: Standard Specification for Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Steel Overhead Ground Wire Strand.

o ASTM B398: Standard Specification for Aluminum Alloy 6201-T81 Wire for Electrical purpose.

o ASTM B399: Standard Specification for concentrically stranded Aluminum Alloy 6201-T81 conductors.

o ASTM B498: Standard Specification for Zinc Coated Galvanized Steel Core Wire for Aluminum Conductors Steel

Reinforced (ACSR).

o IEC-61089: Round wire concentric lay overhead electrical stranded conductors.

o IEC-61395: Overhead electrical conductors – creep test procedures for stranded conductors

o Standard Method of Stress-Strain Testing of Aluminum Conductor and ACSR prepared by the Aluminum

Association.

4.1.3 OPGW and Associated Hardware

o ITU-T G.652: Characteristics of a single-mode optical fiber cable

o ITU-T G.654: Characteristics of a cut-off shifted single-mode optical fiber cable

o IEC 60793: Optical fibers

o IEC 60794: Optical fiber cables

o EIA 598A: Color coding of optical fibers

o ASTM B415: Standard specification for hard-drawn Aluminum-clad steel wires

o ASTM B416: Standard specification for hard-drawn aluminum-clad steel wires

o ASTM B398: Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 201Aluminum-alloy 6201-T81 Wire for Electrical

Purposes

o IEEE Std 1138: Construction of Composite Fiber Optic Overhead Ground Wire (OPGW) for use on Electric Utility

Power Lines

o IEC 61300-2-36: Fiber Optic Interconnection Devices & Passive component-Basic Test and Measurement

Procedures – Part 2-36: Tests-Flammability (Fire hazards)

o IEC 60068-2-14: Joint boxes/hardware fittings

o EN 60529: Protection class of cabinets/cubicles

4.1.4 Insulators and Hardware

o ASTM A47: Specifications for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings.

o ASTM A143: Standard Recommended practice for safeguard against embrittlement of Hot-dip Galvanized

Structural Steel Products and Procedure for Detecting Embrittlement.

o ASTM A153: Standard Specification for Zinc coating (Hot dip) on Iron & Steel Hardware.

o ASTM A220: Specifications for Pearlitic Malleable Iron Castings.

o ASTM A384: Standard practice for safeguarding against warpage and distortion during Hot-dip Galvanizing of

Steel Assemblies.




Final Report


o ASTM A536: Specifications for Ductile Iron Casting.

o ASTM A668: Specifications for Steel Forgings, Carbon and Alloy, for general industrial use.

o ASTM C151: Test Method for Autoclave Expansion of Portland Cement.

o ANSI C29.1: American National Standard Test Methods for Electrical Power Insulators.

o ANSI C29.2: American National Standard for Wet Process Porcelain and toughened Glass Insulators.

o IEC 575: Thermal mechanical performance test and mechanical performance test on string insulator units.

o IEC 61284: Overhead Lines – Requirements and Tests for fittings.

o BS 3288: Insulators and Conductor fittings for overhead power lines Part I. Performance and General

Requirements.

o IEC 61467: Insulators for overhead lines – Insulator strings and sets for lines with a normal voltage greater than

1000V-AC power arc tests.

o IEC 60437: Radio Interference Test on High Voltage Insulators

o Other relevant ANSI, ASTM and IEC standards.

4.1.5 Accessories and Dampers

o ASTM A153: Standard Specification for Zinc coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.

o ASTM A164: Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Steel.



o ASTM D1149: Standard Test Method for Rubber Deterioration - Surface Ozone Cracking in a Chamber.

o ANSI B.1.1: "Unified Screw Threads" class 2A.

o U.S Military Specifications MIL A-8025 C.

o IEEE Paper No. 31 TP 65-156: Recommended Method of IEEE Task Force on Conductor Vibration.

o IEEE Paper T74 061.8: Decay Test Evaluation

o IEEE Paper 31 TP 65-707: An Investigation of the Forces of Bundle Conductor Spacers under Fault Conditions.

o CISPR 18-1 (Part 1): Radio interference characteristics of overhead power lines and high voltage equipment.

o CISPR 18-2 (Part 2): Methods of measurement and procedure for determining limits.

o CISPR 18-3 (Part 3): Code of practice for minimizing the generation of radio noise.

o IEC 61284: Overhead Lines – Requirements and Tests for fittings.

o BS3288: Insulators and Conductor fittings for overhead power lines Part I. Performance and General

Requirements.

o IEC 61897: Overhead Lines – Requirements and Tests for stock bridge type Aeolian vibration dampers.

o IEC 61854: Overhead Lines – Requirements and Tests for spacers.

o IEC 60437: Radio Interference Test on High Voltage Insulators.

o IEEE 1368-2006: IEEE Guide for Aeolian Vibration Field Measurement of Overhead Conductors

o Other relevant IEEE, IEC and ASTM Standards.

4.1.6 Transmission Line Construction

o ASTM A615: Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

o ASTM C33: Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates

o ASTM C39: Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.

o ASTM C150: Standard Specification for Portland Cement.

o ASTM D1556: Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in-place by Sand Cone Method.

o ASTM D1557: Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of soil Using Modified Effort.

o ASTM D1586: Standard Penetration Test

o ASTM C989: Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag for use in concrete and mortars.

o ASTM C494: Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.


Final Report


o ACI Building Code: Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete (ACI-318M, latest edition) and

Commentary (ACI 318RM, latest edition).

4.2 Cleaning and Galvanizing

All fabricated structural steel material and ferrous components shall be cleaned of rust, loose scale, dirt, oil, grease

and other foreign substances, after the shop work has been completed. Unless otherwise specified or directed, all

material, including bolts, nuts and washers shall be hot-dip galvanized, in accordance with the relevant ASTM

Specifications, after all shop work is completed except that nuts shall be re-tapped after galvanizing, and threads of

nuts left bare.

All structural steel shapes shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123.

The coating shall be clean, smooth and free from defects. Bare spots, loosely attached spelter, unevenness of coating,

and globules which may be broken in handling, will be cause for rejection by the Inspector.

If more than 5% of the galvanized material is rejected, galvanizing shall be stopped and the process altered so that

satisfactory work will be produced.

During galvanizing, the Inspector will carry out such tests on the coating and analysis of the spelter as he may

consider necessary.

The Preece Test will also be included in these tests which will be carried out in accordance with ASTM Specification

A239 latest edition but the required number of dips will be six (6).

All tower material shall, prior to shipping, be dipped in a suitable solution such as Sodium Bi Chromate to protect the

galvanizing from "white rust" corrosion during transit. Full details of the treatment proposed shall be submitted to the

Project Manager for Approval. The effectiveness of the treatment shall be verified in accordance with ASTMB201.

All fabricated structural steel and plates that have been warped by the galvanizing process shall be straightened by

being re-rolled or pressed. The material shall not be hammered or otherwise straightened in a manner that will injure

the protective coating. If in the opinion of the Project Manager, the material has been harmfully warped or bent in the

process of fabrication or galvanizing, such defects will be cause for rejection.

Material on which galvanizing has been damaged shall be redipped. Any member on which the galvanized coating

becomes damaged after having been dipped twice shall be rejected.

4.2.1 Galvanizing of Nut, Bolts and Washers

The galvanizing of nuts, bolts and washers shall be in accordance with ASTM A153. Bolts shall be galvanized in such

a manner that the Zinc in the threads will not interfere with the application of the nut. Re-threading of bolt threads after

galvanizing will not be permitted.

4.3 Inspection

The Contractor's inspector shall include, but not necessarily limit his duties to the following:

4.3.1 Material

The Contractor shall:

� Work only to those specifications provided herein and/or as specified by the Project Manager.

� Inspect the following materials for both quality and dimensions.


Final Report


o Structural steel

o Sheet steel

o Nut and bolts

o Washers and fillers

o Conductor

o Overhead EHS shield wire and OPGW along with associated equipment and hardware

o Insulators, Hardware & Grounding Material

o Conductor & Shield wire Accessories

o Dampers for Conductor, EHS Shield wire and OPGW

o Check and remit to the Project Manager certified copies of the mill sheets covering the total quantity of the

above applicable material.

4.3.2 Fabrication & Manufacturing Process

The Contractor shall:

� Work only to drawings and specifications approved by the Project Manager.

� Be responsible for ascertaining that all fabrication is carried out in compliance with the following:

o Exact shop drawing dimensions and notes

o The appropriate specifications

o Good shop practice

o Bending according to Clause 2.1.3.2 for tower steel herein

o Member markings, corresponding to those shown on the detail drawings, are clearly stamped on each

individual member.

o Galvanizing in accordance with the ASTM standards.

� Inspect the fabrication for all the foregoing items, (a) to (e) of A(ii) before galvanizing, and check that no further

fabrication is carried out after galvanizing where dissimilar metals are used, suitable precautions shall be taken at

the metal interface to prevent electrolytic corrosion.

� Casting of ferrous materials is not permitted, except for components not subject to stress.

� All ferrous components which have been cold formed & forged shall be normalized or otherwise heat treated to

relieve stresses before galvanizing, if applicable.

� Threads may be either cut or rolled except that the threads of ferrous bolts which are to be installed with a given

torque value shall be rolled after galvanizing.

� Necessary precautions shall be taken to prevent embrittlement of ferrous components, as specified in ASTM

A143 & A384.

Periodically check the galvanizing against the appropriate specification requirements, which include the testing of the

galvanizing bond by the use of the Chisel-faced hammer.

4.3.3 Electrical Requirements

� The corona extinction voltage shall not be less than 346 kV line to ground. All energized hardware assemblies

shall be corona free at this voltage.

� All energized hardware shall be designed and constructed so that the potential difference between the conductors

and any part of energized hardware will not exceed 300 V.

� If the Manufacturer cannot show, to the satisfaction of the Project Manager, that the materials have been

previously subjected to corona testing to the levels specified, then the Manufacturer shall submit to the Project

Manager a proposal for corona testing. Following the Project Manager’s approval of the Manufacturer's proposed

test program, the Manufacturer shall carry out these tests and if required shall modify his design so that the

requirements are all met at no expense to the Employer.


Final Report


4.3.4 Testing and Quality Control

� It shall be the Manufacturer's responsibility to provide and perform all the inspection and testing necessary to

ensure compliance with these specifications.

� Quality surveillance will be provided by the Project Manager or his authorized representative (hereinafter called

"the Inspector").

� The Inspector shall have free access to those parts of the Manufacturer's Works that concern the manufacturing

of this material at all times while work on this Contract is being performed. The Manufacturer shall provide the

Inspector, with all reasonable facilities to enable him to be satisfied that the material is being furnished in

accordance with these specifications.

� The Inspector shall have the authority to ask any additional testing or inspection he considers necessary in order

to ensure compliance with the specifications and drawings.

� The Inspector's decision for acceptance or rejection of any work shall be final.

4.4 Steel Towers

4.4.1 Type of Towers

All the Towers will be self-supporting type, lattice steel structures, fabricated from galvanized structural steel shapes.

The steel employed will be in accordance with the latest edition of the following standards:

� EN 10025: EURONORM Standard Specifications for Structural Steel, Rolled Steel, Steel Sheets and Plates etc;

� ASTM A36: Standards Specifications for Structural Steel; and,

� ASTM A572: Grade 60 Standard Specifications for High Strength Low-alloy Colimibium-Vanadium Steels for

Structural Quality.

All Towers will be equipped with danger plates, number plates and anti-climbing devices.

The proposed tower types are shown in figure 4.1, 4.2 & 4.3.

Table 4.1 presents the tower utilization data.

Table 4.1: Tower Utilization Data

Tower Height (Meters)

Type Height

Large Angle Type/Heavy Angle Type 37.230 m

Light Angle Type/Tension Type 37.230 m

Suspension Type 39.105 m


Proposed towers are listed in Table 4.2.

Table 4.2: Proposed Tower Alignment

Tower LAT LONG Elevation Types

Red Line-a

No.AD-1 25.703429° 68.261460° 49m Light Angle/Tension Type

No.AD-2 25.704754° 68.261500° 46m Suspension Type




No.AD-6 25.709867° 68.276780° 57m Large Angle/Heavy Angle Type


Final Report


Table 4.2: Proposed Tower Alignment

Tower LAT LONG Elevation Types

Red Line-b

No.AJ-1 25.702408° 68.276722° 49m Light Angle/Tension Type

No.AJ-2 25.701907° 68.274082° 48m Suspension Type



No.AJ-5 25.700123° 68.265222° 55m Large Angle/Heavy Angle Type

Blue line-a

No.BD-1 25.703118° 68.276769° 50m Light Angle/Tension Type

No.BD-2 25.703643° 68.273695° 53m Suspension Type












No.BD-14 25.709736° 68.234359° 144m Large Angle/Heavy Angle Type

Blue line-b

No.BJ-1 25.702779° 68.276730° 48m Light Angle/Tension Type

No.BJ-2 25.702937° 68.273443° 48m Suspension Type












No.BJ-14 25.704292° 68.234813° 136m Large Angle/Heavy Angle Type


Environmental Impact Assessment of proposed 500 kV Transmission Lines for Lakhra Coal Fired Thermal Power Plan Construction Project

Final Report



Figure 4.1: 500kV Transmission System: Large Angle Type/Heavy Angle Type


Final Report



Figure 4.2: 500kV Transmission System: Light Angle Type/Tension Type


Final Report



Figure 4.3: 500kV Transmission System: Suspension Type



4.4.2 Connection Details

The connection details for insulator hardware, EHS shield wire & OPGW hardware shall be similar to the typical details

shown on the drawings. Holes for moving parts shall be drilled and chamfered unless otherwise specified. Such holes

shall have adequate bearing area and in addition to the normal edge distance shall have an extra 6.5 mm edge

distance to provide for wear.

Details of holes for danger signs, number signs, phase plates, aerial markers, grounding and anticlimbing devices

shall be in accordance with Specification Drawings.

4.4.3 Structural Steel

All rolled steel sections, plates shall be supplied in accordance with latest edition of ASTM A572 Grade 60 High

Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Steel of Structural quality, EN10025 S355J2 and ASTM-A36. In addition to

requirements specified herein and in the relevant standards, the offered steel shall withstand the following bend test

requirements. However, procedure of bend test requirement shall be followed as per ASTM A370.

Type of Steel Thickness of Material Ratio of bend dia. to thickness of

specimen at 180o

Mild Steel For all thickness 1.5

High tensile steel Up to 25 mm 1.5

Over 25 mm 2.0

For the fabrication of the towers, the Contractor may propose the use of any steel, provided that the proposed steel

have characteristics and properties equal to or better than those listed for steel mentioned in the specifications.

4.4.4 Nut, Bolts and Washers

� For all types of towers, all connections shall be secured by bolts, nuts, plain and spring washers.

� Hexagonal head bolts and hexagonal nuts shall be used. Only one plain and one spring washer per bolt shall be

used.

� Bolts shall be designed for only bearing and shear and the shank of all bolts except U-bolts shall extend

completely through all connected members. When in position bolts shall project through the corresponding nuts

neither less than 2 thread lengths nor greater than 10 mm. Members shall not bear on thread. Washers shall be

used under all nuts. Bolts shall be free from fins, scale or other defects and the head shall be concentric and

square with the shank. The diameter of the shank shall be full nominal size of the bolts. The ends shall be sharp

and clean and of the proper contour.

� All U-bolts shall be threaded for a sufficient length to take two standard nuts plus member and washer

thicknesses.

� Step bolts shall be provided.

� Nuts shall be of sufficient height to develop the full strength of the bolt. Threads must not be torn or ragged and

shall be of proper contour. The nuts shall fit the bolts after they have been galvanized so that they can be started

and threaded by hand for the full length of the bolt thread.

� The fit of the nut on to the bolt shall be such that no rocking of the nut will occur.

� Nut and bolt of the same size shall be interchangeable. The bolt related dimensions for fabrication can be referred

from DIN 7990 and nut according to DIN 555. The length of bolts shall be calculated to accommodate the

thickness of one plain and one spring washer.

� Material of bolts and nuts shall conform to ASTM A325 and/or ISO 898 standards.

� The dimensions and material of plain washers (circular) shall be according to ASTM F436.

� The dimensions and material of spring lock washers shall be according to DIN127 and 128.

� At least 5% surplus of bolts, nuts and washers shall be supplied to cope with losses and future maintenance.



� The fabricated material shall not have physical properties inferior to those specified.

� Bolt hole diameter shall not exceed the nominal diameter of the fastener plus 1.5 mm.

� Ring fillers for the towers to be supplied in accordance with the dimensions given in the drawing No.

3206/169/TD/01F203. The material of ring filler shall conform to the properties of mild steel as per ASTM A36.

� The minimum edge distance of bolts shall be as follows:

o Minimum Edge Distance: The minimum edge distances measured from the centre of the bolt hole to the end

of the member shall be as follows:

� For Compression Members: One and one-half bolt diameters.

� For Tension Members: In an end connection of not more than three bolts the end distance shall not be less than

that given in (a) above or the following quantity, whichever is greater.

Minimum Bolt Diameter Minimum Edge Distance

Rolled Edge Sheared & Mechanical Guided

16 mm 19 mm 24 mm

20 mm 26 mm 30 mm

24 mm 30 mm 38 mm

� For gusset plates one and one-half bolt diameter.

� Minimum spacing of bolts shall be as follows:

Bolt Diameter Minimum Bolt Spacing

16 mm 35 mm

20 mm 45 mm

24 mm 55 mm

4.4.5 Workmanship

The workmanship and finish throughout shall be of a quality equal to the best that is known to the art at the present

time for this class of work. All work shall be carefully and accurately performed.

Members shall be cut to jig and holes shall be drilled or punched to jig. All holes shall be cylindrical and perpendicular

to the member. Where necessary to avoid distortion of holes close to the points of bends, the holes shall be made

after bending.

Fabricated steel work shall be in accordance with the drawings, and drilling, punching, cutting and bending shall be

carefully and accurately performed to prevent any possibility of irregularities occurring which might introduce difficulty

in the erection of towers or result in straining or distortion of the parts thereof.

4.4.6 Bending

Tower members which are cold bent shall be normalized before galvanizing. Hot bending is preferred. The heating

shall be done in an oven, so that the member is uniformly heated to a distance of approximately 150 mm either side of

the bend point. Proper heat treating procedures shall be used in order to preserve the original physical properties of

the metal. Bending of thick members shall be done in a hydraulic press with a suitable die to prevent buckling of an

unrestrained leg. This process shall not be done under quick impact but through a slow moving press.

4.4.7 Punching & Drilling

Punching and drilling shall be done by methods designed to ensure accuracy. The center of any hole shall not vary

more than 1.5 mm from its position neither shall the center to center distance of end holes in a group of holes vary by

more than 1.5 mm. Plugging and welding of drilled holes shall not be permitted.



Drills, punches and dies shall be sharp and true, and holes shall be round, true to size, and free from ragged edges

and burrs.

Bolt holes shall have diameter 1.5 mm larger than the nominal diameter of the bolt.

It is preferable to have fabrication, punching and drilling carried out by means of a modern computer program

technique.

All holes in material over 19.0 mm in thickness shall either be drilled or sub-drilled and reamed.

For high tensile steel (yield point equal or greater than 35 kg/mm²) holes shall be directly drilled at the definitive

diameter or punched and reamed out. The difference between the punched and reamed diameter shall be at the

minimum 4mm.

The die for all sub-punched holes, and the drill for sub-drilled holes, shall be at least 1.5 mm smaller than the diameter

of the bolt. Drifting to enlarge holes shall not be permitted.

4.4.8 Welding

Welding of structure members, filling or plugging of defective parts and mispunched holes shall not be permitted in

tower fabrication. When holes are mispunched so that the net section of a member is decreased, the member shall be

discarded. However, if welding cannot be avoided and is required in certain structure components, such as for

rigging/attachment plates, prior written approval shall be obtained. In such cases welding procedures shall comply with

ANSI/AWS D1.1M standards. Special care shall be taken regarding seal welding to assure proper galvanizing and to

avoid acid “bleeding” at pockets in structural assemblies.

4.4.9 General Requirements for Fabrication

The towers shall be fabricated having members’ sizes according to the approved drawings. No angle substitution shall

be allowed for main leg and cross arm members and stubs. However member substitution for other tower members

and redundant or secondary members may be allowed with the prior approval of the Project Manager. In such a case

the total number of member substitution would not exceed three (3).

4.4.10 Allowance for Galvanizing

Allowance shall be made in gauge dimensions for the thickness of galvanizing and the possible formation of spelter

fillets inside the angles so as to allow adequate erection clearance after galvanizing.

4.4.11 Blocking

Blocking of outer legs of angles will not be permitted.

4.4.12 Angle Laps

Where angles are lap spliced, the heel of the inside angle shall be chamfered to clear the fillet of the outside angle.

4.4.13 Marking

All structural members shall be marked with the correct designation shown on the shop drawing. Marking shall be

done by stamping the members prior to galvanizing with numerals or letters of 12mm minimum height, and shall be

clearly legible after galvanizing.



4.4.14 Tolerances

Ease of assembling the structure in the field is of utmost importance. The structure shall be so manufactured that all

members carrying the same mark shall be interchangeable when assembled. The structure shall fit without undue

pressing and no reaming or drifting of holes shall be required. When erected, the structures shall not deviate from the

vertical by more than 1/300 ratio.

The Manufacturer shall be responsible for the correct fitting of all parts and shall replace free of cost any defective

materials discovered during erection and shall pay all costs of the correction in the field of any errors not previously

discovered.

The permissible variation from dimensions for structural size steel shapes shall not exceed the prescribed limits in

ASTM A6.

4.4.15 Drawings

The Manufacturer will be supplied the drawings indicating various dimensions, angle sizes used, sizes of bolts used,

type of steel and various standards/process to be followed for fabrication and galvanizing of the structure.

After approval of contract, the Manufacturer shall submit for approval, the following drawings.

a) Shop Details Drawings:

The detailed drawings shall show shop details including dimensions, shearing, punching, bevel cutting, bending

and identification mark and weight for each member.

b) Erection Drawings:

Erection drawings shall show the complete assembly of the structure indicating clearly the positioning of the

members. Each member shall be piece-marked and the number and lengths of bolts shall be given for each

connection. Shop details may be shown either by assembled sections (in place) or piece by piece (knocked

down)

c) Footing Installation Drawings:

Footing erection drawings showing each member with its identification mark, number and size of connection bolts

and all dimensions required for the proper setting and positioning of stub angle footings with relation to the centre

of the structure.

d) Bills of Material:

Bills of material for each tower shall show the quantity, type, size, length; weight and assembly mark for each

member, including bolts, washers, plates and all fittings complete for each structure.

e) Outline Drawing:

The Manufacturer shall prepare single line diagram from the detailed drawings shall show the complete

information like dimensions and member, angle sizes.

4.4.16 Sign Plates

All the plates i.e. danger sign, number & phase plates and aerial markers shall be baked ceramic surfaces on high

grade steel base plates of minimum thickness of 1.5 mm except aerial marker plate which shall be of 3.0 mm

thickness. The fabrication details and dimensions of the plates are shown on the drawing Nos.3206/169/TD/01E206 &

207.

The plates shall be painted with ceramic paint on both sides and they shall be thoroughly cleaned before painting and

the ceramic paint shall completely cover the front and back of the plates and also the edges of plates and the interior



edges of the attachment holes. The ceramic paint shall be of even thickness, reasonably free from cracks, patches,

pin holes, blisters and shall have a uniform gloss. The ceramic paint around the holes shall be protected by means of

fiber washers.

Three coats of ceramic paint shall be applied on the danger sign and number plates. The first coating of black ceramic

paint shall be applied on both sides of the plates. The other two coats of white ceramic paint shall be applied on the

front side of the danger & number plates and yellow on aerial marker plates.

In case of phase plates, three coats of ceramic paint shall be applied. The first coat of black ceramic paint shall be

applied on both sides. The other two coats of red, yellow and blue color shall be applied as specified on both side of

the plate.

Nos. of bolts, nuts, washers and fixtures where required shall be supplied with each plate as shown in the drawings.

Bolts, nuts and washers to be supplied with the fixture shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153.

4.4.17 Barbed Wire

Material, dimensions and testing of the barbed wire shall be in accordance with ASTM A121.

The size and characteristics of the zinc coated barbed wire shall be as per design number 12-2-4-14R, Type Z with

Class 3 coating.

4.4.18 Tests for Tower Steel, Associated Hardware and Accessories

The Manufacturer shall select two samples from each heat to carry out the following tests to satisfy him that the

products comply with the specifications.

(a) For Sections and Plates

1. Chemical composition (Ladle Analysis)

2. Tensile Tests

3. Bend Tests

(b) For Nuts and Bolts

1. Proof Load test

2. Ultimate Tensile Strength test

3. Ultimate tensile strength test under eccentric load

4. Cold bend test

5. Hardness test

6. Galvanizing test

(c) For Washers and Ring Fillers

1. Hardness test

2. Galvanizing test

The Manufacturer shall maintain a record of tests carried out by him for examination by Inspector.

4.5 Optical Fibre Equipment

These Technical Specifications pertain to the following:

o Optical Fiber Ground Wire (OPGW)



o Joint Boxes

o Test Equipment, Installation and Maintenance Tools

o Fiber Optic Cable

In the following sections, technical specifications for each of the above items are given:

4.5.1 General

The OPGW, installed on the transmission line towers, shall be designed to withstand the prevailing environmental

conditions including the effects of high electric and magnetic fields produced in the proximity of live power conductors.

The design of OPGW shall be mechanically and electrically compatible with the design of the transmission line. The

OPGW shall be able to withstand the system fault current and lightning current without irreversible degradation of the

optical properties of the fibers.

The stringing of OPGW shall be similar to conventional earth wires (bending radius, tension forces) and shall be

executed under guidance and supervision of the Manufacturer’s site supervisor, the cost of which is deemed to be

included in the Contract price. The bidder shall provide full details of the method of support and installation procedures,

including the jointing and splicing techniques.

The service life of OPGW shall be similar to that of conventional earth wires (i.e. 25 to 30 years) and test evidence to

support Supplier's claim in this respect shall be submitted with the Bid.

4.5.2 Optical Fibre Ground Wire (OPGW)

� Material and Workmanship

The material(s) used for the manufacture of the OPGW shall be of highest grade free from defects and imperfections

conforming to the requirements of the latest issue of the relevant standards.

The materials used shall be:

� Aluminum Clad Steel (ACS) and/or Aluminum Alloy (AA) wires for outer conducting layer (armor);

� Aluminum Clad Steel (ACS) for inner conducting layer (if additional layer is used);

� Glass fibers;

� Metallic buffer tube;

� Aluminum tube; and

� Moisture proof and hydrogen absorbent gel.

Proper arrangements shall be made for the provision of corrosion prevention material and suitable filling compounds

as hydrogen absorbing gel in the offered OPGW. The bidder shall provide details in this regard.

� Cable Construction

The OPGW shall comprise:

� a central fiber optic unit designed to house and protect the optical fibers from damage to forces such as crushing,

bending, twisting, tensile stress and moisture;

� an aluminum tube over the central fiber optic unit; and

� an outer metallic part (armor) designed to function as the conventional shield wire and to protect additionally the

central fiber optic unit.



The fiber optic unit, Aluminum tube and the outer stranded metallic conductors shall serve together as an integral unit

to protect the optical fibers from degradation due to vibration and galloping, wind and ice loadings, wide temperature

variations, lightning and fault currents as well as environmental effects that may produce hydrogen.

� Central fiber optic unit

The optical fibers shall be protected by metallic buffer tube made of appropriate material to withstand temperatures of

200°C under short circuit current without continuous degradation. The buffer tubes shall not be on the outer layer in

order to be protected from external mechanical forces and electrical disturbances. Inside the buffer tube the fibers

shall be loosely housed in a waterproof gel to prevent water penetration and protection against friction.

The metallic buffer tubes shall have aluminum covering which shall be applied to prevent corrosion. The housing of

the buffer tube shall ensure protection against tensile and crushing forces on the buffer tubes and optical fibers. The

maximum number of fibers in one tube shall not be more than eight (8). Each fiber in a tube shall be distinguishable

from other fiber in the same tube by means of colour coding in accordance with EIA-598A.

� Stranded metallic wires (armor)

The OPGW shall be stranded with Aluminum Clad Steel wires (ACS). However, if more than one stranding layer is

used, Aluminum Alloy (AA) may be used in the outer layer.

The basic construction shall have bare concentric lay stranded metallic wires. The stranded wires may be of multiple

layers with a combination of various metallic wires within each layer. The direction of lay shall be reversed in

successive layers.

The wires shall be stranded such that when the OPGW cable is cut the individual wires can be regrouped and held in

place.

� Sag and Tension Limits

Physical design of the proposed OPGW for installation on new overhead transmission lines shall have sag and tension

characteristics similar to the 9.15 mm diameter, extra high strength, 7 strands, galvanized steel overhead shield wire

for the spans.

� Cable Characteristics

From the environmental point of view, it is reminded that the OPGW will be exposed to a harsh environment viz:

� maximum summer temperature : +80°C;

� maximum summer relative humidity: approaching 100%; and

� sand and wind storms

The Contractor shall take these atmospheric constraints into account to select a suitable OPGW for which 25-30 years’

service life is guaranteed.

The main features of the cable shall be:

- Number of fibers 24

- Outer diameter < 12 mm

- Breaking load > 7000 kg

- DC resistance at 20°C < 0.75 ohm/km

- Nominal weight < 460 kg/km

- Minimum bending radius < 200 mm (without fiber damage)



- Short circuit current for 1 sec. > 5kA for temperature rise from 20 - 200o C

� Fiber Characteristics

The main features of the optical fiber shall be as follows:

- transmission mode single mode complaint with ITU-T Rec G.652

- wave length 1310nm and 1550nm,

- attenuation < 0.35dB/km at 1310nm,

< 0.22dB/km at 1550nm on Jamshoro-Moro

and Dadu-Moro links

< 0.2dB/km at 1550nm on Moro-Goth Qazi

Mahar and Rahim Yar Khan-Goth Qazi

Mahar links

- maximum splicing loss 0.05dB,

- maximum end-connector loss 0.5dB,

- core diameter 9-10µm ± 0.5µm,

- cladding diameter 125µm ± 2µm,

- maximum concentricity error 1µm,

- maximum cladding non-circularity 2%,

- chromatic dispersion < 3.5ps/nm.km at 1310nm,

< 18ps/nm.km at 1550nm,

- cut-off wavelength < 1270nm,

- mode field diameter 8.1-9.7µm,

- operational temperature range -10 to 80°C.

- optical channel capacity for WDM >6.

Inside the buffer tube the reserve length of fibers shall be at least 0.45% against the linear length of the complete

OPGW to prevent the fibers from coming under stress. To prove this a sample of at least 80 m shall be pulled up to

endurance tensile strength while a continuous optical measurement of fiber length and attenuation is done

simultaneously.

4.6 Conductor

This specification covers the technical requirements for design, manufacture and testing of transmission line

conductors.

4.6.1 Conductors Characteristics

The conductors shall be Aluminum Conductor Steel Reinforced (ACSR) and "DRAKE" and All Aluminum Alloy (AAAC)

“GREELEY”. ACSR “DRAKE” shall conform to the requirements of ASTM B498 and B232 and AAAC “GREELEY”

shall confirm to the requirements of ASTM B398 and B399 plus the following requirements.

Table 4.3: Conductors Characteristics

Description of Characteristics Requirements for

ACSR "DRAKE" AAAC GREELEY

- Conductor size, KCM 795 927.2

- Stranding

� Aluminum/Aluminum Alloy 26 37

� Steel 7 -



- Diameter of wires

� Aluminum, mm 4.44 4.02

� Steel mm 3.45 -

- Conductor Diameter (Nominal), mm 28.14 28.14

- Cross Section Area (Nominal)

� Aluminum, mm² 402.6 469.6

� Steel, mm² 65.4 -

� Total, mm² 468 469.6

Nominal Weight

Aluminum, kg/km 1116.2 1295

Steel, kg/km 511.95 -

Total, kg/km 1628 1295

Rated Ultimate Tensile Strength, kg 14174 13835

Minimum DC Resistance at 20°C, ohm/km 0.07195 0.0713

Normal Reel Length, m 3200 3200

4.6.2 Conductor Wires

Each individual Aluminum wire entering into the construction of the complete conductor shall conform to ASTM B230

for ACSR “DRAKE” and ASTM B398 for AAAC “GREELEY”.

The steel core strands must be able to withstand 4 dips of the Preece test in accordance with the ASTM A239. The

other requirements of steel core shall conform to ASTM B498; Standard Specification for Zinc Coated (galvanized)

Steel Core Wire for Aluminum Conductor Steel Reinforced (ACSR). The Zinc coating for steel core wire for conductor

shall conform to class A zinc coated steel wire.

4.6.3 Joints

Joints in finished individual Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy wires composing the conductors may be made in

accordance with ASTM B232 and B398 respectively, but there shall be no joints of any kind made in the finished

individual zinc coated steel wire used for the core for ACSR conductor. Joints in the hot-rolled rods or semi-finished

wires before cold drawing may be made in accordance with ASTM B498.

4.6.4 Stranding

The lay factors used shall be within the limits specified in relevant ASTM Standard. Once stranding has been started,

the same lay factor shall be maintained for all conductor shipments.

The conductor shall be stranded in one pass if this is practical. If this cannot be done, the conductor shall be stranded

in a maximum of two passes.

When stranding the steel core or the partially stranded conductor and the wires to be added shall be inside the

stranding premises for a long enough time period to ensure that the steel core or partially stranded cable and the wires

to be added are at the same temperature that will be maintained throughout the stranding process.

Once the stranding and storing procedure has been started, the same procedure shall be followed for the balance of

the wire for a given destination in order to give all wire as near the same stranding history as possible.

For ACSR “DRAKE” conductor, steel wire from various manufacturers may be used. However, all conductors for a

given destination shall be manufactured from the steel core wire from one manufacturer. If steel core wire from more

than one source is being used, this shall be indicated on the reels.



The same stranding machine or combination of stranding machines if more than one pass is required, shall be used

for all conductor for a given destination unless otherwise approved in writing by the Project Manager. Marking on the

reels shall indicate when a different machine or combination of machines is being used.

4.6.5 Fabrication

The nominal conductor weight is based on ASTM standard, stranding increments. The actual weight will be dependent

on production of lengths.

The wires shall be so stranded that when the conductor is cut, it shall be essentially free from a tendency to untwist or

spring apart.

The finished conductor shall be uniformly cylindrical and shall be capable of withstanding the normal handling in

manufacturing, shipment and installation without being deformed in such a way as to increase corona losses and radio

interference.

The conductor shall be free from excessive amounts of die grease, metal particles and dust, and all imperfections not

consistent with best commercial practice. The finished product shall be free from projections to limit corona and radio

interference.

4.6.6 Testing

� Tests on Individual Wires

Before stranding, wire shall be tested in accordance with ASTM B230 and ASTM B398 respectively for ACSR and

AAAC conductors.

Tensile properties, electrical resistivity and diameter shall be checked using sampling described in ASTM B230 for

ACSR and ASTM B398 for AAAC conductors. For bending properties, ten percent (10%) of reels shall be checked.

� Ductility Test

This test shall be made on Zinc-coated Steel wires only.

One specimen cut from each of the sample shall be gripped at its ends in two vices, one of which shall be free to

move longitudinally during the test. A small tensile load, not exceeding 2% of the breaking strength of the wire, shall

be applied to the sample during testing. The specimen shall be twisted by causing one of the vices to revolve until

fracture occurs and the number of twists shall be indicated by a counter or other suitable device. The rate of twisting

shall not exceed 60 rev/min.

When tested before stranding, the number of complete twists before fracture occurs shall be equivalent to not less

than 18 on a length equal to 100 times the diameter of the wire. The fracture shall show a smooth surface at right

angles to the axis of the wire.

When tested after stranding, the number of complete twists before fracture occurs shall be equivalent to not less than

16 on a length equal to 100 times the diameter of the wire. The fracture shall show a smooth surface at right angles to

the axis of the wire.

As an alternative to the torsion test, an elongation test may be made on zinc-coated steel wires. The elongation of one

specimen cut from each of the sample shall be determined. The specimen shall be straightened by hand and an

original gauge length of 200 mm shall be marked on the wire. A tensile load shall be applied gradually. The rate of

separation of jaws of the testing machine shall not be less than 25 mm/min and not greater than 100 mm/min and the

elongation shall be measured after the fractured ends have been fitted together. If the fracture occurs outside the

gauge marks, or within 25 mm of either mark or the required elongation is not obtained, the test shall be disregarded

and another test made. When tested before stranding, the elongation shall be not less than 4%. When tested after

stranding, the elongation shall be not less than 3.5%.



Note: The choice between a torsion test and an elongation test is to be at the discretion of the manufacturer and the

choice of one test or the other in no way prejudices the quality of the steel used.

4.6.7 Type Tests on Complete Conductor

Following tests shall be performed to qualify the design before regular production:

� Stress – Strain Test

The stress-strain test shall be performed on the conductor in accordance with the method given in Annex B of IEC-

61089.

� Stress – Strain Curves

The Contractor shall provide the data with initial and final stress-strain curves for the conductor.

These stress-strain curves shall be obtained using the "Standard Method of Stress-Strain Testing of Aluminum

Conductor and ACSR" prepared by "The Aluminum Association", 420 Lexington Avenue, New York N.Y.10017, USA.

The creep curves shall be shown for the conductor held at a constant tension of 15%, 20%, 25% and 30% of the rated

ultimate tensile strength of the conductor. These shall be presented on log-log paper, with a minimum of 5 cycles on

the time scale. These data shall be based on tests carried out for a minimum of 1000 hours to obtain the degree of

accuracy required.

� Creep Test

In addition to above, creep test for conductor shall be performed in accordance with IEC-61395 to qualify the design

and creep curves be provided accordingly.

� Longitudinal Smoothness Test

When the dies are ready for the conductor but before regular fabrication commences, a sample of conductor having a

minimum length of 12 meters shall be prepared and tested in the presence of the representatives of Employer and

Project Manager to ensure compliance with outside diameter, cross-sectional area, lay, weight, ultimate strength,

tightness of stranding, and longitudinal smoothness requirements. The conductor shall comply with the requirements

of ASTM B232/B399.

The ultimate strength and longitudinal smoothness shall be carried out on a minimum length of 12 meter of conductor.

The Contractor shall supply and install the compression fittings required at the ends of the sample for testing.

During the test, the conductor shall be checked for longitudinal smoothness as follows:

When the conductor is subjected to a tension of 50% of the rated ultimate strength of the conductor, a straight edge

not less in length than twice the lay of the surface layer shall be placed parallel to the length of the conductor. The

maximum variation from the straight edge shall not exceed 10% of the nominal aluminum strand diameter.

At the end of the test, the nominal ultimate strength of the conductor shall be determined without the fracture of any

wire at 95% of rated tensile strength when pulled steadily and continuously in a tensile machine whose moving head

has a no-load speed of approximately, but no greater than 75 mm/minute.

The sample shall develop the ultimate tensile strength as calculated from the sum of minimum average ultimate

strength of the aluminum wires and the procedure specified in ASTM B232/B399.

4.6.8 Sample Tests on Complete Conductor during Fabrication

The manufacturer shall carry out during fabrication in addition to the tests specified in ASTM Standards, any other

tests specified elsewhere in this specification. A minimum 1.25 meter length sample of finished conductor shall be cut

from the finishing end of the first length in production between the capstan and the take-up reel. To preserve the



proper condition of the sample, both ends shall be taped before cutting. This sample shall be checked for the following

characteristics:

a) Finished diameter

b) Length and direction of lay

c) Finished weight

d) D.C. resistance of each aluminum strand

e) Cracks, scores, undue cross-over marks, indentations etc. of each of the 54 layers of the conductor

When the conductor sample is found to be satisfactory, 1.25 meter minimum length samples shall be taken from every

10th reel subsequently produced and the above characteristics shall be checked. If on testing the sample from any

drum fails to conform to the requirements of the specifications, two additional samples shall be taken from the same

drum for another testing. If both of these samples shall not conform to the specified requirements the drum shall be

rejected. Samples then shall be taken from all the drums offered for acceptance and shall be tested. If sample from a

drum does not meet the requirements, that drum shall be rejected. If number of rejected drums exceeds 20% of the

offered lot, the complete lot shall be rejected.

In addition to the tests specified above, a minimum length of 12 meters of conductor shall be cut off from reels

arbitrarily selected by the Project Manager, but no more than one reel out of every 100 will be chosen unless a

production run comprises less than 100 reels of conductor. In that case, the Project Manager reserves the right to test

one sample from each production run of less than 100 reels.

These samples shall be checked for the ultimate strength and longitudinal smoothness following the standard

procedures.

If a conductor test piece does not meet the strength and elongation requirements, further samples shall be tested from

reels number x, x+10 and x-10, where x is the reel number from which the rejected sample was taken.

If these three conductor samples meet the specification, the lot shall be accepted. If one of the last three samples

does not meet the specification, samples shall be tested from reels x+5 and x-5 where x is the reel number from which

the sample that did not meet the specification was taken. This process shall be repeated until all reels containing faulty

material have been located and rejected.

4.6.9 Markings & Packing

Flange of the reel shall bear a non-corroding tag, written in English language, identifying the following:

a) Type of conductor and code word

b) Weight of conductor

c) Length of conductor

d) Stranding

Each reel shall be stenciled to show all information as follows:

a) Manufacturer’s name and country of origin

b) Year of manufacture

c) Reel number

d) Size of reel

e) Gross weight

f) Net weight

g) Consignee address

h) Direction of rolling with instruction “ROLL THIS WAY”

i) Instructions “DO NOT LAY FLAT”



The overhead line conductor shall be furnished on non-returnable wooden reels, protected by wood lagging or other

suitable method against damage during shipment and to facilitate safe and easy field handling and long-term outdoor

storage. The Contractor is required to follow the sample drawing No 3206/169/TD/01E210 for wooden reel attached in

Volume-III for minimum compliance; however it is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the method of

packing shall be strong enough to withstand wear and tear during sea/inland transportation and handling at site.

However, the manufacturer may at his own option furnish the conductor on non-returnable steel reels at no additional

cost to the Employer. Methods of packing, marking and shipping shall be submitted to the Project Manager for review

and acceptance.

4.7 Pre-Construction and Construction Phase

4.7.1 Clearing Right-of-Way

Right-of-Way clearing shall be restricted to the minimum necessary for the safe construction and operation of the line.

Clearing shall generally consist of brushing out the centre line, tower locations and conductor pulling sites within 30

meters on each side of the centre line. General farming within this corridor is allowed and tree plantations that do not

exceed a height of 1.5m are also allowed to remain under the lines. Whose tops are within 6 meters at 65°C final

conductor sag position, shall be removed.

The clearing of desert vegetation shall be restricted to that required for placement of footings and for the assembly

and erection of towers and wire pulling Site.

The cleared materials will be the property of the Land Owner. If any disposal of cleared material is required it will be

disposed of by burning or other methods approved by the Project Manager.

4.7.2 Engineering and Surveying

The transmission line route marked on SOP sheets is firm and final as established by the Employer and is shown in

the specification drawings. However, the Contractor shall check this line route prior to start the field ground survey.

The Contractor shall be responsible to carry out final route alignment detailed survey, prepare plan and profiles, tower

spotting and prepare construction structure list for transmission line portion for which plan & profile drawings are not

available with the Employer.

The work to be done by the Contractor shall include but not limited to the following:

� Before starting the detailed survey, walkover survey of the line route as shown in the specification drawings shall

be carried out to mark underground utilities/services and built up areas falling in ROW corridor on SOP sheets of

1:50,000 scale for the approval from Project Manager.

� Carry out final route alignment and the detailed survey along the approved line route.

� If any line diversion along the proposed transmission line route is necessitated as decided/approved by the

Project Manager, the Contractor will carry out an investigation of the route along with necessary plan tabling of

the area and shall make necessary modifications and establish the terminal points, the angles locations, road

crossings and other points of interest as advised by the Project Manager or his nominated person.

� All the proposed modifications are then to be transferred on to the route map by the Contractor and submitted to

the Project Manager for approval.

� Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining approvals from various agencies following the necessary rules and

regulations. Survey of Pakistan maps will be shown to the successful bidder in the office of the Project Manager

when requested.

� During the survey, the Contractor will ascertain whether the route indicated to him is most desirable. If in his

opinion another route would be more desirable on technical grounds or more economical, he shall report his

findings to the Project Manager who will then decide about the adoption of new route.

� The survey shall be executed using high precision Electronic Total Station equipment. Ground elevations are to

be taken at regular intervals as directed by the Project Manager and at locations of change of slope and for



various features like roads, rail tracks, canals, power & communication lines, water courses etc. The leveling

along the route shall be connected and confirmed from the nearest available bench marks (BM) of national

reference datum i.e. Survey of Pakistan. In the absence of such bench marks, leveling and check leveling should

be done by using high precision handheld GPS.

� The line route has to be marked on the ground with permanent concrete markers. However if markers have not

been installed or found missing anywhere or if required by the Project Manager, the Contractor will install the

Concrete markers of at least 130 x 150 mm at top and bottom with a height not less than 1m. The markers shall

be buried 0.5 m below existing ground level. The markers shall be white washed and a red point shall be made on

the top of the marker to indicate the exact centre of the line.

� Total accumulated error in longitudinal and transverse measurements should not exceed 0.05% and in the

vertical direction should not exceed 0.20%.

� Longitudinal profiles and strip plans are to be prepared by the Contractor and shall be submitted for Project

Manager’s approval as per following scales;

Horizontal 1: 2000

Vertical 1: 200

� The profile shall be prepared on plans of 700 mm x 2000 mm size, or other size approved by the Project Manager.

Each sheet shall repeat 1/5 km of route on either side. Also the sheet numbers shall be indicated on a key map

for reference.

� Profiles shall include all details relevant to the survey of the routes including position of concrete markers,

crossings, transversal slopes, location of forest reserves, population limits and position of road.

� The ground profile shall be along the centre line of the approved route. All obstacles, and important features

within 50 meters on either side shall be shown on the profiles.

� Tower spotting shall be carried out by the Contractor using template (for “DRAKE” and "GREELEY" conductors)

approved by the Project Manager. The template shall be based on the actual ruling span calculated from angle to

angle, with maximum & minimum temperatures shall be 65°C and -4°C. Templates of various ruling spans will be

provided free of cost to Project Manager on celluloid sheets indicating hot, cold and ground clearance curves. The

tower positions shall be verified for suitability.

� Construction structure lists shall be prepared by the Contractor as approved by the Project Manager.

� Validation, updating & preparation of as-built of the already prepared plan & profile drawings and construction

structure lists (to be provided to the Contractor after award of contract) of the proposed transmission line route

with the actual field developments. Staking (centre and reference pegs) of the tower locations which have to be

concreted are included in the Contractor’s scope.

� Latitude and longitude by hand held GPS of each tower location should be collected and submitted to the Project

Manager.

� Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining approvals from various agencies following the necessary rules and

regulations.

� In case of route diversion, survey shall be conducted as per 9.1(2).

� Tower Staking (for all remaining tower locations which are to be concreted)

� Tower centers shall be staked in the field along with two-reference stakes on either side of the tower along the

line route, using wooden pegs are included in the Contractor’s scope. All angle tower locations shall be bisected.

Tower centers of angle locations with line angle in excess of 20° shall be fixed at offset distance 'X', which will be

calculated from the following formula:

X = A tan θ/2 (only for tower types “M” (angle more than 20o), “D” and “DGM”, “DD1”)

Where

A= Distance (width) from centre of tower bridge/cross-arm to the centre of attachment hole for tension

assembly.

θ = Line deviation angle



� All surveying not mentioned in these specifications as being the responsibility of the Contractor.

� The footings for terminal dead-end tower shall be so placed that the transverse axis of the tower cross-arms shall

be parallel to the transverse axis of the gantry structures of the substation up to 20° line angle. If line angle is

more than 20° then terminal dead-end tower location shall be bisected as stated herein above.

4.7.3 Sub Soil Investigation

The Work specified herein is to determine the type and geotechnical characteristics of the foundation strata to the

specified depth and location. This is to be accomplished through rotary drilling, field testing, ground water observations,

soil sampling and laboratory testing. The location along with depth of investigation boreholes on the ground shall be

established by the Contractor in accordance with the Drawings and from reference points approved by the Project

Manager.

� Method of Drilling

Drilling shall be done by rotary including rock coring method by means of which a hole of specified diameter is

extended in depths. Use of bottom discharge drilling bit shall not be permitted. The contractor shall be allowed to use

percussion method where gravels and boulders are encountered.

� Drilling of boreholes in flowing water conditions

Drilling may be carried out under water conditions. During the investigation, the Project Manager may change such

locations to land drilling depending upon the prevailing water way conditions.

� Test Pit (Not required)

The test pits shall be excavated at the locations as specified by the Project Manager. Excavations of test pits shall be

made to the depths as directed by the Project Manager by manual labor and with the help of suitable digging tools.

Test pits shall generally be excavated to a depth of about 3 meters below the ground surface or bed rock whichever is

encountered earlier. Undisturbed black (30cm x 30cm x 30cm) sample shall also be extracted from each test pit. The

dimension at the bottom of pit shall not be less than 1.5 m x 1.5 m. After field testing and sampling, the test pit should

be backfilled as instructed by the Project Manager.

� Drilling Fluid

The drilling fluid used for rotary drilling shall be clean water clear from suspended sediments. The Contractor may use

the natural or commercial drilling mud/bentonite slurry as drilling fluid.

� Casing of Boreholes

o Casing of a required size allowing entry of sampling tools shall be used in conjunction with drilling to wall the

boring to the bottom of the hole.

o The casing shall be made of cylindrical steel pipes and shall have sufficient strength so as to maintain position

and shape during drilling operations.

o The casing may be omitted only where it can be shown to the satisfaction of the Project Manager that sampling

operations without the casing will not entrain soils from an elevation higher than the depth at which field testing or

sampling is to be made.

o It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to pull out casing from the bore holes after its completion for which no

extra payment shall be made.

� Field Testing

Field testing shall include Standard Penetration Test. Standard Penetration Test shall conform to ASTM D-1586. This

designation describes as procedure to obtain a record of the resistance of sub-soils to the penetration of a standard

sampler and to obtain representative disturbed samples of the material for identification purposes and laboratory

testing. The penetration resistance shall be expressed as the number of blows of a 63.4 kg (140 lbs) hammer freely

dropping 762 mm (30 inches) required to force the standard sampler 305 mm (12 inches) into the soil. Standard

Penetration Tests shall be conducted in the bore holes at one meter interval from 1 meter depth to 10/15 meter depth

of bore hole and up to 40 m in case of river crossing locations, unless otherwise directed by the Project Manager.



Immediately after each penetration test a representative portion of the soil core shall be placed in moisture proof

container.

� Undisturbed Sampling

The undisturbed samples shall be taken in cohesive and non-cohesive materials. Samples shall be obtained using

Denison or Pitcher sampler or equivalent double tube core barrel or Shelby tube. The sampling procedure shall

conform to latest B.S./ASTM Standards. The length of undisturbed samples obtained shall not be less than 30 cm.

Immediately upon extraction from the hole, the sample shall be properly waxed. The number and depth of undisturbed

samples from each hole shall be as directed by the Project Manager during the progress of the drilling work at site.

� Labeling and Disposition of Samples

Each sample shall have identification tags giving information regarding Sample No., Top Elevation of Hole/Test Pit,

Date of Sampling, Depth and Length of Sample, and Description of Sample. The selected undisturbed and disturbed

samples shall be carefully transported for testing by the Contractor to the approved testing laboratory. Every

precaution shall be taken to avoid damage to samples as a result of careless handling and undue delay in

transportation. The tubes containing undisturbed samples and cores shall be well packed in wooden boxes to protect

the samples against vibration.

� Ground Water Observations

Whenever required by the Project Manager, bore holes shall be preserved for observations of ground water conditions.

When the borings are advanced by using natural or commercial drilling mud/bentonite to stabilize the hole, the hole

shall be flushed thoroughly with clean water at the completion of boring for the purpose of observing ground water

levels.

� Laboratory Tests

� The laboratories in which the samples are to be tested shall be approved by the Project Manager.

� The person representing to the Project Manager shall have access to the laboratories to supervise and check the

laboratory testing of the samples.

� The testing shall be carried out in accordance with ASTM or equivalent British Standards, or as directed by the

Project Manager.

� The Contractor shall arrange to carry out laboratory tests on the specified samples of the subsoil material. The

samples to be tested and the tests to be carried out for each sample shall be specified by the Project Manager.

Laboratory testing may include but not limited to the tests listed below:

o Grain Size Analysis (Sieve + Hydrometer)

o Atterberg's Limits

o Chloride Content (soil and water)

o Natural Moisture Content

o Bulk and Dry Densities

o Organic Matter Content

o Sulphate Content (soil and water)

o PH value (soil and water)

o Unconfined Compression Test

o Direct Shear Test

o Consolidation Test

o Total Soluble Salts.

o Magnesium Content



� Confirmatory Sub-soil Investigation

After preliminary subsoil investigations confirmatory investigation (if required) up to maximum depths of 25 meters will

be carried out by the Contractor. The location of selected confirmatory investigation will be conveyed to the Contractor

by the Project Manager.

� Record

The Contractor shall have at site, at all times only qualified, experienced, orderly and thoroughly competent graduate

Geologist who shall conduct and supervise drilling operations sampling and logging. The Contractor shall keep

accurate logs and records of all the Work accomplished under this Contract. All such records shall be preserved in

good condition by the Contractor until they are delivered and accepted by the Project Manager. The Project Manager

shall have the right to examine such records at any time prior to their delivery to him. The following information shall

be included in the records for each investigation borehole:

� Hole/test pit number or designation, coordinates and elevation of top of the hole/test pit;

� Type of drilling operations;

� Dates and time by depths when drilling operations were performed;

� Depths at which samples were recovered and field-testing was performed including complete data of field-testing;

� Depth of Ground water table from NSL; and

� Description of subsoil conditions.

The presence of the Project Manager Representative or keeping of separate records by him shall not relieve the

Contractor of the responsibility for the Work specified in this clause. Payment will not be made if the Contractor has

not furnished the records.

� Foundation design/designation (for diverted portion only)

Contractor shall submit the foundation design/designation along with the following data/calculations to establish that

the proposed foundation type is optimized and cost effective for the review and approval of the Project Manager:

� Necessary soil design parameters to verify the bearing capacity based on geological data (bore log) and

laboratory test results i.e. from (a) standard penetration test & (b) analytical method.

� Immediate and consolidation settlements of soil.

� Seasonal fluctuation of ground water.

� Cement type to be used for foundation construction (based on ACI-318 Table 4.3.1).

4.7.4 Foundation Requirements

� General

The items in the Price Schedules for constructing the various types of concrete foundations (Including pile

foundations) for steel towers include the following:

o Tower staking;

o Performing all clearing, grading, cutting and leveling as required to construct the footings and erect the steel

towers;

o Performing all required excavation, dewatering, shuttering, curing and compacting backfill for the concrete

footings;

o Installing steel stub angles in the concrete footings;

o Tower grounding before placement of concrete;



o All concrete work for the concrete footings, including the cost of furnishing all reinforcing bars, and all materials

for concrete;

o Installing pile foundations (pile, pile cap & tie beam) where required, including the cost of furnishing all reinforcing

bars and all materials for concrete; and

o Assessment of damage and prospect of rectification of already concreted tower foundations.

o The foundation drawings included in Bidding Document are firm & final and only be changed (if required) as

directed by Project Manager

� Excavation for Tower Footings

The Contractor shall perform all excavation required for constructing various types of concrete foundations for the

steel towers. During excavation of towers sites near to amenities, the Contractor shall ensure to perform the work in

such a manner as to minimum damage to them and if any prior approval is required that must be obtained at his own.

However, in case of any damage the Contractor shall be get repair of it at his own risk and cost under intimation to the

concerned agency.

The tower sites shall be leveled, graded/cut and cleared of trees, brush and stumps as may be required to construct

the tower footings and to erect the steel towers. Cleared materials shall be disposed off, as directed by the Project

Manager or his nominated person.

All excavations shall be sufficient to provide concrete footings with dimensions not less than shown on the drawings.

After the Contractor has excavated the footing to the required depth, the Project Manager will inspect the bottom of the

excavation and determine if the bearing material is suitable for the type of footing designated for that location. If it is

found that the bearing material is unsatisfactory for the type of footing designated, the Project Manager or his

nominated person will either designate another type of footing or ask for compacted crushed stone mixed with sand

50:50 ratio to be placed underneath the footing for a depth of up to 1.2 meters. The Contractor will be paid only for the

type of footing actually installed. However, no payment will be made to the excavation & replaced material underneath

the footing.

A maximum variation of 60 mm above or below established grade will be permitted. However, if excavations are below

specified grade plus tolerance, those shall be backfilled to required grade by the Contractor with the Contractor's

furnished concrete at his own cost.

All excavated material which is suitable for backfilling shall be laid aside to be used for backfilling at the tower site from

which it was excavated, and the excess material shall be spread evenly around the site as directed by the Project

Manager or his nominated person.

Concrete shall be placed as soon as practicable after each excavation is completed and all excavations shall be

protected so as to maintain a clean sub-grade until the footing is placed, using dewatering, timbering, shoring, or

casing, as necessary. Any sand, mud, silt, or other objectionable material which may accumulate in the excavation

shall be removed at the expense of the Contractor before placing concrete. After completion of foundations all the

dewatering holes shall be filled with dry sand.

� Rock Excavation (Not required)

Rocks shall be excavated to the depth required to provide suitable base for the foundations as indicated on relevant

drawings. Rocks are classified as sound and mashes, layers or ledges of mineral material 0.241 cubic meters in

volume in place and of such hardness and texture that it cannot be easily loosened or broken down.



Rock excavation includes drilling, blasting, removal, drainage and pumping as required. Drilling and blasting

techniques shall keep over break to a minimum and no extra compensation shall be paid for the removal of over

broken material. The contact surface of the rock shall be cleared of all loose rock and soil.

The cost of any damage whatsoever caused by blasting shall be payable by the Contractor. He shall not be relieved of

these costs in spite of having received approval of his methods from the Project Manager.

� Erosion/Slope Protection

For erosion protection against water current, gravel blankets shall be placed such that they do not flow away with

water current. These gravel blankets shall be placed at or adjacent to tower sites in the manner as directed by the

Project Manager or his nominated person. Gravel for the blankets shall be furnished by the Contractor, and it shall be

pit-run, free draining, containing no stones larger than 635 mm size obtained from the closest source approved by the

Project Manager or his nominated person. The gravel shall be reasonably clean and free from vegetation, pieces of

timber, or other foreign matter, and shall be distributed and graded evenly over the required areas. No compaction will

be required.

Slope protection will be provided for foundations, which are located/placed on uneven ground, and/or they are partially

or fully exposed in such a way that designed burden cannot be provided on these foundations safely. Slope protection

shall include but not limited to construction of retaining walls of stone or brick masonry to a height and depth so as to

provide adequate protection and necessary burden by making a leveled platform with or without brick/stone mortar

after filling with earth as per specifications/drawings or as directed by the Project Manager. The slope protection

drawings will be prepared by the Contractor and submitted to the Project Manager for review/approval prior to

execution of Project.

� Concrete Foundations

Each tower foundation will have four footings and each footing will consist of a steel stub angle embedded in

reinforced concrete. The footings for each tower in a tangent section of the line shall be placed so that the longitudinal

axis of the tower cross-arm will lie in a plane perpendicular to the traverses of the line. Unless otherwise directed by

the Project Manager, the footings for each angle tower shall be placed so that the tower cross-arm will lie in a plane

bisecting the interior angle formed by the inter-section of the traverses of adjacent sections of the line.

The footings at the various tower sites shall be constructed in accordance with the criteria shown on Drawings.

Pile foundations will be required where the field and laboratory tests confirm the requirements. The pile foundations

will be installed as shown on the relevant drawings and in accordance with these Specifications.

Any type of spread footing foundation may be changed to another type of spread footing foundation or pile foundation

in accordance with field requirements during execution of the project with the prior approval of the Project Manager.

� Placing of Stub Angles in Footings

Stub angles shall be placed in the tower footings as shown on the drawings and shall be supported in the proper

position by means of a rigid frame or equivalent suitable device to ensure placement of the stubs within the tolerances

specified below. The stub angles shall be held rigidly in a manner to prevent displacement during placing of concrete.

All stub angles for the tower legs shall be set accurately to the grade and alignment designated on the drawings and

as directed by the Project Manager. Work that is not within the tolerance will be corrected as directed by the Project

Manager, and at the Contractor's expense. The setting tolerances following complete foundation installation including

backfilling and compacting are as follows:



� Tower Center from theoretical location:

o Transverse � ± 150 mm

o Longitudinal � ± 500 mm

� Tower Orientation (angular departure from the theoretical location measured at the point of intersection of a tower

face and the longitudinal centre-line) � 25 mm

� Difference in Elevation between working point marks on Stub Angles including diagonally opposite legs � 8 mm

� Departure from theoretical Horizontal Dimensions between tower centre line and working point marks on stub

angle:

o Along the tower face, plus minus � 5 mm

o Along the tower diagonal, plus minus � 7 mm

� Batter � 5 mm per meter

� Twist (about heel of stub angle) � 2°

� Tower Grounding

Each tower shall be grounded by installing one ground rod below each of two diagonal footings. Ground rods shall be

driven at least 2.5 meters into undisturbed soil at the bottom of the footing excavation, as shown on the Drawings. The

ground rod shall be connected to the stub angle by a 7 No. 10 stranded annealed copper covered ground wire. The

connection of this wire to the ground rod and to the stub angle shall be made by a bolted clamp in accordance with the

Drawings.

Where it is not possible to drive a ground rod an alternative grounding by installing 'crowfoot' shall be adopted.

The resistance of the two rods/crowfoot in parallel shall be measured and recorded before concrete footings are

poured. If the resistance is more than 10 ohms, additional rods/crowfoot shall be installed as directed by the Project

Manager or his nominated person. No extra payment would be allowed for laying on account of this.

The dead end terminal tower of the overhead lines must be connected to the earthing system of the grid stations

� Concrete

All concrete and reinforcement placed for tower footings shall conform to the requirements of this section. At least 30

days prior to beginning concrete placement, the Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager for approval, a design

mix (along with quantity and source of each material) along with six (6) test cylinders using the actual materials to be

incorporated into the Work. Approval of the design mix will in no way relieve the Contractor from meeting all the

requirements of these Specifications. Whenever the Contractor proposes to use a different material source, a new

design mix must be submitted and approved as outlined above. During construction if in the Project Manager’s opinion

the mix shall be adjusted, the Contractor shall submit a new design mix as directed by the Project Manager.

The Contractor shall furnish all materials for use in concrete, including but not limited to cement, sand, coarse

aggregate, water, reinforcing bars, admixture, (including ground slag) and concrete curing compound. Air-entraining

agent and curing compound shall be accepted on manufacturer's certification of compliance with specification

requirements. However, the Project Manager reserves the right to require submission of and to perform tests on

samples of the agent and/or compound prior to shipment and use in the Work at the cost of Contractor.

� Cement

Cement shall meet the requirements of ASTM C150 and shall meet the false set limitation specified therein. The

cement shall be free from lumps and damaged cement, when used in concrete. Adequate provisions shall be made by

the Contractor to prevent absorption of moisture when cement is stored. Cement Type-V shall be used for all

foundations (Lot-I & Lot-II). Cement Type-I shall be used for all types of foundations other than those for which sulfate



resistant cement Type-V is required by the Project Manager (for Lot-III only). No extra payment shall be made to the

Contractor in case of use of sulfate resistant cement.

� Sand and Coarse Aggregate

Sand and coarse aggregate shall be furnished from any approved source. The sand particles shall be clean, hard,

dense, durable, uncoated rock fragments that will pass a screen having 6.5 mm square openings. The sand shall be

well graded from fine to coarse and shall be free from injurious amounts of dirt, organic matter, and other deleterious

substances.

The coarse aggregate shall consist of clean, hard, dense, durable, uncoated rock fragments, shall be free from

injurious amounts of flat and elongated pieces, organic matter, or other deleterious substances. The maximum size of

crushed coarse aggregate for piles shall be 19 mm and for spread footings, pile cap and tie beam 38 mm or as

directed by the Project Manager. The grading of these sizes shall conform to ASTM C33.

The Contractor shall submit, for testing and approval, representative samples of the sand and coarse aggregate

proposed for use in the concrete work. All aggregates shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C33 including

petrographic test. During construction the Contractor shall also arrange testing of sand and coarse aggregate if

directed by the Project Manager to determine compliance with Specifications. The cost of all laboratory testing of

these samples shall be borne by the Contractor.

� Water

Water used for mixing concrete shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, salts, organic

materials, or other substances that may be deleterious to concrete or reinforcement and shall meet the requirements

shown in Table 4.2 below. A complete chemical analysis of water shall be submitted prior to the start of construction

work and shall be required for each new water source being chosen. The cost of all laboratory tests of the samples

shall be borne by the Contractor. No change in water source shall be permitted without prior approval by the Project

Manager.

Table 4.4: Water Quality Requirements for Mixing Concrete

Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) 700 ppm (max)

Magnesium, Chlorides and Sulfates 250 ppm (max)

pH Value 6.5 – 8.0

� Reinforcing Bars

Reinforcing bars shall be deformed bars conforming to ASTM Designation A615, Grade 40 & Grade 60.

Representative steel bar samples shall be collected from the site and tested in the laboratory approved by the Project

Manager. The testing shall be witnessed by the Project Manager. The cost of all laboratory tests and traveling of

Project Manager shall be arranged/borne by the Contractor.

Negative variation in weight [mass] maximum up to 1.5% of reinforcement bar(s) from the applicable weight [mass] per

unit length prescribed in Table 1 of ASTM A615 will be allowed for bar(s) placement. Contractor will have to make

adjustments in bar spacing/number of bars to accommodate the excessive negative variation in weight [mass] if

greater than 1.5%. Contractor will not be allowed for bar(s) adjustment in case of overweight [excessive mass] of any

deformed bar.

� Curing Compound

Curing compound shall be wax-base and white-pigmented (Type 2) and conforming to ASTM Designation C-309 to

reflect solar radiation.



� Admixtures and Ground Slag

Admixtures to be used in concrete shall be subject to prior approval of the Project Manager and shall meet the

following requirements:

� Chemical Admixtures

o Air-entraining admixtures shall conform to ASTM C 260,"Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.

o Water reducing or water reducing and retarding admixtures (Normal Plasticizers) shall conform to ASTM C 494,

“Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete”, Type A or D, respectively.

o Super plasticizers shall conform to ASTM C 494, Type F or G, respectively

o Only one of the Admixtures A, D, F or G, shall be added at a time.

o Chloride-bearing admixtures shall not be permitted.

o Super Plasticizers shall be checked for their compatibility with pozzolanic materials in blended cement concrete.

� Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag

In area where high sulphate and chloride contents are present in soil/water, finely ground granulated blast-furnace

slag can be used as cementitious material in concrete by replacing SRC cement by maximum up to 30%. The

properties of ground granulated blast furnace slag should meet ASTM C 989. The cost of all laboratory testing of these

samples shall be borne by the Contractor. Contractor will not be paid extra for the purchase/procurement of ground

granulated blast-furnace slag to the construction sites.

� Composition

The Contractor shall determine the proportions of the sand, coarse aggregate, and cement needed to provide

concrete, meeting the requirements of these Specifications, and shall be approved by the Project Manager. Concrete

which contains 38 mm maximum-size aggregate shall have a cement content of not less than 380 kg per cubic meter

and concrete which contains 19 mm maximum size aggregate shall have a cement content of not less than 440 kg per

cubic meter. 38 mm maximum size aggregate shall be used for spread footing, pile caps, tie beams and 19 mm

aggregate for piles. The net water cement ratio by weight shall not exceed 0.5. Surface water contained in the

aggregate shall be included as part of the mixing water in determining the water content. Reinforced concrete design

will be checked in accordance with the ACI Building Code.

The Contractor will take minimum three test cylinders (152mm x 305mm) per leg, and the average compressive

strength at 28 days shall exceed 210 kg/cm² (3000 psi) and no individual test value should fall more than 35 kg/cm²

(500 psi) from the minimum specified value.

The compressive strength of the concrete will be determined by the Project Manager through the medium of test of

(152 x 305 mm) cylinders made and tested in accordance with ASTM C39. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary

sampling equipment such as slump cones, test cylinders, etc. at the site. This equipment is to be approved by the

Project Manager or nominated person by Project Manager. The cost of the material lab tests shall be borne by the

Contractor.

In the event that the concrete cylinder fails to meet the specified strength requirements then in-place testing of

concrete shall be conducted under the supervision of the Project Manager. In-place as approved by Project Manager

testing of concrete shall be conducted by one or a combination of the following methods:

o ASTM C42 “Test Method of Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete.”

o ASTM C805 “Test Method of Rebound Number of Hardened Concrete.”

The use of calcium chloride in concrete will not be permitted.



The slump of the concrete shall not exceed 75 mm for conventional foundation, pile cap & tie beam and 150 mm for

piles.

� Batching and Mixing

Unless specifically approved by the Project Manager, all concrete used on the Project shall be machine mixed. Hand

mixing shall only be used when authorized by the Project Manager and shall be performed under his directions.

The sand and coarse aggregate shall be weighed and shall be proportioned on the basis of integral bags of cement

unless the cement is weighed. After weighing, the materials may be proportioned on the basis of equivalent volumes.

The Contractor shall provide equipment and shall maintain and operate the equipment as required to accurately

determine and control the amount of each separate ingredient entering the concrete. Batching shall be such that

combined inaccuracies in feeding and measuring the materials will not exceed 1.5 percent for water and weighed

cement and 2 percent for sand and each size of coarse aggregate. The concrete shall be uniform in composition and

consistency throughout the mixed batch, and from batch to batch, except where changes in composition or

consistency are directed. The mixing time shall be at least 1.5 minutes for stationary mixers. Excessive over-mixing

requiring the addition of water to preserve the required consistency will not be permitted. The temperature of the

concrete when it is being placed shall be not more than 35°C and not less than 5°C in moderate weather or 10°C

when the mean daily temperature drops below 5°C. Truck mixers will be permitted only when the mixers and their

operation are such that the concrete throughout the mixed batch and from batch to batch is uniform with respect to

consistency and grading. Any concrete retained in truck mixers so long as to require additional water to permit

satisfactory placing shall be wasted.

� Forms Preparation for Placing of Concrete

Unless otherwise provided for on the Drawings or approved by the Project Manager, all concrete placed will be

monolithic.

Forms shall be sufficiently tight to prevent loss of mortar from the concrete and shall be maintained rigidly in position

until the concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent damage by form removal. All surfaces of foundations upon or

against which concrete is to be placed shall be free from standing water, mud and debris. The surfaces of absorptive

foundations against which concrete are to be placed shall be moistened thoroughly so that moisture will not be drawn

from the freshly placed concrete. The surfaces of construction joints shall be clean, rough and surface dry when

covered with fresh concrete. Cleaning shall consist of the removal of all laitance, loose or defective concrete, coatings,

sand, curing compound if used, and other foreign material. A mortar layer shall not be used on concrete construction

joints.

The methods and equipment used for transporting concrete, and the time that elapses during transportation shall be

such as will not cause appreciable segregation of coarse aggregate or slump loss in excess of 25 mm in the concrete

as it is delivered into the Work. Concrete may be transported from the mixer to the forms and deposited in the forms

by any method approved by the Project Manager such as transit mixers, buckets, chutes and pumping. Aluminum pipe

or chutes shall not be used for tremie trunk line, or chute for placing of concrete, or for the delivery of pumped

concrete. Re-tempering of concrete will not be permitted. Any concrete which has become so stiff that proper placing

cannot be assured shall be wasted. Formed concrete shall be placed in continuous approximately horizontal layers,

the depths of which generally shall not exceed 500 mm. Concrete shall be vibrated (internal vibrators having a

minimum frequency of 8,000 vibrations per minute) until it has been consolidated to the maximum practicable density,

is free from rock pockets of coarse aggregate, and closes snugly against all surfaces of forms and embedded

materials. Standby vibrators shall be available during concrete placement.



Exposed unformed surfaces of concrete shall be brought to uniform surfaces and worked with suitable tools to a

reasonably smooth wood float or steel-trowel finish as directed. Concrete in the tops of foundations in which stub

angles are embedded shall be sloped to provide drainage away from the stub angles.

� Reinforcement

Steel reinforcing bars shall be placed in the concrete where shown on the drawings. Before reinforcement is placed,

the surfaces shall be cleaned of heavy flaky rust, loose mill scale, dirt, grease, or other foreign substances.

Reinforcement shall be accurately placed and secured in position so that it will not be displaced during placing of

concrete.

The Project Manager shall not furnish supplemental bar-placing diagrams, bar lists, and bar-bending diagrams. Any

such additional diagrams and bar lists of this type which the Contractor may require to facilitate the fabrication and

placement of reinforcement shall be provided by the Contractor.

Reinforcement will be inspected for compliance with requirements as to size, shape, length, splicing, position, and

amount after it has been placed.

Any bar-placing diagrams, bar lists, and bar-bending diagrams prepared by the Contractor shall conform to the

requirements shown on the reinforcement design drawings and shall be approved by the Project Manager. Maximum

two numbers of bars (2+2) in pad and chimney can be lapped.

Lap splices shall be as under:

Bar #

Lap (mm)

3

305

4

360

5

460

6

610

7

40

8

1095

9

1400

10

1750

11

2160

� Protection and Curing

The Contractor shall protect all concrete against injury until final acceptance. The concrete shall be cured with two

applications (coats) at right angles to each other to ensure uniform and more complete coverage with approved

membrane type curing compound to be applied preferably by power sprayer as soon as possible after concrete

placement and in no case later than 2 hours. Curing with water shall be used only as an alternative to the type curing

and with Project Manager approval. The application of the curing compound shall be in accordance with the

procedures outlined by the Manufacturer. In case of pile-cap & tie beam with form, ties are loosened and vertical forms

are still in place water should be applied to run down on the inside of the form to keep the concrete wet. Immediately

after form removal, the surfaces should be kept continuously wet by water spray or water-saturated fabric until the

membrane-forming curing compound is applied.

In exceptional cases where extremely corrosive soil conditions are encountered, or as directed by the Project Manager,

the surfaces of the concrete, both exposed and unexposed, shall be treated with an approved type of bituminous

compound. A minimum of two applications shall be required, and the applications shall be 100 percent effective.

Surfaces to be treated shall not be coated with curing compound. No extra payment will be made to the Contractor for

procurement/treating concrete surfaces with bituminous compound.

� Repair of Concrete

Any concrete that is damaged or defective from any cause; concrete that is honeycombed, fractured, or otherwise

defective, and concrete damaged because of excessive surface depressions, must be excavated and built up to bring

the surfaces to the prescribed lines, shall be removed and replaced and any imperfections and irregularities on

concrete surfaces shall be corrected. The removal and replacement of damaged or defective concrete, and the



correction of surface imperfections and irregularities shall be made with concrete dry pack, or mortar (Portland cement

mortar), or at the option of the Contractor, with epoxy-bonded concrete, or epoxy-bonded epoxy mortar, where and as

applicable for the type of repair involved. All repairs should be completed within 24 hours after removal of forms, and

as directed by the Project Manager or his nominated person. However, forms shall not be removed for a period of at

least 24 hours after the concrete work until it has acquired sufficient strength to safely carry its own weight and any

construction loads that may be imposed on it.

� Tolerances for Concrete Construction

The Contractor shall be responsible for setting and maintaining concrete forms within the tolerance limits necessary to

insure that the completed Work will be within the tolerances specified or within good construction practices. Concrete

work that exceeds the tolerance limits specified herein shall be inspected by the Project Manager and he will

determine what effect the deviations will have upon the structural action or operational function of the structure, and

what remedies may be necessary. If after such inspection the Contractor is directed to remove or replace any

defective Work, he will do so at his own expense.

� (aa) Tolerances for footings:

o Variation from plumb In any length of 3.0

or specified batter for meters ......... 13 mm

lines and surfaces of stems Maximum for entire

length ......... 26 mm

o Variation in cross- Minus........... 7 mm

sectional dimensions Plus ............ 26 mm

of stems

o Variation from specified Minus ......... 13 mm

elevation for top of Plus .......... 13 mm

concrete

o Variation of dimensions Minus .......... 13 mm

in plan Plus ........... 52 mm

o Misplacement or 2 percent of the footing

Eccentricity width in the direction of

misplacement but not more than 52 mm

o Reduction in thickness 5 percent of specified thickness

� (bb) Tolerance for placing reinforcing steel:

o Variation of protective with cover of 64 mm or

covering: less 7 mm with cover of

more than 64 mm

......... 13 mm

o Variation from .......... 26 mm

indicated spacing



4.7.5 Backfill for Tower Footings

Backfill shall be placed about the tower footings to elevations indicated on the drawings or as directed. The material

used for backfilling, the amount thereof, and the manner of depositing this material shall be approved by the Project

Manager. Where the excavated materials are insufficient in quantity or are not suitable, as determined by the Project

Manager nominated person, for use as backfill, the Contractor shall obtain suitable material from the borrow. No

borrow pits shall be made within 25 meter radius from centre of tower. Backfill shall be placed about the tower footings

as soon as practicable after removal of concrete forms, but not earlier than 8 hours from application of sealing

compound or bitumen coating to concrete surfaces.

The excavated material not suitable for backfilling or in excess of backfilling requirement shall be spread evenly over

or adjacent to the Site. The backfill adjacent to footing stems shall be approximately 150 mm above the original

ground, and shall be graded and sloped uniformly away from the stems so that there is no pond at or around the

footing.

In backfilling for concrete footings, the pad of the footing shall be covered with fine material of 300 mm thickness (after

compaction) before any coarse material is deposited. Care shall be taken to avoid damage to the concrete when

backfilling. The backfill material shall be clean and free from vegetation, pieces of timber, or other foreign matter.

Suitable material for backfilling shall be a compatible granular material having a granularity within the following limits.

Sieve % Passing

76 mm (3 in) 100

No. 200 0-15

� Compacting Backfill

Backfill shall be placed in horizontal layers which after compaction shall not be more than 150 mm thickness. Each

layer shall be compacted by tamping machines or other mechanical means approved by the Project Manager.

Backfill shall be moistened properly where required. When excavated material is so wet that it is not suitable for

backfilling, it shall be spread and aerated until the proper moisture content is attained, at which time the material shall

be used as backfill around tower footings. The backfill material shall not be placed until all forms and timber used for

shoring or bracing have been removed, unless otherwise permitted by the Project Manager or his nominated person.

The Contractor shall submit, for laboratory testing and approval, representative samples of the materials proposed to

be used as backfill. On the basis of laboratory test results the Project Manager shall specify the degree of compaction

to be obtained in the field, which shall not be less than 90% of the maximum dry density as obtained by ASTM D-1557.

Density shall be measured in the field according to ASTM D1556 or ASTM D2937 by the Contractor in the presence of

nominated person of the Project Manager to determine compliance with the specified degree of compaction. The cost

of all laboratory and field testing shall be borne by the Contractor.

� Additional Foundations

In case other foundations are required to be installed, which are of different design than the specific types listed, the

Contractor shall install these foundations as directed by the Project Manager. All work performed will be in accordance

with these Specifications. Payment for additional foundations will be made at the applicable unit prices provided in the

Price Schedules for similar works.

� Foundation Test (Not Required)

The Contractor may be required to perform an uplift load test on any one footing for double circuit suspension type

tower. The Project Manager will designate the location and type of footing to be tested. All methods, procedures,



equipment, jigs, apparatus etc., shall be subject to approval by the Project Manager. No testing shall be commenced

until 28 days after the final concreting nor until all backfill is placed and compacted as specified herein.

An uplift load shall be applied until a design value is reached or the footing fails. The rate of load application will be

determined by the Project Manager.

4.7.6 Pile Foundations

� Description of Work

The Work to be performed under these Specifications shall be carried out at the proposed site of towers after the field

and laboratory test results confirmation. The Work includes, but is not limited to the following:

o Carrying out subsoil investigations at the tower locations through drilling, testing and sampling (if required by the

Project Manager).

o Construction of bored, cast-in-place reinforced concrete piles, pile cap and tie beam as shown in the Bid

Drawings or as directed by the Project Manager.

o Complete borehole logs and record of all operations performed during the investigations and the execution of the

Work.

� Location of Investigation Borehole and Piles

o The location of investigation boreholes and piles on the ground shall be established by the Contractor in

accordance with the Drawings after the approval by the Project Manager. Establishing the investigation borehole

and pile locations accurately in the field shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.

o The Contractor will provide the levels, survey and ground elevations for each investigation borehole and pile

location. The elevations will be given with respect to permanent Bench Marks in the vicinity of the Site.

� Number, Diameter and Length of Investigation Borehole and Piles

o One investigation borehole, not smaller than NX size, the hole diameter approximately 75 mm shall be drilled at

each location of tower where pile foundations are proposed to a depth of 20 meters from the general ground level,

or 5meters below the pile tip whichever is greater.

o Bored, cast-in-place reinforced concrete piles shall be constructed having uniform diameter throughout the length

as specified (minimum) in the relevant Bid drawings or as directed by the Project Manager. Pile footings shall only

be installed where the field and laboratory tests confirm the requirements. The final length of the piles shall also

be determined based on field and laboratory test results confirmed after testing.

� Containers

o For preserving and transporting soil and water samples collected from subsoil investigations the Contractor shall

furnish jars, tubes, boxes, bags and crates, meeting the requirements as specified in these Specification and the

cost thereof shall be included in the Contract Price.

� Care and Delivery of Samples

o Contractor shall be solely responsible for preserving all samples in good condition. He shall keep samples away

from undue exposure to the weather, and shall keep descriptive labels and designations on sample jars and

boxes clean and legible until final delivery of samples to the laboratories approved by the Project Manager. The

Contractor shall make arrangements for waxing of samples as directed by the Project Manager.



o The Contractor shall arrange for all samples to be safely packed and careful transportation to a laboratory as

approved by the Project Manager.

� Drillers and Supervisory Staff

o The Contractor shall have at Site, at all times only qualified, experienced, orderly and thoroughly competent

persons including graduate civil engineers / geologists who shall conduct and supervise drilling / concreting

operations during, sampling, logging, in-situ testing and piles construction.

4.7.7 Execution of Piles

� General

This clause covers all the work necessary for the execution of the bored, cast-in-place reinforced concrete piles

namely:

o Drilling and stabilizing of bore holes for the piles.

o Placing of steel reinforcement.

o Mixing and placing of concrete.

The Contractor shall perform all such work in accordance with requirements of this clause as well as in accordance

with the methods proposed or described by him at the time of submitting his Bid and approved by the Project Manager.

� Method of Drilling

The drilling of holes for piling shall be done by mud circulation or reverse rotary or percussion method or any other

method suggested by the Contractor and approved by the Project Manager. Regardless of the method used for drilling

holes, drilling operations shall be carried out in such a way as to avoid any disturbance of the surrounding soil

especially at the bottom of the hole and successful drilling through all types of soil/rock/boulder.

� Stabilizing of Holes

There will be no permanent casing installed. Any temporary protective casing at the start of the drilling shall be later

pulled out. The stabilizing of the drilled holes shall be achieved by using natural or commercial drilling mud/bentonite.

Permanent casing shall only be allowed with the prior approval of the Project Manager, for which no extra cost

procurement/placement shall be paid to the Contractor.

� Tolerances

Tolerances for setting out and for concrete construction shall conform to Clause 5.3 of these Technical Provisions. In

case of piles, deviation from the vertical shall not exceed one percent on any section of the length of the holes.

� Concrete

All concrete and reinforcement placed in the construction of piles shall conform to the requirements of Clause 5.3(8) of

these Technical Provisions. In addition to this, following requirements shall also be fulfilled.

o Promptly after cleaning of the borehole to the entire satisfaction of the Project Manager Representative, concrete

shall be placed in a manner that will not cause segregation of the particles or permit infiltration of water or any

other occurrence which would tend to decrease the strength of the concrete or the capacity of the finished pile.

The slump shall be limited to 150 mm maximum.

o The minimum clear distance between vertical reinforcement, including lapped bars, shall be 100 mm (if

applicable).

o Either tremied or pumped-in concrete can be used in presence of water or of drilling mud. Tremie or pump pipe

shall be made of steel and have watertight joints. Tremie pipe shall have a minimum diameter of 8 inches (200

mm) and pump pipe shall have a minimum diameter of 4 inches (100 mm) should be used. Embed tremie or



pump pipe a minimum of 3 meters in the concrete throughout concreting. The method and equipment used shall

be subject to the prior approval of the Project Manager.

o Concrete placement shall proceed without interruption until the pile is complete.

o Vibrate top 3 to 4 meters of concrete after temporary casing has been withdrawn.

o The Contractor shall make three test cylinders per pile or as directed by the Project Manager during the

concreting of piles.

o The vertical bars of pile can be coupled together as directed by the Project Manager according to the site

requirement.

o The dia of stand casing/permanent casing should be at least 25mm larger than the pile dia, whereas bit dia

should be equal to pile design dia.

� Record

The Contractor shall keep accurate logs and records of all the Work accomplished under this Contract. All such

records shall be preserved in good condition by the Contractor until they are delivered and accepted by the Project

Manager. The Project Manager shall have the right to examine such records at any time prior to their delivery to him.

The following information shall be included in the records for each pile.

� Investigation Bore-hole (if applicable)

o Hole number of designation, coordinates and elevations of top of the hole.

o Type of drilling operations.

o Date and time by depths when drilling operations were performed.

o Depths at which samples were recovered and field testing was performed including complete data of field testing.

o Depth of ground water table from NSL.

o Description of subsoil conditions.

� Piles

o A general description of sub-soil conditions and water table position at the location of the pile.

o Pile number, ground elevation of borehole and elevation of top of pile.

o Type of drilling operations.

o Date and time by depths when drilling operations were performed and piles constructed.

o Total depth of each borehole.

o Quantity of concrete and steel used for the construction of each pile.

o Quantity of constituents for each batch of mix, water cement ratio and the results of all quality control tests.

o Time of start and completion of Concrete.

o Remarks concerning any unusual occurrence during drilling and concreting of piles.

4.7.8 Tower Erection

Contractor's work includes supply of manpower, providing construction equipment, vehicles, rigging tackles for

complete assembly of towers.

Profile drawing indicating the location, height and type of each tower and the construction data sheets showing the

length of leg extension for each of the four legs of each tower will be submitted by Contractor after final survey for

approval of the Project Manager.

Erection shall be done strictly in accordance with the approved manufacturer's drawings, material lists and approved

construction data sheets.



No tower shall be erected until seven days after the last concrete was placed in the foundation, nor until backfill has

been completed where and as required.

� Handling

Tower steel shall be handled so as to prevent deformation of the members and damage to the galvanizing. Materials

shall not be dumped, dragged, barred; rolled or dropped but shall be carefully loaded, unloaded and stored. A

mechanical means such as hoist or crane shall be used when material cannot be properly handled or placed by hand.

Bare wire rope or steel chains shall not be used for handling without adequate protection of the surface coating. Heavy

members shall not be stacked on top of lighter members. Structural members shall be stored according to size,

lengths and markings. The maximum weight of steel bundles shall not exceed a specified weight, typically 1600 kg to

1800 kg, to facilitate handling and unloading. Members with dissimilar finishes shall not be stored over one another to

minimize discoloration of the lower members.

All members shall be placed on wood blocking or other suitable material to ensure that the materials to be stored are

not in contact with the ground. Blocking shall also be used to separate layers of stacked materials. Members shall be

supported in such a manner as to prevent bending and distortion as well as to allow water to drain from the materials.

Failure to provide for proper drainage of stacked galvanized steel members could result in the formation of white rust.

White rust (zinc oxide) forms when two galvanized surfaces are closely rested for an extended time without adequate

ventilation. Ingress of water between the surfaces forms an electrolytic cell, which may, in time, erode some of the zinc

layer. The white rusting action will stop after exposure to air. Spacers placed between the nested pieces ensure

adequate ventilation when extended transport storage is anticipated.

The material yard shall be kept relatively neat and clean and the growth of vegetation kept to a minimum. Good

housekeeping minimizes damage and loss of material handling; periodic physical inventories and complies with

environmental considerations.

� Assembly Methods

All assembly and erection shall be done by methods and equipment that will not cause damage to, or distort any part

of the tower. Extreme care shall be taken to establish and maintain the true geometric shape of the sections of tower

assembled.

Preassembly techniques are generally influenced by site terrain and available equipment. Generally, the larger section

that can be pre-assembled, the more efficient is the assembly/erection operation. Preassembly techniques shall

consider placement of the assembled sections to provide for the most efficient, safe lifting for erection. Structural

assemblies, which are not sufficiently rigid to be raised in one piece, shall be stiffened by means of adequate

temporary bracings.

Towers assembled on the ground shall be placed on suitable blocking so as to be kept free of dirt, mud or other

foreign material that might adhere to the structure and damage the coating. Blocking shall be placed in such a manner

as to provide a flat surface in order to prevent over stressing or distortion of members and to maintain the true

geometric shape of the assembled members. Mud, dirt, white rust and other foreign material shall be removed from

the contact surfaces of joints prior to assembly. Steel members shall not be dragged over the ground or otherwise

handled in such a manner as to damage the galvanizing.

The structures shall be assembled in accordance with the fabricator’s erection and detail drawings. The diameter, type,

and length of bolts as shown on these drawings shall be used for each connection. Orientation of bolts can facilitate

access, final tightening, installation of locking devices and subsequent checking of the erected structure. Tower bolts



shall normally be installed so that the nuts are to the outside of the tower or, in the case of horizontal members, to the

top of the connection unless such positioning is clearly impracticable.

Installation of bolts by hammering or any method that damages the galvanized coating shall not be allowed.

When sections of towers are being assembled prior to erection, assembly shall be on blocks that will provide support,

sufficient to prevent distortion of tower steel. If all bolts in an assembly are not inserted, at least 50 percent of the bolts

in each connection shall be inserted and those bolts shall be finger-tightened only. All bolts in an assembly shall be

inserted before any bolt in the assembly is fully tightened.

Only wrenches which properly fit the nuts and bolt heads shall be used. The use of wrenches, which in any way

deform the nut or cut or flake the galvanizing is prohibited. All bolts shall be entered clear to the head. All 16 mm

diameter bolts shall be tightened to a torque of 10-14 kg - meters and 20 mm and 24 mm diameter bolts to a torque

17-23 kg-meters. All bolts after torque shall be centre punched adjacent to the nut in order to prevent loosening of the

nut. This method of locking the nuts will be used instead of locknuts.

� Method for Erection

Towers shall be erected by any suitable method in the sequence best adapted to the equipment, workers’ experience

and site conditions which will not overstress structure members.

When handling assembled portions of the structure, spreader bars or other devices with proper points of attachment

shall be used to avoid distorting or overstressing members and to maintain the true geometric shape of the section.

Adequate tag lines shall be used to ensure that no section of the tower being lifted will drag on the ground or against

any section of the tower already erected.

Temporary guying may be required when erecting a structure in sections. Any temporary guying system shall be

checked to ensure that the structure section is stable before workers are allowed to work on the section.

Structures shall be completely erected, correctly oriented, with all members in place, all bolts installed and properly

tightened, and the entire structure checked in accordance with the specifications prior to the installation of insulators,

conductors and shield wires. When erecting structure members or sections in the vicinity of energized lines, care shall

be taken to ground these members or sections before any workers come in contact with them.

The use of a crane erection is generally an efficient method of erecting latticed steel structures. With ground pre-

assembly of sections, the time spent in final erection can be greatly reduced.

Cranes with telescoping booms can be more efficient than rigid boom cranes in rough terrain. Considerable

productivity can be lost in the process of assembly and disassembly of rigid boom cranes. In addition, continuous

handling of boom sections can lead to boom damage. Preplanning of the crane location at the structure site allows for

any necessary grading work (building of ramps, soil stabilization etc.) to be accomplished during the foundation

construction operations when suitable equipment is available at the site. Depending on soil conditions, additional

bearing support may be required under outriggers, tracks, and tires. All soil shall be returned to a condition acceptable

to the Project Manager after erection.

Gin Pole is a boom of steel or aluminum pipe, wood pole or latticed truss secured at its base and usually inclined at a

slight angle to the vertical is also used for tower erection. Two wire-guys about 60º to 90º apart in the plan view are

attached to the top of the gin pole to resist or support the load to be lifted. For safety, a third, and preferably a fourth

guy, is installed in front to prevent the pole from falling over backward in the event of an unexpected impact or the

sudden release of load.



� Correction of Misfabricated and Damaged Steel

All shop errors and damaged steel shall be reported to the Project Manager who will decide the manner in which

corrections shall be made. All costs incurred due to punching, drilling or cutting shall be deemed to be included in the

steel erection cost.

Pieces bent in handling may be used if they can be straightened to the satisfaction of the Project Manager, without

structurally damaging the metal. If bent pieces cannot be satisfactorily repaired, they shall be replaced.

Field punching or drilling of holes and field clipping shall be done only with the approval of Project Manager, if the hole

or clip was missed in fabrication of the member but was called for on the fabrication detail drawings. The edges of

clipped angles, new or reamed holes or any member which has its coating scratched or damaged shall be repaired

with a coating approved by the Project Manager. Members having mis-punched holes shall not be repaired by welding

and shall be replaced with correctly fabricated members. If the field fabrication of a member is required, the bolt

spacing and edge distances shall be in accordance with the fabrication detail drawings.

Reaming shall be done only with the approval of the Project Manager, and will be permitted, for the correction of

undersized holes, for removing excessive galvanizing, and for holes off gauge line, to the extent that the connection

cannot be made by loosening bolts in related connections. No hole shall be reamed more than one-eighth of its

original diameter. Reaming to remove fitting difficulty due to improperly set footings, to correct improper tower

assembly and erection, that would distort holes or distort any member, or that would damage the galvanizing, is

prohibited.

� Damage to Galvanizing

Small areas of galvanizing damaged by abrasion, in straightening bent pieces or by necessary clipping-in the field,

shall be repaired by carefully cleaning the affected area and painting. The paint will be furnished by the Contractor.

Damaged area shall be wiped with clean rags saturated with Xylene or equivalent solvent, followed by wire brushing

then recleaned with solvent to remove residue, and painted with one coat of "Galvanox", or approved equivalent.

Galvanizing damaged by drilling or punching shall be repaired by applying an Aluminum paste or zinc rich coating

material to completely fill all voids between the bolt and the surfaces bared, or all exposed steel surfaces around the

holes or on cuts on which such corrective work is permitted. The coating material shall be "Galvanox" or approved

equivalent.

� Tower Signs and Aerial Markers

Tower signs (danger sign and number signs) shall normally be installed on the tower so that they will be readily visible

when viewed in the direction of increasing tower numbers. However, if signs installed in the normal position will not be

readily visible from a permanent access road, they shall be installed on the tower faces best exposed to view from the

access roads. These signs shall be supplied by the Contractor, and before the manufacturing, a sample shall be

submitted to the Project Manager for approval.

Aerial markers shall be installed on the upper side of bridge structure, as shown on the drawings. Two markers shall

be installed on every tenth tower of the line; one marker faced back on line and the other ahead on line. These shall

also be supplied by the Contractor.

� Anti-climbing Devices

An anti-climbing device will be installed on each tower as shown on the relevant drawings. The anti-climbing device

normally will not be installed until all the tower and wire stringing work is completed.



The tower steel will be provided with holes for mounting the anti-climbing device brackets. The brackets shall be

fabricated from mild steel and shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153. The brackets along with barbed

wire shall be supplied by the Contractor. Any holes required to be punched/drilled for installation of Anti-climbing

Devices and applying of Galvanox, shall be carried out by the Contractor without any extra cost.

Anti-climbing device will be provided with an arrangement of barbed wire around the tower to prevent unauthorized

person(s) from climbing the tower.

After erection, tower shall be cleaned of any foreign matter.

� Supporting Device for Joint Boxes of OPGW

Supporting device for joint boxes of OPGW to be designed, manufactured and supplied by OPGW manufacturer will

be installed on the towers where joint boxes are required to be installed. Joint boxes will be installed on the tower on

completion or just before completion of each OPGW reels of about 3.2 km length or wherever particularly required.

The holes required to be drilled in the tower braces for installation of these supporting devices including provision and

applying of Galvanox at the holes drilled shall be responsibility and to the cost of the Contractor.

� Welding of Nuts & Bolts

All nut & bolt connections of all types of towers shall be welded according to drawing No. 3206/169/TD/01F202, up to

8.0 m height from the top of chimney.

4.7.9 Installation of Insulators and Hardware

Insulators and insulator hardware shall be assembled and installed as shown on the drawings and in accordance with

the recommendations of the manufacturers.

No insulator with chips or cracks in the porcelain or defects in the fittings shall be installed.

Uncrated or otherwise unsupported strings of insulators shall not be picked up or suspended except by the upper units

of the string. All cotter pins installed by the Manufacturer shall be checked.

All insulators shall be cleaned with a clean cloth when installed. The porcelain shall be bright and all other parts free

from dirt. Only clean rags free from any abrasive material shall be used for cleaning insulators.

Wire brushes shall not be used for the cleaning of any parts, metal or otherwise. The use of solvents will not be

permitted.

Each completed suspension assembly shall be adjusted to hang in a vertical plane through the axis of the tower.

Where it would be possible, nuts, locknuts and cotter pins shall be placed to face the tower body.

Workmen shall not climb on insulators during stringing operations or at any other time. When raising conductor strain

assemblies, the insulators shall be kept under tension to avoid possibility of those being damaged due to excessive

bending.

4.7.10 Stringing Conductors, Overhead EHS Shield Wire and OPGW

� General

The conductor, overhead shield wire and OPGW shall be installed as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.

� Safety Grounding

It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to take adequate safety precautions to protect his employees and others from

the potential voltage build-up during construction. The voltage buildup may be comparatively small during normal



operations, but could be lethal during switching and ground fault conditions on the energized parallel line. The

following minimum safety and grounding procedures shall be followed by the Contractor during stringing operations in

the Sections with parallel existing high voltage lines.

Temporary electrical grounds shall be placed at both ends of the section requiring special safety precautions and at

intervals along the line which is under construction. The grounding sets installed at both ends of the section of line

shall remain in place until the completion of the work and shall be removed as the last phase of cleanup. Hot stick

shall be used for installing and removing the grounding sets.

All temporary grounds furnished and installed for protection shall be clearly visible for inspection and shall be flagged

by use of a red cloth placed at the point of grounding. All grounds, except those placed at both ends of the section,

and red flags shall be removed when they are no longer needed for protection.

All pulling and tensioning equipment shall be bonded and effectively grounded with approved-type driven grounds

securely attached to the equipment. At least two driven grounds shall be used at both the pulling and tensioning set up.

All conductive parts of the tensioning set up and equipment shall be operated from grounded or insulated platform

provided with barricades or insulated walkways.

Running grounds shall be installed within 6 meters of the tensioning set up to constantly ground each sub-conductor,

overhead shield wire and OPGW. At the pulling set up grounding shall be achieved by the use of block grounds

connected to the adjacent tower by approved type ground leads bonded to the tower with approved type clamps.

These connections shall be removed by the use of a hot-stick.

An approved-type driven ground shall be located at each side and within 3 meters of working areas where conductors

or overhead shield wires or OPGW are being compressed to dead-end assemblies or spliced at ground level or jointed.

The two ends to be spliced shall be effectively bonded together prior to and during splicing operation. Splicing and

compression operations at dead-end assemblies shall be carried out on either an insulated platform or on a

conductive metallic grounding mat roped off with an insulated walkway provided for access to the mat.

Installation and removal of temporary jumpers, at any time the conductor is not continuous, shall be performed by hot

stick methods.

All conductors, overhead shield wires and OPGW shall be bonded to the tower with approved type tower grounds at

any isolated tower where it may be necessary to complete Work. Work on dead-end towers shall require grounding on

both sides of the tower. Grounds may be removed when the Work is completed, providing the line is not left open

circuited at an isolated tower at which work is being completed.

For all sections of the line under work, which are not in parallel with energized high voltage lines or otherwise requiring

special safety precautions, only the provision of the grounding at the pulling and tensioning stations shall be required.

All provisions specified herein shall not prevent the Contractor from installing as many additional grounds as deemed

necessary for the protection of workmen against static and accidental contacts with foreign circuits.

Clipping crews and all others working on the conductive pulling lines, isolated conductors, overhead shield wires or

OPGW shall be protected by individual hot stick clamp type grounds installed at every work location.

� Approved Type Grounding Material

Approved type moving grounds shall be such as to exert constant pressure on the conductor, overhead shield wire or

OPGW, and the contact rollers shall be with permanently lubricated-type bearings.



Approved-type driven ground rods shall be minimum of 16 mm diameter copper-weld or equivalent. Ground rods shall

be driven into the ground a minimum of 2.5 meters.

Approved-type tower grounds shall be hot stick clamp grounds, bonded to the tower with a flexible ground lead.

Approved-type ground leads shall be at least 43 mm² cross-section copper or equivalent.

Approved-type insulated platforms shall be constructed of 65 mm nominal dimension lumber supported on 102 mm

nominal dimension sills, or of materials of equivalent insulation.

At the tensioning set up, the insulated platform and rope barriers shall extend completely around the equipment set up

in such a manner as to prevent any one standing on the ground from contacting any conductive part of the equipment.

� General Safety Precautions

Prior to initiation of the stringing in any section of the line the following shall be insured.

o The installation of all towers within the section of the line is satisfactorily completed.

o The stringing loads will not exceed the design loads for any of the towers.

o If any tower is to be subjected to loads exceeding the design loads, the Contractor shall provide temporary

bracing for such tower, and the bracing is subject to approval by the Project Manager.

o The stringing and sagging operation is such that no sudden loads will be applied on the towers.

� Safety Precautions at Crossings

Wherever any power line, communication line, highway or railroad is to be crossed, the owners shall be notified 30

days in advance and all temporary changes shall be pre-arranged.

The Contractor shall not erect towers near, or string conductors or overhead shield wire or OPGW over energized

power circuits until a Hot-Line Order is placed on the energized line.

Qualified personnel shall remain at the site of work while the Hot-Line Order is in effect and shall ascertain that all

personnel are in the clear and properly notified before the Hot-Line Order is released.

All existing lines which are de-energized for crossing shall be short-circuited and grounded at each side of the

crossing.

Guard structures shall be provided at all crossings, as required for the protection of the conductor, line, road, structure,

or feature being crossed, and as required by the owner, or the Employer.

Guard structures shall be of sufficient strength and stability to withstand the stresses to which they may be subjected.

As soon as a guard structure has served its purpose, it shall be removed and all holes shall be backfilled.

� Atmospheric Adverse Conditions

All pulling and stringing operations shall cease when either wind velocities are such as to cause conductors to deflect

more than 1.5 meters at mid-span from the normal no wind position or there is any indication of lightning activity in the

area.



� Handling and Stringing of Conductors

The conductor will be furnished in matched sets of twelve reels and shall be strung by the controlled tension method.

At no time will the conductor be allowed to contact the ground or any object which might cause damage to the

conductor.

All reels shall be inspected in the field prior to installation. Reels showing signs of careless or unusually rough

handling, such as split frames or crashed outer protective lagging shall be inspected carefully for conductor damage.

Preparatory to unreeling a conductor from the reel, the outer protective lagging shall be removed carefully, and all

surfaces in contact with the running conductor shall be examined for protruding objects which might damage the

conductor.

Care shall be taken to insure that no dirt is carried by the conductors from the reels. Reels shall be properly cleaned

before starting stringing operation of any line section.

A spreader bar shall be used when lifting or lowering the reels. Full or partial reels shall not be dropped or rolled under

any circumstances.

The four conductors in a bundle shall be strung simultaneously and shall hang in stringing blocks for the same period

of time not exceeding 24 hours and, in exceptional cases, up to 48 hours before being sagged to the specified sag.

Four conductors shall start and end approximately at the same points of the line and stringing operations shall be

planned to keep waste to a minimum. Lengths of conductor less than 100 meters are scrap lengths and shall not be

spliced into the line without the approval of the Project Manager. Jumpers shall be cut only from scrap lengths unless

otherwise permitted.

Stringing sheaves may be hung on the insulator strings or in straps of equal length attached to the structure arms with

suitable hooks or clamps. The sheave shall support the conductors at the same elevation as when clipped in.

Stringing of conductors and temporary guying of conductors shall be done by methods that will prevent damage to the

conductor and structures in any way. Temporary guying/dead ending to tower footings will not be permitted. Where

temporary dead end is required, the conductors shall be attached to suitable temporary anchors.

The general requirements for installation of the temporary anchors are as follows:

• The angle formed by conductors/EHS shield wire/OPGW to the horizontal shall not exceed 15 degrees.

• The anchors shall be aligned in the direction of stringing.

• The anchors and their accessories shall withstand the maximum conductor tensions with a factor of safety of

three.

Four sub-conductors of one phase shall be strung simultaneously by means of running board attached to a single

pulling line with a swivel. Sub-conductors shall be connected to the running boards with a swivel connection and a

stocking-type grip. The grips shall be secured to the conductor by means of a band installed around the tail end of the

grip.

Following stringing, measures shall be taken to prevent the sub-conductors of the bundle from contacting each other.

Before adjusting the sag of the conductors, sub-conductor slapping may be prevented by pulling each of them to a

different sag which will separate them at least 153 mm vertically from either of the other sub-conductor at mid-span.



After adjusting the sag, the following conditions will require sub-conductors tie-off: any time that sub-conductors

slapping is noted, any time that prior to spacer installation the conductors are left unattended.

Two reel lengths of conductor may be pulled into the sheaves using only approved swivels and grips to make the

connections between reel lengths. Double socking will be permitted, but permanent splices shall not be pulled through

a sheave or bull-wheel. All sheaves, swivels and grips shall be inspected daily for free and easy movements and to

assure that such may be safely used. Sheaves carrying pulling lines shall not be used for conductors.

The conductor shall be kept clean by removing grease, dust or any other contamination. Cleaning shall be done

immediately after the conductors leave the tensioning device. The method of cleaning shall be wiping with a clean

cloth saturated with proper cleaning agent. When it is necessary to slack the conductor at any time during the stringing

operation, it shall be done with the approval of the Project Manager. Rigid plank guard or lagging, or a combination of

both shall be used to prevent damage. Lagging shall consist of nonmetallic material which will not damage the

conductor and shall be rigid so that it will not be displaced by the motion of the conductor. It shall be free of any

material, which can be transferred to the conductor.

Sections of the conductor damaged by application of gripping attachments or any other way during stringing shall be

removed before the conductor is sagged in place.

The conductor repairs shall be done as outlined in Clause 9.7(11) (b) of the Technical Provisions.

All stringing operation must be conducted so that at no time will any suspension structure be subjected to longitudinal

loads and at no time will any tension structure except dead end structure be subjected to excessive unbalanced loads

resulting from longitudinal loads on opposing faces. At no time shall any structure be subjected to torsion. The vertical

angles of pulling lines shall be such as to minimize the vertical loading on towers. The attachment of temporary guys

and stringing equipment on towers shall be done only with approval of the Project Manager.

The conductor and shield wire reels, tensioners, and pulling machines shall be located as near to mid-span as

possible but in no case shall the slope of the OPGW or shield wire or conductor between any machine and the

stringing block or any anchor lead be steeper than three horizontal to one vertical (15°-20° to the horizontal).

The tension in the conductor during stringing shall be maintained as constant as practicable. The sag in each

conductor must be maintained at least 20 percent greater than the sagging value specified in sag charts and the

maximum pulling tension shall never exceed the sagging tensions.

If the conductor is left unattended, during stringing operations, it shall be freely suspended between stringing sheaves

so as to provide a safe clear distance over ground or obstructions.

The minimum tension shall be such as to maintain the conductors at a minimum distance of 3 meters above ground or

any obstacle.

When there is possibility of conductor being damaged due to wind or other conditions they shall immediately be fully

tensioned. It is recommended that variations in stringing tensions be as small as possible and the tension shall be

near the maximum permitted. Immediately after completing stringing of a section of the line, the tensions shall be

increased to the maximum permitted stringing values.

The spinning of the conductors and shield wires shall be prevented during stringing. Unreeling of the conductors shall

be closely watched at all times in order to detect any damage or flaw in the conductor.



� Handling and Stringing of Shield wire and OPGW

One 9.15 mm dia.7 strand extra high strength (EHS) galvanized steel overhead shield wire and one 12mm OPGW

shall be strung for the entire length of line.

The specifications used for handling and stringing the OPGW & overhead shield wires shall be the same as for the

conductors.

� Conductor Sagging

After being pulled into the sheaves all sub-conductors in a sag section shall be sagged within 24 hours.

The conductors shall be sagged in accordance with sag charts, furnished by the Contractor. The exact value of sag for

a given span length at a given temperature can be ascertained from the appropriate table or by linear interpolation of

data.

Conductor sagging temperature shall be measured by an accurate thermometer. A length of core shall be pulled from

a 0.5 meter length of the conductor sufficient for thermometer to be inserted into the space vacated by the core.

The length of conductor shall be placed in the full sun at least 4 meters above the ground for a minimum period of 15

minutes. A thermometer in a container which stimulates the effect of the conductor may also be used.

The length of conductor sagged in one operation shall be limited to the length that can be sagged satisfactorily,

usually 3,000 meters to 6,000 meters.

Temporary snubs shall be used between a section previously sagged and clipped in and the section being sagged.

Dead ending or snubbing will not be permitted on any tower except dead end towers at the normal point of attachment.

When conductors are sagged a mark shall be placed on each conductor at the last structure in each pull. The location

of this mark shall be checked after the succeeding sag has been made to ascertain whether or not the back spans are

still sagged properly. The wire grips may be removed only after the next section of the line has been sagged.

When sagging conductor shall have lengths of more than four spans, the sag shall be checked near each end span

and at or near the middle span of the length being sagged. The length of the spans used for checking sag shall be as

nearly equal to the ruling span as practicable.

The sag of each span more than 600 meters in length shall be checked in addition to above. Sag at sharp vertical

angles and horizontal angles of 10 or more degrees shall also be checked on both sides of the angle.

The sags shall be determined by means of a transit or other approved methods. At least one person shall be provided

to measure the correct sag for pulls up to five spans, two persons for six to ten spans and three persons for eleven

spans or more.

The total number of spans to be checked shall be not less than two in a four-span section, three for a section up to two

kilometers and in proportion for a longer section.

In the quad conductor bundle the sag of the two upper sub-conductors shall be the same. The lower sub-conductors

shall be sagged from 30 to 60 mm more than the upper sub-conductors.

A tolerance of plus or minus 10 mm of sag per 30 meter of horizontal span length, but not to exceed 150 mm in any

one span, will be permitted, provided: 1) that: (1) upper sub-conductors in the span assume the same sag; (2) the

necessary ground clearance is obtained; (3) the conductor tension between successive sagging operations is

equalized so that the suspension insulator assemblies will assume the proper position when the conductor is clipped

in; (4) the sag in the lower sub-conductor of the bundle is 30 to 60 mm more than the sag in the upper sub conductors.



Log books shall be maintained to record all conductor installation data and chronological progress.

The temperature, spans, tower, general weather, wind velocity and direction, sags, tensions, and drawing references

shall be recorded for each section of conductor as it is being installed, tensioned and sagged. When possible, sagging

operations shall be scheduled when wind velocity is at or near zero.

Radio or telephone communication shall be used to relay information and instructions between the conductor payout

station, intermediate check points, mobile stations and the pulling stations at all times during stringing operations. A

failure of communication requires immediate cessation of the conductor pulling operation.

� Conductor Clipping-in

After being sagged, the conductor shall be allowed to hang in the stringing blocks for not less than 2 hours before

clipping-in is commenced, to permit the conductor tension to equalize.

Plumb marks shall be made on the conductors in the vertical plane through the centerline of the tower prior to clipping-

in. Only paint, crayon, or wax pencil shall be used for marks on conductors.

All conductors marking in the section being sagged shall be accomplished while the conductors are in the sheaves

and before clipping-in or dead ending is begun.

The total time during which the conductor is allowed to remain in the stringing blocks before being clipped-in shall not

exceed 72 hours.

Torque wrenches shall be used to tighten all nuts on clamps. The torque applied shall be in conformance with the

recommendation of the manufacturer.

Yoke plates for V-Vee string insulators shall be installed as shown on the drawings and shall hang at 90 degrees to

the conductor axis within a tolerance of plus or minus 2.5 cm.

Well-padded pull-lift hooks or other approved methods shall be used for handling conductors during the clipping-in

operation.

� Installation of Conductor, Shield wire and OPGW Accessories

o Splices and Dead Ends

All splices shall be of the compression type.

All splices shall be made at least 15 meters away from structures and no splices shall be made in dead end spans or

spans greater than 600 meters or spans crossing over the highways, railroads, major canals, rivers and transmission

lines of voltages greater than 33 kV unless approved by the Project Manager.

As a rule not more than one joint or splice should be made in any one conductor in any one span. However, in

exceptional cases, as in the repair of damaged conductors, or when necessary owing to stringing limitations two

splices will be allowed.

The splices and compression dead ends shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations of the

Manufacturer of the accessories.

Conductor shall be laid out straight for a distance of 15 meters and straightened at the end before preparation of the

ends for splicing or dead-ending. The ends of the conductor shall be thoroughly cleaned immediately prior to

compressing. After the compression has been completed, all corners, sharp projections and indentations shall be



carefully rounded and smoothed, and tape, tape residue, and filler paste shall be removed from splice and conductor.

If the completed splice requires straightening, it shall be straightened on a wood block by use of a wooden maul.

Splicing, dead-ending and repair of damaged conductor shall be done in the presence of nominated person of the

Project Manager.

If the completed splice or dead-end is not satisfactory, in the opinion of the Project Manager or his nominated person,

it shall be removed and a new splice or dead-end shall be properly installed.

The Contractor's inspector shall stamp his own initials on the aluminum sleeve of each compression joint and

compression dead end completed under his supervision.

o Repair of Conductors and Shield wire

Damage is any deformity on the surface of the conductor or shield wire which can be detected by eye or by feel and

shall be repaired by whichever the following methods is appropriate:

- Repair by manual polishing

- Installation of repair sleeves over the damaged part

- Installation of compression joints

- Replacement with new conductor or shield wire

Slight damage such as superficial scratches or abrasions, which are not deeper than one-third the strand diameter,

can be repaired by dressing with a fine emery cloth.

Severe cuts which cannot be repaired with emery cloth due to their depth or extension, and cause increase in the

resistance of the external layers shall be repaired by use of repair sleeves, provided that not more than one-third of

the outer layer is cut or damaged over a length of less than 10 centimeters.

Damages of extent greater than described in above paragraphs shall be repaired by replacing the damaged length of

the cable using compression joints.

When there is repeated damage in the same span or in consecutive spans, the Project Manager or his nominated

person may require all conductors in these spans to be replaced.

In the case when signs of corrosion are detected during the stringing operation, the reels containing corroded

conductors shall be set aside, the operation shall be interrupted and the Project Manager or his nominated person

shall be informed immediately.

Whenever a repair sleeve is installed, a rope cage shall be placed on the sleeve to ensure that there will be no

damage from sub-conductor slapping prior to installation of the spacer-dampers.

For the repair of the shield wires, only compression joints shall be used.

o Jumper Connections

Where compression type dead-ends are used, the jumper shall be one continuous piece, and compression-type

jumper terminals bolted to the compression-type dead-ends shall be used.



At overhead shield wire dead-ends with bolted strain clamps and OPGW with thimble clevis and grip dead end,

sufficient length of wire to form the jumper loop to clear the tower shall be allowed. Parallel groove bolted clamps will

be used for connection.

� OPGW Jointing/Splicing and Installation of OPGW Joint Boxes

OPGW jointing/splicing and joint boxes installation will be carried out by the Contractor.

However, following general instructions should be followed:

No mid span joint shall be allowed in the OPGW. All joints shall be performed in a joint box located on the tower just

above the location of anti-climbing device. OPGW jointing (splicing) and joint boxes installation including supporting

device for joint boxes shall be executed by the Contractor. OPGW shall be dropped to the joint boxes along with tower

braces by installing OPGW attaching clamps at about one meter interval.

4.7.11 Installation of Dampers

� Spacer Dampers

The four sub-conductors of each phase shall be secured to each other by means of spacer dampers installed strictly in

accordance with data furnished.

The intervals, measured along the length of the conductors at which spacers are installed shall be as shown on the

data sheets with tolerances not more than plus/minus 1.0 meter.

Spacer-dampers shall be installed in a span only after that span has been dead-ended and clipped-in. The installation

of spacer dampers shall be completed in each section within 72 hours after the sub-conductors have been sagged.

The clamps shall be properly aligned on the conductors. Distorted shape of the spacer dampers will be considered an

unsatisfactory installation and shall be corrected or the spacer damper replaced.

The bolts of the breakaway type shall be tightened until the outer head breaks off.

Spacer dampers shall be installed with the bolt heads in a downward position for viewing from the ground.

� Vibration Dampers

Vibration dampers shall be attached to the overhead shield wires and OPGW at the ends of all spans and as

designated on the data sheets. The vibration dampers shall be fastened securely to overhead shield wires & OPGW

so that they will hang in vertical planes. Spacing of dampers shall be in accordance with the Drawings. Breakaway

type bolts shall be tightened until the outer head breaks off.

4.8 Pre Commissioning and Commissioning Tests

4.8.1 Pre Commissioning Tests

� Mechanical Tests

o For steel structures, ensure that structure type is as per specification/drawings/structure list

o Check galvanizing and thickness (rust is not acceptable).

o Check bolt types and tightness (torque wrench method).

o Ensure anti-climbing guards are correctly installed.

o Check step bolt tightness.

o For porcelain insulators, check insulators for chips, cracks, etc. Ensure correct number of insulators have been

installed in each string. Ensure that cotter keys have been properly installed.

o Make sure that insulators are clean and line is safe to be energized.



o Check that all line hardware and fittings (insulators, corona rings, vibration dampers, spacer dampers, conductor

clamps, armor rods, etc) is installed correctly and in correct locations as per specifications and drawings.

o Check that all splices are correct and installed in correct span locations.

o Check that all jumpers are installed correctly. Ensure correct clearances between jumper and structure as well as

with other phases at acute angle locations.

o Ensure there is no twist in the insulator string.

o Check that overhead shield wire and OPGW are grounded to towers as specified.

o Ensure that sags for phase and overhead ground conductors are even and according to the specification.

o Check that ground clearances are as per specification.

o Check circuit/phase identification plates, structure number plates, danger sign plates, etc. have been correctly

installed at each structure and aerial markers at the required structures.

o Check line/phase correctly transposed at the specified locations and clearance between the phases is as per

specification.

� Electrical Tests

o Check tower footing resistance as per specification.

o Verification of physical phase arrangement.

o Perform sequence impedance test (both zero and positive sequence).

o Perform continuity and insulation test of complete transmission line with appropriate test equipment.

o Tests on OPGW:

- OTDR test of each fiber

- Attenuation test

- Continuity test

4.8.2 Commissioning Tests

o Perform phase sequence/rotation check.

o Inspection of Facilities for any visual/audible abnormality


Final Report

Environmental Management Consultants (EMC) Chapter – 5: Description of the Environment Page 1 of 41

Chapter 5 Description of the Environment

This Section of the EIA presents the profile of the macroenvironment and microenvironment of project area. The

macroenvironment includes Jamshoro district which was carved out of Dadu district in 2004. The microenvironment

encompasses Manjhand Taluka. The location of projected Lahra Power Plant and microenvironment of the project

area are shown in Figure 5.1 and Figure 5.2 respectively.

5.1 The Macroenvironment: District Jamshoro

5.1.1 Geography

Located at 67o16”20’ to 68o27”37’E longitudes and 24o 58”14’ to 26o 36”33’N latitudes, on the right bank of River Indus,

Jamshoro district is bounded on the north by Dadu district, on the east by River Indus, on the south by Thatta district,

on southwest by Karachi district and on the west by the Kirthar Range which is the dividing line between Sindh and

Baluchistan. The district takes its name from Jamshoro City which has its headquarters.

The administrative framework of Jamshoro district has four Talukas: Sehwan (area 2,830 km2, population about

170,589), Kotri (area 1, 845 km2, population about 215,966), Thana Bula Khan (area 4,799.31 km2, population about

179,527), and Manjhand (area 1,630 km2, population about 100,135). It is here that the Project site is located. District

Jamshoro has 28 union councils and 174 mouzas (revenue village). Out of these mouzas, 139 are rural, 6 are urban,

11 are partly urban and 13 are un-populated mouzas.

5.2 The Microenvironment

The microenvironment encompasses the specific site of activity i.e. the Lakhra Power Plant site on Indus Highway,

N55. The site is located in UC Manzoorabad of Manjhand Taluka of Jamshoro district, and geographically situated at

25o 26’ 55.23” N 68o 17’ 00.59” E. The project site is accessed easily from Super Highway M-9 to Indus Highway N-55.

It is adjacent to which leads to railway crossing at main Jamshoro market.

The microenvironment of Project area also forms part of Deh Kohistan. The land here is a barren, flat to mildly hilly

tract, consisting of outlying spurs of the Kirthar Range. Cultivation is carried out wherever alluvial soil exists and near

or along the numerous depressions where rain water carried by hill streams (nallas) can be stored. Cattle grazing,

stone quarrying, gravel and sand collection and transportation, besides wood cutting are the main occupation. The

vegetative growth in this area is limited to short grasses, shrubs and scrubs along with a few drought resistant trees.

Soil cover in Deh Kohistan area is very thin due to severe wind erosion on land and soil erosion in the drainage basin.

Natural vegetation has almost disappeared from the surface plain. The soils of the area in this region are shallow,

strongly calcareous silt loam with weak structure. The slope of the stony waste land and the hilly region is towards the

syncline of river Indus and its tributaries.

5.2.1 Power Plant Site

The Feasibility Study1 carried out in 1984 identified the preferred sites for the power plant because of i) the presence

of a dedicated railway line, which connects the coal mining area that is 45 km north-northwest of Hyderabad and 20

km west of the Indus, and ii) availability of water from the Indus. The Lakhra coal mine area is 112 m (367.4 ft) above

the Indus flood plain and consists of low, flat-topped hills Laki limestone with slopes and valleys of Rannikot formation

and Basal Laki laterite. The area is barren with a few shrubs and bushes and no trees. The population is very sparse,

consisting mainly of nomads who graze their herds during the brief wet season. The Jamshoro area, 10 m above the

Indus flood plain, forms the east side of the Lakhra anticline and is covered with Laki limestone containing marlstone

1 Lakhra Coal and Power Development Project Review, USAID


Final Report


and shale. Manzoorabad is on the east of the existing Lakhra Power Station. The area on the west is barren stoney

wasteland; it will house towers that will carry the transmission lines.

The Lakhra coal mine area is 112 m (367.4 ft) above the Indus flood plain. The Indus River flows north to south on the

east side of the microenvironment and is largely undulating. The west bank of Indus River is also used for drawing

water for existing Lakhra Power Station.


Figure 5.1: Location of proposed Lakhra Coal Power Plant


Final Report



Figure 5.2: Microenvironment of the proposed Transmission Lines

5.3 Topography

The Lakhra anticline is a breached anticline. The interior has been eroded, forms a broad basin, and exposes strata as

low as the Bara Formation. Low rounded hills and broad lowlands form on the Bara Formation. Broad benches form

on shale and sandstone of the Lakhra Formation; beds of limestone form ledges and underlie dip slopes. The

generally nonresistant Sohnari Formation crops out in low rounded ledges and underlie dip slopes. The generally

nonresistant Sohnari Formation crops out in low rounded hills and in steep slopes of shale. Siltstone and sandstone

under the scree of the overlying limestone. Where thick, the limestone beds of the Laki Formation form cliffs;

elsewhere, they form ledges. They underlie extensive dip slopes that are interrupted by steep-walled nallas (canyons,

gullies, ravines, or watercourses and the streams in them) on the east side of the anticline and shale slopes and

limestone ledges near the core of the anticline. Dissected eastward sloping benches, terraces, pediments, and the

dissected alluvial fan of Lakhra Nala are formed of older alluvium. Sediments in nallas, on flood plains, and on most

alluvial fans are composed of younger alluvium.

The Lakhra coal mine area is 112 m (367.4 ft) above the Indus flood plain and consists of low, flat-topped hills Laki

limestone with slopes and valleys of Ranikot formation and Basal Laki laterite. The area is barren with a few shrubs

Manzoorabad


Final Report


and bushes and no trees. The population is very sparse, consisting mainly of nomads who graze their herds during the

brief wet season. The Jamshoro area, 10 m (32.8 ft) above the Indus flood plain, forms the east side of the Lakhra

anticline and is covered with Laki limestone containing marlstone and shale.

5.4 Geology

The geology of the Sindh region of Pakistan is closely related to the formation process of Himalayan mountain ranges

resulting in intense deformation with complex folding, high angle strike-slip faults and crust thickening expressed in a

series of thrust faults. Figure 5.3 shows the geology of the Project area within Sindh Province.

Most parts of Sindh are covered either by recent alluvium or wind-borne sand. The principal features of geological

significance are to be found in the hilly portions of the province, towards the west of the Indus. Outlying extensions of

this hilly tract occur east of the Indus as well, near Sukkur, Hyderabad and Jerruck.

The hilly region of western Sindh consists almost entirely of rocks belonging to the tertiary system of geological

nomenclature. It is only along the Laki Range and in its neighborhood that there are some exposed rocks belonging to

the next older system, the Cretaceous. With the exception of some volcanic beds associated with these Cretaceous

strata, all the rock formations of western Sindh are of sedimentary origin. All the important hill masses consist of

limestone.

According to AH Kazmi, the region belongs structurally to Lyari embayment zone bordering the Kirthar fold in the

southwestern part of the Thano Bulla Khan-Jhimpir area. A thick sequence of Tertiary sedimentary rocks mainly

comprising limestone, shale, mudstone and sandstone, ranging in age from Eocene to Pleistocene underlie or are

exposed throughout the area. The deposition of the sequence was in the remnant of the shallow Tethys seaway,

which was gradually eclipsed as a result of the northward drifting of the Indian plate and its ultimate collision with the

Eurasian plate to the north. The shoreline of the Indus plain had, during the Oligocene and Miocene era, a north-south

orientation and extended from the area presently occupied by the Kirthar fore deep up to Karachi and beyond. A

relatively shallow sea washed its shores.

A sequence of lateritic clay and shale with beds of arenaceous sandstone of Laki Formation, named as Sonhari

Member of Eocene age is found in Deh Kohistan, where the proposed Project is located. Geological investigations of

the Deh Kohistan area, according to Kazmi as well as DeJong, suggest the presence of (Shallow marine Early to

Middle Eocene Laki limestone and Late Eocene Tyon Formation) only Middle and Tertiary rock formations comprising

fresh and slightly weathered recent and sub-recent shoreline deposits. Principal constituents of these deposits are the

interbedded sandstone and shale together with subordinate amounts of large size gravels or conglomerate.

Geotechnical investigations report for the wind power project in Deh Kohistan prepared by Civil and Geotechnical

Engineers Testing Laboratory gives the stratum description of the Project site. A study of the borehole logs shows

that the top 6-8 m comprise of silty clay, shale, sand and clay stone deposits. The silty clay/shale deposits possess

medium to high plasticity. Such high plasticity strata are susceptible to swelling upon wetting and shrinkage upon

drying.


Final Report

Environmental Management Consultants (EMC) Chapter - 5 Page 5 of 41


Figure 5.3: Geological Map of Sindh

Project site


Final Report


5.5 Soil Types

The soil of Project area comprise of rock outcrops and loamy very shallow steep mountain soils of mainly arid and

semi-arid zone. Soil of the Sindh Province including Project and its Area of Influence (AOI) is shown in the Figure 5.4.

The soil cover of the Project site and its AOI is very thin due to severe wind erosion and soil erosion in the drainage

basin. Most of the rocks contain limestone. Natural vegetation has almost disappeared from the surface plain. The

soils are shallow, strongly calcerous silt loam with weak structure. The slope of the entire Project site is towards west

to east i.e. towards the river Indus. The outcrops comprise either bare rocks or have very shallow soils. Overall, the

physical, geographical and hydrogeological features of the Project site and AOI portray the distinctive features of

desertified arid land.

Source: Study of Riverine Forest Upstream Sukkur and Downstream Kotri, 2008, WWF Pakistan

Figure 5.4: Soil Map of Sindh with Project Site

5.6 Earthquake Hazard

The seismicity map of Pakistan (5.4) shows that the earthquake zones have been hit by earthquakes a number of

times, but the depth of their epicenter is not usually lower than 33 km. The map also shows the yellow line, which

marks the frequency zones as well as the fault lines. It also shows that the yellow line on entering the Arabian Sea

bifurcates into one that travels along the coastline and the other goes southwest. This indicates that there are quite a

few other active faults in Lower Sindh, including a thrust-and-fold belt extending northward parallel to the transform

fault separating India from Asia, and the Rann of Kutch fault system trending westward towards Jhimpir, Karachi city

Project site

and AOI


Final Report


and Makran Coast bordering the Arabian Sea. The map does not show the presence of the unique Mud Volcanoes,

which are still active on the Baluchistan coast as a result of impact of the Indian Plate under the Arabian Plate.

Seismic activity in the macroenvironment of Project area is caused by the dynamics of slow but constant relative

motion of the active Karachi Triple Junction (KTJ) of three major tectonic plates viz. the Indian Plate, the Arabian Plate,

and the Eurasian Plate of the earth's crust. Their corresponding fault systems comprising a subduction zone, a

transform boundary, and the ancient rift system, intersect in the general vicinity of the Triple Junction. Each such

system produces a distinct type of ground motion and appears to have been reactivated, with an associated hazard

risk that can be disastrous. Seismic activity in the region is the result of movement on one or more faults and mainly

from intra-plate active faults, including the Karachi-Jati, Allah Bund-Rann of Kutch, Surjan-Jhimpir, and Pab.


Figure 5.5: Seismicity & Natural Disasters - Pakistan, 1990-2000.

The macroenvironment of Project site is about 200 km on the NEE, while Karachi lies approximately 160 km east of

the triple junction. The western and north-trending arms of the triple junction sustain convergent and trans-current

rates of 28-33 mm/yr respectively.

The presence of a recently discovered active Sonne fault indicates that the Arabian plate has been fragmented across

the southwest corner of the triple junction defining a triangular plate: the Ormara plate whose velocity relative to the

Arabian plate increases the subduction velocities by a few millimeters per year compared with the rate at the west. In

addition to these clearly defined plate boundaries, other active structural zones have produced damaging earthquakes

that have been felt in the macro environment of Project site in Deh Kohistan in the past 200 years. They include the

following faults:

1. Karachi-Jati

Project site


Final Report


2. Surjan-Jhimpir,

3. Pab Fault

4. Hab Fault

5. Rann of Kutch.


Figure 5.6: Fault Map of Pakistan

Surjan Fault: Surjan Fault, located in the Frontal Part of Kirthar fold and thrust belt, is a hinterland dipping high angle

fault, which extends from Jhimpir to San area. Some NS trending thrusts along Thano Bulla Khan Ranges collectively

constitute Thano Bulla Khan fault zone. A number of strike slip faults with limited aerial extent cut obliquely the strata

at many places. The northern Kirthar is dominated by NE trending while southernmost part is dominated more by NW

trending strike slip faults.

These N-S trending dip-slip or bedding-plane faults are active along the Kirthar Range Front. This fault cuts across the

Quaternary deposits on the north of Karachi and west of Mirpur Sakro. The southern end of this fault is intersected by

the northwest trending Jhimpir Fault on the west of Jhimpir. The interaction of these two faults is characterized by at

least four tele-seismic events of shallow focal depth and magnitude 3-6. The maximum magnitude of the earthquake

associated with the Surjan Fault is of the order of M ≈ 6.1.

Jhimpir Fault: A number of epicenters are located on this N-W trending fault. The fault has produced an earthquake

of M ≈ 5.6 on Richter scale.

Project site


Final Report


Pab Fault: This NNW-SSE trending 135 km long fault is located in the eastern part of the Pab Range. It has

dislocated vertically the Quaternary alluvial fans. The maximum magnitude of the earthquake associated with this fault

is of the order M ≈ 7.0 on Richter scale.

Hub Fault: The Hub valley is traversed by this fault.

Rann of Kutch Fault: This E-W trending fault has produced earthquake of the order of M~7.6 on Richter scale. In

1819 and 1956, this fault was responsible for severe earthquakes in Gujarat, Tharparkar and Indus delta. This fault

system also known as Allah Bund Fault passes in the proximity of the Steel Mills and Karachi Nuclear Power plant. It

is 225 km in length and is responsible for the production of earthquake of considerably high magnitude of up to 7.6 M

on Richter scale and of IX to X intensity on the Modified Mercallis, MM scale on June 16, 1819.

Additionally a complex series of faults generally oriented easterly and slightly concave to the north have been

identified through aerial photographs. They are roughly parallel to the inferred zone of rupture for the 1819 earthquake

event.

Over the last sixty years, earthquakes of intensity lower than 5 on Richter scale, including those in 1945 and 1985,

have struck the region comprising the macro environment and thus far they have been of minor significance. This is

mainly because the earthquakes here are not "Inter-Plate" or "Plate Boundary" earthquakes which occur commonly

along narrow zones that follow the edges of tectonic plates.

The tectonic fault that produced the 2002-Bhuj earthquake, which registered a massive 7.7 on the Richter scale, was

part of a complex system of geologic faults that run northwest in Gujarat through the marshy Rann of Kutch, where it

produced a magnitude 7.6 quake in 1819, and also ran into Pakistan. While concealed under the loose sand of the

Rajasthan and Thar deserts and sediments of the Indus delta, this system of faults appears to continue to the west,

passing through Karachi and while extending into the Arabian Sea, it intersects another system of faults associated

with a major tectonic boundary that has produced devastating earthquakes as far north as Quetta in the past.

Together these fault systems have produced historically large earthquakes within Kohistan, notably in the Pab Range,

Thatta Taluka, and Jhimpir areas.

It is the Intra-plate type of earthquakes (Mid-Plate Earthquakes) that occur far away from plate boundaries. The latter

type earthquakes are less frequent but are capable of releasing just as much energy in a single event as one of similar

intensity along a plate boundary. These arise due to localized systems of forces in the crust sometimes associated

with ancient geological structures such as in the Rann of Kutch. Thus while the October 8, 2005 mega thrust

earthquake was the direct result of the interaction between Indian Plate and the Eurasian plate, the earthquakes of

July, August and October 11 in the macro environment are intra-plate or Mid-Plate events.

It may be noted that no earthquake, including the 1945 Makran and 2001 Bhuj events, as well as the occasional

shaking from M 4-5 earthquakes on faults in Kohistan, has ever produced documented damage anywhere. Although

the 1819 earthquake was apparently similar or larger in magnitude than the 2001 Bhuj event, little damage occurred in

Thatta and Hyderabad in 1819 compared to 2001 even though the former event was closer to these towns/cities.

The Table 5.2 shows the earthquake occurrences over the last forty years. The Table does not include the numerous

events of magnitude less than 4.0 on Richter scale. Earthquakes of recent occurrence were recorded on July 16, 2005,

followed by one on August 6, another on August 13, yet another on October 9 and then again on October 11, 2005.

They were all of magnitude between 4 and 5.1 on Richter scale. The epicenter of these earthquakes was away from

those listed in table. The epicenter of the most recent tremor of January 2, 2009 was 100 kilometers in the coastal

region of Thatta district. It had a shallow depth of 10 kilometers and magnitude of 2.2 M on Richter scale.


Final Report


Table 5.1: Epicenter, Depth, Magnitude & Intensity of Earthquakes Near Jhimpir

Year Coordinates Depth Magnitude

Richter Scale

Intensity

MM Location

1962 24o70’N66o00E 0 4.50 - Karachi

1965 25o 03N67o76’E 40 4.50 - Karachi

1966 25o 0N68o00’ E - 5.0 VI-VII Jhimpir

1968 24o 61N66o42’ E 19 4.10 - Karachi

1970 25o 28N66o65’ E 33 4.90 V Karachi

1971 25o 00N68o00’ E - 4.50 V Jhimpir

1972 25o 35N66o71’ E 33 4.50 V Karachi

1973 25o 00N68o00’ E - 5.00 VI Jhimpir

1973 25o 48N66o33’ E 57 4.90 V Karachi

1975 25o 50N66o80’ E - 4.50 V Gadani

1975 25o 22N66o59’ E 33 4.90 V Karachi

1976 24o 96N70o38’ E 14 4.70 V Karachi

1984 25o 86N66o41’ E 33 4.70 VI Karachi

1985 24o 90N67o39’ E 33 5.00 VI Karachi

1986 25o 34N66o60’ E 33 4.50 V Karachi

1992 25o 25N67o76’ E 33 3.60 IV Karachi

1996 25o 06N66o76’ E 33 - - Karachi

1998 25o 69N66o46’ E 33 4.40 V Karachi

1998 24o 85N66o35’ E 33 4.50 V Karachi

2009 24o 31N67o18’ E 10 2.2 IV Thatta


According to a map created by the Pakistan Meteorological Department, the country is divided into 4 zones based on

expected ground acceleration. The areas surrounding Quetta, those along the Makran coast and parts of the NWFP,

and also along the Afghan border fall in Zone 4. The rest of the NWFP lies in Zone 3, with the exception of southern

parts of this province, which lie in Zone 2. The remaining parts of the Pakistani coastline also lie in Zone 3. The

remaining parts of the country lie in Zone 2. According to this classification this ecosystem would be placed in Zone 2.

Seismic Zones are a vestige of the Uniform Building Code or UBC and were introduced in the 1949 edition when the

USA seismic hazard map, published in 1948 by the US Coast and Geodetic Survey was adopted into the UBC. The

first edition of the U.S. Uniform Building Code (UBC); however, was published in 1927 by the Pacific Coast Building

Officials (PCBO), contained an optional seismic appendix, that used a coefficient C’ which ranged from 7.5% to 10% g

(% of gravity applied as a lateral inertial load).

The Zone number correlated to a level of acceleration expressed as a % of gravity or g. The maps were intended to

represent the likely levels of earthquake ground shaking and, therefore, the potential for structural damage. The maps

evolved over time including the addition of a Seismic Zone 4 in 1976 and the division of Zone 2 into 2A and 2B in

1988. The ground accelerations associated with the Zones were probabilistic based and correlated to prescribed

levels of ground accelerations with Zone 4 being the highest and 0 being negligible. (Source:

http://www.nishkian.com/what-happened-to-seismic-zones/#sthash.1qtSsJRl.dpuf)

The following table describes the peak ground acceleration for zones 1, 2A, 2B, 3 and 4.


Final Report



Figure 5.7: Seismic Map of Pakistan

Table 5.2: Peak Ground Acceleration for each Zone

Zone Peak Horizontal Ground Class Acceleration (g*) Seismic Zone Factor

1 0.05 to 0.08 g 0.075

2A 0.08 to 0.16g 0.15

2B 0.16 to 0.24g 0.20

3 0.24 to 0.32g 0.30

4 > 0.32g 0.40

Note: g* is the acceleration due to gravity



Final Report


5.7 Climate

Climate is the average course or condition of the weather at a place usually over a period of years as exhibited by

temperature, wind velocity, and precipitation. The climate of the Study Area is broadly hot and dry summer mild winter

and rainfall in monsoon.

The weather station closest to the Study Area is located at Hyderabad (25° 38’ N, 68° 42’ E), approximately 42 km

east of the plant site. The climatic description of the Study Area presented in this section is based on the 30-year

climatic data of Hyderabad. The hottest month is June in which the maximum average monthly temperature exceeds

40 ºC. The winters are mild with temperature dropping to 20 ºC in January. The Study Area receives approximately

178 mm of rain annually. Almost 65 % of the rain is concentrated in the monsoon months of July and August. Monthly

temperature, rainfall and wind data are provided in Figure 5.8 and Figure 5.9. The annual and seasonal wind-roses

are shown in Table 5.3 and Figure 5.10.

According to Koppen climate classification, the climate in the Study Area is arid desert hot climate which is broadly hot

and dry summer with mild winter rainfall. Broadly speaking, there are four seasons in Pakistan. These seasons are

defined on the basis of temperature and the changes associated with the southwest monsoon. The southwest

monsoon is a wind system that prevails from April to October in the Indian Ocean, and is characterized by a reversal

in wind direction and heavy rainfall over most of the Indian Subcontinent. Within Pakistan, considerable variation is

found in temperature and monsoonal changes. Thus, the specific characteristics and duration of seasons depend on

geographic location. The general characteristics of the season in the Study Area on the basis of climatic data of

Hyderabad are presented below:

o Winter (December to early March): The winters have mild weather with minimum temperatures ranging between

11 to 19 ºC with January being the coldest month. Winter is mostly dry with accumulative rainfall of about 10 mm

similarly relative humidity is around 50%. The Wind direction is mostly from North to South in entire winter with

an average speed of 1.4 meters per second (m/s) and shift to Northeast direction in the month of March and

remains there for the rests of the year.

o Summer (April to June): The summers are hot with average temperature reaching 35 ºC with June being the

hottest month where temperate may cross 40 ºC. Summer is also dry with rainfall of less than 14 mm in the

month of June relative humidity ranges between 50% in April to 64% in June. The wind direction is towards

Northeast with average wind speed of 3 m/s.

o Monsoon (July to August): Monsoon is the characteristic feature of the subcontinent with hot average

temperature reaching 36 ºC and heavy rainfall. From the historic climatic data (1961-1990) almost 65% of the

rainfall occurs in this season with slightly higher rainfall in august than July. The relative humidity reaches

monthly average of more than 65%. The wind direction is still towards Northeast with average wind speed of 3.6

m/sec.

o Post-Monsoon summer (September to November): In Post Monsoon temperatures starts dropping and reaches

24 ºC by November, although in month of September the recorded rainfall is of 16 mm but rest of season is

mostly dry with humidity of around 50%. Wind direction is from Southwest to Northeast which changes its course

towards north in the end of season.

Post-Monsoon summer (September to November): In Post Monsoon temperatures starts dropping and reaches 24 ºC

by November, although in month of September the recorded rainfall is of 16 mm but rest of season is mostly dry with

humidity of around 50%. Wind direction is towards southwest which changes its course towards north in the end of

season.


Final Report


*Highest and lowest recorded temperatures are based on data collected at the Hyderabad station since it was established in 1877

Source: Pakistan Meteorological Department

Figure 5.8: Temperature of the Study Area

* Based on data collected at the Hyderabad station since it was established in 1877


Figure 5.9: Rainfall in the Study Area

Table 5.3 Mean Wind of the Study Area

Month Wind Speed(m/s) Wind Direction

Jan 1.2 N

Feb 1.3 N

Mar 1.3 SW

Apr 2.2 SW

May 3.5 SW

Jun 3.9 SW

Jul 3.7 SW

Aug 3.6 SW

Sep 2.8 SW

Oct 1.4 SW

Nov 1.3 N

Dec 1.2 N

Year 2.3 SW

Based on data collected at the Hyderabad station between 1975 and 1979


-10

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec

Temperature Maximum

Minimum

Highest Recorded

Lowest Recorded

0

50

100

150

200

250

300

350

400

450

Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec

Ra

in F

all

(m

m)

Mean Monthly

Wettest Month


Final Report


Oct. 2010 to Feb. 2011 Mar. to Jun. (2011) Jul. to Sep. (2011)


Figure 5.10: Wind Rose for 2011

Table 5.4: Climatic Data of District Jamshoro


Final Report


Table 5.4: Climatic Data of District Jamshoro

Source: Irrigation & Power Department, Government of Sindh


Final Report


5.8 Air Quality

The quality of our air is often described in terms of the amount of contaminants released by emission sources, and the

concentrations measured at ambient (outdoor) monitoring stations. It is important to make a distinction between the

emissions themselves and the resultant ambient air quality. While the emissions released from industrial stacks, motor

vehicle tailpipes, residential chimneys and the myriad of sources in the region do contribute to ambient air quality,

some air contaminants discharged into the atmosphere undergo transformations or reactions, leading to secondary

pollutants. Two examples are the reaction of nitrogen oxides and volatile organic compounds in the presence of

sunlight to form ground-level ozone, and the reaction of nitrogen oxides, Sulphur oxides & ammonia to form secondary

fine particulate matter.

Tropospheric air is highly susceptible to hostile anthropogenic activities taking place at ground level or in vicinity of

ground; which are mainly caused by Fossil fuel combustion in large industrial units and also caused by high density

transportation by mobile & immobile vehicles. Degradation of fossil fuel under the impact of high temperature give rise

to varying gaseous products composed mainly of CO2 in association with small amounts of Particulates, CO, NOx,

SOx and UHC,s etc. These pollutant gases changes the ambient concentration of air environment and could cause

sufficient damage to ground level air ecology should it is present beyond the safe limits as defined by either USEPA or

WHO guidelines on air quality standards.

Health, visual air quality and climate change issues arise when contaminants are emitted into the air at concentrations

that may be harmful to human health and the natural and built environments. These contaminants can also undergo

chemical reactions in the air to produce other contaminants, called secondary contaminants, which can additionally

affect our health and environment. Table 5.5 provides a summary of the possible effects associated with air

contaminants and greenhouse gases.

Table 5.5: Potential Impacts Associated with Air Contaminants

Pollutant Description Health Impacts Ecosystem

Impacts Climate Impacts

Other Socio-

economic Impacts

Inhalable

particulate

matter

(PM10)

PM10 refers to

microscopic solid

and liquid particles,

10 micrometers or

smaller, that are

suspended in the

atmosphere.

Aggravates

respiratory and

cardiovascular

disease, reduces

lung function,

increases

respiratory

symptoms and can

lead to premature

death.

Contributes to

acidification and

nutrient

enrichment of

soil and surface

water.

Affects radiative

balance and

climate.

Contributes to poor

visual air quality,

which affects the

well-being of

residents. Poor

visual air quality

impacts tourism.

Damages or

discolors

structures and

property.

Fine

particulate

matter

(PM2.5)

PM2.5 refers to

microscopic solid

and liquid particles,

2.5 micrometers or

smaller, that are

suspended in the

atmosphere; can be

emitted directly from

sources or formed

secondarily in the

atmosphere

Aggravates

respiratory and

cardiovascular

disease, reduces

lung function,

increases

respiratory

symptoms and can

lead to premature

death.

Contributes to

acidification and

nutrient

enrichment of

soil and surface

water.

Affects radiative

balance and

climate.

Contributes to poor

visual air quality,

which affects the

well-being of

residents. Poor

visual air quality

impacts tourism.

Damages or

discolors

structures and

property.

Sulphur Colorless gas with Aggravates asthma Contributes to Damages or


Final Report





Other Socio-

economic Impacts

dioxide

(SO2) *

pungent odor that

smells like a struck

match.

and increases

respiratory

symptoms.

acidification of

soil and surface

water and

mercury

methylation in

wetland areas

discolors

structures and

property.

Ammonia

(NH3)*

Ammonia is a

colorless gas with a

pungent smell.

Irritates eyes, nose

and throat, and

may induce

coughing.

Contributes to

nutrient

enrichment of

soil and surface

water.

Odors affect the

well-being of

residents.

Black

carbon

(BC)*

Black carbon (or

soot) comes from

the incomplete

combustion of fossil

fuels, biofuel, and

biomass.

Black carbon

absorbs radiation

from the sun,

increasing the rate

of global climate

change.

Health impacts of

black carbon are

closely linked with

Diesel particulate

matter, which is

responsible for

Lifetime cancer risk

due to air pollution.

Higher water

temperatures in

oceans and

rivers make

them less

hospitable to

salmon and

other fish.

Drier and hotter

climates make it

more difficult for

species

accustomed to

coastal

rainforests.

Black carbon

has been

identified as a

short lived

climate forcer

and cited as the

second biggest

contributor to

global climate

change after

carbon dioxide,

although its

effects are not

as long-lived.

Climate refugees

may begin arriving

in the region

because of climate

induced flooding,

desertification, loss

of drinking water,

and other impacts.

Damage from

increased

frequency and

intensity of storms.

Carbon

monoxide

(CO)

An odorless gas

which, when

inhaled, reduces our

body’s ability to use

oxygen.

Decreases athletic

performance,

aggravates cardiac

symptoms,

increases hospital

admissions for

cardiac diseases,

and can lead to

premature death

Ground

level ozone

(O3)

Very reactive

oxygen species.

Formed in the

atmosphere from

Reactions involving

NOx and VOCs in

the presence of

sunlight.

Aggravates

respiratory and

cardiovascular

decreases

Lung function and

increases

respiratory

symptoms,

increases

susceptibility to

respiratory infection

and can lead to

premature death.

Damages

vegetation and

impacts tree

growth.

Ground-level

ozone is

identified as a

short-lived

climate forcer.

Reduces crop

yields.


Final Report





Other Socio-

economic Impacts

Nitrogen

Oxides

(NOx)*

Group of highly

reactive gases that

include nitric oxide

(NO) and nitrogen

dioxide (NO2); NO2

is an odorous,

brown and highly

corrosive gas.

Aggravates

respiratory disease

and increases

susceptibility to

respiratory

infections.

Contributes to

Acidification and

nutrient

enrichment of

soil and surface

water.

Volatile

organic

compounds

(VOC)*

A group of carbon-

containing

compounds that

tend to evaporate

quickly at ordinary

temperatures.

Some VOCs are

carcinogenic, such

as formaldehyde

and benzene.

Some VOCs are

Odorous, which

affects the

wellbeing of

residents.

Methane

(CH4)

A combustible gas,

sometimes called

natural or biogas.

Sources are

decomposition of

waste in landfills,

manure from

livestock, and

digestive processes

in cattle.

No direct health

impacts, but

climate change is

expected to cause

more high heat

days during the

summer months

which can stress

those with

preexisting heart

and lung

conditions.

Higher water

temperatures in

oceans and

rivers make

them less

hospitable to

salmon and

other fish.

Drier and hotter

climates make it

more difficult for

species

accustomed to

coastal

rainforests.

Methane is a

relatively potent

greenhouse gas.

Compared with

carbon dioxide,

it has a higher

global warming

potential, but

has been

identified as a

short-lived

climate forcer,

persisting in the

atmosphere for

around 10

years.

Climate refugees

may begin arriving

in the region

because of climate

induced flooding,


of drinking water,

and other impacts.

Damage from

Increased

frequency and


Carbon

dioxide

(CO2)

A colorless,

Odorless, and

tasteless gas that is

the by-product of

combustion of fossil

fuels. Also released

through processes

of deforestation and

other land-use

change.

No direct health

impacts, but

climate change is

expected to cause

more high heat

days during the

summer months

which can stress

those with

preexisting heart

and lung

conditions.

Higher water

temperatures in

oceans and

rivers make

them less

hospitable to

salmon and

other fish.

Drier and hotter

climates make it

more difficult for

species

accustomed to

coastal

rainforests.

CO2 is the most

abundant

greenhouse gas

and causes

global climate

change.

CO2 is long-lived

in the

atmosphere

often remaining

for more than

100 years.

Climate refugees

may begin arriving

in the region

because of climate

induced flooding,


of drinking water,

and other impacts.

Damage from

Increased

frequency and


* Contributes to PM2.5 formation with associated impacts



Final Report


Ambient air samplings were conducted at three locations from July 06th to 08th, 2014. These locations were selected

considering their proximity to the Project site and surrounding settlements. The sampling locations are shown in Figure

5.11. Summary of sampling results are presented in Table 5.6.


Figure 5.11: Ambient Air Monitoring Locations

The microenvironment of the Project is located in what is a piedmont zone of the Khirthar Range with N55 Indus

Highway separating it from the Indus river flood zone. The concerned area has no industrial activity worth the name

except the existing Lakhra Power Station and the Coal Mine. As such the air quality corresponds to that of an arid

environment. The Habibullah Mor, Hussain Rind Goth, Murid Khan Rind Goth and Bhora Khan Goth are the only

populated conglomerations that comprise the living area in the surrounding. Lakhra Coal Power Plant in the east and

vehicular traffic on Indus Highway Link road in the north, Indus Highway N55 in the east are the only point sources

that are adding the exhaust emissions. There is otherwise no other point sources. The vehicular traffic operating on

the link road as well as N-55 comprises mainly the large trucks that transport coal mined at the Lakhra coal mines.

These trucks usually carry the content uncovered and as such the roads do have larger particulate matter emissions.

Additionally the solid waste comprising mainly the fly ash are subject to wind aeolian erosion due to which the air

quality has particulate matter emissions above acceptable level in the environment as is apparent from the following

table:

Table 5.6: Ambient Air Quality at Lakhra Power Plant Microenvironment

CO

mg/m3

SO2

µg/m3

NO2

µg/m3

NO

µg/m3

SPM

µg/m3

PM10

µg/m3

PM2.5

µg/m3

Sindh Environmental Quality

Standards (SEQS) 5 120 80 40 500 150 75

IFC Guidelines [b] 125 100 [b] [b] 150 75

Northeast boundary of the plant 6.1 48.9 37.4 28.0 113.4 167.3 60.7

Murid Khan Rind Goth 4.9 31.4 29.4 10.2 108.3 121.4 44.8

Habilullah Mor 1.2 22 28 14 150 82 26.0

b IFC has not prescribed any guidelines for these parameters for the corresponding averaging period. Source: Environmental Management Consultants (EMC)

Boundary of Lakhra Plant

Murid Khan Rind Goth

Habibullah Mor


Final Report


The impact of operations at the Lakhra Coal Power Plant as well as operation of vehicular traffic on Indus Highway N-

55 and the Link Road was reduced to acceptable level as may be seen on air quality measurements at Habibullah Mor

which is the major inhabited area in the microenvironment of the Project.


Figure 5.12: Sources of Particulate Emissions


Final Report


5.9 Noise

Noise samplings were conducted at three locations from July 06th to 08th, 2014. These locations were selected

considering their proximity to the Project site and surrounding settlements. The sampling locations are shown in Figure

5.13. Summary of sampling results are presented in Table 5.7.


Figure 5.13: Noise Monitoring Locations

The main sources of noise are the existing Lakhra Power Station and vehicles on N-55.

Table 5.7: Noise Level at Lakhra Power Plant Microenvironment

Noise

dB(A)

Sindh Environmental Quality Standards (SEQS) 75

IFC Guidelines -

Northeast boundary of the plant 71.2

Murid Khan Rind Goth 61.0

Habibullah Mor 72


5.10 Water Resources

5.10.1 Surface Water

Jamshoro occupying a large section of area formerly occupied by Dadu district before 2004 and is situated in northern

part of Sindh province, bordering both Thatta and Hyderabad in the northern section respectively. The localities of

Jamshoro district which are situated in the vicinities if river water provided visible and non-visible contaminants or

impurities are eliminated. There is one water treatment plant in Hyderabad-Jamshoro road which is capable to treat

this water for diversity applications. The water used for drinking purpose comes from Indus River by tankers and

through pipelines.

Boundary of Lakhra Plant

Murid Khan Rind Goth

Habibullah Mor


Final Report


River Indus is the only surface water resource used throughout in Jamshoro district for diversity applications. The

water is primarily consumed for drinking and sanitary applications in addition to limited agricultural and other activities

in Jamshoro district.

Lakhra coal field occupies a very large section of Jamshoro district, where surface resourced water from River Indus is

transported through pumping at a Hydrant station on considerable height. This water is distributed to all Lakhra

coalfields free of cost through mobile tankers. There is no pre-treatment facility exists at hydrant station but the water

is partially self-treated via gravity settling, during its way to final consumer.

Large volume of this surface water is extensively used for two Power generation plants located in Jamshoro and

Lakhra respectively. Large scale water is also consumed in Jamshoro educational clusters consisting mainly of

University, Colleges and residences. This water is pre-treated to remove un-desired visible solid portion such as sand

and other particulates, etc, followed by disinfection to eliminate biological contamination.

In far distant villages and Goths or at temporary settlements occupied by gypsies, the water is directly consumed for

drinking applications because this water is the ultimate source for their need.

5.10.2 Ground Water

Jamshoro covering a large area formerly occupied by Dadu district before 2004 in northern part of Sindh province,

bordering both Thatta and Hyderabad in the northern section respectively. In Lakhra section of Jamshoro district the

groundwater extraction is scarce due to the anticlinal structure, the ground water is nearly absent except few small

synclinal structures, where water is found in small quantity.

Ground water is very scarcely extracted from ground throughout this section of Jamshoro District because of presence

of large surface water resources existing in River Sindh and Manchar Lake; and due to rock-based geological features

of most parts of Lakhra, in which mineral deposits of coal is dominant in addition to some other minerals.

In the south-western section of Jamshoro district along both sides of superhighway there exists plenty of groundwater

resources. In this section there is large number of agricultural and other type of farms where water need is

accomplished through groundwater resources.

5.10.3 Hydro-geological Studies of Jamshoro District

Chemical Analysis of Water Resources: Physical, Chemical and Biological Analyses of all types of water resources

was conducted on criteria parameters, in the light of APHA; USEPA & USFDA based Standard procedures and

protocols. Table 5.8 and Table 5.9 demonstrate analysis results of ground water and surface water near the project

site respectively. These sampling and analysis were conducted for the preparation of “EIA Due to Mining Activities in

various districts of Sindh, Mines and Minerals Development Department GoS through SGS Pakistan”.

Analysis results of ground resourced water were compared with WHO guidelines on drinking water; whereas quality of

surface resourced waters were compared with National Environmental Quality Standards (NEQS). Ground resourced

waters were also examined biologically to assess its drinking suitability.

The sampling sites are shown in Figure 5.14.


Final Report



Figure 5.14: Sampling sites of Ground Water and Surface Water

Table 5.8: Ground Water Samples

S.# Parameters Ldl*

Jamshoro

Sampling Site G-1

River Indus Pipeline (Lakhra Coal Mine)

WHO

1 pH at 25oC - 7.96 6.5-8

2 Conductivity, Electrical, µs/cm - 17 -

3 Solids, Total Suspended (TSS) 5 236 -

4 Solids, Total Dissolved (TDS) 5 7 <1000

5 Turbidity, NTU 0.01 <0.1 <5

6 Total Hardness, mg/l 0.05 <2.0 -

7 Alkalinity, Total as CaCO3 mg/l 5 <5.0 -

8 Chloride, mg/l 1 <1.0 250

9 Sulfate (SO4) mg/l 5 133.5 -

10 Bicarbonates (HCO3) mg/l 5 101.43 -

11 Calcium (Ca) mg/l 0.02 0.543 -

12 Magnesium (mg) mg/l 0.02 <1.0 -

13 Potassium (K) mg/l 0.2 0.033 -

14 Sodium (Na) mg/l 1 <0.05 -

15 Arsenic mg/l 0.005 <0.01 0.01

16 Barium mg/l 0.01 <0.005 0.7

17 Cadmium mg/l 0.002 <0.01 0.003


Final Report


Table 5.8: Ground Water Samples

S.# Parameters Ldl* Jamshoro

Sampling Site G-1

18 Chromium mg/l 0.02 <0.002 0.05

19 Copper mg/l 0.02 <0.02 2

20 Iron mg/l 0.02 <0.02 -

21 Lead mg/l 0.01 0.15 0.01

22 Manganese mg/l 0.02 0.03 0.5

23 Mercury mg/l 0.001 <0.02 0.001

24 Nickel mg/l 0.02 <0.001 0.02

25 Selenium mg/l 0.01 <0.02 0.01

26 Silver mg/l 1 <0.01 -

27 Zinc mg/l 0.05 <0.1 3

Microbiology

28 Heterotrophic Plate Count 500 cfu/ml 1508 -

29 Total Coliforms Absent/100ml 39 -

30 Faecal Coliforms (E.Coli) Absent/100ml 19 -

31 Faecal Streptococci/Enterococci Absent/100ml 4 - Source: EIA Due to Mining Activities in various districts of Sindh, Mines and Minerals Development Department GoS through SGS Pakistan. * Lower detection limit – is the minimum concentration of a substance that can be measured with the procedure adopted


Table 5.9: Surface Water Samples

S.# Parameters Ldl*

Jamshoro

Sampling Site S-1 NEQS Jamshoro Thana Bula Khan

( Tank Water Supply)

1 Temperature - 29.0 ≤3oC

2 pH at 25oC - 7.11 6-9

3 Total Suspended Solids 5.0 660.0 200

4 Total Dissolved Solids 5.0 <5.0 3500

5 COD 5.0 <5.0 150

6 BOD 2.0 <2.0 80

7 Total Hardness (CaCO3) 0.05 245.38 -

8 Oil & Grease 1.0 <1.0 10

9 Chloride 1.0 143.53 1000

10 Sulfate (SO4) 5 104.93 600

11 Sulphide (S) 1.0 <1.0 1.0

12 Fluoride (F) 0.01 0.1 10

13 Ammonia (NH3) 0.1 <0.1 40

14 Cyanide (CN) 0.01 <0.01 1.0

15 Phenolic Compounds 0.01 <0.01 0.1

16 Anionic Detergents 0.1 <0.1 20

17 Arsenic (As) 0.005 <0.005 1.0

18 Barium (Ba) 0.5 <0.5 1.5

19 Boron (B) 0.02 0.582 6.0

20 Chromium (Cr) 0.02 <0.02 1.0

21 Cadmium (Cd) 0.002 <0.002 0.1

22 Copper (Cu) 0.02 <0.02 1.0

23 Iron (Fe) 0.02 0.075 8.0

24 Lead (Pb) 0.01 <0.01 0.5

25 Manganese (Mn) 0.05 <0.05 1.5

26 Mercury (Hg) 0.001 <0.001 0.01

27 Nickel (Ni) 0.02 <0.02 1.0

28 Selenium (Se) 0.01 <0.01 0.5

29 Silver (Ag) 1.0 <1.0 1.0

30 Zinc (Zn) 0.05 0.1 5.0

31 Total Toxic Metals - 0.757 2.0

32 Chlorine (Residual) 0.1 <0.1 - Source: EIA Due to Mining Activities in various districts of Sindh, Mines and Minerals Development Department GoS through SGS Pakistan. * Lower detection limit – is the minimum concentration of a substance that can be measured with the procedure adopted


Final Report


Water Analysis Results

o Ground Water

All parameters well meet the WHP guideline levels.

o Surface Water

TSS exceeds the NEQS level. The other parameters well meet the NEQS standard level.

5.11 Flood / Drainage Water

On broader scale, project area lies in the flood plain of River Indus of Sindh province as shown in Figure 5.15. It is

almost flat and located at the bottom of Indus Basin. Surplus water of Indus River and its tributaries including monsoon

has to pass through Sindh. Hill torrents which emanate from Balochistan add to the pressure on both accounts, till its

outfall in the Arabian Sea. The inflow of River Indus into Sindh is dangerous, because it flows at ridge. In case of

breach the out flowing water cannot be drained back into the river at any point.

Jamshoro district is subject to flooding and was affected by the flood encountered in the year 2011. There are a few

nallas out of which Rani Nala in the north and northeastern direction of the project area overflows its banks during the

rainy season.


Final Report



Figure 5.15: Vulnerability to floods


Final Report


5.12 Biological Environment

5.12.1 Macroenvironment

Flora: Jamshoro composed of a total area of 11,200 sq. Km and is extended viable distance towards Dadu District in

the north; in the north-west towards Rani-kot section that mostly included Lakhra; and in the western boundaries

towards Karachi-Hyderabad Motorway. Both sides of Karachi-Hyderabad Motorway are rich with diversity mineral

deposits. The district is rich in flora. Manchar Lake is an ideal place having different kinds of botanical plants. Different

type of grasses and other plants of low growth in considerable. The significant trees are the balm (populas euphratica,

kandi(prosopis specigera, siras (mimosasivissa), papal (ficus religiosa). The natural shrubs are kal, dear, thuer and

khore.

Northern Lakhra Section of Jamshoro: In Lakhra section of the project, variety of floral regime is found despite arid

and barren nature of land. This section is deprived of large tree flora and consisting mainly of shrub and bush flora

largely distributed in the project zone. All of these floral species are capable to withstand penetrating heat during most

of the year and survive mainly on moisture contents in the troposphere. Cultivation land is almost non-existent in the

Lakhra section and it is only limited to patches in comparatively low lying areas, where rain water accumulates.

Western Superhighway Section of Jamshoro including Thano Bulla Khan: Large variety of floral regimes exists in this

section of Jamshoro despite of arid and barren nature of land. This section is deprived of large trees flora and

consisting mainly of shrub and bush flora largely distributed in the project zone. All of these floral genera are capable

to withstands penetrating heat during most of the year and survive mainly on atmospheric moisture in troposphere. A

considerable number of agricultural fields and farms exist in this section which is extended up to Nooriabad and

Gadap areas. Although large variety of floral regimes have been extinct due to anthropogenic activities along both

sides of superhighway but it is dominant and still surviving behind the rocky mounts along both sides of the highway

particularly towards Thano Bulla Khan and Thano Ahmed Khan vicinities.

Distribution of Floral Diversity in Gorakh Hill: Gorakh Hill in Jamshoro district constitute an essential part of the Khirthar

ranges consisting of an ascending series of ridges running generally north. The highest ridge of ranges is from the

boundary between Sindh and Balochistan. Gorakh Hill is the second highest point of Khirthar range. The present

condition of the area is not satisfactory due to many reasons. Little rainfall, poor soil condition, deforestation and

grazing. These all factors neither support rich species diversity nor progressive growth. The indigenous people

continuously cutting and chopping large shrub and trees for their fuel requirement.

The floral diversity of the macroenvironment consists of 34 significant floral families, out of 34 families 3 families

belong to monocot i.e., Poaceae, Palmae and Liliaceae and 31 to Dicots viz., Aizoaceae, Amaranthaceae,

Apoctnaceae, Asteracerae, Asclepiadaceae, Bigniniaceae, Boraginaceae, Caesalpiniaceae, Capparidaceae,

Convolvulaceae, Cucurbitaceae, Euphorbiaceae, Labiatae, Malvaceae, Menispermaceae, Mimosaceae,

Nyctaginaceae, Oleaceae, Papilionaceae, Rhamnaceae,Salvadoraceae, Sapindaceae, Scrophulariaceae, Solanaceae,

Tamaricaceae, Tiliaceae, Umbelliferae, Verbenaceae, Urticaceae, Violaceae and Zygophyllaceae, Rhazya stricta

(Apocynaceae), Withania coagulans (Solanaceae), Dodanea viscose, (Spindaceae), Fagonia indica(Zygophyllaceae),

Grewia tenax and Grewia villosa (Tiliaceae), were the common plants of the study area. Poaceae is the most

dominant family with species, Asteraceae is the second most largest family followed by Papilionceae, Solanaceae,

Boraginaceae, Capparidaceae and Mimosaceae where as other families are rare in distribution. No endemic species

has been found from the study area, however, Sophoraalopecuroides L. (Paplioaceae), Asparagus gharoensis Blatt

(Liliaceae), Salvadorapersica L. (Salvadoraceae), Olea ferruginea Royle (Oleaceae) were the significant finding from

the study area. No species registered in the IUCN Red List was found in the study area as well.

Fauna: With the exception of humbler species like jackal, wild life is almost non-extent. Hyenas and Wolves are

hardly ever seen. Pig, though, extinct is still found in small numbers. Manchar Lake has a variety of migratory birds


Final Report


coming from Siberia. Among other birds partridge both grey and black is remarkable. Common type of wild ducks and

water fowls can be seen during winter season.

5.12.2 Microenvironment

The microenvironment is mostly rocky wasteland. It is characterized by very low vegetation cover. Patches of

vegetation are localized in areas of riparian habitats where water accumulates during the rainy season. A deep gorge

or water nullah passes through the mid of the project area. The road from the coal deposit area to the Power Plant

also passes through the Project Area. There are small dry water courses/ nullahs in the Project Area which are active

in the rainy season. Some livestock grazing takes place in the area but at a very low scale. There are dry ash deposits

in the close by area.

Methodology: Data in respect of fauna and flora were gathered from both primary and secondary sources. The

sampling was done in the entire area ensuring that the representative locations were sampled for each habitat and the

maximum possible number of species belonging to each habitat was recorded. Secondary data were collected through

information obtained from the local communities. Some information was also available about the fauna of the area

collected during various faunal studies conducted previously in the area.

Standard direct and indirect methods were applied to record the occurrence, distribution and status of the species in

the area which included Line Transect Method, Point Count Method, Roadside Counts and Track/Sign Counts.

The vegetation surveys were carried out by laying 20’ x 20’ quadrates within the study area. The plant communities

were determined within the various habitats of the project area.

Results: The area does not provide suitable habitats to wild life due to very dry habitat with very sparse vegetation.

Only 8 species of mammals, 14 species of birds, 4 species of reptiles and 12 species of plants have been recorded.

Among mammals, rodents such as Indian Gerbil and Balochistan Gerbil are generally found. Indian Hare and Desert

Hedgehog have also been reported, while Red Fox and Desert Cat are rare in the area.

Among the birds, Grey Partridge, Pigeons, Doves, Larks, House Sparrow, Green Bee-eater, Common Babbler and

White-cheeked Bulbul have been recorded. Short-toed Eagle is rare in the area. Birds of Prey pass over the area

during the migratory season, temporarily halting over the poles in the area.

Among Reptiles, only Black Rock Agama, Brilliant Agama, Bluetail Sand Lizard have been recorded. Saw-scale Viper

has been reported from the area.

Among plants, Prosopis juliflora, Cassia italica, Prosopis glandulosa, Salvadora oleoides, Calotropis procera, Rhazia

stricta, Convolvulus spinosus and Cymbopogon jwarancusa are common. Trees such as Acacia nilotica, Acacia

senegal, Prosopis cineraria are scarce.

Threats: There are no serious threats to the animals. Due to non-suitability of the habitat for them because of scanty

vegetation in the area, mostly the resident species of birds were recorded. The migrant species of birds only pass

through the area in very few numbers and that too in winter.

No hunting takes place in the area, as the wildlife is restricted to the distant surrounding areas due to unfavorable

habitat and disturbance due to the traffic on the road which passes through the area to the coal pits about 25km away.

Only the species adapted to human environment such as Pigeons, Doves, Sparrows, Crows are seen in the area.

Grey Partridges are seen sitting near the main road but only in the early hours of the morning when the traffic

movement is quite low.


Final Report


Protected / Sensitive Areas: There is no Protected Area nearby. Rannikot Fort of Khirthar National Park is more than

38 km from the Project Area. River Indus is located at 5km from the Project Area. Ketai Khasai Reserve Forest is more

than 5km from the Project Area.

Threatened / Protected Species: No threatened species has been recorded from the area. The only protected

species recorded were Indian Desert Cat which is rare in the area, Short toed Eagle rarely visits the area during winter,

and common kite which is less common in the area.

Table 5.10: List of Mammals recorded

S. # Common Name Scientific Name Occurrence/ Status

(SWPO)

1. Balochistan Gerbil Gerbillus naus C

2. Common Red Fox Vulpes vulpes Ra

3. Indian Gerbil Tatera indica C

4. Indian Desert Cat Felis silvestris Ra

5. Indian Hare Lepus nigricollis LC

6. Long-eared Desert Hedgehog Hemiechinus collaris LC

7. Indian Jackal Canis aureus LC

8. Crested Porcupine Hystrix indica LC


Table 5.11: List of Birds recorded

S.

# Common Name Scientific Name

Occurrence/ Status

(SWPO)

1. Black crowned Finch Lark Eremopterix nigriceps R/C

2. Blue Rock Pigeon Columba livia R/LC

3. Collared Dove Streptopelia decoacto R/C

4. Common Babbler Turdoides caudatus R/ LC

5. Common Myna Acridotheres tristis R/C

6. Crested Lark Galerida cristata R/C

7. Green Bee-eater Merops orientalis R/C

8. House Crow Corvus splendens R/C

9. House Sparrow Passer domesticus R/C

10. Little Brown Dove Streptopelia senegalensis R/C

11. Short toed Eagle Circaetus gallicus R/SC

12. Common Kite Mivus migrans R/LC

13. White cheeked Bulbul Pycnonotus cafer R/LC

14. Grey Partridge Francolinus pondicerianus R/LC



Final Report


Table 5.12: List of Reptiles recorded

S. # Common Name Scientific Name Occurrence/ Status

(SWPO)

1. Black Rock Agama Laudakia melanurus LC

2. Brilliant Agama Trapelus agilis LC

3. Bluetail Sand Lizard Acanthodaetylus contoris LC

4. Saw scaled Viper Echis carinatus LC

Legend:

C = Common LC = Less Common

SC = Scarce R = Resident

Ra = Rare

+ = Protected under the Sindh Wildlife Protection Ordinance 1972


Table 5.13: List of Vegetation recorded

S. # Family Name Scientific Name Common Name Life Form Life-span

1. Poaceae

Cymbopogon

jwarancusa Katan Grass Annual

2. Apocynaceae Rhazya stricta Shahaer Shrub Perennial

3. Asclepiadaceae Calotropis procera Ak Shrub Perennial

4. Caesalpiniaceae Cassia italica Ghora Wal Herb Annual

5. Convolvulaceae Convolvulus spinosus Kirhanji Herb Herb

6.

Mimosaceae

Acacia jacquemontii Banwar Shrub Perennial

7. Acacia nilotica Sindhi Babur Tree Perennial

8. Acacia senegal Khor Tree Perennial

9. Prosopis cineraria Kandi Tree Perennial

10. Prosopis glandulosa Devi Shrub Perennial

11. Prosopis juliflora Devi Shrub Perennial

12. Polygonaceae Zizyphus mauritiana Ber Tree Perennial

13. Salvadoraceae Salvadora oleoides Jar/ Peeron Shrub Perennial



Final Report



Figure 5.16: Site Survey by Ecologist


Final Report


Acacia sanigal Prosopis cineraria

Salvadora oleoides


Figure 5.17: Shrub Vegetation at Project Site


Final Report


Cassia italica Convolvulus spinosis

Convolvulus spinosis Cymbopogon jwarancusa

Prosopis glandulosa Ziziphus nummularia

Rhazia stricta Rhazia stricta and Ziziphus nummularia



Final Report


5.13 Socioeconomic Environment

5.13.1 History

District Jamshoro is situated in the western part of the Sindh province. Jamshoro district was bifurcated in the month

of December 2004 from district Dadu. Historically, this region has been ruled by different dynasties, including the

Soomras (1024-1351), the Summas (1335-1520), the Arghuns (1520-1650), the Kalhoras (1657-1783) and the

Talpurs (1783-1843). In 1783 A.D, the Kalhoras were defeated by the Talpur dynasty and Sindh was divided, for

administrative purposes, into seven parts, by the Talpur Mirs. When Britain invaded the subcontinent, General Charles

Napier, a commander in the British Army, defeated the Talpur dynasty and conquered Sindh in 1843. He was

appointed as the first Governor General of Sindh. The province was divided into different administrative parts and

assigned to Zamindars (landlords) to collect taxes for the British government. Later on, the rulers developed these

areas as urban centers. People migrated from other districts and provinces as well and started to reside here. The

British Empire named these small developed areas as "Talukas". They built a network of roads, schools, dispensaries

and many other civic amenities throughout the province.

After the independence of Pakistan, in 1947, district Jamshoro remained a part of district Dadu. This area continued to

be neglected by the authorities but the gradual process of development has changed this district significantly. In 2004,

Jamshoro was made a district after carving it out of district Dadu.

5.13.2 Culture (Ethnicity, Religion and Politics)

Jamshoro has a rich traditional Sindhi culture. Women usually wear Shalwar Qameez but quite often dress in the

traditional attire, Ghaghra or Parro, as well. Traditionally, women wear bangles. Men usually wear a Shalwar Qameez

distinguished by broader bottoms, and a traditional Sindhi style cap.

People of this district are pre-dominantly Sindhi speaking but Urdu, Balochi and Brohi are also spoken in the district.

Bhutto, Rind, Syed, Talpur, Chandio, Magsi, Soomro, Memon and Kalhoro are the major clans of this district. Islam is

the religion of majority in this district followed by a minority of Hindu community.

The Town Sehwan is famous for the shrine of Hazrat Makhdoom Usman Marvindi, Popularly known as Hazrat Lal

Shahbaz Qalandar. Thousands of people from all over the country come to visit (ziarat) and pay tribute to this great

Saint during the annual URS on the 18th of Shaban, every year. Manchhur Lake is also one of the well-known places

of Sehwan because it is the largest sweet water lake in the Asian continent. Taluka Manjhand is famous for the

Dargah of Hyder Shah Sanni and the fort of Rani Kot, known as Deewar-e-Sindh.

This district is home to Mr. G.M Syed, a famous political leader, who pioneered the ‘Jeay Sindh Movement’, a

nationalist movement in Sindh. He is regarded as one of the founding fathers of modern Sindhi nationalism. He died

on April 25, 1995. Currently, his grandson Syed Jalal Mehmood Shah is a prominent nationalist leader of this district.

Pakistan People’s Party (PPP) also has strong political base in this district. Talpur family represents PPP in this district.

This district is represented by one national assembly and three provincial assembly seats. In the general elections of

2008, PPP won all the national and provincial assembly seats of the district.

5.13.3 Economically Active Population

In Jamshoro district, economically active population comprises the persons of either sex who are engaged in some

work for pay or profit including un-paid family helpers, persons not working but looking for as well as laid off, during the

reference period i.e., last year. Economically active population in the district is 20.64% of its total population and

37.37% of the population aged 10 years and above. The %age of children below 10years is 32.03 while 7.54% are

students and 8.22% are all others. Among the inactive population 31.57% are domestic workers including 63.75%

housewives/females in the district. The activity or participation rates, % age of population y economic categories and

unemployment rates are shown in table 5.14.


Final Report


Table 5.14: % age of population by Economic categories, sex and rural/urban areas in district Jamshoro

Economic

Category All Areas Rural Urban

Both sex Male Female Both sex Male Female Both sex Male Female

Labor force 20.64 38.08 1.34 20.65 38.15 1.15 20.62 37.84 2.05

not in labor force 79.36 61.92 98.66 79.35 61.85 98.85 79.38 62.16 97.95

Children below

10years 32.03 31.75 32.34 32.41 32.00 32.86 30.64 30.81 30.46

Domestic workers 31.57 2.47 63.75 31.57 2.50 63.96 31.54 2.35 63.01

Students 7.54 12.64 1.90 6.45 11.00 1.38 11.57 18.76 3.80

All others 8.22 15.05 0.66 8.92 16.32 0.66 5.64 10.23 0.68

Labor force

participation rate 30.37 55.80 1.98 30.55 56.10 1.71 29.73 54.69 2.94

Unemployment rate 22.07 22.37 12.72 20.57 20.74 14.27 27.64 28.54 9.60


5.13.4 Infrastructure Facilities Available in Villages

The following Table shows that the infrastructure facilities are available in the villages and Housing Society.

Table 5.15: Infrastructure Facilities Available in Villages

Villages

Pri

mar

y S

cho

ol

Mid

dle

Sch

oo

l

Tec

hn

ical

Sch

oo

l/

Hig

h S

cho

ol

Mo

squ

e

Mad

rasa

h

Dis

pen

sary

Water Supply

Ele

ctri

city

Tu

be

wel

l

Han

d P

um

p

Bhora Khan Goth √ - - 1 - - 3 √ √ erratic

Murid Khan Rind Goth √ - - 1 - - 4 √ √ erratic

Hussain Rind Goth √ - - 1 - - 1 √ √ erratic

Manzoorabad √ - - √ 1 1 √ √ √ erratic

Note: √ means ‘available’


5.13.5 Drinking water

“Safe” drinking water is not available at the site as may be seen from the following table. There is a water supply line

from the WAPDA pumping station at the river bed but the treatment facility has not been provided to the facility at the

living areas.

Table 5.16: Drinking Water Quality

S. # Parameters Standards

Units

Results NSDWQ - Limits

1 pH value 6.5 – 8.5 SU 7.44

2 Alkalinity NA mg/L 128.0

3 Total Hardness as CaCO3 ˂ 500 mg/L 125

4 Chloride(as Cl-) ˂ 500 mg/L 48

5 Calcium NA mg/L 16.19

6 Magnesium NA mg/L 19.53

7 Lead ≤0.005 mg/L BDL


Final Report


Table 5.16: Drinking Water Quality

S. # Parameters Standards

Units

Results NSDWQ - Limits

8 Arsenic 1 mg/L BDL

9 Sodium NA mg/L 27.82

10 Nitrate ( NO2 ) ≤ 50 mg/L BDL

11 Carbonate NA mg/L BDL

12 Bicarbonate NA mg/L 128.0

13 Sulfate NA mg/L 51

14 Total Coliform 0 cfu/100 ml cfu 14*

15 Faecal Coliform 0 cfu/100 ml cfu 0


5.13.6 Transportation

The Indus Highway N-55 and the Link road to the Project site enclose the microenvironment of the Transmission Line.

The Highway is a two track carriageway with asphalt surface. The Link road is however broken at some places due to

movement of heavy vehicles. The site is connected by railway from Karachi – Kotri – Jamshoro – Dadu Track.

People resident in Hussain Rind Goth, Murid Khan Rind Goth, Bhora Khan Goth and Manzoorabad have at least one

motorcycle per household and an automobile with the higher income group. Rickshaws are available for short distance

travel. It costs Rs. 10 per person to travel to the Highway. The less privileged villagers who are not many have to take

a bus to Jamshoro City and Hyderabad. Most people resident at farther distances travel by any means available and

that includes a motorcycle, a donkey cart and a car owned by the privileged people. In case of emergency they have

to hire a Datsun truck and pay Rs 1000 to reach Jamshoro and Rs 2000 to reach the nearest clinic in Hyderabad.


Figure 5.18: Rickshaw service in the project area


Final Report


5.13.7 Power Supply

Power supply is available to the villages in the surrounding viz. Hussain Rind Goth, Murid Khan Rind Goth, Bhora

Khan Goth and Manzoorabad. There is a state power grid at Jamshoro. There is a 500kV regional substation of

WAPDA nearby. The electricity has been provided to the villages from the PMT transmission system.

5.13.8 Diseases

Water borne diseases are common in the villages particularly during the rainy season. Incidence of following diseases

is reported from villages in the surrounding of Project site. There are cases of drug addiction and alcohol is freely

available even to the children. Incidence of Hepatitis, respiratory and oral ailments can be attributed to the lifestyle

change that is apparent from the reported consumption of what is described here as kachi sharab and gutka.

o Water borne diseases

o Malaria

o Cough

o Skin Diseases

o Typhoid

o Asthma

o Hepatitis

o Tuberculosis

5.13.9 Health Facilities

The healthcare services are not available at each village in the Project area, but Habibullah Mor has been provided

has a well-built hospital that takes good care of the outdoor patients reporting from the nearby villages. The Zainab

Habib Hospital (Trust) is provided with up-to-date diagnostic as well as treatment facilities so that the villagers have to

travel to Jamshoro or Hyderabad only in case of complicated cases. Cost of treatment is affordable and the villagers

are satisfied with the provision of the facility by the Trust.


Figure 5.19: Zainab Habib Hospital (Trust)


Final Report


5.13.10 Literacy Rate and Education Facilities

There are primary schools for boys and girls, middle school, and madrassas in the villages for which information could

be gathered at the focused group discussions at each village. All the schools are functional. As such the literacy rate

among the youngsters is reasonably high.

Male literacy ratio is about 50% and female literacy is less than 30%. Quite a few persons can speak Urdu, the

National language and many more can read the Holy Quran. There are mosques in every village. Things have started

to change with the emergence of new leadership which has started setting up mosques and madrassas in the area of

influence. However, access to easy money is taking away much of the advantage of improvement in quality of life.

Television sets, Cellular phones, Motorcycles, are available to everyone in the village and hence the science of

improvement in quality of life are more than apparent.


Figure 5.20: Mosque

5.13.11 Professional Affiliations

The people in the project area are engaged in low as well as high level occupation, with the members of the nuclear

family engaged in mining, farming, and raising livestock. Two or three persons from each village assume the

management responsibility and assign different roles to different members of the family and to the families in other

villages, if necessary. The persons in the management hierarchy form about 5% of the population; they are

responsible to the Sardar/wadera/rais (Leaders) of the area. 85% of the male population is engaged in mining. The

household chores are left to the female population.

5.13.12 Source of Livelihood

The project is located in the largely arid zone dominated by stony wasteland. The agricultural practices are limited to

the areas beyond the Highway N-55 on the east of the area, where Livestock herding is commonly practiced. The UC

has a high per capita ownership of the livestock of the order of at least 8 heads per household while agricultural

practices are limited to subsistence farming. The entire population of the villages is in one way or the other engaged in


Final Report


mining. The male population is engaged in the mines as mining labor or is serving as a driver, mechanic or electrician

or as semi-skilled labor. Much of the skill attained by the resident population has been from Lakhra mine itself. The

resident population does not have high level manpower but its higher income group has the youngsters being trained

at the nearby university at Jamshoro.


Figure 5.21: Livestock herding

Before construction of dams the land in this part of the District used to be inundated and there would be loss of crop

and property and also recharging of the aquifer. Raising embankment, land clearance and making water available at

farm gate has changed the livelihood pattern of the population across Indus Highway N-55. The microenvironment

was not in receipt of adequate rainfall and was dependent on subsistent farming. The current incidence of climate

change has induced substantial reduction in water availability. The aquifers were not recharged for a considerably

long time until the floods of the year 2011. The floods did not have major impact on the microenvironment but it was

considerable across the Indus Highway N-55. The environmental impact of climate change of the above kind has had

profound impact on living pattern and professional affiliations in the macroenvironment. The wildlife vanished with land

clearance while the people had to switch over from agriculture to raising livestock. With reduced availability of water in

River Indus, the fisher-folk also switched to fish farming.

The population engaged in the agricultural zone across N-55 grows multiple crops: rice, maize and fodder, wheat,

tomato, and also owns mango orchards. People own land varying in size from 2 to 5 acres.


Final Report


5.13.13 Food & Nutrition

The people in villages enjoying prosperity eat three meals and often skip lunch. They generally eat bread with lassi

(water yogurt), tea, lentils and potato. Being a nuclear family no one starves. Food is in plenty but people try to live

within their means. This may be the reason that the people of these villages do not look malnourished. People in

surrounding villages lead an improved quality of life because of the opportunities that are available in the mining area,

at the power plant as well as facilities in Jamshoro and Hyderabad.

5.13.14 Monthly household income and expenditure

The focused group discussion at each village showed that the families depend mostly on mining; agricultural activity is

limited to subsistence farming at places where alluvial soil is available. The population did not seem to be engaged in

activities other than mining which provides them ample income to remain contented at the villages. The average

monthly household income is estimated to exceed Rs. 50,000 depending on the size (6-8) and type of engagement

(mining or others) and the type of services provided (skilled/unskilled). The household expenditure is estimated at Rs.

35,000 to 40,000. The exceedance of income over expenditure keeps the people engaged in enjoying the richness

though momentary. This may be the reason that the people interviewed during the focused group discussion looked a

happy lot, and also for their teen agers involved in drinking/addiction to gutka2 and enjoying chatting on cellular phone.

5.13.15 Indebtedness

None of the respondent at the focus group discussion admitted that he was in debt.

5.13.16 Poverty

The Project area did not show signs of poverty. People did seem concerned about short supply of inputs including

water and power but by and large they seemed satisfied with whatever they were getting and whatever they had.

Frequent droughts occurring during the past few years were a cause of concern to them but they seemed to have

accepted the reality that they have to be careful in excessive use of their resources.

Family income of Rs. 50 thousand, arrived at during focused group discussion, suggests that the families live above

the poverty line. All members of the family contribute to sustain their living. There is however room for improvement in

quality of life which may be achieved by the following:

o Conservation of resources including water

o Disaster management

o Promoting sustainable agriculture including livestock farming

o Improving the literacy rate

o Promoting skill development

o Awareness on population control

Degradation of the environment by unsustainable mining practices including waste disposal in the microenvironment

will enhance environmental degradation, which is both a cause and a consequence of poverty. Therefore,

impoverishment of resources will lead to desertification which in turn will lead to poverty, and the vicious circle will

complete when poverty leads to further desertification.

2 Gutka is a powdery, granular, light brownish to white substance. Within moments of chewing mixing with saliva, the gutkha begins to dissolve and turn

deep red in color. It may impart upon its user a "buzz" somewhat more intense than that of tobacco chewing, snuffing and smoking.


Final Report


5.13.17 Gender Issues

Women in the project area are restrained from outdoor activities because of ethnic constraints. Their activities are

limited to the indoors. Female education in the rural area is low but due to the increasing awareness among parents

the enrollment at the primary school level is increasing. Things are changing to the extent that women in the project

area take part in decision making and their implementation.

In individual interview and focus group discussions, women identified the following issues, despite ethnic restrictions:

o Need for a dispensary and Mother and Child Healthcare Centre for this region of Rural Jamshoro

o Awareness on education

o Access to vocational training centre for women to earn through working at home

o Establishment of industrial home type of institution for production of handicraft which has been on the decline

o Gender discrimination

5.13.18 Community Expectations from Proponent

All respondents i.e. males as well as females expect the following from the add-on project:

o Safe drinking water**

o Job Opportunity*

o Healthcare centers particularly for women and children**

o Schools*

o Vocational training

o Black top link roads*

o Poverty alleviation through sustainable development*

o Land development for suitable crops

o Protection from droughts

** Highest Priority *High Priority

The resident population did not expect much from Project, yet they were confident that the proposed project would

enhance their lifestyle and they will enjoy better quality of life and their young and future generation will not live in

poverty, if the company is committed to develop the villages and provide them job opportunities.

5.13.19 Archaeological and Historical Record

No archaeological site was identified/seen within or around the limits demarcated for the Project during the site visit.


Final Report

Environmental Management Consultants (EMC) Chapter – 6: Consultation and Information Disclosure Page 1 of 22

Chapter 6 Consultation and Information Disclosure

6.1 Stakeholders Engagement

This chapter provides a brief discussion on the presence of key stakeholders at the site, and on the likely influence

that they enjoy in the area and the their concerns towards the proposed project along with the details of formal

engagement and consultation activities that have been carried out so far.

Stakeholders are those individuals, groups and institutions those who are directly affected by any component of the

project or those who have not directly affected by the project but have an interest in the project along with their

composition, concerns, and potential influence on project design and outcomes12. In this project, individuals or groups

likely to be directly affected by the project, e.g. local communities, their representatives and the representative

organizations are designated as primary stakeholders, while those likely to be indirectly affected but will have benefit

and a possible interest, such as line ministries and government departments involved in the project; and national and

international non-government organizations (NGOs) are referred to as secondary stakeholders.

The process of stakeholder participation and consultation was endorsed in the United Nations Conference on

Environment and Development (UNCED) in 1992 through Agenda 21 that was one of the key documents of the

UNCED. Agenda 21 was adopted as a comprehensive strategy for global action on sustainable development to deal

with issues regarding human interaction with the environment. It emphasizes the role of public participation in

environmental decision-making for the achievement of goals of sustainable development.

The participation of project stakeholders in project planning, design and implementation has been universally

recognized as an integral part of environmental and social assessment. Local communities, their representatives,

government and national and international NGOs contribute effectively to, and benefit from, the dialogue directed at

identifying and resolving key project-related matters. Stakeholder consultation is a dialogue between the project

proponent and stakeholders, specifically aimed at developing ideas that can help shape project design, resolve

conflicts at an early stage assist in implementing solutions and monitor ongoing activities.

6.2 Objectives of the Process of Stakeholder Engagement

The proposed Transmission Line Project will be developed as an add-on infrastructure facility in an undeveloped rural

socio-economic context with the Lakhra Coal Fired Power Plant as the only industrial unit and the Lakhra Coal Mine

as the only employment provider for un-skilled and semi-skilled manpower of the area. It is understood that another

major coal fired power plant is in the planning / establishment stage in the Jamshoro district.

The stakeholder engagement and consultation process has the following objectives:

o Provide information related to proposed project activities to Stakeholders;

o Initiate, facilitate and maintain dialogue;

o Engage all parties interested directly or indirectly;

o Providing an opportunity for the public to influence project design in a positive manner;

o Obtaining local and traditional knowledge (corrective and creative), before decision making;

o Identify and compile interests and issues of stakeholders;

o Propose action plan for addressing the concerns and integrating them into project design, operations, and

management, and

o Increasing public confidence in the proponent, reviewers and decision-makers;

1 International Finance Corporation, January 2012, Performance Standard 1

2 World Bank, Resettlement Sourcebook


Final Report


o Providing better transparency and accountability in decision making;

o Increasing a sense of ownership of the proposal in the minds of the stakeholders; and

o Ensure the sustainability of project by learning from, and incorporating, the expertise of individuals, professionals,

communities and organizations.

6.3 Consultation Framework

Public involvement is a feature of environmental assessment and can lead to better and more acceptable decision-

making. It can be time consuming and demanding, yet without it, proposals are seldom soundly based, and there is

likely to be antagonism from affected people, Public involvement, undertaken in a positive manner and supported by a

real desire to use the information gained to improve the proposal, will lead to better outcomes, and lay the basis for

ongoing positive relationships between the participants. The consultation being a continuous process needs to be

maintained throughout the project3. The EIA of the proposed Project is undertaken in compliance with relevant national

legislation and in accordance with the environmental and social safeguards laid out under JICA Guidelines for

Environmental and Social Considerations, April 2010 (JICA Guideline 2010) and World Bank Operational Policy 4.01

(OP 4.01) Annex B.

6.3.1 JICA Guidelines for Environmental and Social Considerations (April 2010)

Public consultation is mandated under JICA Guideline 2010.

o Projects must be adequately coordinated so that they are accepted in a manner that is socially appropriate to the

country and locality in which they are planned.

o In the case of Category A projects with a potentially large environmental impact, project proponents must consult

with local stakeholders such as residences at an early stage, at which time alternatives for project plans may be

examined. The outcome of such consultations must be incorporated into the contents of project plans.

o Project proponents etc. consult with local stakeholders on draft reports for Category A projects and also (, if

necessary, for Category B projects,) after the information disclosure. JICA supports the process and incorporates

the results of such consultations into final reports.

o Appropriate consideration must be given to vulnerable social groups, such as women, children, the elderly, the

poor, and ethnic minorities, all members of which are susceptible to environmental and social impacts and may

have little access to decision-making processes within society.

6.3.2 Sindh Environmental Protection Act 2014

Public consultation is mandated under Sindh’s environmental law. Regulation 11 of the Sindh IEE/EIA Regulations

2014 provides the general requirements whereas the sectoral guidelines indicating specific assessment requirements

are provided in the Guidelines for Public Consultation 1997 (the ‘Guidelines’). These are summarized below.

o Objectives of Public Involvement: ‘To inform stakeholders about the proposed project, to provide an

opportunity for those otherwise unrepresented to present their views and values, providing better transparency

and accountability in decision making, creating a sense of ownership with the stakeholders’;

o Stakeholders: ‘People who may be directly or indirectly affected by a proposal will clearly be the focus of public

involvement. Those who are directly affected may be project beneficiaries, those likely to be adversely affected,

or other stakeholders. The identification of those indirectly affected is more difficult, and to some extent it will be a

subjective judgment. For this reason it is good practice to have a very wide definition of who should be involved

and to include any person or group who thinks that they have an interest. Sometimes it may be necessary to

consult with a representative from a particular interest group. In such cases the choice of representative should

3 Social Analysis Sourcebook: Incorporating Social Dimensions into Bank-Supported Projects: The World Bank. December 2003


Final Report


be left to the group itself. Consultation should include not only those likely to be affected, positively or negatively,

by the outcome of a proposal, but should also include those who can affect the outcome of a proposal’;

o Mechanism of consultations: ‘Provide sufficient relevant information in a form that is easily understood by non-

experts (without being simplistic or insulting), allow sufficient time for stakeholders to read, discuss, consider the

information and its implications and to present their views, responses should be provided to issues and problems

raised or comments made by stakeholders, selection of venues and timings of events should encourage

maximum attendance’;

o Timing and Frequency: Planning for the public consultation program needs to begin at a very early stage; ideally

it should commence at the screening stage of the proposal and continue throughout the EIA process;

o Consultation Tools: Some specific consultation tools that can be used for conducting consultations include;

focus group meetings, needs assessment, semi-structured interviews; village meetings and workshops;

o Other Important Considerations: ‘The development of a public involvement program would typically involve

consideration of the following issues; objectives of the proposal and the study; identification of stakeholders;

identification of appropriate techniques to consult with the stakeholders; identification of approaches to ensure

feedback to involved stakeholders; and mechanisms to ensure stakeholders’ consideration are taken into

account’.

As above, the Guidelines for Public Consultation introduces effective ways to inform the contents of the project to the

general public during the planning stage and that eventually consensus building toward the implementation of project

is reached.

Incorporating public involvement into the stages of environmental assessment is explained in the guidelines that public

consultation meeting has to be carried out after the works on "developing options, and assessing and mitigating

impacts" for comments and assessment.

For the proposed Transmission Line Project, the consultation program is based on the following principles:

o Development and maintenance of an open and transparent dialogue with all parties which have an interest or

influence on the project and its proposed area;

o Demonstration of how, when and why input from stakeholders was or was not utilized to make project iterative

and flexible (so that decisions can be continually fed into design, construction and operation);

o Learning from stakeholder experience so as to modify and adapt future consultation activities and project design;

o Maintaining continuous dialogue with stakeholders throughout the project planning, designing, actual construction

and operation;

o Development of the consultation process in recognition of the existence of understanding at different levels

amongst the stakeholders, and

o Providing complete/updated information about the project, with regard to such issues as design, construction

methodology, engineering and operation, besides necessary mitigation measures.

The consultation framework adopted for the pre-construction, construction and subsequent phases of the proposed

Transmission Line Project is elaborated in the following Table:

Table 6.1: Consultation Framework

Project Phase Proposed Tool Stakeholders Consulted/to be

Consulted

Responsibility

Pre-

Construction

Formal and informal meetings, focus

group discussions

Institutional stakeholders;

Grass root stakeholders, including

communities in neighborhood likely to

Proponent &

Environmental

Consultant


Final Report


Table 6.1: Consultation Framework

Project Phase Proposed Tool Stakeholders Consulted/to be

Consulted

Responsibility

be involved during the Project

Implementation Stage

Construction i. Formal and informal contact and

liaison with the community and other

relevant stakeholders (e.g. Sindh EPA,

Wildlife and Forest department)

i. Institutional stakeholders

ii. Grass root stakeholders, including

communities in neighborhood involved

during Project Implementation Stage

Proponent &

Environmental

Consultant

ii. Grievance Redress

iii. Consultations with communities

during environmental compliance &

Impacts monitoring

iv. during external monitoring

v. during site visits by JICA/ Equator

Principles Financial Institutions (EPFIs)

Monitoring Mission

Communities in neighborhood involved

during Project Implementation Stage

Proponent &

Environmental

Consultant

Operation Liaison with communities in

neighborhood

Communities in neighborhood Involved

during the Project Operation Stage

Proponent &

Environmental

Consultant


6.4 Consultation Methodology

6.4.1 Stakeholder Identification and Analysis

At scoping stage, stakeholders were identified as groups and individuals that can be affected by the Project activities

or that can influence the outcome of the project. All groups and individuals that fall within the Study Area were

identified as stakeholders and were consulted through representatives during the scoping phase.

At the outset, it should be emphasized that the most important stakeholders for the proposed Transmission Line

Project are:

o Primary stakeholders (Local Community): Community living within study area / in close proximity of the project

boundaries (Goth Hussain Rind, Goth Bhora Khan, Goth Murid Khan and Manzoorabad), and Community

Leaders and Herders, and

o Secondary stakeholders (Institutions): District administration in Jamshoro, regulatory bodies such as the

NTDC, the Sindh EPA, Revenue Department GoS, Wildlife department, Forest Department, IUCN, WWF, and

Academia.

6.4.2 Feedback Consultation

The feedback consultation primarily targeted the same community that was consulted earlier in the scoping

consultation. The community consultation was undertaken in the same manner as presented in the consultation

process. Similarly, the institutions and authorities consulted were revisited to get their feedback on the draft EIA report.


Final Report


6.4.3 Future Consultations

6.4.3.1 Consultation during the EIA Process

Further consultations to be undertaken as part of the Project EIA process include the Project public hearing. The

SEPA will require that one or more public hearings are held to assess public opinion on the environmental impacts of

the Project. Within 10 days of receipt of the EIA report for the Project and subject to acceptance of the EIA for review,

the SEPA will notify the Project proponents that one or more public hearings must be held. The Sindh EPA will

advertise the public hearings in a newspaper. The legal requirement is advertisement in at least one English or Urdu

national newspaper, but in practice, advertisements are usually placed in two national newspapers and also in local

newspapers. The public hearings will be held at least 30 days after the public notice. Copies of the EIA report and a

non-technical summary have to be made accessible to the public during the notification period.

6.4.3.2 Consultation beyond the EIA Process

The Project management will continue community engagement activities throughout the life of the plant. Visits will be

undertaken in all the communities twice or more time in a year, depending on the number of concerns raised under

each consultation. Ongoing community engagement activities relevant to the EIA include:

o Ongoing reporting on progress on the implementation of environmental & social management measures identified

during the EIA process and recording of comments on the effectiveness of these measures;

o Updating communities about new project developments and recording comments on these; and,

o Ongoing operation of the grievance mechanism (EIA Chapter 08).

6.5 Consultation Process

6.5.1 Consultation at Scoping Stage

The stakeholders were briefed during scoping sessions about the background and objectives of the proposed

Transmission Line Project, its needs, and the necessity of introducing the EIA process. Observations of the

participants were noted and have been incorporated into the text of the EIA. At the consultation meeting the

stakeholders and area representatives were informed that:

o The National Energy Policy 2013 requires development of strategy to i) ensure the generation of inexpensive and

affordable electricity for domestic, commercial, and industrial use by using indigenous resources such as coal

(Thar coal) and hydel power, ii) address the key challenges of the power sector in order to provide much needed

relief to the citizens of Pakistan, and iii) shift Pakistan’s energy mix towards cheaper fuel, and conservation of

natural resources.


Final Report


Source: Goal and Strategy for Affordable Power in National Power Policy (2013)

o Pakistan is experiencing the worst ever energy crisis in its history, since the industrial production has slowed

down to a grinding halt, the fuel resources have been exhausted and new finds are only slowly been

commissioned, in the meantime the vegetative cover has been deforested and the land has been desertified. The

availability of water resources has been erratic all along. The hydrological potential is decreasing both because of

losses and lack of good governance. The gap between availability of electric power and demand has widened. On

the one hand the current shortfall of 5,000 to 7,000 MW is continuing and on the other hand the circular debt

arising out of withholding of payments by the public sector is hampering the cash fluidity which could sustain even

the present shortfall.

o Power outages have gone up from six hours to eight hours in the urban area and 14 hours to 18 hours in the rural.

This is not all because in the winter the outage had increased to 12 hours in the urban & industrial area. This is

the result of ad-hocism because the gap between supply and demand was of consumerism. Unfortunately

additional power generation facilities were not introduced, alternative energy sources if identified were not

adopted/implemented with the result that the existing power production units went idle during the last decade.

o The Nexus of Climate Change - Environmental degradation - Poverty is caught in the cobweb of Social Pollution

in that impoverishment of resources leads to environmental disasters which in turn lead to poverty and the vicious

circle repeats when poverty leads to continuous impoverishment.

o The status quo just cannot continue because the country is falling deeper and deeper into debt while the current

resources are being impoverished at a very fast rate. Indigenous Coal has remained a disregarded resource and

steam coal is being imported for cement and power production. The technology for utilization of lignite at Lakhra

was inappropriately transferred with the result that only one of the three units could operate ever since its

adoption. The present position is that the Lakhra Power Plant is unable to continue to generate electricity even at

the current low capacity, inefficiency, non-availability of fuel and cash starvation. Such being the case the

Government of Pakistan has in September 2013 introduced the policy on developing coal-fired thermal power

plants gradually substituting the fuel with the coal reserve in the Thar coalfield.

o Among the different international agencies that have been invited to help Pakistan in coming out of the energy

crisis, the Japan International Cooperation Agency (JICA) has taken the lead by implementing the “Data

Collection Survey on Thar Coal Field in Pakistan,” as a first step. The project survey recommends the

construction of the Thar coal-fired thermal power plant for Pakistan’s energy mix, safety, security and the very


Final Report


survival of the country. Accordingly, JICA has decided to implement this “Preparatory Survey on Lakhra Coal

Fired Thermal Power Plant Construction Project”.

o The stakeholders were briefed on the siting of the project and its associated features which are as follows:

� The new power plant will be installed within the existing complex of the Lakhra Coal Power Plant (LCPP) in

Manjhand Taluka, Jamshoro District, about 175 kilometers northeast of Karachi and about 40 km northeast

of Hyderabad.

� The site is right on N-55 (Indus Highway) which is one of the main highways that connect Karachi with the

rest of the country.

� Four (04) 500 kV T/Ls would be installed and connected from the LCPP to the existing lines in the western

side of the Plant.

� The selection of the RoW of the T/Ls will follow the procedures laid down in the guidelines adopted by

NTDC:

- Operation in environmentally sensitive areas with special respect for fragile eco-systems and their

inherent biodiversity will be avoided to the extent possible;

- ROW for a T/L through natural features like mountains, hilly terrain vulnerable to landslides, large lakes,

reservoirs, marshes, human habitations and reserved forests or national parks will be avoided to the

extent possible;

- ROW will be selected after due consideration for location of telecommunication lines and railway circuits

to avoid electrical interference due to mutual induction;

- Residential structures will be kept to the minimum of 12m out from the plumb line of the outer conductor

in the ROW;

- Innovative technologies and latest equipment will be adopted or used to abate pollution in construction

activities and operations;

- Routes of T/Ls will avoid to the maximum extent through areas of cultural or historical importance and

religious places;

- Tube-wells and open wells using a surface pump will not be permitted under high voltage conductors as

piping and cranes used to recondition such wells could make contact with high voltage conductors;

- Existing orchards may remain within the ROW although Towers could be kept out of orchards wherever

possible. Orchards will be over-sailed by a clearance of 6m above the height of a mature orchard

whereas all other trees may be removed;

- Brick kilns will be avoided to keep them at least 30m outside the centre line of ROW;

- Alternative route alignments will be used if any school, rural dispensary, mosque or local shrine (ziarat)

falls within 200m of the centre line of a planned route;

- Existing open wells and hand pumps can remain under high voltage conductors, provided open wells

are capped;

- Selection of sites for Tower foundation and Tower erection will be made consciously on stable surfaces

and by rejecting sites vulnerable to erosion, slips and landslides;

- Alignment of the T/L will be made by NTDC after discussions with key stakeholders of the area and by

avoiding properties and infrastructure to the extent feasible;

- Spacing between Towers may not be uniform and ranges variously for physical & other considerations,

such as crossing of main roads, residential areas, streams and canals and trees and for avoiding

graveyards and big ditches in between Towers;

- The route alignment of the T/L, location of the Towers and the corridors will be identified by NTDC;

- The main consideration relating to public safety is a safe horizontal and vertical distance of conductor

from ground level to prevent electrocution of people or animals under the T/L.

- A corridor having a minimum width of 30m, clear of all obstructions, will be provided for EHV (500 KV

and 220 KV) T/Ls (half on either side from the centre line). However, general farming within this corridor

will be allowed and tree plantations that do not exceed a height of 1.5m will also be allowed to remain


Final Report


under the lines. Similarly, open wells, including Persian wheels, may remain under T/Ls. Tube-wells and

pumps will not be permitted under high voltage conductors, because piping and cranes used to refurbish

such wells may come into contact with the lines and

- No residential or other public buildings such as factory, school, hospital and mosque, except for

graves/graveyards, will be permitted within the corridor. However, farm buildings which are not in use for

residential purposes may remain under EHV lines, provided vertical clearance of at least 8m is

maintained. The height of Towers can be increased to accommodate such buildings.

o Additionally the project design will follow all applicable national and international laws, standards, regulations,

guidelines & policies and the conventions to which Pakistan is a signatory.

o The design and installation of the Transmission Lines (T/Ls) will require the following environmental issues to be

addressed:

- Land Use Changes

- Aesthetics

- Noise Effect

- Archeological and Historical Resources

- Cultural Concerns

- Visual Effects

- Flora and Fauna

- Endangered/Threatened and Protected Species

- Socioeconomic impacts

- Electric and Magnetic Fields (EMF)

- Implantable Medical Devices and Pacemakers

- Radio and Television Reception

- Safety

- Stray Voltage

- Water Resources

- Wetlands

- Woodlands

- Property Owner Issues

6.5.1.1 Outcome of Consultation with Institutional Stakeholders

Institutional stakeholders as secondary stakeholders were consulted on July 14-15, 2014 and May 23, 2014 during the

scoping phase. The list of institutional stakeholders meetings conducted are shown in Table 6.3. The stakeholders

were in total support of the proposed project and offered full support to JICA and the Government of Pakistan in

proceeding with the development of Lakhra Coal Power Plant and associated facilities including the 4 Transmission

Lines, without any delay because the current energy supply and demand gap in the country is rapidly growing and has

adversely affected the economic and social well-being of the people of the country.

The summary of comments and concerns raised by secondary stakeholders are as followings. The detail log of

meetings are provided in Annex VII

Discussion with District Administration

The Assistant Commissioner of Taluka Manjhand was appreciative of the project and assured full support to the

energy projects that are priority areas of the governing hierarchy. He went on to offer all help that may be required

towards initiation and completion of the project. He informed that the Coal Mines and the Power Plant will benefit the

local population of the area, the skilled and unskilled labor in the coal field and the semi-skilled and skilled labor in the

power plant.


Final Report


Discussion with Sindh Rural Support Program (SRSP)

SRSP (NGO) was of the view that the proposed project is the need of the hour and it should get initiated at the earliest

so that the much needed power is available to the fast developing industrial area of Kotri and Jamshoro. Electricity

shortfall has become the order of the day and the situation has to be redressed with immediate effect. The people of

Manjhand have suffered too much from the vagaries of flood. They have lost property as well as livelihood. The SRSP

would emphasize on up-grading the quality of their life by commitment of a sustainable CSR policy by the proponent.

The local representative of SRSP while speaking on behalf of the local community was of the view that the

Transmission Lines (T/Ls) should follow the guidelines of NTDC and JICA in letter and spirit suggesting thereby that

the involuntary resettlement will be avoided through transparent process.

Discussion with Sindh Environmental Protection Agency

Sindh EPA (SEPA) offered assurance in the planning and development of the project only if construction activity is

started after grant of approval as required by Sindh Environmental Protection Act, 2014. The environmental

performance of LCPP in the past was far from being satisfactory. The local community has submitted several

complaints to the EPA but their grievances could not be addressed due to non-cooperation from the proponents. The

SEPA would only allow the project to be initiated if all provisions of the SEPA regulation are keenly followed. Citing the

cases of approval by SEPA to the different coal fired power plants it was emphasized by the regulating authority that

the proponent of the LCPP must come-up with reduction of emission from the stacks to levels acceptable to Sindh

EQS and to suitable disposal of fly ash and bottom ash. Their laboratories should be well maintained and independent

environmental performance monitoring reports must be submitted regularly. EPA emphasized on the need of effective

environmental management and monitoring program during the entire development process and on the initiation of

Research and Development on aspects emerging from day to day operation of the plant. EPA was of the view that

LCPP has never submitted any audit or third party monitoring report regarding on the existing Lakhra Power Plant.

This is really worrisome because validity of EIA or IEE approval is subject to compliance of conditions that must be

fulfilled. SEPA has started taking strict legal actions against violators of SEP Act 2014.

Discussion with Sindh Wildlife Department

Sindh Wildlife Department (SWD) official was of the view that proposed project is being initiated in environmentally

degraded land. Its ecosystem has been degraded much beyond repair during the floods. Whatever wildlife that was

there has either migrated east or west or has been lost. The project during its implementation phase must be very

careful in protecting the wildlife. Any assistance that may be required from the SWD to upgrade the quality of the

ecosystem would be extended as and when required. He showed his concern with regard to the impoverishment of

the precious ecology of the protected areas in Sindh in the name of development. The soil, gravel and stone being

removed from such areas is against sustainability principles. This has endangered the wildlife habitat in particular the

reptile population.

Discussion with IUCN

IUCN recommended that the EIA should include an Environmental Management Programme that should have a well

laid out monitoring Programme which is the only way to effectively mitigate the negative impacts, if there are any.

IUCN representative observed that the proposed Lakhra Coal Power Project is on the periphery of the Khirthar

Protected Area Complex (KPAC) which is already under serious stress due to anthropogenic activities all entailing

impoverishment of the precious resources/ecology. The proponent should be asked to contribute to enhancement of

the environment by introducing sustainable mining practices and power generation activities.

Discussion with WWF

WWF representative was in support of the Project provided all measures for conservation of resources and

minimization of their impoverishment are an integral part of mitigation. In view of the considerable loss of diversity of


Final Report


the Khirthar Range including the piedmont zone on which the project is sited, he was in total support of having the

project on establishment of a Biodiversity Park.

Discussion with Pro-Vice-Chancellor, Quaid-e-Awam University

The Pro-Vice-Chancellor was of the opinion that power plants based on coal are being set-up one by one in the

province of Sindh and perhaps quite a few such plants will be in operation in the next few years. Since most of them

are likely to be based on imported coal in the first instance Pakistan is likely to lose the status of a Carbon Sink. This

status must be protected by using indigenous coal. This is a subject that should have been dealt with through the

Strategic Environmental and Social Assessment procedure which is now mandatory for policy related projects.

6.5.1.2 Outcome of Consultations with Local Communities (Focus Group Discussions)

In this project, there are no residences living under or along the RoW which is directly impacted by the T/Ls. The

populated villages settling within the study area, including Goth Hussain Rind, Goth Bhora Khan, Goth Murid Khan

and Manzoorabad are likely impacted during construction period. The residents of these villagers were informed about

stakeholder meetings through community leaders and were invited to Village Autaq4 in Bhora Khan, Murid Khan Goths

and Manzoorabad.

The consultation sessions were held in a style of Focus Group Discussions (FGDs) on July 6, 2014 during scoping

period. The list of meetings are listed in Table 6.3. Unfortunately no women were represented in the participants. The

detail log of meetings are provided in Annex VII.

The community was briefed on the project, it likely impact during construction of the Transmission Lines (T/Ls) and

post operation phase. The community members patiently listened to the briefing. However, a sense of deprivation was

apparent from the faces of the people. Apparently they were not satisfied with the way LCPP project was being

handled since its beginning and they had the following observations:

o The Project area is all stony wasteland which cannot be used for agricultural purposes. The scanty vegetation

that was there once upon a time has succumbed to the drought condition that the area has witnessed during the

last few years. Droughts occurring during recent years were a cause of concern to them but they seemed to have

accepted the reality that they have to be careful in excessive use of their resources.

o The community members were complaining that the proponents of the LCPP did nothing to help them out during

their hard time. They lost their livestock and also the fertility of the land. The past flood has taken away everything

that they owned.

o The stony wasteland has few patches of green area on which they are carrying out subsistence farming and

livestock herding.

o The Lakhra Coal Mine is the only source to depend on. Much of the manpower required by the mines is provided

by the villages of which Bhora Khan and Murid Khan are the main clusters.

o People were highly concerned about the emissions from LCPP and the disposal system of the ash. Some of them

were of the view that the ash has besides creating unhygienic conditions in the area is responsible for respiratory

diseases.

o Their main concern was availability of potable water and also electricity. They nevertheless seemed satisfied with

their lot.

o There was a general sense of impoverishment and deprivation in the community but since the employment in the

mining area had helped them in improvement of quality of life they seemed to be living within their means.

o It appeared from the general discussion that a majority of the families was living at or above the poverty line. All

members of the family contribute to sustain their living. They were of the opinion that ‘poverty’ in the area has

been induced by the following factors:

4 Village Ataque: is a place where people in Sindh traditionally host visitors.


Final Report


- Recurring drought

- Floods

- Exhaustion of resources due to deforestation and desertification

- High cost of living resulting from ever increasing price of fuel and consequently of every other

commodity but very little increase in income

- Scarcity of water

- High cost of healthcare

- Low literacy rate

- Lack of training

- High population growth

Impoverishment of resources in the environmentally degraded land has, according to the residents of Villages, led to

desertification which in turn has induced poverty, and the vicious circle is completing when poverty induces further

desertification. It was surmised from the discussions at Villages, that the major cause for environmental degradation

is both a cause and a consequence of impoverishment.

The participants emphasized the need to ensure the appointment of locals in all non-technical and support services

through a transparent process. They also suggested that people from the nearby village who have land rights may be

given priority.

The participants emphasized the need for establishment of a water purification plant. They also asked for a maternity

health care center because at present they and their family have to face great difficulties in taking the patients

particularly women and children to Jamshoro in case of any medical emergency that becomes so expensive for them

that they can’t bear this cost easily.

Participants were not very concerned about acquisition of a small piece of land along the RoW over which the

Transmission Line and Tower will be installed. They offered their all-out support for the project and did not raise the

issue of compensation of land. However, they were expecting installation of a water purification plant, electricity and

employment for their able bodied persons.

The communities further expected that the project staff, contractors and security personnel would respect the privacy

of the women, sanctity of their mosque and graveyard and sight their camps away from their living area. They also

requested toilet construction for women.

The villagers suggested that a process should be established with the start of construction so that they could regularly

contact officials and address their social and cultural grievances. They agreed with the suggestion that establishment

of a social complaint register and continuous contact by the senior project staff would be sufficient to address all the

complaints.

The summary of main concerns raised during community consultation meetings were summarized in the Table 6.2.

Table 6.2: Summary of main concerns

Concern Raised Strategy to address the concern

(Response by EIA Consultant)

Adequacy and timeliness of compensation payments

The compensation will be paid at full replacement cost of lost

asset, if any.

The compensation will be paid well in advance before the

commencement of construction work


Final Report


Safety measures be taken during the construction of the

towers and stringing of the transmission lines

NTDC shall adopt standard procedures and due safety

measures during the construction of towers

Expectation regarding installation of a water purification

plant, maternity health care center, and employment for

their able bodied persons

NTDC shall include the community expectation in CSR policy

and shall implement the same as the project proceeds

Emissions from existing LCPP and the disposal system

of the ash

The company implementing the power plant project

(GENCO) shall take necessary mitigation / pollution control

measures for emissions and ash management from the plant

Appointment of locals in all non-technical and support

services through a transparent process

NTDC/GENCO shall ensure transparency in the recruitment

process and shall prefer locals for non-technical and support

services

Privacy of the women, sanctity of their mosque and

graveyard

The contractor and staff shall be contractually bound to

respect privacy of the women, sanctity of their mosque and

graveyard

Community liaison

Community liaison shall be ensured through the GRU.

Establishment of a social complaint register and continuous

contact by the senior project staff would be sufficient to

address all the complaints


6.5.2 Feedback Consultation

6.5.2.1 Feedback Consultation with Community Stakeholders (Focus Group Discussions)

The feedback consultation was held in a style of FGDs during November 19, 2014 at convenient places (i.e. Village

Autaq). The participants in the focus group discussion at the Bhora Khan, Murid Khan Goths and Manzoorabad were

happy with the reporting in the EIA. They were of the opinion that the report correctly reflects the views expressed by

them during the earlier meeting. They were appreciative of the role of the consultant in highlighting the criticality of the

situation with which they were faced. They however were more concerned about the impact of the negative impact of

coal fired power plant than the T/Ls. They wished that the EIA on the Power Plant will identify their concern on

emission and disposal of ash which they have already communicated to the EPA. They were also hoping that the

proponent should be broad minded in the Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) and allocated adequate funds for the

welfare and up gradation of the quality of life of the community. They repeated the earlier demand for employment of

the semi-skilled and un-skilled labor, training of their youngsters, provision of potable water and establishment of

mother-child health care center. The record of log is provided in Annex VIIII.

6.5.2.2 Feedback Consultation with Institutional Stakeholders

The institutional stakeholder meetings were held during November 24-26, 2014. The stakeholders were satisfied with

the presentation of their views in the draft report in that it truly reflected their concerns on description of the baseline

and the likely impacts of the transmissions lines on the environment. The major out come from each institution are as

described below and record of log is provided in Annex VIII.

Consultation with Proponent (NTDC)

The draft report was shared with the NTDC, the proponent of the project. They approved the draft report as such for

onward submission to the Sindh Environmental Protection Agency for their review and approval.


Final Report


Consultation with Sindh Rural Support Program (SRSP)

The draft report was discussed with SRSP (NGO) who were of the opinion that their concern was duly reflected and

their concerns on the impact of flood and other vagaries were correctly identified. They reiterated their emphasis on

up-grading the quality of life of the community by commitment of a sustainable CSR policy by the proponent.

Consultation with Sindh Environmental Protection Agency

Sindh EPA was of the view that the feedback consultation is not necessary as per the SEP Act 2014. The procedures

on the EIA review are well laid in the law and the SEPA will proceed according to the procedures framed thereunder.

Consultation with Sindh Wildlife Department

The findings of the report were discussed with SWD and they found that the draft report reflected their views correctly.

Consultation with IUCN & WWF

The findings of the report were discussed with the IUCN and WWF and both of them agreed with the protective

measures identified for the conservation of biodiversity. WWF reiterated their emphasis on establishment of a

biodiversity park.

Consultation with Pro-Vice-Chancellor, Quaid-e-Awam University

The Pro-Vice-Chancellor appreciated that his views on environmental considerations were reflected in the report and

was hopeful that the SEA process on National Power Policy will be initiated as soon as possible.


Final Report


Figures 6.1: Consultations with Stakeholders

Consultation with EPA Sindh

Consultation with IUCN Pakistan


Final Report


Consultation with Conservator, Sindh Wildlife Department (SWD)

Consultation with Assistant Conservator (SWD), Jamshoro


Final Report


Consultation with Deputy Conservator (SWD), Karachi

Consultation with WWF Pakistan


Final Report


Focus Group Discussions


Final Report




Final Report


Table 6.3: List of Stakeholders Consulted

Primary Stakeholders

S.# Attendees Language of

communication

Date of Consultation Time Location

Scoping Feedback

1. 2 attendees from Goth Hussain Rind Urdu & Sindhi July 6, 2014 Nov 19-21, 2014 10:00 – 11:00 am Village Autaq in Goth Bhora Khan

2. 6 attendees from Goth Bhora Khan Urdu & Sindhi July 6, 2014 Nov 19-21, 2014 11:30 am – 12:30 pm Village Autaq in Goth Bhora Khan

3. 12 attendees from Goth Murid Khan Urdu & Sindhi July 6, 2014 Nov 19-21, 2014 1:00 pm – 2:00 pm Village Autaq in Goth Murid Khan

4. 4 attendees from Manzoorabad Urdu & Sindhi July 6, 2014 Nov 19-21, 2014 2:30 pm – 3:30 pm Village Autaq in Manzoorabad

Secondary Stakeholders

S.# Organization Language of

communication

Date of Consultation Time Location

Scoping Feedback

1. Sindh Environmental Protection Agency English & Urdu July 14, 2014 Nov 24, 2014 10:00 – 11:00 am SEPA Office

3. 3 officers from Sindh Wildlife Department (SWD) English & Urdu July 14, 2014 Nov 24, 2014 1:30 pm – 2:30 pm SWD Office

4. IUCN Pakistan English & Urdu July 14, 2014 Nov 25, 2014 12:30 pm – 1:00 pm IUCN Office

5. WWF Pakistan English & Urdu July 14, 2014 Nov 25, 2014 2:00 pm – 3:00 pm WWF Office

6. Sindh Rural Support Program English & Urdu July 15, 2014 Nov 26, 2014 3:00 pm – 4:00 pm SRSP Office

7. Dean, Quaide Awam University English & Urdu July 15, 2014 Nov 26, 2014 3:00 pm – 4:00 pm Dean Office

8. Director, Envtl & Social Impact Cell, NTDC English & Urdu May 26, 2014 Nov 26, 2014 10:00 – 11:00 am ESIC Office

9. A.D, Envtl & Social Impact Cell, NTDC English & Urdu May 26, 2014 Nov 26, 2014 10:00 – 11:00 am ESIC Office

10. A.D, Envtl & Social Impact Cell, NTDC English & Urdu May 26, 2014 Nov 26, 2014 10:00 – 11:00 am ESIC Office

11. Lakhra Power Generation Co. Ltd. English & Urdu May 23, 2014 Nov 27, 2014 2:00 pm – 3:00 pm CEO Office

Note: No. 8-11 are meetings with project executing agencies and implementing agencies of the Project.



Final Report

Environmental Management Consultants (EMC) Chapter – 7: Screening of Potential Environmental Impacts & Proposed Mitigation Measures

Page 1 of 29

Chapter 7 Environmental Impact Assessment & Proposed Mitigation Measures

Presented in this chapter are the screening and scoping of the potential environmental, social and economic impacts and assessment of their severity based on stakeholder perceptions about the project which was obtained at the inception of the EIA activity together with the baseline data detailed in chapter 5.

7.1 Methodology of Environmental Impact Assessment For the proposed erection of Transmission Lines, the impacts assessment was performed in the following three (3) steps:

Step 1 Screening: Identification of interactions between activities and environmental receptors Step 2 Scoping: Identification of potentially significant environmental impacts Step 3 Assessment: Assessment of significant environmental impacts

In Step 1, based on the project description and site description, the proposed project was assessed whether an interaction exists between an activity and a receptor. The project were also categorized based on the identified environmental and social aspects. According to Pak-EPA, IEE/EIA Regulations 2000, the project falls in Schedule II (A3 - Transmission lines (11 KV and above) and grid stations). Thus there is need of conducting EIA study for this project.

In Step 2, a range of significant and potentially significant impacts during the stages preceding construction, establishment, and operation was identified based on the interactions identified in Step 1. Then the study methods were selected.

In Step 3, the impacts were then assessed and rated as per criteria given in Table 7.1. The impact may be beneficial or adverse, direct or indirect, reversible or irreversible and short-term or long-term.

Table 7.1: Impact Rating Assessment Matrix Impact Criteria Nature of impact Beneficial Positive

Adverse Negative Duration of impact Short term Impacts shall be confined to a stipulated time

Long term Impacts shall continue till the end of project life Impacted area Localized Impacts shall be confined within 5 km radius

Regional Impacts shall continue beyond 5 km radius Source: Environmental Management Consultants (EMC)

All the potentially significant impacts were then evaluated and a qualitative evaluation is made. An impact level is rated as “low”, “medium” or “high”. The impact rating is based on two (2) parameters, i.e. the “severity of impact” and the “likelihood of occurrence of the impact”.

o Severity of Impact: The severity of an impact is a function of a range of considerations including impact magnitude, impact duration, impact extent, compliance of prescribed legal framework and the characteristics of the receptors/ resources; and

o Likelihood of Occurrence: How likely is the impact (this is particularly an important consideration in the evaluation of unplanned/ accidental events).


Final Report


Page 2 of 29

The significance of each impact is determined by assessing the impact severity against the likelihood of the impact occurring, as summarized in the impact significance assessment matrix provided in Table 7.2.

Table 7.2: Impact Significance Assessment Matrix Impact Severity Impact Likelihood

Unlikely (e.g. not expected to occur during the project lifetime)

Low Likelihood (e.g. may occur once or twice during the project lifetime

Medium Likelihood (e.g. may occur every few years)

High Likelihood (e.g. routine, happens several times a year)

Slight Negligible Impact Negligible Impact Negligible Impact Negligible Impact Low Negligible Impact Negligible Impact Negligible to Minor

Impact Minor Impact

Medium Negligible Impact Minor Impact Minor Moderate Impact

Moderate Impact

High Minor Impact Moderate Impact Major Impact Major Impact Notes: - Negligible Impact: Defined as magnitude of change comparable to natural variation - Minor Impact: Defined as detectable but not significant - Moderate Impact: Defined as insignificant; amenable to mitigation; should be mitigated where practicable - Major Impact: Defined as significant; amenable to mitigation; must be mitigated Source: Environmental Management Consultants (EMC)

7.2 Assessment of Environmental Impact Environmental aspects identified during the stakeholders meetings and by the scoping process were assessed for their severity and mitigation measures have been proposed on the basis of assessment.

Potential Project impacts were identified in this section related to the project pre-construction (siting), construction and operation phases. Impact predictions are based on the consultants’ previous experiences on similar projects; professional judgment; data collected in the field; JICA guidelines; discussions with local communities, relevant governments officials and relevant technical specialists. Predicted impacts relate to all aspects of the proposed T/L. Many of the mitigation measures are related to good design practices, others with good construction and housekeeping practices.

The environmental impacts may include all those that are beneficial or adverse, short or long term (acute or chronic), temporary or permanent, direct or indirect and local or regional. Adverse impacts may include all those impacts that lead to: harm to living resources, damage to human health, hindrance to other activities, impairment of quality for use, reduction of amenities, damage to cultural and heritage resources and damage to physical structures. For each identified potential environmental impact, the associated environmental risk is assessed based on its likelihood and significance.

The mitigation measures proposed here will be adopted by the Proponent to reduce, minimize and compensate for the negative impact as far as possible. The scoping process adopted the checklist method, in addition to professional judgment to additionally identify the residual impact that may persist after adoption of mitigation measures.

7.2.1 Identification of Interactions between Activities and Environmental Receptors

Based on the legal framework and baseline environment data, it is determined whether an interaction exists between an activity and a receptor. The environmental aspects of the project relate to:

o Transmission Lines Route and Land Acquisition


Final Report


Page 3 of 29

o Topography, Geology o Seismicity, Vulnerability to seismic shocks and High winds o Present Land use o Ecology o Vulnerability to land erosion o Vulnerability of site to storm water drainage and land submergence o Damage to vegetation o Waste Generation during construction o Noise and other forms of nuisance during construction at site o Air pollution due to fugitive dust emission and operation of equipment during construction o Human Exposure to Electromagnetic Fields (EMF) o Electromagnetic Interference o Electrocution and Induced Currents o Oils, Fuel Spills and Dangerous Goods o Long-term energy supply security

7.2.2 Identification of potentially significant environmental impacts

Assessment of impact of different activities, during construction and operation of T/Ls has been made to ascertain that the impacts are site specific and would occur at the microenvironment of the site and that the macroenvironment would not be impacted.

Scoping is the first step in EIA Study to identify the processes that may influence the project environments. Level of the assessment is also determined by application of this technique. The scoping of potential impacts on the macroenvironment and microenvironment of the Project Corridor were assessed was carried out using the checklist JICA Guidelines for Environmental and Social Considerations (April 2010). The result of scoping showing the likely impacts is presented in Table 7.3.

Table 7.3: Result of Scoping

No. Item


Results

Pre/

Cons

tructi

on

Oper

ation

Pollution Control 1 Air Quality B- D [Construction Phase]

- Temporary dust may be generated as a result of construction activities. Besides, exhaust emissions (CO, SOx, NOx and PM10) are generated from stand-by diesel generator, material transport vehicles and construction machinery /earth moving equipment.

[Operation Phase] - No adverse impact is expected.


Final Report


Page 4 of 29

2 Water Quality B- C- [Construction Phase]- Site erosion and landslides due to the construction activities including

installation of towers, construction of new access roads and clearing of tower basis leads to the contamination of surface and ground water.

[Operation Phase] - Spills of oil and chemicals during operation and maintenance might

impact on ground water. 3 Soil Quality B- B- [Construction Phase]

- Generated wastes such as waste concrete, steel scrap, wooden scaffolding, empty cement bags, excavated soil, wood remains etc. would cause negative impact on the surroundings.

[Operation Phase]- During operation and maintenance activities, spills of oil and chemicals

may occur. 4 Wastes B- D [Construction Phase]

- Solid wastes and hazardous wastes might be generated from base camps and construction sites.

[Operation Phase]- No waste would be generated.

5 Noise and Vibration B- D [Construction Phase]- Noise may be generated from heavy machinery, vehicles and

construction activities including excavation. [Operation Phase]- No noise would be generated.

6 Subsidence D D [Construction & Operation Phase] - No subsidence would occur.

7 Odor B- D [Construction Phase] - Odor might be generated from temporary construction camps due to

solid and liquid wastes. [Operation Phase]- No odor would be generated.

Natural Environment 8 Protected Areas D D [Construction & Operation Phase]


9 Ecosystem C- C- [Construction & Operation Phase]- Further site investigations shall be done.

10 Hydrology D D [Construction & Operation Phase] - As there is no major water body, no adverse impact is expected.


D D [Construction & Operation Phase] - No large-scale topographical and geological change is expected.

Social Environment 12 Resettlement

(Land Acquisition) C- C- [Pre/Construction Phase]

- Physical and economical relocation might be expected due to temporary land acquisition.

[Operation Phase] - Land that falls under ROW are accessible and no need of permanent


Final Report


Page 5 of 29

land acquisition. 13 People below

the Poverty Line C-/C+ C-/C+ [Pre/Construction and Operation Phase]

- Income of the people below poverty line may be affected due to land acquisition without appropriate mitigation measures.

- Job creation and provision of job training would impact positively. 14 Ethnic, Minorities and

Indigenous People C- C- [Pre/Construction and Operation Phase]

- Investigation is required to identify whether people other than Muslim such as Hindi, Christian and other minor groups of people are more vulnerable to project impacts compared with the major religious group.

15 Living and Livelihood C-/C+ C-/C+ [Pre/Construction Phase]- Temporary land acquisition for tower construction, contractor's camp,

access roads etc. will adversely affect living and livelihood of land owners.

[Construction Phase] - Loss of crops, cropping seasons and trees within the ROW will

adversely affect income of the owner. - Job creation and provision of job training would impact positively. [Pre/Construction and Operation Phase] - Economic inequality/ income gap may occur between the project

workers and other people in communities. 16 Use of Land and

Resources C- C- [Pre Construction Phase]

- Loss of crops and trees within the ROW.[Construction Phase]- The general mobility of locals and their livestock in and around TL will

be temporary affected in specific locations. - Loss of cropping seasons within the ROW. [Operation Phase]- Restriction of agricultural use within the land under the towers.

Restriction of plantation of trees (e.g. orchards) above certain height. - The value of land may vary in the long term basis due to the erection

of towers and the TL passing. 17 Water Use C- D [Construction Phase]

- Temporary contamination of surface and ground water due to construction activities (clearing and grabbing, excavation, filling, laying down concrete foundation for towers and camps, use of fuel and lubricants etc.) may affect water use (for the purpose of drinking, agriculture and fishing).


B- D [Construction Phase]- Stringing across the existing roads may temporary disturb traffic.

19 Social Capita, Institutions & Conflicts

C- D [Pre Construction Phase] - Differences in acceptance of the project and income gap among

stakeholders may change social relation, deepen hierarchies and, create conflicts.

20 Heritage C- D [Construction Phase] - Syed Daad Shaheed Shrine might be impacted in terms of sound,

vibration and traffic disturbance. 21 Landscape B- B- [Construction Phase]

- Temporary restriction in use of land in and around ROW of TL.


Final Report


Page 6 of 29

[Operation Phase] - Landscape along ROW will be changed due to having towers and lines

22 Gender C- C- [Construction Phase]- Difference in benefits of temporary job opportunities between men and

women will be arisen. [Construction and Operation Phase]- Gender issues such as any un-ethical activities, disturbance in routine

movement, increase in work load may be caused. 23 Child Right C- C- - No specific negative impact is expected. 24 Infectious Diseases B- D [Construction Phase]

- Influx of workers may increase risks in respiratory and infectious disease.


B- B- [Construction Phase]- Risks of accident, spread of infectious diseases may be increased. [Operation Phase] - Accident could be occurred in work environment. Possibility of traffic

accident and spontaneous combustion at the coal yard are expected. Others

26 Trans-boundary of Waste Treatment and

Climate Change

B- D [Construction Phase]- Temporary emissions of CO2 from trucks and heavy machines are

expected. [Construction and Construction Phase] - No transboundary of waste would occur.

A+/-: Significant positive/negative impact is expected B+/-: Positive/negative impact is expected to some extent

C+/-: Extent of positive/negative impact is unknown. (A further examination is needed, and the impact could be clarified as the study progresses)

D: No impact is expected Source: JICA Survey Team

7.2.3 TOR for Environmental and Social Considerations Survey

The scoping identified environmental items that are significantly and potentially impacted by the project implementation. Based on the result of scoping, Term of Reference (TOR) for environmental impact assessment survey and its method is determined and shown in Table 7.4.

Table 7.4: Terms of Reference Environmental Item Survey Item Survey Method Consideration of alternatives

(1) Route of transmission lines and location of steel towers

(1) Data collection of residential area, affected facilities (school, hospital, etc.), wetland, pond and river, road (e.g. Indus Highway), protected area

Air Quality (1) Confirmation of environmental standards (SEQS, NEQS, IFC, etc.)

(2) Current condition of air quality (3) Confirmation of location of residence,

school and hospital, etc. around the ROW.

(4) Adverse impact during construction

(1) Collection of air quality standards (2) Measurement of current air quality (baseline) (3) Site investigation (4) Prediction of adverse impact

Water Quality (1) Confirmation of water body. - Site investigation and hearing with relevant organization.

Wastes (1) Type of wastes generated from construction site and camps

- Collection of existing EIA for construction of transmission lines

Noise and Vibration (1) Confirmation of environmental (1) Collection of standards for noise and vibration


Final Report


Page 7 of 29

Table 7.4: Terms of Reference Environmental Item Survey Item Survey Method

standards (NEQS, IFC, etc.) (2) Distance between the site and

residential area, school and hospital, etc.

(3) Impact during construction (4) Current situation of noise

(2) Site investigation (3) Confirmation of construction method (4) Measurement of current noise (baseline)

Odor (1) Waste treatment method - Collection of existing EIA for construction of transmission lines

Ecosystem (1) Current condition of ecosystem - Collection of existing EIA and conducting ecological survey (baseline)

Involuntary Resettlement

(1) Land and assets to be relocated Affected people (economically or physically) (2) Renters, businesses, workers, employees, people without allocation (squatters and encroachers) (3) Replacement cost for land and assets (farm land, urban land, houses and other structures) (4) Supplementary measure for loss of assets

- Analysis of legal frameworks - Collection of reference material -Analysis on satellite image - Population census survey -Collection of land record and assets inventory - Socioeconomic survey (Interviews, public

meeting, group discussion, site investigation)

People below poverty line

(1) Presence and state of people below poverty line in the affected people

- Collection of reference material -Collection of land record - Socioeconomic survey - Population census survey - Income and livelihood survey - Interviews, public meeting, group discussion, site

investigation Ethnic Minorities & Indigenous People

(1) Baseline information on ethnic, minorities and indigenous people, the social relations and vulnerability.

- Collection of reference material - Socioeconomic survey - Interview to local community

Living and Livelihood / Regional Economy

(1) Baseline information on livelihoods and standards of living of which affected people

- Collection of reference material - Socioeconomic survey - Income and livelihood survey - Site investigation and interview to affected

people, labor's association, local government and NGO etc.

Land and Resources

(1) Baseline information on land use (2) Baseline information on local resources

- Collection of reference material - Analysis on satellite image - Analysis of land use map - Site investigation and interview

Water Use (1) Baseline information on use of surface and underground water (for different purposes i.e. drinking and irrigation

- Collection of reference material - Analysis of water management record - Interviews to local government - Site investigation

Infrastructure and Social Services

(1) Transporting route of construction materials and equipment (2) Transporting route of coal (3) Location of social infrastructures (school, hospital and other services)

- Analysis on satellite image - Analysis of land use map - Site investigation to understand geographic

relations of roads and infrastructures and - Interviews to local government


Final Report


Page 8 of 29

Table 7.4: Terms of Reference Environmental Item Survey Item Survey Method Gender and Child (1) Baseline information of women's role

and work state (especially in family of fishermen) (2) Baseline information of child labor and school drop-out (especially in family of fishermen)

- Socioeconomic survey - Income and livelihood survey - Site investigation and interview to affected

people, fishermen, labor's association, local government and NGO etc.

Infectious (HIV/AIDS) diseases

(1) Infection rate of diseases such as respiratory diseases and HIV/AIDS in the local community (2) Local NGOs conduct activities regarding infectious disease

- Collection of reference materials - Interviews to local government, medical facilities,

NGOs etc.

Working Conditions (1) Potential hazards to workers at construction and operation phase (2) Potential health risk to workers (3) Baseline information of forces labor

- Requirements and guideline of occupational health and safety in Pakistan

- Environmental, Health and Safety Guidelines (EHS Guidelines) are

- Collection of reference material (similar projects' EIA)

- Interview with local government, NGOs, labors association etc.

Accident (1) Potential hazards to workers at construction and operation phase (2) Time, route and area of public movement

- Analysis of satellite image - Analysis of land use map - Collection of reference material (similar projects'

EIA) - Interviews

Stakeholder consultation

(1) Stakeholder's states and the relations (2) Concerns and comments on project Baseline information

- Stakeholder meetings -Public consultations -Focus group interviews - Individual interviews

Climate Change (1) CO2 emissions from trucks and heavy machines

- Confirmation of construction method


7.3 Evaluation of Significant Environmental Impacts 7.3.1 Preconstruction Phase (Siting) Impacts and Mitigation Measures

Preconstruction phase impacts are primarily related to Project siting including i) land acquisition and resettlement; ii) potential impacts on sensitive receptors (schools, hospitals, environmentally sensitive areas) and existing infrastructure (roads, railways, TLs); iii) potential impacts on physical cultural resources (PCRs); iv) potential impacts on national parks; and iv) potential impacts related to the siting of temporary borrow and disposal pits . Mitigations are primarily related to careful selection of the ROW alignment so as to avoid or minimize impacts.

7.3.1.1 Land Acquisition and Resettlement

Based on the NTDC safety consideration and the results of this EIA study, ROW is proposed as 60 m width (30 m from the center line) for the project, while the land used for the foundation of 39 towers is 6.02 acres in total.

In accordance with the Telegraph Act 1885, towers are installed without acquisition of land and payment of compensation in case the land remains in the custody of the owner and is freely accessible for productive use for farming.

As a result of the land survey by this study team with the help of the Revenue Staff, the land under ROW and footings of towers are determined to be unregistered. Under Pakistani land laws, any unregistered land falls under the


Final Report


Page 9 of 29

ownership of the provincial government. In particular, the concerned land is non-productive and unoccupied barren waste land. In any case, the towers will be installed without any formal land acquisition and no compensation will be paid based on existing practice of NTDC.

7.3.1.2 Sensitive Receptors and Existing Infrastructure

According to NTDC safety considerations, no residential or other public buildings like factory, school, hospital, mosque except for the graves / graveyards are permitted within the corridor. However, farm buildings which are used for residential purposes are allowed to remain under the extra high voltage lines, provided 8 m vertical clearance is maintained. The height of the towers can be increased to accommodate such buildings. Tube wells and open wells using a surface pump are also not permitted under the high voltage conductors. This due to the reason that piping and cranes used to recondition such wells could come in contact with the high voltage conductors. While, existing open wells including Persian or artesian wells are allowed to remain under the high voltage conductors, as are hand pumps. Existing open wells in the ROW will be capped.

No residential, public buildings, farm buildings, tube/open/surface pump wells are not found along T/L routes.

7.3.1.3 Physical Cultural Resources

T/L routes through area of cultural or historical importance and religious places are avoided to the possible extent.

7.3.1.4 National Parks

The microenvironment of Project area forms part of Deh Kohistan. The land here is a barren, flat to mildly hilly tract, consisting of outlying spurs of the Kirthar Range. However, the construction of the T/L does not pass through the National Parks and no impact will result in displacement of wildlife and loss of habitat.

7.3.1.5 Impediment to Movement of Wildlife/Livestock/People

The proposed transmission line route will provide passageways for humans and animals passing through these sites. Therefore, TL structures will not pose any impediment to the movement of livestock and people. No negative impact will occur.

7.3.1.6 Incidence of Natural Hazards

According to the seismic zone map of Pakistan, the Project Area lies in Zone where minor to moderate damage can occur, as given in Figure 7.1.


Final Report


Page 10 of 29

Source: Environmental Management Consultants (EMC) Figure 7.1: Earthquake zone map

The incidence of natural hazard like earthquake is expected in the Project area. As a precautionary measure an earthquake proof design could be developed so that little or no intensification of the basic accelerations associated with the frequency spectrum of the seismic disturbance is encountered.

7.3.1.7 Temporary Borrow, Disposal Pits & Quarries

In case there will be a requirement to establish temporary borrow and spoil disposal pits to source materials from quarries, and other contractor’s facilities. If not sited or undertaken carefully these activities can result in reductions to air, water quality; and social impacts including social unrest and disease transmission. To mitigate these impacts:

o The locations of temporary borrow and spoil pits will be determined during detailed design in accordance with applicable laws and regulations of SEPA and good international practices as well as JICA Environmental and Social Considerations Guidelines.

(1) Temporary Borrow and Disposal Pits

o Borrow and disposal pits will not be located in environmentally sensitive areas. o Local community leaders will be consulted regarding the design and location of all borrow and disposal pits so as

to ensure the safety of local communities. o Borrow pits should be properly barricaded to avoid the intrusion of wild and grazing animals. o Borrow and disposal pits are to be located away from settlements and hill slopes facing settlements so as to

minimize visual impacts. o Spoil disposal pits should be in suitable depressions not adjacent to waterways.


Final Report


Page 11 of 29

(2) Quarries

o Construction materials for tower foundations and access road works will be sourced only from established quarries which comply with environmental, health and safety and other applicable regulations.

(3) Temporary Facilities including Hot Mix and Batching Plants

o Should be located at least 500m away from settlements. o Should not be located in environmentally sensitive areas. o Should have adequate drainage and not be subject to flooding. o Should not be within 100 m of any domestic or public water sources. o Local MoF departments should be consulted as to any proposed temporary facilities in Production or Limited

Production Forests.

As construction activities will be mainly confined to the project site only for a short duration, hence the impact due to Borrow and Disposal Pits and Quarries during construction and development phase is rated as given below:

Impact Rating Borrow and Disposal PitsNature of Impact Adverse Duration of Impact Short term Impacted Area Localized Likelihood of Occurrence High Severity of Impact Low Significance of Impact Minor

7.3.2 Construction Phase Impacts and Mitigation Measures

Construction phase impacts include site erosion and landslides; impacts on surface and groundwater; solid waste management; air quality issues, primarily related to dust generation; noise; vegetation removal or cutting and other impacts on flora and fauna; destruction of PCRs; aesthetic impacts; and occupational and community health risks. Mitigation measures include good construction and housekeeping practices, and re-planting for the loss of trees in the ROW.

7.3.2.1 Ambient Air Quality

Construction activities that may lead to dust generation include cutting and excavation; transportation and tipping of cut materials; blasting operations; transportation of raw materials from quarries and borrow sites; transportation of tower materials, conductors and equipment; stone crushing; handling and storage of aggregates in concrete plants; concrete batching; site leveling and clearing of trees; laying of asphalt and construction of bridges on access roads; and construction of structures and associated activities.

Temporary dust nuisance, measurable as Total Suspended Particulates (TSP) and Respirable Suspended Particulates (RSP), may generate as a result of construction activities during the construction phase. Among all construction activities, site formation has the highest potential of causing dust nuisance.

Major sources of exhaust emissions are stand-by diesel generator, material transport vehicles and exhaust from construction machinery/earth moving equipment. Exhaust emissions are CO, CO2, SOx, NOx and PM10. These emissions are injurious to human health if in high concentration and also cause vegetation damage by clogging the photosynthesis process in plants.


Final Report


Page 12 of 29

Given the scale and dispersed nature of the Project construction these impacts will be localized to each construction site and small scale in nature. Hence impact on the ambient air quality during construction and development phase is rated as given below:

Impact Rating Ambient Air QualityNature of Impact Adverse Duration of Impact Short term Impacted Area Localized Likelihood of Occurrence High Severity of Impact Low Significance of Impact Negligible

Nonetheless, to mitigate potential impacts:

o Tower construction sites and access roads should be sprayed with water as necessary to suppress dust. o Truckloads should be covered, with the exception of on-site or local trips. o Soil and temporary spoil piles should be covered or sprayed if generating dust. Piles that are not going to be used

in the short-term should be allowed to develop vegetation cover. o Only controlled blasting should be carried out. o During construction localized and relatively minor air quality impacts will also occur from vehicle emissions. To

mitigate these impacts: o All vehicles and machinery should be routinely checked and maintained and in good working order, and should be

in compliance with NEQS. o Excessive engine idling should be discouraged and machinery causing excessive pollution (i.e. visible clouds of

smoke) should be banned from sites

7.3.2.2 Surface and Ground Water Quality and Hydrology

(1) River Crossings, Streams, Irrigation Channels

The T/L alignment does not crosses any river system but small storm water streams are present; however, as these are overhead crossings the impacts associated with construction of the T/L will be minimal, though there may be some temporary impacts due to construction of access roads and foundations at locations near to the water bodies.

The overall impact is summarized as hereunder:

Impact Rating Surface Water QualityNature of Impact Adverse Duration of Impact Short term Impacted Area Localized Likelihood of Occurrence High Severity of Impact Slight Significance of Impact Negligible

To address these impacts, in addition to the erosion mitigation measures noted above:

o Natural water courses should be maintained to the maximum extent possible. o Work on access roads should be limited to the dry season if possible, when many of the smaller streams will have

low water flows. Water diversion works can thus be minimized or eliminated, and if diversion is required the original course can be restored immediately after the work is completed.

o Drainage structures on access roads should be properly designed to accommodate forecast discharges. o Debris and vegetation clogging culverts should be regularly cleared.


Final Report


Page 13 of 29

(2) Fuels, Oils and Chemicals

Inappropriate storage of fuels, oils and chemicals at construction sites may lead to the contamination of surface and groundwater.


Impact Rating Soil Quality Nature of Impact Adverse Duration of Impact Short term Impacted Area Localized Likelihood of Occurrence High Severity of Impact Slight Significance of Impact Negligible

To mitigate these impacts:

o At all construction sites chemicals and oils should be stored in secure designated areas with temporary impermeable bunds at distance of at least 100 m from any water course.

o Refueling, oil changing and engine maintenance of machinery, equipment and vehicles should be undertaken in designated areas with containment to prevent any oil spills, washing away at distance of at least 100 m from any water course.

o Waste oil shall be collected and taken for recycling at designated recycling facilities, if available, or for disposal at designated waste disposal facilities if recycling is not available.

o Oil contaminated material shall be disposed at designated waste disposal facilities

7.3.2.3 Solid Waste Management

Typical solid waste generated during construction include waste concrete, steel scrap, wooden scaffolding, empty cement bags, excavated soil, wood remains etc. Solid waste generated during land clearance and Earth-fill material will be in large quantities. This waste has the potential to cause negative impact on the surroundings if not properly managed and disposed of. It is likely to block nearby drainage channels that can ultimately cause localized flooding during the monsoon. Irregular storage of this waste is hazardous to the workers at the site as well. Windblown debris is a nuisance to the nearby dwelling units. Poor waste management practices would result in short term, and long term negative impact on the aesthetics of the surrounding. Hence, overall impact is summarized as follows:

Impact Rating Solid Waste ManagementNature of Impact Adverse Duration of Impact Short term Impacted Area Localized Likelihood of Occurrence High Severity of Impact Low Significance of Impact Minor

To mitigate impacts from construction waste contractors will be required to adopt good construction site housekeeping practices:

o A Comprehensive Waste management Plan for Construction phase should be developed. o Construction sites should be equipped with temporary refuse bins, and construction wastes should be collected

on a daily basis and contained in a temporary designated waste storage area on each site. o Designated waste storage areas should not be within 50 m of water ways.


Final Report


Page 14 of 29

o Wastes should be routinely collected from the designated area and disposed at licensed waste disposal facilities approved by local EPA.

o Upon completion of activities at a construction site all solid wastes should be completely removed and the site should be re-contoured or prepared for natural revegetation.

7.3.2.4 Noise

During the construction phase noise will be generated from the operation of heavy machinery, haulage of construction materials and tower materials to and around construction sites, and site construction activities including concrete mixing, excavation and blasting. These construction activities are expected to produce noise levels in the range of 80 – 95 dB (A) (Table 7.5), and may cause discomfort to local residents and fauna. However, as there is no residence near the construction sites and animals living in the barren site are very few. Besides the construction works are conducted during daytime and the noise would be generated temporarily. Therefore any adverse impact on residents and fauna is negligible.

Hence the impact on the noise level during construction and development phase is rated as given in the table below.

Impact Rating Noise Level Nature of Impact Adverse Duration of Impact Short term Impacted Area Localized Likelihood of Occurrence High Severity of Impact Slight Significance of Impact Negligible


o Machinery operation and high noise activities should be carefully planned and scheduled. o To the extent practical batching plants and construction areas should not be located with 500 meters of a

settlement. o Where that is not possible, high noise activities should cease between 22:00 and 06:00 hrs at any construction

site within 500 meters of a settlement, or if noise complaints are received settlement residents.

Vehicles and machinery should be equipped with exhaust. Contractors should be required to fit noise shields on high noise construction machinery.

Table 7.5: Typical noise levels of construction equipment (noise level in dB (A) at 15 m) Clearing Structure Construction Bulldozer 80 Crane 75-77 Front end loader 72-84 Welding generator 71-82 Jack hammer 81-98 Concrete mixer 74-88 Crane with ball 75-87 Concrete pump 81-84 Concrete vibrator 76 Excavation and Earth Moving Air compressor 74-87 Bulldozer 80 Pneumatic tools 81-98 Backhoe 72-93 Bulldozer 80 Front end loader 72-84 Cement and dump trucks 83-94 Dump truck 83-94 Front end loader 72-84 Jack hammer 81-98 Dump truck 83-94 Scraper 80-93 Paver 86-88


Final Report


Page 15 of 29

Table 7.5: Typical noise levels of construction equipment (noise level in dB (A) at 15 m) Clearing Structure Construction Grading and Compaction Landscaping and clean-up Grader 80-93 Bulldozer 80 Roller 73-75 Backhoe 72-93 Truck 83-94 Paving Front and end loader 72-84 Paver 86-88 Dump truck 83-94 Truck 83-94 Paver 86-88 Tamper 74-77 Dump truck 83-94

Source: U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Noise from Construction Equipment and Operations. Building Equipment and Home Appliance. NJID. December 31, 1971

7.3.2.5 Impacts on Flora

The T/L ROW passes through shrub/barren areas. The vegetative growth in this area is limited to short grasses, shrubs and scrubs along with a few drought resistant trees. Small wild shrubs are observed along the project alignment as also seen in Figure 7.2. Construction of the Project will not require removal of vegetation for transmission tower bases and therefore the impact is insignificant.


Figure 7.2: Wild shrubs growth along the project corridor

The ecology of the area will not be significantly altered, as it is a barren, mostly desolate area, with little vegetation which will not be affected by the erection of towers of transmission lines as the main system already exists there. The


Final Report


Page 16 of 29

faunal species are thinly scattered in a wide area around, while the plants are very few and mostly ephemerals or invasive species, and the trees are very few in numbers.

The effects of deposition of coal ash over a wide area in the Project site need to be taken into account.

7.3.2.6 Impacts on Fauna

The microenvironment of Project area forms part of Deh Kohistan. The land here is a barren, flat to mildly hilly tract, consisting of outlying spurs of the Kirthar Range.

The construction of the T/L does not pass through the National Parks and no impact will result in displacement of wildlife and loss of habitat.

There are no flora species listed in the IUCN Red list along the transmission line route. Precious species of insects, amphibians, reptiles, mammals and birds designated by IUCN are not observed along the transmission line route.

Other fauna species have been observed, but those species are generally observed widely around the area.

7.3.2.7 Erosion from Borrow and Spoil Pits, and Sourcing of Aggregates

Construction activities for the T/L including installation of towers, construction of new access roads and clearing of tower bases, have the potential to lead to site erosion and landslides.


o During detailed design final tower locations should avoid steep erosion prone slopes to the maximum practical extent.

o Materials used for tower foundations and surface dressing will consist mainly of aggregates and gravel, which do not contain silt.

o Excavation and earthworks should be undertaken during the dry season to the maximum practical extent when the risks from erosion and silt run-off are lowest.

o Streams, river and drains within and adjacent to construction sites should be kept free from any debris. o Cut and fill should be balanced to the extent practical at each site in order to minimize the need for fill and for

spoil disposal. Cut material should be used to level the site area or be disposed at designated spoil disposal sites. o Aggregates should be sourced from existing licensed quarries that comply with environmental and other

applicable regulations, if available. If not available and new quarries are to be developed: o EMP dust control, noise control and health and safety requirements will apply to temporary quarries, as will

environmental monitoring as presented in the Environmental Monitoring Plan (EMoP). o Rehabilitation should include covering the quarry area with good quality soil and planting native vegetation.

Surfaces should be provided with a low angle slope sufficient to avoid pooling of water which may be a breeding area for insects.

o The extent of area to be excavated at borrow pits should be demarcated with signs and access to the operational area controlled.

o Excess spoil should only be directed to designated disposal areas and temporary quarries; no disposal in waterways is allowed.

o Disposal pits are only to be used for spoil disposal and not for construction or other solid wastes. o Topsoil from borrow pits should be preserved; borrow and disposal pits should be rehabilitated when no longer

required. This includes ensuring rehabilitated sites are: - compatible with local land uses; - stable and safe;


Final Report


Page 17 of 29

- provided with a low angle slope sufficient to avoid pooling of water which may be a breeding area for insects. o Construction sites within 50 m of waterways should be protected by silt fences.

Again as construction activities will be mainly confined to the project site only for a short duration, hence the impact of erosion during construction and development phase is rated as given below:

Impact Rating Erosion and LandslidesNature of Impact Adverse Duration of Impact Short term Impacted Area Localized Likelihood of Occurrence High Severity of Impact Low Significance of Impact Negligible

7.3.2.8 Living and Livelihood of the Neighbouring Community

Cattle grazing, stone quarrying, gravel and sand collection and transportation, besides wood cutting are the main occupation of neighboring people. However, these agricultural practices and livestock herding are limited to the areas beyond the Highway N-55 on the east of the area. Therefore, there is no significant impacts on these livelihood of neighboring community.

7.3.2.9 Physical Cultural Resources

Based on site surveys, the current T/L alignment and Tower siting do not encroach on any known Physical Cultural Resource (PCR) sites. Nonetheless, to mitigate against impacts on any unknown PCRs, a chance find procedure will be put in place:

o If PCRs are encountered during the construction phase, all works at the find site should be immediately halted. o The find should be assessed by a competent expert, and procedures to avoid, minimize or mitigate impacts to the

physical cultural resources should be developed by the expert in cooperation with the relevant local heritage authority, proportionate to the value of the resource in question and the nature and scale of the Project’s potential adverse impacts on it.

o Work should not begin until the procedures to avoid, minimize or mitigate impacts to the PCRs have been implemented.

o Where avoidance is not feasible, no alternatives to removal exist, and the Project benefits outweigh the anticipated cultural heritage loss from removal, the PCR should be removed and preserved according to the best available technique.

o Any removal should be conducted in accordance with relevant provisions of national and/or local laws. o Records should be maintained of all finds, including chain of custody instructions for movable finds. o All Project workers and staff should be made aware of the chance-find procedure.

7.3.2.10 Water Consumption and Conservation

Water is used in numerous construction activities such as concreting, curing, plastering, domestic etc. Water required for such activities is being met from external sources such as water tankers supplying water to the construction site. Conservation practices will nevertheless be adopted during the entire course of construction.


Final Report


Page 18 of 29

Construction activities for the proposed development can have insignificant impact on hydrology and ground water quality of the area if the construction waste leaches into ground. Potential sources of impacts on the hydrology and ground water quality during the construction phase are as follows:

o Soil runoff from the site leading to off-site contamination (particularly during rainy season). o Improper disposal of construction debris leading to off-site contamination of water resources. o Spillage of oil and grease from the vehicles and wastewater stream generated from onsite activities such as

vehicles washing, workshop etc.


Impact Rating Water Consumption and ConservationNature of Impact Adverse Duration of Impact Short term Impacted Area Localized Likelihood of Occurrence High Severity of Impact Slight Significance of Impact Negligible

To mitigate these impacts precautions and preventive measure are being taken at the site during construction to avoid any ground and surface water contamination. Following mitigation measures will be adopted as conservation.

o Not allowing water to leave the construction site. o Construction of storm water diversion channels to divert storm runoff from flowing over the construction areas. o Regular monitoring of water consumption. o Regular monitoring of water quality for good quality concreting. o Use of leak proof storage tanks. o Monitoring of the ground water table to evaluate the impact of construction activity on ground water, if applicable.

7.3.2.11 Occupational Health and Safety

The construction of civil works such as transmission towers poses an inherent risk of injury to workers from accidents and hazardous working environments. To mitigate these potential impacts:

o Prior to the commencement of civil works the EHS specialists will develop a construction phase Occupational Health and Safety Plan (OHSP). The OHSP should:

identify and minimize, so far as reasonably practicable, the causes of potential hazards to workers, including communicable diseases such as HIV/AIDs and vector borne diseases; provide preventive and protective measures, including modification, substitution, or elimination of hazardous conditions, with particular attention to live power lines, working at height, working above water, EMFs, high noise levels, and exposure to chemicals; provide measures for the management and appropriate disposal of hazardous wastes to ensure protection of the workforce and the prevention and control of releases and accidents; provide for the provision of appropriate fire extinguishers and fire response plans and appropriately trained first aid response staff; provide for the provision of appropriately stocked first-aid equipment and stations at both work sites including appropriately trained first-aid staff on site and provision of adequate transport facilities for moving injured persons to the nearest hospital;


Final Report


Page 19 of 29

provide for the provision of appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) to minimize risks, such as but not limited to appropriate (insulated if necessary) outerwear, boots and gloves; eye protectors; ear plugs safety helmets, etc.; provide training for workers, and establish appropriate incentives to use and comply with health and safety procedures and utilize PPE; include procedures for documenting and reporting occupational accidents, diseases, and incidents; and include emergency prevention, preparedness, and response arrangements in place.

With the development of an effective OHSP, occupational health and safety risks can be minimized.

7.3.2.12 Heat Stress to Construction Worker

There will be a very likely impact of sunlight causing Heat stress to construction worker during summer season. The project corridor is a barren land and no vegetative cover is there.


Impact Rating Heat StressNature of Impact Adverse Duration of Impact Short term Impacted Area Localized Likelihood of Occurrence High Severity of Impact Medium Significance of Impact Moderate

To mitigate the impact of heat stress the following measure are proposed:

o Provide cold refuges to the worker o Provide plenty of drinking water o Break the working in shifts

7.3.3 Operation Phase Impacts and Mitigation Measures Impacts from TLs are primarily related to the construction phase, and there are relatively few significant operation phase impacts. Potential operational issues include spills or release of oils or hazardous materials, EMF effects, occupational and community health and safety risks, and risks from wind loading, fires and earthquakes. Spills of transformer oil also pose a risk. Mitigation measures have been incorporated into the design to minimize these to acceptable levels.

7.3.3.1 Impact on migratory bird flyways

The birds during migration fly at elevations between 800 and 2000 m, whereas maximum height of the towers of the transmission lines is less than 40 m. As such, the 500 kV transmission line routes will not cause any obstruction for the flight of migratory birds. Similarly the T/Ls will not intercept Indus Flyway (Green Route) causing any disruption to flight of migratory birds.

Figure 7.3 shows Indus Flyway. This famous route from Siberia to various destinations in Pakistan over Karakorum, Hindu Kush, and Suleiman Ranges along Indus River down to the delta is known as International Migratory Bird Route Number 4. It is also called as the Green Route or more commonly Indus Flyway, one of the important migratory routes in the Central Asian - Indian Flyway. The birds start on this route in November. February is the peak time and by March they start flying back home. These periods may vary depending upon weather conditions in Siberia and/or


Final Report


Page 20 of 29

Pakistan. As per an estimate based on regular counts at different Pakistani wetlands, between 700,000 and 1,200,000 birds arrive in Pakistan through Indus Flyway every year.

Figure 7.4 shows the movements of migratory birds tracked between June 2010 and August 2011, which is on the Indus Flyway. This study suggests that the project site is not on the corridor of migratory birds.

Therefore no adverse impact on migratory birds is expected.

Source: Wikipedia Figure 7.3: Central Asian, East Asian-Australasian, and West Pacific migratory bird flyways


Final Report


Page 21 of 29

Source: Bird Life International Figure 7.4: Sociable Lapwing tracking June 2010 - August 2011


Impact Rating Migratory bird flywaysNature of Impact Adverse Duration of Impact Long term Impacted Area Regional Likelihood of Occurrence Medium Severity of Impact Medium Significance of Impact Minor– Moderate Impact


o Birds Monitoring shall be carried out by the Project Proponent through IMC.

7.3.3.2 Health Impacts

TL Operation and Maintenance

Operation and maintenance (O&M) of elevated high tension (EHT) lines can pose an inherent risk to workers. O&M is currently undertaken by NTDC staff adequately trained and experienced in EHT line maintenance.

Project Site


Final Report


Page 22 of 29


Impact Rating Health and Safety Nature of Impact Adverse Duration of Impact Long term Impacted Area Localized Likelihood of Occurrence High Severity of Impact Slight Significance of Impact Negligible

Nonetheless, to avoid hazards from T/L O&M:

o O&M of EHT lines will be undertaken by adequately trained, certified and experienced NTDC staff or contractors. o All relevant Government health and safety laws will be complied with. o In addition, an operation phase OHSP will be developed.

Human Exposure to Electromagnetic Fields (EMF)

During the operation phase the TLs will be energized and there will be an increase in the level of electromagnetic fields (EMFs) in the ROW vicinity.

In epidemiological studies, researchers try to establish whether there is a statistical association between selected groups of people with certain types of exposures of EMF and diseases. Some epidemiological studies have suggested a possible link between exposure to magnetic fields and childhood leukemia. It is unclear however, whether exposure to magnetic fields actually caused the disease. Some studies do not include magnetic field measurements when trying to determine an association and no epidemiological study has drawn direct conclusions about a link between cancer and EMF.

Experimental studies involve exposing cells, tissues and/or animals to magnetic fields under controlled conditions. These studies allow researchers to closely control magnetic field exposure and provide information about any small scale biological changes that magnetic fields may cause. Experimental studies have not found that magnetic fields are the cause of any disease.

Many reputable health authorities such as the World Health Organization (WHO) and Health Canada have conducted thorough reviews of all the different types of studies and research on EMF and health. These health authorities have examined the scientific weight-of-evidence and have determined that when all of the epidemiological and experimental studies are considered together, the consensus is that there is no cause-effect relationship between exposure to magnetic fields and human health. The WHO concludes:

From the current scientific literature there is no convincing evidence that exposure to radiation field shortens the life span of humans or induces or promotes cancer (WHO, 2006).

Similarly, the World Bank Electric Power Transmission and Distribution EHS Guidelines state: Although there is public and scientific concern over the potential health effects associated with exposure to EMF (not only high voltage power lines and substations, but also from everyday household uses of electricity), there is no empirical data demonstrating adverse health effects from exposure to typical EMF levels from power transmissions lines and equipment. However, while the evidence of adverse health risks is weak, it is still sufficient to warrant limited concern (World Bank, 2007).


Final Report


Page 23 of 29

The World Bank Electric Power Transmission and Distribution EHS Guidelines recommend evaluating potential exposure to the public against the reference levels developed by the International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation (ICNIRP); average and peak exposure levels should remain below the ICNIRP recommendation for general public exposure. The WHO reviews also conclude that exposures below the limits recommended by the ICNIRP international guidelines do not appear to have any known consequence on health. The overall impact is summarized as hereunder:

Impact Rating Electromagnetic FieldsNature of Impact Adverse Duration of Impact Long term Impacted Area Localized Likelihood of Occurrence High Severity of Impact Slight Significance of Impact Negligible

To minimize potential EMF impacts from the Project the following mitigation measures have been adopted:

o During design the ROW alignment was selected so as to avoid settlements and sensitive receptors. o Operation phase EMF monitoring will be undertaken. Average and peak exposure levels should remain below the

ICNIRP recommendation for general public exposure.

The EMF below the proposed 500kV overhead TLs is predicted to be 40 microtelsa (μT), well below the ICNIRP guideline of 100 μT. Overall no significant adverse EMF impacts are predicted during Project operation.

Electrocution and Induced Currents

Electrocution can occur as a result of direct contact with high-voltage electricity or from contact with tools, vehicles, ladders, or other devices that are in contact with high-voltage electricity. Power line fields can also induce voltages and currents on conductive objects such as metal roofs or building, fences, and vehicles. When a person or animal comes in contact with a conductive object a perceptible current or small secondary shock may occur.


Impact Rating Electrocution and Induced CurrentsNature of Impact Adverse Duration of Impact Long term Impacted Area Localized Likelihood of Occurrence Low Severity of Impact High Significance of Impact Moderate

To mitigate against these impacts:

o Warning signs will be posted at towers along the ROW. o Conducting objects (e.g. fences or other metallic structures) installed near power lines will be grounded to prevent

shock.

7.3.3.3 Wind, Fire and Earthquake Hazards

Wind, fire and earthquakes pose risks to the Project operation.


Final Report


Page 24 of 29


Impact Rating Wind, Fire and Earthquake HazardsNature of Impact Adverse Duration of Impact Long term Impacted Area Localized Likelihood of Occurrence Medium Severity of Impact High Significance of Impact Major

To mitigate against wind loading impacts:

o Transmission towers have been design as per relevant national building codes which include earthquake resistance and loading requirements related to wind conditions.

o Transmission support structures such as tower foundations have also been designed to withstand different combinations of loading conditions including extreme winds that generally exceed earthquake loads.

o Electricity arcing from power lines can be a fire hazard. To mitigate against fire hazards:

- The fire hazards risk will be minimized through the use of tall towers and wide ROW.

- System protection features designed to safeguard the public and line equipment will minimize fire hazards due to fallen conductors. The protection systems will consist of T/L relays and circuit breakers that are designed to rapidly detect faults and cut-off power to avoid shocks and fire hazards.

- Regular maintenance of the protection system including conductors and circuit breakers will be undertaken.

-

7.3.3.4 Electromagnetic Interference

The corona of overhead T/L conductors and high frequency currents of overhead T/Ls can create radio noise which interferes with broadcast signals or electronic equipment.


Impact Rating Electromagnetic Interference Nature of Impact Adverse Duration of Impact Long term Impacted Area Localized Likelihood of Occurrence High Severity of Impact Slight Significance of Impact Negligible

To mitigate against this:

o during design the ROW alignment was selected so as to avoid settlements; o standard design guidelines have been adopted to limit the conductor surface gradients so as to minimize

electronic interference.

7.3.4 Positive Socio-economic and Environmental Impacts Project operation will result in a number of significant positive socio-economic impacts in Bali, including:


Final Report


Page 25 of 29

o contributing to long-term energy supply security; o supporting sustained socio-economic growth by providing power to existing industries and new industrial

activities; o improving the electrification rate through the provision of connections to industries and rural areas which are

currently waiting for power connections; o improving access to health, education and other social services; o generating employment; and o improving the technical skills of the implementing agency. o the stability of the Transmission and Transformation Network (TTN) normally relies on number of alternate

sources available, faults occurrence and trippings and a normally loaded system operating within the permissible limits of the rated voltage. In NTDC transmission system, it is the overloading especially in summer season when the voltage drop is severe across the network. There are frequent trippings due to overloading. Consequently the overloading results into the breakdown of transmission lines and cause of fire at any transmission line above permissible limits, eventuating in forced load shedding.

o by implementation of this project the system will become more stable and enhance its capability to cater for the existing and future load needs. Major positive impact is anticipated.

o project operation will also result positive environmental impacts including: o reductions in GHG emissions through the reduced use of low efficiency generators by individuals, businesses and

hotels for power generation; o reductions in NOx, SO2 and particulate emissions through the reduced use of low efficiency generators without

emission control systems by individuals, businesses and hotels for power generation; and, o energy savings through the reduction of power losses due to the improved efficiency of the 500 kV transmission

system. o the overall impact is summarized as hereunder:

Impact Rating Positive ImpactsNature of Impact Beneficial Duration of Impact Long term Impacted Area Regional Likelihood of Occurrence High Severity of Impact Medium Significance of Impact Moderate

7.4 Overall Assessment of Potential Impacts and Mitigation The potential environmental aspects of establishment of the T/L have been identified for the different stages of the Project and the results summarized in following Table 7.6.

Table 7.6: Result of Environmental Impact Assessment (Transmission Line)

No. Item


Assessment of Survey Result

Results

Pre/

Cons

tructi

on

Oper

ation

Pre/

Cons

tructi

on

Oper

ation

Pollution Control


Final Report


Page 26 of 29

1 Air Quality B- D D D [Construction Phase] - Temporary dust generated from construction will be

negligible. - Exhaust emissions generated from stand-by diesel

generator, vehicle, construction machinery, etc. will be negligible.

[Operation Phase] - No specific air pollution is expected.

2 Water Quality B- C- D D [Construction Phase] - No negative impact on water quality is expected.

Because transmission routes are selected avoiding any step sloping land, and any slopes would be reinforced with concrete or other means to minimize soil runoff and turbid water generation.

[Operation Phase] - No negative impact is expected. Because the oil and


3 Soil Quality B- B- D D [Construction Phase] - No negative impact on soil quality is expected. Because

generated wastes would be stored at designated sites. [Operation Phase] - No negative impact is expected. Because the oil and


4 Wastes B- D B- D [Construction Phase] - Solid wastes and hazardous wastes might be generated

from construction sites. [Operation Phase] - No waste would be generated.

5 Noise and Vibration B- D D D [Construction Phase] - Noise may be generated from heavy machinery, haulage

of construction materials and tower materials to and around construction sites, and site construction activities including concrete mixing, excavation and blasting. But since there is no house near the ROW, no impact is predicted.

[Operation Phase] - No noise and vibration would be generated.

6 Subsidence D D D D [Construction & Operation Phase] - No subsidence would occur.

7 Odor B- D D D [Construction & Operation Phase] - No odor would be expected by appropriately disposing

of solid and liquid wastes at designated sites and being collected by licensed company regularly.

Natural Environment 8 Protected Areas D D D D [Construction & Operation Phase]


Final Report


Page 27 of 29


9 Ecosystem C- C- D B- [Construction Phase] - No negative impact on ecosystem is expected.

Transmission line route was selected so as to avoid any protected areas.

[Operation Phase] - Birds striking the lines and other impacts are expected to

be least significant. 10 Hydrology D D D D [Construction & Operation Phase]

- As there is no major water body, no adverse impact is expected.


D D D D [Construction & Operation Phase] - No large-scale topographical and geological change is

expected. Social Environment

12 Resettlement (Land Acquisition)

C- C- D D [Pre-construction Phase] - The concerned land is non-productive and

unoccupied barren waste land. As a result of the land survey by this study team with the help of the Revenue Staff, the land under ROW and footings of towers are determined to be unregistered. Under Pakistani land laws, any unregistered land falls under the ownership of the provincial government. In any case, the towers will be installed without any formal land acquisition and no compensation will be paid based on existing practice of NTDC.

13 People below the Poverty Line

C-/C+ C-/C+ D D [Pre-construction and Operation Phase] - No settlement of people was identified along the T/L

route and therefore will not be disturbed. [Construction Phase] - No significant adverse impact on the major occupation

(cattle grazing, stone quarrying, gravel and sand collection and transportation, besides wood cutting) of neighboring people since these practices are limited to the areas beyond the Highway N-55 on the east of the area.

14 Ethnic, Minorities and Indigenous People

C- C- D D [Pre-construction and Operation Phase] - No ethnic minority groups or indigenous people were

identified along the transmission line route. 15 Living and Livelihood C-/C+ C-/C+ B+ D [Pre-construction and Construction Phase]

- No productive land use was observed along the T/L route.

[Construction Phase] - Project can contribute on the local economy by employ

non-skilled workers from local communities and


Final Report


Page 28 of 29

procuring goods/materials from local communities as much as possible.

16 Use of Land and Resources

C- C- D D [Pre-construction Phase] - The land covered under the project alignment is a

barren, flat to mildly hilly tract, consisting of outlying spurs of the Kirthar Range.

- The land will remain as its natural condition. 17 Water Use C- D D D [Construction and Operation Phase]

- T/L route was selected so as to avoid any steep sloping land.

- Any slopes shall be reinforced with concrete, plantation or other means to minimize soil runoff and turbid water generation.


B- D B- A+ [Construction Phase] - The proposed T/Ls will be connected to the existing

ones; therefore, there is a chance of power outage. - Since the volume of construction traffic will be small, no

significant impact is anticipated on existing traffic. [Operation Phase] - The proposed T/Ls will increase the capacity of the

existing power of the system. 19 Social Capita,

Institutions & ConflictsC- D D D - No specific impact is predicted concerning social

infrastructure and local decision making institutions. 20 Heritage C- D D D [Construction Phase]

- No cultural, historical and archaeological heritage sites and structures were found along the proposed T/Ls.

[Operation Phase] - No specific impact is predicted concerning cultural

heritage. 21 Landscape B- B- D D [Construction and Operation Phase]

- T/L route was selected so as to avoid any protected and scenic areas to the maximum extent.

22 Gender C- C- D D - No specific negative impact is expected. 23 Child Right C- C- D D - No specific negative impact is expected. 24 Infectious Diseases B- D B- D [Construction Phase]

- Local people will be recruited for simple work as much as possible and there is a low risk of infectious diseases being transmitted by external workers.

[Operation Phase] - No specific negative impacts are expected.


B- B- B- B- [Construction Phase] - The construction of civil works poses an inherent risk of

injury to workers from accidents and hazardous working environments.

[Operation Phase] - Operation and maintenance (O&M) of elevated high

tension (EHT) lines can pose an inherent risk to workers.


Final Report


Page 29 of 29

O&M is currently undertaken by NTDC staff adequately trained and experienced in EHT line maintenance.

Others 26 Trans-boundary of

Waste Treatment and Climate Change

B- D D D - No specific negative impact is expected.

A+/-: Significant positive/negative impact is expected. B+/-: Positive/negative impact is expected to some extent. C+/-: Extent of positive/negative impact is unknown. (Further examination is needed, and the impact may be clarified as the study progresses.) D: No impact is expected. Source: Environmental Management Consultants (EMC)


Final Report

Environmental Management Consultants (EMC) Chapter – 8: Environmental Management & Monitoring Plan Page 1 of 27

Chapter 8 Environmental Management & Monitoring Plan

8.1. Introduction 8.1.1. General

In this section, the mitigation measures that are required for the Construction of four (04) 500 KV Transmission Lines for Lakhra Coal Fired Thermal Power Plant, to reduce residual impact to acceptable levels and achieve the expected outcomes of the project, are discussed. The Environmental Management Plan (EMP) is based on the type, extent and duration of the identified environmental impacts. The EMP has been prepared following PEPA guidelines and by reference to JICA Guidelines 2010.

Environmental management and monitoring is mandatory activity to be undertaken by the administration over the entire project cycle showing its commitment towards meeting environmental regulations/standards as well as maintaining health and safety standards.

The environmental management and monitoring programs are implemented from the very early stages of planning and execution phases of the project. In fact the authorization of the project is the point of initiation of environmental management plan. The monitoring data, observations recorded and test results / analyses are vital and formulate legal documents to be kept in safe custody and may be provided to competent authority as and when required in accordance to Sindh Environmental Protection Act 2014.

EMP is a dynamic and a live document that is under constant review having periodic revisions and may be updated as required. Any amendments in the procedures, information are notified to the concerned personnel after the approval from the competent authority for subsequent implementation.

8.1.2. Objectives

The EMP will serve as a principal execution module of the project that would not only mitigate adverse environmental impacts during the construction and the operation phase of the project but also ensures that environmental standards and good housekeeping is maintained. Continuous environmental monitoring is exercised to ensure that preventive measures are in place and effective to sustain environmental integrity. Some of the key objectives of EMP are to:

o Outline mitigation measures recommended in the EIA and define the responsibility and timing for the implementation of these measures;

o To outline functions and responsibilities of responsible persons. o To state and implement standards and guidelines which are required under environmental legislations particular

in context to the project. o Facilitates the implementation of the mitigation measures by providing the technical details of each project

impact, and proposing implementation schedule of the proposed mitigation measures. o Define a monitoring mechanism and identify monitoring parameters to ensure that all proposed mitigation

measures are completely and effectively implemented. o Identify training requirements at various levels and provide a plan for the implementation of training sessions.

It is important that the recommendations and mitigation measures are carried out according to the spirit of the environmental assessment process and in line with the guidelines. The EMP matrix is presented in table 9.1. The impact prediction (Chapter 7) has played a vital role in reconfirming typical mitigation measures and in identifying any different approaches based on the feasibility and detailed design assumptions and any alternatives available at this stage.


Final Report


8.1.3. Legislation and Guidelines

The EIA and EMP plan must be reviewed by the project management and approved by the SEPA before any construction activity is initiated. It is recommended that, before the works contract is worked out in detail and before pre-qualification of contractors, a full extent of the environmental requirements of the project (EIA/EIA and EMP) are included in the bidding documents. Professional experience indicates that past environmental performance of contractors and their awareness of environmentally responsible procurement should also be used as indicator criteria for the prequalification of contractors.

8.2. Environmental Management Plan (EMP) In order to facilitate the implementation of the EMP, during the preparation for the construction phase the NTDC must prepare the future contractors to co-operate with all stakeholders in the mitigation of impacts. Furthermore the contractor must be primed through the contract documentation and ready to implement all the mitigation measures. NTDC will need to engage at least one trained environmental management staff and the staff should audit the effectiveness and review mitigation measures.

The impacts have been classified into those relevant to the design/preparation stage, construction stage and operation and maintenance stage. The matrix provides details of the mitigation measures recommended for each of the identified impacts, time span of the implementation of mitigation measures, the responsibility of the institution. The institutional responsibility has been specified for the purpose of the implementation and the supervision. The matrix is supplemented with a monitoring plan (Table 9.2).

8.2.1. Institutional Framework for the Implementation of EMP

This section describes the responsibilities required for the implementation of EMP in conjunction with the NTDC, Environmental and Social Unit (ESU), Monitoring Consultants (MC), Construction Supervision Consultant (CSC) and Contractors. The Executing Agency (EA) will be Planning and Development Department Government of Sindh. The Implementation Agency (IA) is NTDC PMU. The IA will be assisted by Construction Supervision Consultant (CSC) during construction and CSC will be responsible for field surveys, engineering studies, design, and preparation of engineering drawings.

Japan International Cooperation Agency (JICA) will monitor the overall planning, design, construction stages of the project and nominate a Consultant who will report directly to JICA.

Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Sindh will act as the overall regulatory body for environmental control. The specific roles of key officials are described henceforth.

The Organizational setup of the management plan is shown in Fig. 9.1.

8.2.1.1. Project Management Unit (PMU)

The Project Management Unit (PMU), constituted by NTDC will be responsible for the successful implementation of project. PMU will ensure that the project complies with JICA guidelines and SEPA 2014. An Environment and Social Unit (ESU) within PMU will be developed that oversees the environmental and social issues.

8.2.1.2. Construction Supervision Consultant (CSC)

Monitoring responsibility will solely rest with the CSC. The CSC includes design consultants and project monitoring consultants. CSC will support PMU for the project development.

o The design consultants will ensure that all the environmental mitigation measures proposed for the design phase are incorporated in the design and included in the contract documents.


Final Report


o Project monitoring consultants will conduct environmental monitoring and prepare monitoring reports and submit to ES. He will also ensure that day-to-day construction activities will be carried out in an environmentally sound and sustainable manner.

8.2.1.3. Environment Specialist (ES)

NTDC PMU will appoint an environment specialist (ES) to monitor the implementation of environmental management measures required for the project. He will commence monitoring of project and prepare environmental monitoring reports with the aid of CSC, every month (during construction) and post-project reports (during operation), to be delivered to JICA.

The following are the responsibilities of ES:

o Support Environmental and Social Unit (ESU) formed under PMU o He will ensure that the EMPs, including all proposed mitigation measures and monitoring programs are properly

implemented. o Carrying out visits to the construction sites to review the environmental performance of the contractors; o Ensuring that the required environmental training is provided to the staff concerned;

8.2.1.4. Contractor

EMP will be made a part of the bidding documents and contract agreement and the contractor will ensure that all Project activities are in compliance with the EMP and NEQS.

8.2.1.5. Independent Monitoring Consultants (IMC)

Independent Monitoring Consultants (IMC) will be part of CSC and will assist ES. IMC will be responsible for day to day environmental monitoring and will report directly to ES.

8.2.1.6. NTDC O&M Staff

O&M staff will be responsible for activities carried out in operation phase. It will be part of PMU and assisted by ESU.

8.2.1.7. Japan International Cooperation Agency (JICA)

Japan International Cooperation Agency (JICA) will monitor the overall planning, design, construction stages of the project and nominate a Consultant who will report directly to JICA.

8.2.2. Grievance Redress Mechanism

Field level grievances will be addressed through a local Grievance Redress Committee (GRC) to be formally constituted by the proponent. The GRC will consist of a specially recruited grievance officer nominated by PMU, a jirga member or notable person, a representative from the nearby villages, locally present NGO representative and environment specialist (depending on nature of grievance). Women will be members of the GRC. The GRC will be formally notified and established at the project site. The GRC will function as open forums for hearing complaints and exploring quick resolutions to conflicts. The GRC will be required to develop an outreach program including links to the provincial ombudsman’s office. GRC will record its deliberations and inform the concerned parties of a resolution within 2 weeks of its findings and recommendations. If the GRC cannot resolve the grievance, they will be facilitated to take their complaints to the provincial ombudsmen or relevant environmental tribunal.

To ensure women have access to the grievance mechanism, separate Focus Group Discussions (FGDs) will be held with them to design protocols that are suited to their needs including procedures and mechanisms to enable their access to the mechanism, including, access to the provincial ombudsman’s office. Outreach programs will be tailored to women’s needs to ensure information is communicated to them.


Final Report


The recruited grievance officer will place a complaint register at an accessible location (Union Council office, mosque, or at camp site) for respective community so anyone can register their complaint in this register and on weekly basis, it will be checked by the GRC. In case of any complaint, the following mechanism will be adopted to resolve it:

o GRC will resolve the compliant in a week’s time and inform in writing the action taken against that grievance. o If the complaint cannot be resolved at the GRC level, the issue will be brought to the notice in PMU. o If the complaint cannot be resolved at PMU level, the matter will be taken to the highest level Project Director.

Source: Environmental Management Consultants (EMC) Figure 8.1: The Organizational setup of Environmental Management Plan and Environmental Monitoring Plan

8.2.3. Integrating EMP with Project Phases

This section outlines a management plan to be followed under the project contract. It recommends measures that will help mitigate the project’s adverse environmental effects, and assigns responsibility for implementing these measures. The environmental management plan (EMP) has been presented with project phases, and subdivided according to the key environmental and social impacts foreseen generally as and when they are triggered in a particular phase. The EMP focuses on measures that will be applied during the construction and operation phase, or are required to be incorporated into the project design up front.

8.2.3.1. Design and Pre-Construction Phase

The key environmental and social concerns identified at design phase involve Land Acquisition and Resettlement, disturbance of existing Infrastructure, impact on precious ecology, incidence of natural hazards, borrow pits, construction camps location and impediment to movement of Wildlife/Livestock/People. All of these should be taken under consideration by CSC and ESU during design activity at project site.

8.2.3.2. Land Acquisition and Resettlement

No involuntary resettlement is involved. The towers will be installed in the state-owned lands without any compensation for land, used by the tower, under existing practice. Thus, there will be no permanent acquisition of land for the four (04) 500 kV lines and towers.

The Contractor will ensure that local community structures will not be disturbed during the project. Monitoring will be required by ESU & external monitoring will be required by IMC for the assurance of no damage to local community.

8.2.3.3. Loss of land for borrow pits

The Contractor will ensure that borrow material /earth-fill will be obtained from within the ROW to reduce the impact of project siting on community owned assets. Borrow pits will need to be located along the project alignment as a


Final Report


source of earth for sub-base material for the reconstruction. Natural areas with high elevation can be utilized for source of borrow material /earth-fill but not those privately owned by the community. Construction materials for tower foundations works will be sourced only from established quarries which comply with environmental, health and safety and other applicable regulations.

Borrow and disposal pits will not be located in environmentally sensitive areas. Local community leaders will be consulted regarding the design and location of all borrow and disposal pits so as to ensure the safety of local communities. Borrow pits should be properly barricaded to avoid the intrusion of wild and grazing animals.

8.2.3.4. Encroachment on precious ecology

ES and contractor will ensure that the project will not cause any intrusion into Protected Areas and wetlands and no loss of trees will result from project siting. Fuel and oil storage areas should be located well away from any watercourses and refueling should wherever possible be carried out at the fuel storage area and not be permitted within or adjacent to watercourses.

8.2.3.5. Impediment to Movement of Wildlife/Livestock/People

The proposed transmission line route will provide passageways for humans and animals passing through these sites. Therefore, TL structures will not pose any impediment to the movement of livestock and people.

However, Contractor and ESU will ensure that passageways will not be obstructed by construction work.

8.2.3.6. Incidence of Natural Hazards

The incidence of natural hazard like earthquake is expected in the Project area. As a precautionary measure, CSC and ESU will ensure that an earthquake proof design could be developed so that little or no intensification of the basic accelerations associated with the frequency spectrum of the seismic disturbance is encountered.

8.2.3.7. Location and Management of Construction Camp

Workers will be based in the nearby townships such as Jamshoro and Hyderabad, so as principle contractor not establish any construction camp for this Project.

8.2.3.8. Encroachment on Historical/Cultural/Archeological Sites

Monitoring will be required by contractor and IMC for the assurance of no damage to these cultural and archaeological sites.

8.2.3.9. Enhancement and Maintenance of Vegetation /Plantation

The vegetation cover shall not be removed and tree cutting shall be avoided as much as possible. If any accidental removal of a tree will take place during construction or operation then it should be compensated with five indigenous trees and contractor will be responsible for the protection of the newly planted saplings during the contract period. Thereafter ESU will take the responsibility. In addition, the contractor will establish his campsite on waste /barren land rather than green or agriculturally productive land, in order to minimize the clearing of trees.

8.2.4. Construction Phase

8.2.4.1. Borrow Pit Management and Topsoil Conservation

The Contractor will be responsible for regulating the procurement of borrow material and protecting topsoil from erosion by complying with the following measures:


Final Report


o During detailed design final tower locations should avoid steep erosion prone slopes to the maximum practical extent.

o Materials used for tower foundations and surface dressing will consist mainly of aggregates and gravel, which do not contain silt.

o Excavation and earthworks should be undertaken during the dry season to the maximum practical extent when the risks from erosion and silt run-off are lowest.

o Streams, river and drains within and adjacent to construction sites should be kept free from any debris. o Cut and fill should be balanced to the extent practical at each site in order to minimize the need for fill and for

spoil disposal. Cut material should be used to level the site area or be disposed at designated spoil disposal sites.

o The extent of area to be excavated at borrow pits should be demarcated with signs and access to the operational area controlled.

o Excess spoil should only be directed to designated disposal areas and temporary quarries; no disposal in waterways is allowed.

o Aggregates should be sourced from existing licensed quarries that comply with environmental and other applicable regulations, if available. If not available and new quarries are to be developed

8.2.4.2. Contamination to ground and water resources

Contractor will be responsible to take suitable preventive measures while using construction material that may result in contamination of ground and water resources like lubricants, solid waste etc. Fuel and oil storage areas should be located well away from any watercourses during construction. Natural water courses should be maintained to the maximum extent possible. Drainage structures on access roads should be properly designed to accommodate forecast discharges. Debris and vegetation clogging culverts should be regularly cleared. Refueling, oil changing and engine maintenance of machinery, equipment and vehicles should be undertaken in designated areas with containment to prevent any oil spills, washing away at distance of at least 100 m from any water course.

8.2.4.3. Dust formation

In consultation with ESU/CSC, the contractor will be responsible to implement dust abatement program that includes spraying water on work area. The delivery of cement should be done in bulk rather than bags. All dust abatement procedures must be maintained. Soil and temporary spoil piles should be covered or sprayed if generating dust. Piles that are not going to be used in the short-term should be allowed to develop vegetation cover. Only controlled blasting should be carried out.

8.2.4.4. Management of Site Drainage System

The Contractor will carry out the following activities to manage drainage of project area:

o Construction of storm water diversion channels to divert storm runoff from flowing over the construction areas. o Drainage outlets will be designed leading into either natural streambeds or open areas when no natural streams

are located nearby. Damage to private property shall be avoided in all cases. o Retention work will be carried out in or around the project site to avoid damage to land or property.

8.2.4.5. Protection of Cultural and Community-Owned Assets

The key issues that will arise during the construction phase in this regard include the impact of construction activities on local community water resources, the impact of noise generated by construction machinery, and any chance discovery of historical/archaeological importance. The Contractor will carry out the following activities to mitigate these impacts:


Final Report


o Construction activities situated close to densely populated areas will be limited to daylight hours, to minimize the impact of noise generated by construction machinery.

o Guidelines will be established to minimize the wastage of water during construction operations and at campsites. o The Contractor will be required to maintain close liaison with local communities to minimize conflicts, if any,

related to the utilization of local resources for project purpose.

8.2.4.6. Noise and Vibration

Contractor will be responsible to reduced construction noise and vibration as far as practicable through the implementation of appropriate management procedures, including use of low noise equipment and management of construction hours.

o Construction activities situated close to densely populated areas to be limited to daylight hours to minimize impact of noise.

o Earthmoving equipment should be kept in good condition by proper maintenance and servicing.

8.2.4.7. Heat Stress to Construction Worker

For Workers, Contractor will be responsible to:

o Provide cold refuges to the worker o Provide plenty of drinking water o Break the working in shifts

8.2.5. Maintenance and Operation Phase

8.2.5.1. Electrocution and Induced Currents

O&M staff of NTDC is responsible for adopting the following measures:

o Warning signs will be posted at towers along the ROW. o Conducting objects (e.g. fences or other metallic structures) installed near power lines will be grounded to

prevent shock.

8.2.5.2. Community Safety Risk

As the project corridor will be accessible to members of the community, the project should not pose a safety risk to the community due to both accidental and natural causes during maintenance and operation phase.

o Emergency and safety plan will be prepared by ESU. o Transmission towers have been designed as per relevant national building codes which include earthquake

resistance and loading requirements related to wind conditions. o Transmission support structures such as tower foundations have also been designed to withstand different

combinations of loading conditions including extreme winds that generally exceed earthquake loads. o Electricity arcing from power lines can be a fire hazard. To mitigate against fire hazards:

- The fire hazards risk will be minimized through the use of tall towers and wide ROWs.

- System protection features designed to safeguard the public and line equipment will minimize fire hazards due to fallen conductors. The protection systems will consist of T/L relays and circuit breakers that are designed to rapidly detect faults and cut-off power to avoid shocks and fire hazards.

o Grievance Redress Mechanism will be implemented by Contractor/Environmental Specialist (ES) to ensure that community complains are recorded appropriately.


Final Report


8.3. Environmental Monitoring Plan (EMoP) The monitoring plan was designed based on the project cycle. During the preconstruction period, the monitoring activities will focus on (i) checking the contractor’s bidding documents, particularly to ensure that all necessary environmental requirements have been included; and (ii) checking that the contract documents’ references to environmental mitigation measures requirements have been incorporated as part of contractor’s assignment and making sure that any advance works are carried out in good time. Where detailed design is required (e.g. for power distribution lines and avoidance of other resources) the inclusion and checking of designs must be carried out. During the construction period, the monitoring activities will focus on ensuring that environmental mitigation measures are implemented, and to guide any remedial action to address unexpected impacts. Monitoring activities during project operation will focus on recording environmental performance and proposing remedial actions to address unexpected impacts.

The organizational structure of monitoring plan is shown in Figure 9.1.

8.4. Environmental Training An environmental training program will be prepared to address the need of contractor’s site staff as well as project proponent (NTDC) field staff and build their capacity to effectively implement project-specific EMP.

ES will assist NTDC to organize training for their staff and to help them establish system /infrastructure for future sustainability.

In addition to the training arranged and imparted by the ES for complete project team, the contractor will also plan small training sessions for workers involved in specific jobs. Cost of trainings and mitigation measures will be deemed included in contract cost.


Final Report


Table 8.1: Environmental Management Plan Environmental

concern Objectives Mitigation Measures recommended Timing to implement Locations to

implement Responsibility Monitoring

Design Stage Social Impacts To ensure community

involvement to minimize social impacts

- Disclose project detail to neighboring community - Before the construction of TLs.

Construction Site (ROW)

CSC NTDC ESC

Hydrological Impacts To minimize hydrological and drainage impacts during construction.

- Design of adequate major and minor culverts facilities for drainage.

- Existing open wells in the ROW will be capped

- Before the commencement of construction activities/during design stage.

If lines are relocated near water courses.

NTDC ESU with the Design Consultant

NTDC

Waste disposal Ensure adequate disposal options for all waste including transformer oil, residually contaminated soils, and scrap metal.

- Create waste management policy and plan to identify sufficient locations for and storage of waste generated from construction sites, oils, disposal of residually contaminated soils and scrap metal “cradle to grave”.

- Designate disposal sites in the contract and cost unit disposal rates accordingly.

- Prior to detailed design stage no later than pre-qualification or tender negotiations

- Include in contract.

NTDC ESU. Locations approved by EPA and NTDC.

NTDC ESU EPA

Temporary drainage and erosion control

Include mitigation in preliminary designs for erosion control and temporary drainage.

- Identify locations where drainage crossing ROW may be affected by works.

- Include protection works in contract as a payment milestone(s).

- During designing stage no later than pre-qualification or tender negotiations.

Locations based on drainage crossing RoW.


NTDC


Final Report





Contract clauses Ensure requirements and recommendations of environmental assessment are included in the contracts.

- Include EMP Matrix in tender documentation and make contractors responsible to implement mitigation measures by reference to EIA/EIA in contract.

- Include preparation of EMP review and method statement Waste Management (WM) Plan, Temporary Drainage (TD) and Erosion Control (EC) Plan in contract as a payment milestone(s).

- Require environmental accident checklist and a list of controlled chemicals / substances to be included in the contractor’s work method statement and tender documentation.

- During tender preparation.

- No later than pre- qualification or tender negotiations

- In bidding documents as evaluation criteria.

Locations identified in the EIA/EIA/EMP or as required/approved by SEPA.


NTDC

Construction Stage Hydrology and Drainage Aspects

To ensure the proper implementation of any requirements mentioned in EPA conditions of approval letter in relation to Hydrology of the project.

- Streams, river and drains within and adjacent to construction sites should be kept free from any debris

- Spoil disposal pits should be in suitable depressions not adjacent to waterways

- Natural water courses should be maintained to the maximum extent possible

- Debris and vegetation clogging culverts should be regularly cleared

- Consideration of weather conditions when particular construction activities are undertaken.

- Limitations on excavation depths in use of recharge areas for material exploitation or spoil disposal.

- Prepare a thorough drainage management plan

- Proper timetable prepared in consideration with the climatic conditions of the area, the different construction activities mentioned here to be guided.

Special locations are identified on the site by the contractor to minimize disturbances. A list of locations of drains to be compiled and included in the contract.

Contract or supervised by Contractor or to actively supervise and enforce.

NTDC ESU


Final Report





Orientation for Contractor, and Workers

To ensure that the CSC contractor and workers understand and have the capacity to ensure the environmental requirements and implementation of mitigation measures.

- NTDC ESU environmental specialist to monitor and progress all environmental statutory and recommended obligations.

- Conduct special briefing for managers and / or onsite training for the contractors and workers on the environmental requirement of the project. Record attendance and achievement test for contractors site agents.

- Agreement on critical areas to be considered and necessary mitigation measures, among all parties who are involved in project activities.

- Continuous progress review and refresher sessions to be followed.

- Induction course for all site agents and above including all relevant NTDC staff / new project staff before commencement of work.

- At early stages of construction for all construction employees as far as reasonably practicable.

All staff members in all categories. Monthly induction and six month refresher course as necessary until contractor complies.

NTDC ESU, Contractor and the CSC and record details.

NTDC & CSC to observe and record success.

Air quality To minimize dust effectively and avoid complaints due to the airborne particulate matter released to the atmosphere.

- Control all dusty materials at source. - All heavy equipment and machinery shall be fitted in full

compliance with the national regulations. - Stockpiled soil and sand shall be slightly wetted before

loading, particularly in windy conditions. - Fuel-efficient and well-maintained haulage trucks shall be

employed to minimize exhaust emissions. - Vehicles transporting soil, sand and other construction

materials shall be covered. Limitations to speeds of such vehicles necessary. Transport through densely populated area should be avoided.

- Spraying of bare areas with water.

- During all construction.

Construction sites within 100m of sensitive receivers. A list of locations to be included in contract and other sensitive areas identified by the CSC along the ROW during works.

Contractor should maintain acceptable standard CSC to supervise activities.

NTDC ESU / CSC


Final Report





- Concrete plants to be controlled in line with statutory requirements should not be close to sensitive receptors.

Construction Waste Disposal

Minimize the impacts from the disposal of construction waste.

- Waste management plan to be submitted by the contractor to CSC and approved by NTDC ESU prior to starting of works. WMP shall estimate the amounts and types of construction waste to be generated by the project.

- Investigating whether the waste can be reused in the project or by other interested parties without any residual environmental impact.

- Identifying potential safe disposal sites close to the project, or those designated sites in the contract.

- Investigating the environmental conditions of the disposal sites and recommendation of most suitable and safest sites.

- Piling up of loose material should be done in segregated areas to arrest washing out of soil. Debris shall not be left where it may be carried by water to the water bodies.

- Used oil and lubricants shall be recovered and reused or removed from the site in full compliance with the national regulations.

- Oily wastes must not be burned. Disposal location to be agreed with local authorities/EPA.

- Machinery should be properly maintained to minimize oil spill during the construction.

- Machinery should be maintained in a dedicated area over drip trays to avoid soil contamination from residual oil spill

- Prior to start and during the construction period

Dumping: A list of temporary stockpiling areas and more permanent dumping areas to be prepared at the contract stage for agreement. A list of temporary stockpiling areas and more permanent dumping areas to be prepared at the contract stage for agreement (in WM Plan)

CSC and NTDC ESU should supervise and take action to ensure that contractor’s complete relevant activities according to EIA / EMP requirements & NEQS.

NTDC/CSC


Final Report





during maintenance. Safety Precautions for the Workers

To ensure safety of workers

- Providing induction safety training for all staff adequate warning signs in health and safety matters, and require the workers to use the provided safety equipment.

- Providing workers with skull guard or hard hat and hard toe shoes.

- Prior to commencement and during construction

Location to be identified by the CSC with contractor.

Contractor and CSC

NTDC / CSC

Social Impacts To ensure minimum social impacts on infrastructure and services

- Monitor power outage - Monitor complaints of the people on construction

nuisance/damage and responded promptly through GRM. - Contractor should make alternative arrangements to avoid

local community impacts


- Complaints of public to be solved as soon as possible

Close to ROW Contractor and the CSC

NTDC ESU/ CSC / IMC

To contribute on living and livelihood of local communities

- Employ non-skilled workers from local communities. - Procurement of goods/materials from local communities


Through the Project corridor.

Contractor and CSC

NTDC / CSC

Existing Social Infrastructure and Services

Temporal electric outage during connection between existing TLs and new ones

- Compliance of the technical protocol, notification to the local residents and institutions

- During the process of connecting the proposed and the existing TLs

Local residents and institutions such as clinics and schools

Contractor and the CSC

NTDC PMU

Infectious Diseases Impacts of the influx of labor farce and staff on infectious diseases.

- Instructions on construction workers about infectious diseases and their preventions by the Consultant before the construction starts.

- Biannually Project site, camp site Contractor and the CSC

NTDC PMU

Operational Stage Oils, Fuel Spills and Dangerous Goods

Minimize Oil, fuel spillage.

- Chemicals and oils should be stored in secure designated areas with permanent impermeable bunds at distance of at

Operational phase Through the Project corridor.

NTDC O&M Staff NTDC ESU


Final Report





least 100 m from any water course. - Transformer oil will be supplied in drums from an imported

source and tap tanks will be topped up as necessary at the above noted secure designated areas.

- Refueling of machinery, equipment and vehicles should be undertaken at distance of at least 100 m from any water course.

- Any major work including oil changing and engine maintenance with the potential for oil to be spilled will be done in designated areas at distance of at least 100 m from any water course and with containment to prevent any oil spills washing away.

- Contaminated residues and waste oily residues should be disposed at an appropriate site approved by the relevant local environmental authority.

T/L Operation and Maintenance

Mitigate any inherent Health and Safety risk to O&M staff.

- O&M of EHT lines will be undertaken by adequately trained, certified and experienced NTDC staff or contractors.

- All relevant Government health and safety laws will be complied with.

- In addition, an operation phase Occupational Health and Safety Plan (OHSP) will be developed.




Final Report





Human Exposure to Electromagnetic Fields (EMF)

Mitigate the impact of EMF.

- Overall no significant adverse EMF impacts are predicted during Project operation

- During design the RoW alignment was selected so as to avoid settlements and sensitive receptors.

- Operation phase EMF monitoring will be undertaken. Average and peak exposure levels should remain below the ICNIRP recommendation for general public exposure.

Design and Operational phase

Through the Project corridor.


Electrocution and Induced Currents

Mitigate the risk of direct contact with high-voltage electricity or from contact with tools, vehicles, ladders, or other devices.

- Warning signs will be posted at towers along the ROW. - Anti-climbing features will be installed on towers. - Conducting objects (e.g. fences or other metallic

structures) installed near power lines will be grounded to prevent shock.



Wind, Fire and Earthquake Hazards

To ensure that the safety of project operations.

- Transmission towers have been design as per relevant national building codes which include earthquake resistance and loading requirements related to wind conditions.

- Transmission support structures such as tower foundations have also been designed to withstand different combinations of loading conditions including extreme winds that generally exceed earthquake loads.

- The fire hazards risk will be minimized through the use of tall towers and wide ROWs.

- System protection features designed to safeguard the public and line equipment will minimize fire hazards due to fallen conductors. The protection systems will consist of




Final Report





T/L relays and circuit breakers that are designed to rapidly detect faults and cut-off power to avoid shocks and fire hazards.

- Regular maintenance of the protection system including conductors and circuit breakers will be undertaken.

Impact on migratory bird flyways

To reduce the impact on migratory birds and impact on their flyways.

- Birds Monitoring Operational phase Through the Project corridor.

NTDC ESU NTDC PMU

NTDC = National Transmission and Despatch Company Limited. LAC = Local Authority Council. TD = Temporary drainage. EC = Erosion control. WM = waste management. CSC = Construction supervision consultant or equivalent. TXL = Transmission line. NEQS = National Environmental Quality Standards CSC = Construction supervision consultant. ESU = Environmental and Social Unit Source: Environmental Management Consultants


Final Report


Table 8.2: Environmental Monitoring PlanS# Monitoring Parameter Monitoring Locations Means of Monitoring Timing Responsibility

Design / Pre-Construction Stage 1. Audit project bidding documents to ensure EIA

and EMP is included - - Prior to issue of biding documents ESU through PMU.

2. Monitor that the selection process and final alignment selection process and its environmental compliance with EMP

- - Prior to ESU’s approval of contractor’s detail alignment survey

ESU with the assistance of CSC

3. Monitor contractor’s detail project design to ensure relevant environmental mitigation measures in EMP have been included

- - Prior to ESU’s approval of contractor’s detail alignment survey

ESU with the assistance of PMU

4. Monitor through implementation of detail environmental guidelines for construction works including procurement management, works and closing operation

- - Prior to ESU’s approval of contractor’s detail design


5. Review the mineral, construction materials and waste management



6. Audit detail design of facilities and installation to ensure standard



Construction Stage 7. Checks for dust emissions Construction sites,

project roads Visual observation During routine monitoring CSC

8. Waste management Construction sites Visual observation During routine monitoring CSC

9. Existing Social Infrastructure and Services Local residents and institutions such as clinics and schools

Occurrence and recovery of outages

Continuously during the process of connecting the proposed and the existing transmission lines

CSC

10. Infectious diseases Project site, camp Implementation status of Biannually CSC


Final Report


Table 8.2: Environmental Monitoring PlanS# Monitoring Parameter Monitoring Locations Means of Monitoring Timing Responsibility

sites mitigation measures proposed in the EMP, the reported number of infections

Operational Stage 11. Maintenance T/L Corridor During routine maintenance NTDC ESU 12. Birds monitoring T/L Corridor Counting the birds’ body June - August NTDC ESU

Complete record of sampling and analysis should be maintained and documented. PMU = Project Monitoring Unit, Source: Environmental Management Consultants


Final Report


8.5. Monitoring Form If environmental reviews indicate the need of monitoring by JICA, JICA undertakes monitoring for necessary items that are decided by environmental reviews. JICA undertakes monitoring based on regular reports including measured data submitted by the project proponent. When necessary, the project proponent should refer to the following monitoring form for submitting reports.

When monitoring plans including monitoring items, frequencies and methods are decided, project phase or project life cycle (such as construction phase and operation phase) should be considered.


Final Report


1. Monitoring Form (during construction)

Construction Phase

(1) Response/Actions to Comments and Guidelines from Government Authorities and the Public

(2) Pollution- Waste

MeasurementPoint

Frequency

Constructionsites

Annualy in November

Note: Needed only during construction and there are no impacts during operational phase

(3) Social Environment- Existing Social Infrastructure and Services

MeasurementPoint

Frequency

Local residentsand institutionssuch as clinicsand schools

Continuously duringthe process ofconnecting theproposed and theexisting transmissionlines

- Infectious DiseasesMeasurement

PointFrequency

Project site,camp sites

Biannually

- Accidents and SafetyMeasurement

PointFrequency

Project site Everyday

Implementation status ofmitigation measuresproposed in the EMP,occurrence of accidentsand health issues

Implementation status ofmitigation measuresproposed in the EMP, thereported number ofinfections

Visual observatin

Item Monitoring results during report period Measures to be taken


Occurrence andRecocery of Outages

Visual observatin



Waste disposal status Visual observatin

The latest results of the below monitoring items shall be submitted to the lenders as part of Quarterly Progress report throughout the

Monitoring Item Monitoring Results during Report PeriodConditions laid down in the EIA approval issuedfrom EPA.

The compliance reports shall be submitted to EPA on regular basis.


Final Report


2. Monitoring Form (during operation)

Operation Phase

(1) Natural Environment

MeasurementPoint

Frequency

T/L Corridor June - August

Note: Needed only during operational phase

The latest results of the below monitoring items shall be submitted to the lenders on biannual basis for the first two years of operation.


Birds Monitoring (Birdstrikes)


8.6. Environmental Checklist An environmental checklist based on the JICA Guidelines is shown in Table 8.3.


Final Report


Table 8.3: Environmental Checklist for Transmission Line

Environmental Item Main Check Items Yes: Y

No: N Confirmation of Environmental Considerations

(Reasons, Mitigation Measures) 1 Permits and Explanation(1) EIA and Environmental Permits

(a) Have EIA reports been already prepared in official process? (a)Y Evaluation: EIA report has been completed.(a) The EIA report has been completed as per guidelines of the JICA.

(b) Have EIA reports been approved by authorities of the host country' government?

(b)N (b) Not yet.Necessary approval will be obtained by the client, as and where required, to fulfill the EIA condition from EPA Sindh.

(c) Have EIA reports been unconditionally approved? If conditions are imposed on the approval of EIA reports, are the conditions satisfied?

(c)N (c) Not yet.

(d) In addition to the above approvals, have other required environmental permits been obtained from the appropriate regulatory authorities of the host country's government?

(d)N (d) Not yet.

(2) Explanation to the Local Stakeholders

(a) Have contents of the project and the potential impacts been adequately explained to the Local stakeholders based on appropriate procedures, including information disclosure? Is understanding obtained from the Local stakeholders?

(a) Y Evaluation: Contents of the project and the potential impacts were adequately explained to the local stakeholders.

(a) Public consultation process undertaken by the consultants during the EIA study. Their views are considered in report and due weightage given. After its review by the concerned authorities, the EIA study will be made public.

(b) Have the comment from the stakeholders (such as local residents) been reflected to the project design?

(b)Y Evaluation: The comments from the stakeholders have been reflected to the project design.

(b) The comments obtained from stakeholder meetings have been reflected to the project design and locations.

(3) Examination of Alternatives

(a) Have alternative plans of the project been examined with social and environmental considerations?

(a)Y Evaluation: Alternative plans have been examined with social and environmental considerations properly.

(a) The alternative plans were examined concerning transmission line routes with social and environmental considerations as well as technology and cost.(see Chapter 11)

2 Pollution Control(1) Water Quality (a) Is there any possibility that soil runoff from the bare lands

resulting from earthmoving activities, such as cutting and filling will cause water quality degradation in downstream water areas? If the water quality degradation is anticipated, are adequate measures considered?

(a)N Evaluation: No possibility of water quality degradation is predicted due to proper mitigation measures.

(a) As water quality degradation from construction activities is expected, erosion controls will be applied which is designated in the EMP. On the other hand, there is no major surface water within the ROW (Right Of Way).

3 Natural Environment(1) Protected Areas

(a) Is the project site located in protected areas designated by the country’s laws or international treaties and conventions? Is there a possibility that the project will affect the protected areas?

(a)N Evaluation: There is no protected area with in ROW.(a) The project site is not located in any protected area.


Final Report




(Reasons, Mitigation Measures) (2) Ecosystem (a) Does the project site encompass primeval forests, tropical rain

forests, ecologically valuable habitats (e.g., coral reefs, mangroves, or tidal flats)?

(a)N Evaluation: Not applicable(a) No forest and ecologically valuable habitats in ROW.

(b) Does the project site encompass the protected habitats of endangered species designated by the country’s laws or international treaties and conventions?

(b)N Evaluation: Not applicable(b) The project does not encompass any protected habitats of endangered species.

(c) If significant ecological impacts are anticipated, are adequateprotection measures taken to reduce the impacts on the ecosystem?

(c)N Evaluation: Not applicable(c) No significant impacts on ecosystem are envisaged.

(d) Are adequate measures taken to prevent disruption of migration routes and habitat fragmentation of wildlife and livestock?

(d)Y Evaluation: Not applicable(d) Adequate measures such as construction regulation in the night would be done.

(e) Is there any possibility that the project will cause the negative impacts, such as destruction of forest, poaching, desertification, reduction in wetland areas, and disturbance of ecosystem due to introduction of exotic (non-native invasive) species and pests? Are adequate measures for preventing such impacts considered?

(e)N Evaluation: Not applicable(e) As there is no forest, wetland, exotic species in the ROW, no negative impact on ecosystem would be anticipated.

(f) In cases where the project site is located in undeveloped areas, is there any possibility that the new development will result in extensive loss of natural environments?

(f)N Evaluation: Not applicable(f) Right of Way (ROW) is located in undeveloped area. However, no extensive loss of natural environments would be expected due to the poor vegetation.

(3) Topography and Geology

(a) Is there any soft ground on the route of power transmission and distribution lines that may cause slope failures or landslides? Are adequate measures considered to prevent slope failures or landslides, where needed?

(a)N Evaluation: No slope failures or landslides occur.(a) The land is plain having no expected damage of land sliding or slipping.

(b) Is there any possibility that civil works, such as cutting and filling will cause slope failures or landslides? Are adequate measures considered to prevent slope failures or landslides?

(b)N Evaluation: No slope failures or landslides occur.(b) The land is plain having no expected damage of land sliding or slipping.

(c) Is there a possibility that soil runoff will result from cut and fill areas, waste soil disposal sites, and borrow sites? Are adequate measures taken to prevent soil runoff?

(c)N Evaluation: Not applicable(c) All the solid waste (soils) will be reused in tower foundation after compaction to make the site to original landscape.

4 Social Environment (1) Resettlement (a) Is involuntary resettlement caused by project implementation? If

involuntary resettlement is caused, are efforts made to minimize the impacts caused by the resettlement?

(a)N Evaluation: There will be no permanent and temporary acquisition of land for the T/Ls. (a) The project land is barren plain and unused land with few vegetation, no physical obstacles, crops, fruit trees, and other assets. In any case, the towers will be installed without any formal land acquisition and no compensation will be paid based on existing practice of NTDC.

(b) Is adequate explanation on compensation and resettlement assistance given to affected people prior to resettlement?

(b)N Evaluation: This Project will not involve any affected people.(b) As a result of EIA and Land Acquisition and Resettlement Plant (LARAP) studies with the help of Revenue staff, the project site were determined to be unregistered. Under Pakistani law, any unregistered land falls under the Province Government. and also this project does not cause any involuntary resettlement.


Final Report




(Reasons, Mitigation Measures) (c) Is the resettlement plan, including compensation with full replacement costs, restoration of livelihoods and living standards developed based on socioeconomic studies on resettlement?

(c)N Evaluation: This project does not involve any involuntary resettlement therefore resettlement plan is not required.

(d) Are the compensations going to be paid prior to the resettlement?

(d)N Same as above.

(e) Are the compensation policies prepared in document? (e) N Same as above.

(f) Does the resettlement plan pay particular attention to vulnerable groups or people, including women, children, the elderly, people below the poverty line, ethnic minorities, and indigenous peoples?

(f) N/ Same as above.

(g) Are agreements with the affected people obtained prior to resettlement?

(g) N Same as above.

(h) Is the organizational framework established to properly implement resettlement? Are the capacity and budget secured to implement the plan?

(h) N Same as above.

(i) Are any plans developed to monitor the impacts of resettlement? (i) N Same as above.

(j) Is the grievance redress mechanism established? (j) N Same as above.

(2) Living and Livelihood

(a) Is there a possibility that the project will adversely affect the living conditions of inhabitants? Are adequate measures considered to reduce the impacts, if necessary?

(a) N Evaluation: No significant adverse impact. (a) No residential structures and economical activities and vulnerable groups of people were observed in the project area. There will be positive impacts to local communities. Project will employ as many local people as possible and use the services and goods offered by local community.

(b) Is there a possibility that diseases, including infectious diseases, such as HIV will be brought due to immigration of workers associated with the project? Are adequate considerations given to public health, if necessary?

(b)Y Evaluation: There is a risk of infectious diseases during construction period.(b) Local people will be recruited as much as possible and lower the risk of infectious disease transmitted by external workers. The environmental and social management plan fully addresses the issue of communicable diseases and their management.

(c) Is there any possibility that installation of structures, such as power line towers will cause a radio interference? If any significant radio interference is anticipated, are adequate measures considered?

(c)N Evaluation: There is no possibility of radio interference.(c) The transmission line will pass through remote area that is barren plain land hence; no possibility of radio interference is expected. Moreover T/L distance from natural surface level will be maintained as per international guidelines.

(d) Are the compensations for transmission wires given in accordance with the domestic law?

(d)N Evaluation: No compensation is needed to the transmission wires according to the domestic law.(d) According to Telegraph Act 1885 of Pakistan, there is no necessity to compensate to the land owners. The land will remain in the custody of the owner and productive for farming. In case land under a tower is not freely accessible for productive use, then the site will be permanently acquired and appropriately compensated. There is no agricultural land on the ROW in this project.


Final Report




(Reasons, Mitigation Measures) (3) Heritage (a) Is there a possibility that the project will damage the local

archeological, historical, cultural, and religious heritage? Are adequate measures considered to protect these sites in accordance with the country’s laws?

(a)N Evaluation: Not applicable(a) There are no structures /sites of religious or cultural heritage.

(4) Landscape (a) Is there a possibility that the project will adversely affect the local landscape? Are necessary measures taken?

(a)N Evaluation: The project will not affect the local landscape(a) Necessary measures are proposed.

(5) Ethnic Minorities and Indigenous Peoples

(a) Are considerations given to reduce impacts on the culture and lifestyle of ethnic minorities and indigenous peoples?

(a)N Evaluation: Not applicable(a) The project complies with the country’s law for rights of ethnic minorities and indigenous people. However, no such communities are found in the project area.

(b) Are all of the rights of ethnic minorities and indigenous peoples in relation to land and resources respected?

(b)N Evaluation: Not applicable(b) The project complies with the country’s law for rights of ethnic minorities and indigenous people. However, no such communities are found in the RoW.

(6) Working Conditions

(a) Is the project proponent not violating any laws and ordinances associated with the working conditions of the country which the project proponent should observe in the project?

(a)Y Evaluation: Project proponent will comply with the relevant law and ordinances(a) The Municipal Laws such as Pakistan Labour Policy, 2010 are observed.

(b) Are tangible safety considerations in place for individuals involved in the project, such as the installation of safety equipment which prevents industrial accidents, and management of hazardous materials?

(b)Y Evaluation: Appropriate measures to prevent the workers from accidents will be taken(b) The construction of civil works such as transmission towers and substations poses an inherent risk of injury to workers from accidents and hazardous working environments. A construction phase Occupational Health and Safety Plan (OHSP) will be developed

(c) Are intangible measures being planned and implemented for individuals involved in the project, such as the establishment of a safety and health program, and safety training (including traffic safety and public health) for workers etc.?

(c)Y Evaluation: Intangible measures will be planned and implemented(c). A construction phase Occupational Health and Safety Plan (OHSP) will be developed.

(d) Are appropriate measures taken to ensure that security guards involved in the project not to violate safety of other individuals involved, or local residents?

(d)Y Evaluation: Appropriate measures will be taken(d) The appropriate measures would be taken so as to ensure that the security guards will not violate safety of other individuals.

5 Others

(1) Impacts during Construction

(a) Are adequate measures considered to reduce impacts during construction (e.g., noise, vibrations, turbid water, dust, exhaust gases, and wastes)?

(a)Y Evaluation: Adequate measures will be taken to reduce impacts during construction(a) These are taken care of in the EMP.

(b) If construction activities adversely affect the natural environment (ecosystem), are adequate measures considered to reduce impacts?

(b)N (b) N/A

(c) If construction activities adversely affect the social environment, are adequate measures considered to reduce impacts?

(c)Y (c) Evaluation: Monitoring will be conducted for outage. Temporary power outage is expected during connection between existing T/Ls and new ones.


Final Report




(Reasons, Mitigation Measures) (2) Monitoring (a) Does the proponent develop and implement monitoring program

for the environmental items that are considered to have potential impacts?

(a)Y Evaluation: Monitoring program has been developed(a) Monitoring program has been developed.

(b) What are the items, methods and frequencies of the monitoring program?

(b)Y Evaluation: The items, methods and frequencies are described in Monitoring Plan(b) The methods and approaches have been adopted in the monitoring plan.

(c) Does the proponent establish an adequate monitoring framework (organization, personnel, equipment, and adequate budget to sustain the monitoring framework)?

(c)Y Evaluation: Adequate monitoring framework has been established(c) Proponent has established the monitoring frameworks for pre-construction (design stage), construction and operation phase.

(d) Are any regulatory requirements pertaining to the monitoring report system identified, such as the format and frequency of reports from the proponent to the regulatory authorities?

(d)Y Evaluation: Monitoring format is regulated by national law.(d) Monitoring activities will be presented in the regular monthly and quarterly progress reports.

6 Note Reference to Checklist of Other Sectors

(a) Where necessary, pertinent items described in the Road checklist should also be checked (e.g., projects including installation of electric transmission lines and/or electric distribution facilities).

(a)Y Evaluation: Relevant items on road checklist are referred.(a) Air quality, waste, noise and vibration, hydrology are given as the item of check list to concern the road. Appropriate measures would be taken to those items.

Note on Using Environmental Checklist

(a) If necessary, the impacts to transboundary or global issues should be confirmed, (e.g., the project includes factors that may cause problems, such as transboundary waste treatment, acid rain, destruction of the ozone layer, or global warming).

(a)N Evaluation: Not applicable(a) The project will not cause any trans boundary impacts.

1) Regarding the term “Country’s Standards” mentioned in the above table, in the appropriate environmental considerations are required to be made. In cases where local environmental regulations are yet to be established in some areas, considerations should be made based on comparisons with appropriate standards of other countries (including Japan's experience).

2) Environmental checklist provides general environmental items to be checked. It may be necessary to add or delete an item taking into account the characteristics of the project and the particular circumstances of the country and locality in which it is located.




8.7. Total Budget Estimations Cost estimates are prepared for all the mitigation and monitoring measures proposed in the EMP. The details of the cost estimates and the budget during construction stage and first two years of operation stage for the mitigation and monitoring measures are given in Table 8.1. The cost estimates for control measures and some of the mitigation measures that were already part of Engineers estimate are not included in the EMP.

The cost estimates include the budget for environmental monitoring and independent monitoring consultant for EMP implementation during the project phases.

The total budget for EMP implementation is estimated to be about US$ 84 thousand as shown in Table 8.4.

Table 8.4: Summary of Costs for Environmental Management and Monitoring

Item Unit Unit Cost US$ Quantity Total Cost US$

1 Waste Management Site 1,000 12 12,000

2 Birds Monitoring Site 12,000 06 72,000

Total (1 + 2) 84,000 Source: Environmental Management Consultants (EMC)


Final Report

Environmental Management Consultants (EMC) Chapter – 9: Conclusion and Recommendations Page 1 of 1

Chapter 9 Conclusion and Recommendations

The EIA process finds that the impacts of the project activities at the pre-construction, construction and operation

stages have been adequately addressed and mitigation measures duly proposed wherever needed. Adoption of

mitigation measures will ensure reduction of impact on the micro and macroenvironment as well as socio-economic

conditions to acceptable levels. The development of this project will be compatible with the requirements of the Sindh

Environmental Protection Act 2014, Pakistan Environmental Protection Act 1997, and JICA Guidelines 2010 as well

as other regulatory requirements of Government of Sindh and Government of Pakistan. The issue of environment,

health & safety has been duly incorporated in the design & operations phases of the project.

On the basis of the findings of the EIA Study, it is possible to conclude that:

o Operation of T/Ls will, on adoption of the mitigation measures, have no significant impact on the physical as well

as socio-economic composition of the microenvironment and macroenvironment of the project area in Jamshoro.

o The likely impact of construction and operation of the T/Ls and associated infrastructure will be appropriately

mitigated through proven technologies, careful planning and landscaping.

o The proposed T/Ls Project will when commissioned become an integral part of the microenvironment of Taluka

Manjhand and a friendly component of its macroenvironment.

Mitigation will be assured by a program of environmental monitoring conducted to ensure that all measures are

provided as intended, and to determine whether the environment is protected as envisaged. This will include

observations on and off site, document checks, and interviews with workers and beneficiaries, and any requirements

for remedial action will be reported to the EPA Sindh.

There are two essential recommendations that need to be followed to ensure that the environmental impacts of the

project are successfully mitigated.The Implementing Agency (NTDC) shall ensure that:

o All mitigation and enhancement measures proposed in this EIA report are implemented in full, as described in the

document;

o The Environmental Management and Monitoring Plan is implemented in letter and spirit.

It is envisaged that the current commitment of the proponent to maintain the quality of life in and around the project

area through implementation of the environmental management plan and manpower engagement/employment plan,

specifically developed for the project would mitigate the likely adverse impacts. Furthermore the Project will achieve

the prime objectives of utilizing the indigenous resources by providing the much-needed fuel to the current energy-

deficient scenario of Pakistan.

The Project will thus respond to all aspects of sustainability: Economic, social and environmental and will thus be a

sustainably viable project.


Final Report

Environmental Management Consultants (EMC) Annexures

ANNEXURES

I. Draft Land Acquisition and Resettlement Action Plan (LARAP)

II. Sindh Environmental Protection Act, 2014

III. Sindh Environmental Protection Agency (Review of IEE and EIA) Regulations, 2014

IV. National Environmental Quality Standards (NEQS)

V. JICA Guidelines for Environmental and Social Considerations

VI. Detailed Log of Scoping Consultations

VII. Detailed Log of Feedback Consultations


Final Report

Environmental Management Consultants (EMC) Annex – I

ANNEX – I Land Acquisition and Resettlement Action Plan


Final Report

Environmental Management Consultants (EMC) Annex – I

Land Acquisition and Resettlement Action Plan

August 2015

500 kV Transmission Lines for Lakhra Coal Fired Thermal Power Plant Construction Project

Islamic Republic of Pakistan

National Transmission and Despatch Company (NTDC),

Government of Pakistan

Prepared by JICA Survey Team

Nippon Koei Co., Ltd and Mitsui Consultants Co., Ltd

In association with Environmental Management Consultants


Final Report

Environmental Management Consultants (EMC) Annex – I Page 1 of 35

Abbreviations

ALAO Assistant Land Acquisition Officer

CoI Corridor of Impact

DHs Displaced Households

DISCOs Distribution Companies

EHV Extra High Voltage

EM Entitlement Matrix

FGDs Focus Group Discussions

GoP Government of Pakistan

GRC Grievance Redress Committee

GRM Grievance Redress Mechanism

IMC Independent Monitoring Consultant

JICA Japan International Cooperation Agency

JST JICA Survey Team

LAA Land Acquisition Act

LAC Land Acquisition Collector

LARAP Land Acquisition and Resettlement Action Plan

LCPP Lakhra Coal Power Plant

NRP National Resettlement Policy

NTDC National Transmission and Despatch Company

PAPs Project Affected Persons

PMU Project Management Unit

RAP Resettlement Action Plan

RoW Right of Way

SCR Social Complaint Register

SPS Safeguard Policy Statement

SSP Social Safeguard Specialist

T/Ls Transmission Lines

TA Telegraph Act


Final Report


GLOSSARY

Compensation Payment in cash or in kind for an asset or a resource that is acquired or affected by a project at the time the asset needs to be replaced.

Cut-off-date The completion date of the census of project-displaced persons is usually considered the cut-off date. A cut-off date is normally established by the borrower government procedures that establish the eligibility for receiving compensation and resettlement assistance by the project displaced persons. In the absence of such procedures, the borrower/client will establish a cut-off date for eligibility.

Displaced persons In the context of involuntary resettlement, displaced persons are those who are physically displaced (relocation, loss of residential land, or loss of shelter) and/or economically displaced (loss of land, assets, access to assets, income sources, or means of livelihood) as a result of (i) involuntary acquisition of land, or (ii) involuntary restrictions on land use or on access to legally designated parks and protected areas.

Economic displacement Loss of land, assets, access to assets, income sources, or means of livelihood as a result of (i) involuntary acquisition of land, or (ii) involuntary restrictions on land use or on access to legally designated parks and protected areas.

Eminent domain The right of the state using its sovereign power to acquire land for public purposes. National law establishes which public agencies have the prerogative to exercise eminent domain.

Entitlement Resettlement entitlements with respect to a particular eligibility category are the sum total of compensation and other forms of assistance provided to displaced persons in the respective eligibility category.

Expropriation Process whereby a public authority, usually in return for compensation, requires a person, household, or community to relinquish rights to land that it occupies or otherwise use.

Host communities Communities receiving physically displaced persons of a project as resettlers.

Household Household means all persons living and eating together as a single-family unit and eating from the same kitchen whether or not related to each other.

Implementing agency Implementing agency means the agency, public or private, that is responsible for planning, design and implementation of a development project.

Income restoration Assistance to restore and/or improve the incomes of displaced persons through allowances and provision of alternative means of income generation.

Involuntary Resettlement Development project results in unavoidable resettlement losses that people affected have no option but to rebuild their lives, incomes and asset bases elsewhere.

Katcha A house is considered katcha, if both the walls and roof of the house are made of material that includes grass, leaves, mud, un-burnt brick or wood.

Land Acquisition Land acquisition means the process whereby a person is compelled by a public agency to alienate all or part of the land she/he owns or possesses, to the ownership and possession of that agency, for public purposes in return for fair compensation.


Final Report


Meaningful consultation A process that (i) begins early in the project preparation stage and is carried out on an ongoing basis throughout the project cycle; (ii) provides timely disclosure of relevant and adequate information that is understandable and readily accessible to affected people; (iii) is undertaken in an atmosphere free of intimidation or coercion; (iv) is gender inclusive and responsive, and tailored to the needs of disadvantaged and vulnerable groups; and (v) enables the incorporation of all relevant views of affected people and other stakeholders into decision making, such as project design, mitigation measures, the sharing of development benefits and opportunities, and implementation issues.

Physical displacement Relocation, loss of residential land, or loss of shelter as a result of (i) involuntary acquisition of land, or (ii) involuntary restrictions on land use or on access to legally designated parks and protected areas.

Pucca A house/structure is considered pucca, if both the walls and roof of the house are made of material that includes tiles, cement sheets, slates, corrugated iron, zinc or other metal sheets, bricks, lime and stone or RBC/RCC concrete.

Rehabilitation Assistance provided to affected persons to supplement their income losses in order to improve, or at least achieve full restoration of, their pre-project living standards and quality of life.

Replacement Cost Replacement cost involves replacing an asset at a cost prevailing at the time of its acquisition. This includes fair market value, transaction costs, interest accrued, transitional and restoration costs, and any other applicable payments, if any. Depreciation of assets and structures should not be taken into account for replacement cost. Where there are no active market conditions, replacement cost is equivalent to delivered cost of all building materials, labor cost for construction, and any transaction or relocation costs.

Relocation assistance Support provided to persons who are physically displaced by a project. Relocation assistance may include transportation, food, shelter, and social services that are provided to the displaced persons during their relocation. It may also include cash allowances that compensate displaced persons for the inconvenience associated with resettlement and defray the expenses of a transition to a new locale, such as moving expenses and lost work days.

Semi Pucca/Katcha Pucca A house/structure is considered Semi Pucca, if both the walls and roof of the house are made of material that includes wood, planks, grass, leaves and wall are made of bricks walls with mud masonry or un-burnt brick.

Squatters People without legal title to land and/or structures occupied or used by them. ADB’s policy explicitly states that such people cannot be denied compensation based on the lack of title.

Vulnerable DPs Displaced poor and other groups disproportionately affected by land acquisition and resettlement, including the elderly, disabled and female headed households

Security of tenure Protection of resettled persons from forced evictions at resettlement sites. Security of tenure applies to both titled and non-titled displaced persons


Final Report


Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Project Description ............................................................................................................. 51.1 LARAP Study Team ............................................................................................................................. 8

Chapter 2 Legal Framework ................................................................................................................ 92.1 JICA's Policy on Involuntary Resettlement ......................................................................................... 92.2 Land Acquisition Act, 1894 ................................................................................................................ 102.3 (Draft) National Resettlement Policy (2002) ..................................................................................... 112.4 Policy on Public Consultation ............................................................................................................ 122.5 Telegraph Act (TA), 1885 .................................................................................................................. 122.6 National Transmission and Dispatch Company Safety Considerations ......................................... 132.7 Land Classification ............................................................................................................................. 142.8 Land for projects of public interest ..................................................................................................... 152.9 Identified Gaps ................................................................................................................................... 162.10 Principles and Policies for the Project ............................................................................................... 232.10.1 Strategy for Selection of Project Area ............................................................................................... 232.10.2 Summary of the Principles for Items of Assets ................................................................................. 23

Chapter 3 Socioeconomic Profile of the Project Area ...................................................................... 253.1 Geography of the Macroenvironment ............................................................................................... 253.2 The Microenvironment ....................................................................................................................... 253.3 History ................................................................................................................................................. 263.4 Culture (Ethnicity, Religion and Politics) ........................................................................................... 273.5 Economically Active Population ........................................................................................................ 273.6 Infrastructure Facilities Available in Villages ..................................................................................... 283.7 Drinking water ..................................................................................................................................... 283.8 Transportation .................................................................................................................................... 293.9 Power Supply ..................................................................................................................................... 303.10 Diseases ............................................................................................................................................. 303.11 Health Facilities .................................................................................................................................. 303.12 Literacy Rate and Education Facilities .............................................................................................. 313.13 Professional Affiliations ...................................................................................................................... 313.14 Source of Livelihood ........................................................................................................................... 313.15 Food & Nutrition .................................................................................................................................. 323.16 Monthly household income and expenditure .................................................................................... 323.17 Indebtedness ...................................................................................................................................... 333.18 Poverty ................................................................................................................................................ 333.19 Gender Issues .................................................................................................................................... 333.20 Community Expectations from Proponent ........................................................................................ 333.21 Archaeological and Historical Record ............................................................................................... 34

Chapter 4 Impact of Project .............................................................................................................. 354.1 Project Components and Impact Assessment Survey .................................................................... 354.2 Impact of Project ................................................................................................................................. 354.2.1 Impact on Land under T/Ls and Towers ........................................................................................... 354.2.2 Impact on Structures .......................................................................................................................... 374.2.3 Other Impacts during Construction Period ........................................................................................ 38

Conclusion ..................................................................... エラー! ブックマークが定義されていません。


Final Report


Chapter 1 Project Description

The Government of Pakistan (GoP) has requested for financing from the Japan International Cooperation Agency (JICA) regarding implementing the 660 megawatt (MW) Lakhra Coal Fired Thermal Power Plant utilizing imported coal. The Power Plant project comprises the associated components including four 500 kV Transmission Lines (T/Ls). The Government of Japan, under bilateral agreement with Government of Pakistan, has initiated a Preparatory Survey through JICA Survey Team comprising Nippon Koei Co., Ltd and Mitsui Consultants Co., Ltd (hereinafter referred as “JST”).

The National Transmission and Despatch Company (NTDC) is the Executing Agency (EA) for the component of 500 kV T/Ls project and is therefore responsible to i) appropriately address the issues involved in the involuntary resettlement of population affected by the proposed 500 kV T/Ls Project, and ii) formulate and implement the Land Acquisition and Resettlement Action Plan (LARAP) as per national and international laws & guidelines on land acquisition and resettlement.

Environmental Management Consultants (EMC) has been commissioned by JST to conduct the LARAP study of proposed “Four 500 kV T/Ls Project” to meet the requirements of the specified reference framework as follow:

Applicable national laws and regulations in Pakistan; World Bank/Safeguard Policy OP 4.01 Annex B; World Bank/Safeguard Policy OP 4.12 Annex A, Resettlement Plan; World Bank/Involuntary Resettlement Sourcebook; JICA Guidelines for Environmental & Social Considerations (April 2010)

According to the World Bank OP 4.12 and ADB Safeguard Policy Statement (SPS) 2009, resettlement impacts are considered significant if more than 200 people are physically displaced from housing or lose 10% or more of their productive assets (income generating) are classified as category “A”. Projects which will create non-significant impacts are classified as category “B”. In both cases, a LARAP is prepared.

In Pakistan, Extra High Voltage (EHV) T/Ls are exclusively sited in rural areas, where they connect with ex-urban grid stations. NTDC’s overall policy on horizontal clearances is to keep all buildings and other obstructions out of the Right of Way (ROW) of a high voltage T/L. Horizontal clearance of 30 m is adopted for 500 kV T/L.

The potential route alignment has been selected after detailed investigation. The preferred route alignment has been defined as: Red Line [a) The 1.9 km route starts from the Power Plant and goes straight to the Tower No. 5 of the existing 500 kV Dadu New Sub-Station (S/S); it has six proposed Towers, and, b) The 1.4 km route starts from the Power Plant and goes straight to the Tower No. 9 of the existing 500 kV Jamshoro S/S; it has five proposed Towers], and Blue Line [a) The 4.5 km route starts from the Power Plant and goes straight to the Tower No. 2 of the existing 500 kV Dadu New S/S; it has fourteen proposed Towers, and b) The 4.7 km route starts from the Power Plant and goes straight to the Tower No. 5 of the existing 500 kV Jamshoro S/S; it has fourteen proposed Towers.]

The proposed route option 1 is shown in Figure 1.1 and proposed towers are listed in Table 1.1.


Final Report


Figure a-1.1: Connection Method of 500kV T/Ls from Lakhra Power Station

Dadu New S/S

Existing 500 kV

Dadu New S/S

Existing 500 kV

Jamshoro S/S

Existing 500 kVJamshoro S/S

Existing 500 kV


Final Report


Table a-1.1: Proposed Tower Alignment Tower LAT LONG Elevation Remarks

Red Line-a

No.AD-1 25.703429° 68.261460° 49m Tension Type





No.AD-6 25.709867° 68.276780° 57m Heavy Angle Type

Red Line-b

No.AJ-1 25.702408° 68.276722° 49m Tension Type




No.AJ-5 25.700123° 68.265222° 55m Heavy Angle Type

Blue line-a

No.BD-1 25.703118° 68.276769° 50m Tension Type













No.BD-14 25.709736° 68.234359° 144m Heavy Angle Type

Blue line-b

No.BJ-1 25.702779° 68.276730° 48m Tension Type













No.BJ-14 25.704292° 68.234813° 136m Heavy Angle Type


Final Report


While the number of households affected by this subproject is “Nil” the magnitude of impact is insignificant because none of the households is either being relocated or losing any type of their productive asset permanently. The impacts are temporary and any of the DHs (Displaced Households) will not have to be rehabilitated. The following sections of this LARAP details out (i) the principles and eligibility/entitlement criteria for compensation or rehabilitation of DHs; (ii) the LARAP institutional organization; (iii) the various LARAP implementation mechanisms (information disclosure, participation and consultation, grievance redress and, monitoring and evaluation); and, (iv) time schedule and budget.

1.1 LARAP Study Team JICA study Team commissioned Environmental Management Consultants (EMC) for conducting the survey of Project Affected Persons (PAPs) and preparing Land Acquisition and Resettlement Action Plan (LARAP).

EMC formulated the following team of experts for conducting the LARAP study and preparing the report:

S. No. Name of Expert Position in LARAP Study Team

1 Mr. Syed Nadeem Arif Project Manager

2 Mr. Saquib Ejaz Hussain Resettlement Specialist, Project Team Leader

3 Mr. Khurram Shams Khan Social Development Specialist

3 Ms. Nida Kanwal Gender Specialist

5 Mr. Imran Morai Coordinator and Field Supervisor


Final Report


Chapter 2 Legal Framework

This section provides a summary of Pakistani laws and regulations on land acquisition and resettlement and JICA Policy on Involuntary Resettlement.

2.1 JICA's Policy on Involuntary Resettlement The key principle of JICA policies on involuntary resettlement is summarized below.

Involuntary resettlement and loss of means of livelihood are to be avoided when feasible by exploring all viable alternatives. When, population displacement is unavoidable, effective measures to minimize the impact and to compensate for losses should be taken. People who must be resettled involuntarily and people whose means of livelihood will be hindered or lost must be sufficiently compensated and supported, so that they can improve or at least restore their standard of living, income opportunities and production levels to pre-project levels. Compensation must be based on the full replacement cost1 as much as possible. Compensation and other kinds of assistance must be provided prior to displacement. For projects that entail large-scale involuntary resettlement, resettlement action plans must be prepared and made available to the public. It is desirable that the resettlement action plan include elements laid out in the World Bank Safeguard Policy, OP 4.12, Annex A. In preparing a resettlement action plan, consultations must be held with the affected people and their communities based on sufficient information made available to them in advance. When consultations are held, explanations must be given in a form, manner, and language that are understandable to the affected people. Appropriate participation of affected people must be promoted in planning, implementation, and monitoring of resettlement action plans. Appropriate and accessible grievance mechanisms must be established for the affected people and their communities.

Above principles are complemented by World Bank OP 4.12, since it is stated in JICA Guideline that “JICA confirms that projects do not deviate significantly from the World Bank’s Safeguard Policies”. Additional key principle based on World Bank OP 4.12 is as follows.

Affected people are to be identified and recorded as early as possible in order to establish their eligibility through an initial baseline survey (including population census that serves as an eligibility cut-off date, asset inventory, and socioeconomic survey), preferably at the project identification stage, to prevent a subsequent influx of encroachers of others who wish to take advance of such benefits.

1 Description of “replacement cost” is as follows. Land Agricultural Land The pre-project or pre-displacement, whichever is higher, market value of land of equal

productive potential or use located in the vicinity of the affected land, plus the cost of preparing the land to levels similar to those of the affected land, plus the cost of any registration and transfer taxes.

Land in Urban Areas The pre-displacement market value of land of equal size and use, with similar or improved public infrastructure facilities and services and located in the vicinity of the affected land, plus the cost of any registration and transfer taxes.

Structure Houses and Other Structures

The market cost of the materials to build a replacement structure with an area and quality similar or better than those of the affected structure, or to repair a partially affected structure, plus the cost of transporting building materials to the construction site, plus the cost of any labor and contractors’ fees, plus the cost of any registration and transfer taxes.


Final Report


Eligibility of Benefits include, the Project Affected Persons (PAPs) who have formal legal rights to land (including customary and traditional land rights recognized under law), the PAPs who don't have formal legal rights to land at the time of census but have a claim to such land or assets and the PAPs who have no recognizable legal right to the land they are occupying. Preference should be given to land-based resettlement strategies for displaced persons whose livelihoods are land-based. Provide support for the transition period (between displacement and livelihood restoration. Particular attention must be paid to the needs of the vulnerable groups among those displaced, especially those below the poverty line, landless, elderly, women and children, ethnic minorities etc. For projects that entail land acquisition or involuntary resettlement of fewer than 200 people, an Abbreviated Resettlement Plan is to be prepared and the plant will cover the contents complemented by World Bank OP 4.12. In addition to the above core principles on the JICA policy, it also laid emphasis on a detailed resettlement policy inclusive of all the above points; project specific resettlement plan; institutional framework for implementation; monitoring and evaluation mechanism; time schedule for implementation; and, detailed Financial Plan etc.

2.2 Land Acquisition Act, 1894 The 1894 Land Acquisition Act (LAA) with its successive amendments is the main law regulating land acquisition for public purpose in Pakistan. The LAA has been variously interpreted by local governments, and some province has augmented the LAA by issuing provincial legislations. The LAA and its Implementation Rules require that following an impacts assessment/valuation effort, land and crops are compensated in cash at market rate to titled landowners and registered land tenants/users, respectively.

Table a-2.1: Summary of Land Acquisition Act {1894) Sections of the Act Description

Section 3(b)

Persons Interested The LAA does not recognize any adverse effect on Affected Persons (APs) for purposes of compensation. The APs cannot claim compensation as "persons interested", because as per Section 3(b), an "interested person" is a person claiming an interest in compensation to be made on account of the acquisition of land and a person shall be deemed to be interested in land if he is interested in an easement affecting the land. It does not cover the categories of “affected persons" for compensation purposes.

Sections 5(a) and 24

Compensation and Objections In determining compensation, the Act leaves discretion in the hand of decision-making authority, which is contrary to the interests of APs including "preference of their informed choice". The LAA only allows payment of compensation valued on the date of the notification and not on the value at the time of actual acquisition.


Final Report


Sections 6-10

Acquisition, Valuation, Entitlements and Compensation These are inconsistent to meet resettlement principles and requirements of foreign donors and international agencies, emphasizing on community involvement and consultation, taking into account adverse sociocultural losses; and rehabilitation of vulnerable affected groups. To ensure compliance of resettlement principles, the mechanism for making valuation and applying various measures to ensure its fairness, has to be there, based on the principle of compensating the APs at replacement cost, and rehabilitation of the lost incomes and livelihoods up to the pre -project level.

Section 11

Persons Entitled to Compensation The award should mention the compensation for "persons in knowledge or believed to be interested in the land", and the Collector can make payment of the compensation to the "persons interested" entitled thereto. This does not cater for the "affected persons".

Sections 16 and 17

Land Acquired These do not differentiate between lands acquired for developmental or non-developmental purposes; and also between two types of land acquisition: that which causes involuntary displacement and that which does not.

Section 28

Valuation of Compound Interest For determining compensation values and interests/premium for land acquisition, the Land Valuation Committees (LVCs) are necessary but recommendations made by the LVCs are not binding on the Collector, as these committees have no legal basis under the Act. In order to facilitate the APs to decide about agreeable entitlements, the role of LVCs needs to be strengthened

The Act would apply for all the situations during the project when land area for the purpose of the project is needed to be acquired. However for the proposed Transmission Lines project, LAA 1894 does not apply because the land acquisition is not required.

2.3 (Draft) National Resettlement Policy (2002) The laws and regulations regarding Resettlement Action Plan (RAP) in Pakistan are provided in the National Resettlement Policy, 2002 (NRP), as a draft form from the Pakistan Environment Protection Agency. This covers not only the APs subject to resettlement but also ensures an equitable and uniform treatment of resettlement issues. This policy states the following policy objectives:

Avoid or minimize adverse social impacts in a project wherever possible and where adverse impacts cannot be avoided, the mitigation measures and resettlement activities should be conceived and executed as development programs and the affected persons be provided opportunity to share the project benefits; APs should be provided with sufficient compensation and assistance for lost assets, that will assist them to improve or at least restore their living standards, income earning or production capacity to the pre-project level; Provide a development opportunity to all vulnerable groups. The vulnerable populations should receive special assistance to bring them at least to a minimum living standard at par with the pre-project level; and All population adversely affected by the project, should be eligible for sharing the social and economic benefits, envisaged after completion of the project.


Final Report


The draft NRP is further supplemented by "Project Implementation and Resettlement of the Affected Persons Ordinance, 2002" that has to be adopted by state and local governments. This ordinance provides a comprehensive and detailed procedures and definitions for land acquisition and resettlement of the APs. As of March 2014, the draft NRP has not yet approved in Pakistan.

2.4 Policy on Public Consultation The Pakistan Environmental Protection Agency has published the "Guidelines for Public Consultation" in October 1997 and it defines the "objectives of consultation" as follows: Public involvement is a feature of environmental assessment and can lead to better and more acceptable decision-making. It can be time consuming and demanding, yet without it, proposals are seldom soundly based, and there is likely to be antagonism from affected people, Public involvement, undertaken in a positive manner and supported by a real desire to use the information gained to improve the proposal, will lead to better outcomes, and lay the basis for ongoing positive relationships between the participants.

The objectives of public involvement include:

Informing the stakeholders about what is proposed; Providing an opportunity for those otherwise unrepresented to present their views and values, therefore allowing more sensitive consideration of mitigation measures and trade-offs; Providing those involved with planning the proposal with an opportunity to ensure that the benefits of the proposal are maximized and that no major impacts have been overlooked; Providing an opportunity for the public to influence project design in a positive manner; Obtaining local and traditional knowledge (corrective and creative), before decision making; Increasing public confidence in the proponent, reviewers and decision-makers; Providing better transparency and accountability in decision making; Reducing conflict through early identification of contentious issues, and working through these to find acceptable solutions; Increasing a sense of ownership of the proposal in the minds of the stakeholders; and Developing proposals which are truly sustainable.

As above, the Guidelines for Public Consultation introduces effective ways to inform the contents of the project to the general public during the planning stage and that eventually consensus building toward the implementation of project is reached.

Incorporating public involvement into the stages of environmental assessment is explained in the guidelines that public consultation meeting has to be carried out after the works on "developing options, and assessing and mitigating impacts" for comments and assessment.

2.5 Telegraph Act (TA), 1885 In case of impacts caused by Poles and Towers for public facilities and T/Ls, the land acquisition is not regulated by the LAA but instead by the Telegraph Act, 1885 (amended I 1975). The original provision of this Telegraph Act was framed for the construction of telegraphic poles during the British Era and the land occupied by telegraph poles was not to be compensated (only crops destroyed during the erection of the pole were compensated). This was based on the logic that a pole, covering only a negligible land area, does not cause substantial impacts to land users. This, however, is no longer the case once the same provision is extended to transmission Towers.


Final Report


The Telegraph Act (Section-11) confers Powers on the Distribution Companies (DISCOs) to enter private lands and (Section-10) construct/maintain electric poles and lines without the need to acquire the land affected and paying compensation for it. However, the Sub Section-10 (d) provides that a DISCOs is required to avoid causing unnecessary damages to the affected land and associated assets. Finally, the Section-16 provides that if any such damage occurs (i.e. damages to crops, irrigation facilities, and land quality or land income). The Proponent has to provide compensation for the damages.

To accommodate the PAPs needs, under this program, the DISCOs have agreed to apply the Telegraphic Act liberally by i) compensating at market rates all land occupied by Towers in urban areas; ii) by avoiding land impacts in rural areas through the use of Towers with sufficient vertical clearance to allow the continuation of unrestricted farming and animal grazing; and iii) if the construction of such Towers is impossible, by compensating the land occupied by Tower bases land also in rural areas.

2.6 National Transmission and Dispatch Company Safety Considerations According to the National Transmission and Dispatch Company Safety Considerations" issued by the Design Directorate of NTDC2, the Right of Way of EHV (500 KV and 220 KV) T/Ls, which is defined as a corridor having a minimum width of 30m (half on either side from the center line), needs to be cleared all obstructions provided for T/Ls following guidelines:

Operation in environmentally sensitive areas with special respect for fragile eco-systems and their inherent biodiversity are to be avoided to the extent possible;

ROW for a T/L through natural features like mountains, hilly terrain susceptible to landslides, large lakes, reservoirs, marshes, human habitations and reserved forests or national parks are to be avoided to the extent possible;

ROW is selected after due consideration for location of telecommunication lines and railway circuits to avoid electrical interference due to mutual induction;

Residential structures are kept a minimum of 12m out from the plumb line of the outer conductor in the ROW. However, in the absence of an alternative alignment, an exception can be made for farm buildings and single floor factory buildings, provided neither is used for purposes of residence;

Innovative technologies and latest equipment must be adopted or used to abate pollution in construction activities and operations;

Routes of T/Ls are avoided to the maximum extent through areas of cultural or historical importance and religious places;

Tube-wells and open wells using a surface pump are not permitted under high voltage conductors as piping and cranes used to recondition such wells could make contact with high voltage conductors;

Existing orchards can remain within the ROW although Towers are kept out of orchards wherever possible. Orchards are to be over-sailed by a clearance of 6m above the height of a mature orchard whereas all other trees are to be removed;

Brick kilns should be kept at least 30m outside the center line of ROW;

Alternative route alignments should be used if any school, rural dispensary, mosque or local shrine (ziarat) falls within 200m of the center line of a planned route;

2Source: "Thar - Matiari LARP Vol-1 & Vol-2 December 31, 2012", Page 6-9 of the Vol-1, the main report state and, “Design Manufacture,

Installation, Testing Commissioning of the Transmission Scheme for Dispersal of Power from 747MW Guddu Power Plant”, page 80.


Final Report


Existing open wells and hand pumps can remain under high voltage conductors, provided open wells are capped;

Selection of sites for Tower foundation and Tower erection are made consciously on stable surfaces and by rejecting sites susceptible to erosion, slips and landslides;

Alignment of the T/L is made by NTDC after discussions with key persons of the area and by avoiding properties and infrastructure to the extent feasible;

Spacing between Towers may not be uniform and ranges variously for physical & other considerations, such as crossing of main roads, residential areas, streams and canals and trees and for avoiding graveyards and big ditches in between Towers;

The route alignment of the T/L, location of the Towers and the corridors are identified by NTDC;

The main consideration relating to public safety is a safe horizontal and vertical distance of conductor from ground level to prevent electrocution of people or animals under the T/L.

A corridor having a minimum width of 30m, clear of all obstructions, is provided for EHV (500 KV and 220 KV) T/Ls (half on either side from the center line). However, general farming within this corridor is allowed and tree plantations that do not exceed a height of 1.5m are also allowed to remain under the lines. Similarly, open wells, including Persian wheels, can remain under T/Ls. Tube-wells and pumps are not permitted under high voltage conductors, because piping and cranes used to refurbish such wells may come into contact with the lines and

No residential or other public buildings such as factory, school, hospital and mosque, except for graves/graveyards, are permitted within the corridor. However, farm buildings which are not used for residential purposes may remain under EHV lines, provided vertical clearance of at least 8m is maintained. The height of Towers can be increased to accommodate such buildings.

Trees less than

1.5m height

Clear aｌｌ obstructions. No residential or public buildings (E.g. factory, school, hospital, mosque or local shrine)

Hand pumps, Open wells,Persian wheels

Min.30m Min.30m

FarmingGraves

Farming buildings with vertical clearance of min. 8m

Clearance Min. 8 m

Right of Way = ROW (Direct Impacted Area)Corridor of Impact = COI

(Non-direct Impacted Area)

Min. 200 m ?? Min. 200 m ??

Figure a-2.1: Right of Way (RoW) of the Transmission Line

2.7 Land Classification The land identified in the study area is state owned, rural, un-irrigated land, barren, flat to mildly hilly tract, consisting of outlying spurs of the Kirthar Range. Identification of the type of land under RoW is an important step in determining eligibility for compensation of land. Jurisdiction rather than use classifies land.

Rural land includes irrigated land and un-irrigated land is governed by the Land Revenue Act, 1967 which must be read in conjunction with the LAA and other legislation that may also apply, including for example the Punjab Alienation of Land Act, 1900, Colonization of Government Lands Act, 1912 and the various Land Reform Regulations. Rural land falls under the jurisdiction of revenue districts.

Min 200 m Min 200 m


Final Report


Urban land including all permutations there-under such as residential, commercial, built upon and buildable is governed by various regulations and ordinances including the People’s Local Government Ordinance, 1972 for each province, Cantonments Act, 1924 and Land Control Act, 1952. Urban land falls under the jurisdiction of municipal and local government authorities.

While there are broad definitions of rural and urban land in the People’s Local Government Ordinances, such classifications are not immutable and have been and are changed by the Collector of Revenues and provincial governments over time. In general, it is either the People’s Local Government Ordinances or the Land Revenue Act that determines the classification of land however there are some cases where both applies and other cases where different legislation altogether can dictate jurisdiction and classification over land. Hence there is neither a universal classification nor legislation pertaining to the land that will be potentially affected under the program.

Besides the amended LAA, the Proponent has adopted the Telegraph Act, 1885 (amended) for the construction and maintenance of T/L. The later Act was originally framed for the construction of telegraphic poles during the British Era and later inherited by Pakistan upon independence. This Act was subsequently adopted by WAPDA for electric poles and supply lines and eventually passed to Proponent. However, telegraphic or electric poles cover a much smaller area of land compared with transmission Towers which have the potential to affect crops, orchards and scattered wood and fruit trees. The Proponent makes utmost efforts to minimize resettlement impacts, alternatively the affected farmers are compensated for their crop and tree losses and built-up structures requiring relocation, based on prevalent market prices.

Based on current Pakistani Law and NTDC’s practice, the land under the Towers is not acquired permanently and therefore, compensation is not required for land because land will remain in the custody of owner and productive (for farming). However, it is suggested that the land under the Tower would only require compensation in the case where:

(i) in rural areas, the Tower hinders access to the land under the Tower for cultivation; and/or,

(ii) in urban/residential areas, the Tower restricts use of the land for housing development.

In cases where in rural areas, under the tower, there will be enough space to cultivate the crops and the cultivation field is not disturbed due to this small area of field under the tower. But in cases where the area under the tower after tower installation is not easily accessible for cultivation due to topography or due to restriction of farming machining going under the tower. In that case, the area under the tower is affected and no cultivation can be done on this area.

2.8 Land for projects of public interest Any ownerless property belongs to the Government: Article 172(1) of the Constitution of the Islamic Republic of Pakistan declares that “Any property which has no rightful owner shall, if located in a Province, vest in the Government of that Province, and in every other case, in the Federal Government”.

Grant of state land to private citizens is governed by the Transfer of Property Act 1882, Government Grants Act 1895 and the Colonization of Government Land Act 1912. The Section 10 of the Colonization of Government Land Act 1912 declares as follows.


Final Report


(i) the Board of Revenue (BOR) subject to the general approval of the granting government land in a colony to any person;

(ii) the provincial government may issue a statement or statements of the conditions on which it is willing to grant land in a colony to tenants and;

(iii) where such statement of conditions have been issued, the Collector may, subject to the control of the Board of Revenue, allotting land to any person, to be held subject to such statement or conditions issued.

For the land, which there are no genuine claims, the BOR or district revenue department will prepare the record and award the land to the project proponent. The award will be registered in the records of the Revenue Department of district government to complete the acquisition process.

2.9 Identified Gaps There are gaps between Pakistan Laws and JICA Guidelines (April 2010) and World Bank (WB) Safeguard Policy. To establish equal and appropriate land acquisition and resettlement system, the Pakistan government proposed "Draft National Resettlement Policy (NRP), 2002" and "Draft Project Implementation and Resettlement of Affected Persons Ordinance 2001”. However, they haven't approved by the cabinet of Parliament so that not applicable to practice use at present. As described above, there are legal frameworks for public consultation for EIA implementation though; there are none for land acquisition and resettlement.

The differences between the Pakistani legal frameworks and JICA Guideline (April 2010) on land acquisition and resettlement are analyzed in Table 2.2.


Final Report


Table a-2.2: Gaps between JICA Guidelines and LAA 1894 and Telegraph Act, 1885No. JICA Guidelines Laws of Pakistan: LAA 1894

and TA 1885 Gaps between JICA Guidelines and Laws of Pakistan

Policy of measurement to fill the gap

1 Involuntary resettlement and loss of means of livelihood are to be avoided when feasible by exploring all viable alternatives.(JICA GL)

None There is a gap: There is no approved legal framework for No.1.

The following criteria will be applied: Select alignments of T/Ls that can avoid involuntary resettlement and minimize the extent of land acquisition. Select uncultivated or grazing lands, or unencumbered government land as much as possible. Develop appropriate measures for protection of lives and livelihoods. Avoid any adverse impact on vulnerable people.

2 When population displacement is unavoidable, effective measures to minimize impact and to compensate for losses should be taken. (JICA GL)

None There is a gap: There is no approved legal framework for No.2

This project will follow the JICA Guidelines.

3-1 People who must be resettled involuntarily and people whose means of livelihood will be hindered or lost must be sufficiently compensated and supported, so that they can improve or at least restore their standard of living, income opportunities and production levels to pre-project levels. (JICA GL)

None There is a gap: Compensations for land, structures, crops and trees are required under LAA, however, there is no provision of income and livelihood rehabilitation measures. There is also no requirement of providing opportunities for benefit sharing

In terms of improvement or restoration of AP’s living standard and income opportunities, this project will follow the JICA Guidelines. For compensation of land, land price will be determined in regards if the followings considerations: (i) the latest price paid for land recently acquired in the vicinity; (ii) the price paid in private transactions as discoverable from the register of mutations, and records of the land revenue office; (iii) all other information available, (iv) the committee may consult other respectable people who are disinterested with regard to value of the land.


Final Report





3-2 For houses and other structures, it is the market cost of the materials to build a replacement structure with an area and quality similar to or better than those of the affected structure, or repair a partially affected structure, plus the cost of transporting building materials to the construction site, plus the cost of any labor and contractors fees, plus the cost of any registration and transfer taxes.

In determine the replacement cost, depreciation of the asset and the value of salvage materials are not taken into account, nor is the value of benefits to be derived from the project deducted from the valuation of affected assets. (WB OP 4.12)

Based on Telegraph Act, land for tower construction or under T/L is not to be acquired or compensated as long as the land’s permanent productive potential is not affected. According to LAA, 15 % compulsory acquisition charges are paid over the assessed compensation. The valuation of structures is based on official rates, with depreciation deducted from gross value of the structure and also 15 % of the value of salvaged materials. Only registered landowners or customary rights holders are recognized for compensation. Only registered landowners, sharecroppers and leaseholders are eligible for compensation of crop losses. Tree losses are compensated based on outdated officially fixed rated by the relevant forest and agriculture departments.

There is a gap: Under Telegraph Act, land under tower and T/Ls is not to be acquired. Therefore, LAA is not applicable. Only temporary impacts on crops and structures are compensated based on official rates with depreciation deducted from gross value of the structure. The 15% of the value of salvaged materials are paid.

APs losing their productive assets (farmland, house or business), or in case of partial loss when the remaining assets are not viable for continued use, will be entitled for full compensation for the entire affected assets at replacement cost. The remaining of partial impact on their assets are viable for continued use, and where the livelihood is not land-based, the compensation for affected assets would be paid in cash.

4 Compensation must be based on the full replacement cost as much as possible. (JICA GL)

None The is a gap: There is no legal framework requiring provision of replacement cost.

This project will follow JICA Guidelines.


Final Report





5 Compensation and other kinds of assistance must be provided prior to displacement. (JICA GL)

In case of urgent acquisition, land possession shall be taken prior to payment of compensation.

There is a gap: There is no mechanism to ensure the payment of compensation before displacement.

This project will make sure to prepare compensation and other forms of assistance in advance to displacement. The detail will be considered based on the results of socioeconomic surveys and public consultations.

6 For projects that entail large-scale involuntary resettlement, Resettlement Action Plans (RAP) must be prepared and made available to the public. (JICA GL)

Land acquisition shall be implemented based on negotiated purchase. Procedures available through signed instructions and agreement.

There is a gap: There is no law or policy that requires preparation of RAP.

In this project, LARAP will be prepared referring to the JICA Guideline and WB OP 4.12.

7 In preparing a RAP, consultations must be held with the affected people and their communities based on sufficient information made available to them in advance. (JICA GL)

The decisions regarding land acquisition and the amounts of compensation to be paid are published in the official Gazette and notified in accessible places so that the affected people are well informed.

There is a gap: No requirements for public consultations about RAP.

The relevant information about land acquisition and resettlement will be published in the official Gazette in Sindhi, Urdu and English and notification will be made at places in the affected communities. In addition, public consultations will be held and all relevant information will be explained to the public.

8 When consultations are held, explanations must be given in a form, manner, and language that are understandable to the affected people. (JICA GL)

None There is a gap: There is no legal framework specifying the form, manner and language of consultations.

The consultations will use materials that can be easily understood by the people with no technical knowledge. The consultations will be held in Sindhi language (and Urdu if necessary). The RAP will be translated to Sindhi language.

9 Appropriate participation of affected people must be promoted in planning, implementation, and monitoring of resettlement action plans. (JICA GL)

None There is a gap: No requirements to public participation. No requirements to prepare and disclose monitoring reports.

Public will be involved in preparation process of LARAP. A monitoring plan will be enclosed in LARAP.


Final Report





10-1

Appropriate and accessible grievance mechanisms must be established for the affected people and their communities. (JICA GL)

APs are provided right for review, enquiry and complain of quantities and compensations. Any objection shall be made to the Collector3 in writing. Any person can object to the acquisition of the land for a public purpose within thirty days (30) after the issue of the preliminary notification. The Collector gives notice to all affected/displaced persons (APs/DPs) that the government intends to take possession of the land based on the land survey. If APs/DPs have any claims for compensation then those claims are to be made to the Collector at an appointed time.

There is a gap: Grievance could be made through the land acquisition process as ruled in LAA. However, no requirement to establish a grievance mechanisms. Moreover, the Collector holds the powers to change even the negotiated land prices in Section 4 of LAA.

Grievance mechanism will be established and enclosed in the LARAP. The basic rules such as timing will be based on the LAA. Other structures will be referred to JICA Guidelines and other similar projects.

10-2

Affordable and accessible grievance procedures for third-party settlement of disputes arising from resettlement should take into account the availability of judicial recourse and community and traditional dispute settlement mechanisms. (WB OP 4.12 Para. 17)

In case of dissatisfaction with "the award", displaced persons (DPs) may request the Collector to refer the case onward to the court for a decision within six (6) weeks from the date of Collector’s award.

No gaps Grievance mechanism will be established in appropriate manner.

3 Collector means a “District Revenue Officer” who is specially appointed by the Board of Revenue or Executive District Revenue Office.


Final Report





11 Affected people are to be identified and recorded as early as possible in order to establish their eligibility through an initial baseline survey (including population census that serves as an eligibility cut-off date, asset inventory, and socioeconomic survey), preferably at the project identification stage, to prevent a subsequent influx of encroachers of others who wish to take advance of such benefits. (WB OP4.12 Para.6)

The Collector is responsible for issuing notification of cut-off date in the Official Gazette, not the project proponent.

There is a gap: LAA rules the power and role of the Collector. However, LAA does not include a mechanisms of identifying affected people and land.

In this project, JICA Guidelines and WB OP4.12 will be referred to identify the affected people, decide the eligibility criteria and entitlement matrix.

12 Eligibility of benefits includes, (1) the PAPs who have formal legal rights to land (including customary and traditional land rights recognized under law), (2) the PAPs who don't have formal legal rights to land at the time of census but have a claim to such land or assets and (3) the PAPs who have no recognizable legal right to the land they are occupying. (WB OP4.12 Para.15)

Only titled landowners or customary rights holders are recognized for compensation and any other support. Only registered landowners, sharecroppers and lease holders are eligible for compensation of crop losses. Tree losses are compensated based on outdated officially fixed rated by the relevant forest and agriculture departments.

There is a gap: In Pakistan, untitled displaced persons are not entitled to rehabilitation support.

The group of people who have no recognizable legal right or claim to the land they are occupying, will be provided "resettlement assistance" in lieu of compensation for the land they occupy, and other assistance to replace their shelter and income source such as productive land and structures for business. The cut-off date will be set to prevent any influx of encroachers and announced in the Official Gazette in Sindhi/Urdu and English.

13 Preference should be given to land-based resettlement strategies for displaced persons whose livelihoods are land-based. (WB OP4.12 Para.11)

Negotiated purchase of land shall be taken. Procedures available through instructions and agreement sighed.

No gaps

14 Provide support for the transition period (between displacement and livelihood restoration). (WB OP4.12 Para.6)

None There is a gap: There are also no special allowances of support for transition period.

In this project, JICA Guidelines and WB OP4.12 will be referred. Provision of support for transition period will be considered and enclosed in ARP.


Final Report





15 Particular attention must be paid to the needs of the vulnerable groups among those displaced, especially those below the poverty line, landless, elderly, women and children, ethnic minorities etc. (WB OP4.12 Para.8)

None There is a gap: There are also no special allowances of support for vulnerable and tribal (indigenous/ minorities) groups.

In this project, JICA Guidelines and WB OP4.12 will be referred and attentions will be paid to vulnerable people. Concerns and opinions of vulnerable people will be collected through focus group discussion and interviews.

16 For projects that entail land acquisition or involuntary resettlement of fewer than 200 people, abbreviated resettlement plan is to be prepared. (WB OP4.12 Para.25)

None There is a gap: No legal framework to require preparation of a plan for land acquisition and resettlement.

See No. 6


Final Report


2.10 Principles and Policies for the Project To fulfill the national and international regulations, guidelines and requirements, this draft LARAP was prepared by NTDC with assistance of EMC to guide the process of the land acquisition and compensation at the time of commencement of the project. The process guided in this draft LARAP will be implemented by the project proponent to fill the inconsistencies between the existing practices. The draft LARAP will be updated based on the detail design of the project and submitted to JICA for review.

2.10.1 Strategy for Selection of Project Area According to the international guideline and the safety considerations of NTDC, the alignment of four T/Ls was carefully selected based on the site selection criteria, that is no Dwelling, Commercial or Community Structure within the Corridor of Impact in order to avoid physical displacement due to project.

2.10.2 Summary of the Principles for Items of Assets Based on the analysis of national and international regulations, guidelines and requirements, the following Table 2.3 summarize the specification and principles for each item of assets and the referenced regulations and guidelines.


Final Report


Table a-2.3 Summary of the Regulations and Guidelines

No. Items of Assets Impacted under Towers and T/Ls

Specification and Principles Referred Regulations and Guidelines

1 Rural Cultivated land and Uncultivated barren land

The land will not be acquired permanently. Access is not restricted and land use will remain unchanged (productive for farming). In this case, compensation is not required for land

Telegraph Act, 1885

2 Compensation would only be required in the case the access to the land under Tower is restricted for cultivation.

Telegraph Act, 1885

3 Urban Residential for housing development and Commercial land

The land under the Tower will not be permanently acquired. However, compensation only required in case the land under the Tower is restricted for the use of custody.

Telegraph Act, 1885

4 Residential and commercial structures

No residential structures or other public buildings are permitted within the corridor. Compensation at replacement cost basis for affected structure and other fixed assets

NTDC safety considerations, LAA, 1894 JICA guideline

5 Crops Compensated for the lost or damaged crops. Telegraph Act, 1885 JICA guideline

6 Trees Orchards less than 6 m height can remain within the ROW but all other trees are to be removed. Compensated for the removed trees.

Telegraph Act, 1885 NTDC safety considerations, JICA guideline

7 Community structures Relocated and rehabilitation of the affected structures.

JICA guideline

8 Relocation Transport assistance (shifting materials of affected structures)

JICA guideline

9 Livelihood Compensation for the lost income from losing assets and business during interruption period

JICA guideline

10 Employment Lost wages and employment opportunity JICA guideline 11 Vulnerable people Affected household identified as vulnerable JICA guideline 12 Cultural and religious

sites Compensation on replacement cost for the affected cultural and historical sites

Sindh Cultural Heritage (Preservation) Act, 1994/JICA guideline


Final Report


Chapter 3 Socioeconomic Profile of the Project Area

This Section of the LARAP presents the socioeconomic profile of the macroenvironment and microenvironment to describe an overview of the situation of the project area. The macroenvironment includes Jamshoro district which was carved out of Dadu district in 2004. The microenvironment encompasses Manjhand Taluka.

3.1 Geography of the Macroenvironment Located at 67o16”20’ to 68o27”37’E longitudes and 24o 58”14’ to 26o 36”33’N latitudes, on the right bank of River Indus, Jamshoro district is bounded on the north by Dadu district, on the east by River Indus, on the south by Thatta district, on southwest by Karachi district and on the west by the Kirthar Range which is the dividing line between Sindh and Baluchistan. The district takes its name from Jamshoro City which has its headquarters. The administrative framework of Jamshoro district has four Talukas: Sehwan (area 2,830 km2, population about 170,589), Kotri (area 1, 845 km2, population about 215,966), Thana Bula Khan (area 4,799.31 km2, population about 179,527), and Manjhand (area 1,630 km2, population about 100,135). It is here that the Project site is located. District Jamshoro has 28 Union Councils (UCs) and 174 mouzas (revenue village). Out of these mouzas, 139 are rural, 6 are urban, 11 are partly urban and 13 are un-populated mouzas.

Table a-3.1: Administrative Division of District Jamshoro Tapas4 Patwari Tapa Total

mouzasRural Urban Partly Urban Forest Unpopulated

Jamshoro District 8 47 174 139 6 11 5 13 Sehwan Taluka 3 20 71 58 4 3 1 5 Kotri Taluka 2 7 26 22 2 1 1 - Thano Bula Khan 1 8 28 26 - 2 - - Manjhand Taluka 2 12 49 33 - 5 3 9 Source: Mouza Statistics of Sindh 2008, Agriculture Census Organization

3.2 The Microenvironment The microenvironment encompasses the specific site of activity i.e. the Lakhra Power Plant site on Indus Highway, N55. The site is located in UC Manzoorabad of Manjhand Taluka of Jamshoro district, and geographically situated at 25o 26’ 55.23” N 68o 17’ 00.59” E. The project site is accessed easily from Super Highway M-9 to Indus Highway N-55. It is adjacent to which leads to railway crossing at main Jamshoro market. The microenvironment of Project area also forms part of Deh Kohistan. The land here is a barren, flat to mildly hilly tract, consisting of outlying spurs of the Kirthar Range. Cultivation is carried out wherever alluvial soil exists and near or along the numerous depressions where rain water carried by hill streams (nallas) can be stored. Cattle grazing, stone quarrying, gravel and sand collection and transportation, besides wood cutting are the main occupation. This land area in the form of semi-arid/arid sand desert is also present in the upper half of the wind corridor in small patches. The vegetative growth in this area is limited to short grasses, shrubs and scrubs along with a few drought resistant trees. Soil cover in Deh Kohistan area is very thin due to severe wind erosion on land and soil erosion in the drainage basin. Natural vegetation has almost disappeared from the surface plain. The soils of the area in this region are shallow,

4 Division of land larger than Deh. Deh is the smallest division of land.


Final Report


strongly calcareous silt loam with weak structure. The slope of the stony waste land and the hilly region is towards the syncline of river Indus and its tributaries.

The Study area is taken as 5 km radius stretched to form a circle centered at the junction of proposed power plant and T/Ls. Study area covers the right of way of 4 proposed T/Ls, Location of Power plant, Lakhra powerhouse colony, small section of Indus highway, part of Left Bank of River Indus. The Villages lie inside the study area are Manzoorabad, Murid Khan Rind Goth, Bhora Khan Goth and Hussain Rind Goth. The locations of these Goths (Villages) are shown in figure 3.1 which portrays that these villages are outside the ROW of T/Ls and outside the Power plant site. There is no Dwelling, Commercial or Community Structure within the Corridor of Impact of the Project as shown in figure 3.1.

Figure a-3.1: Microenvironment of the proposed 500 kV T/Ls Source: Environmental Management Consultants

3.3 History District Jamshoro is situated in the western part of the Sindh province. Jamshoro district was bifurcated in the month of December 2004 from district Dadu. Historically, this region has been ruled by different dynasties, including the Soomras (1024-1351), the Summas (1335-1520), the Arghuns (1520-1650), the Kalhoras (1657-1783) & the Talpurs (1783-1843). In 1783 A.D, the Kalhoras were defeated by the Talpur

Manzoorabad


Final Report


dynasty and Sindh was divided, for administrative purposes, into seven parts, by the Talpur Mirs. When Britain invaded the subcontinent, General Charles Napier, a commander in the British Army, defeated the Talpur dynasty and conquered Sindh in 1843. He was appointed as the first Governor General of Sindh. The province was divided into different administrative parts & assigned to Zamindars (landlords) to collect taxes for the British government. Later on, the rulers developed these areas as urban centers. People migrated from other districts and provinces as well & started to reside here. The British Empire named these small developed areas as "Talukas". They built a network of roads, schools, dispensaries & many other civic amenities throughout the province. After the independence of Pakistan, in 1947, district Jamshoro remained a part of district Dadu. This area continued to be neglected by the authorities but the gradual process of development has changed this district significantly. In 2004, Jamshoro was made a district after carving it out of district Dadu.

3.4 Culture (Ethnicity, Religion and Politics) Jamshoro has a rich traditional Sindhi culture. Women usually wear Shalwar Qameez but quite often dress in the traditional attire, Ghaghra or Parro, as well. Traditionally, women wear bangles. Men usually wear a Shalwar Qameez distinguished by broader bottoms, and a traditional Sindhi style cap.

People of this district are pre-dominantly Sindhi speaking but Urdu, Balochi and Brohi are also spoken in the district. Bhutto, Rind, Syed, Talpur, Chandio, Magsi, Soomro, Memon and Kalhoro are the major clans of this district. Islam is the religion of majority in this district followed by a minority of Hindu community.

The Town Sehwan is famous for the shrine of Hazrat Makhdoom Usman Marvindi, Popularly known as Hazrat Lal Shahbaz Qalandar. Thousands of people from all over the country come to visit (ziarat) and pay tribute to this great Saint during the annual URS (Death anniversary of Sufi Saint) on the 18th of Shaban, every year. Manchhur Lake is also one of the well-known places of Sehwan because it is the largest salt water lake in the Asian continent. Taluka Manjhand is famous for the Dargah of Hyder Shah Sanni and the fort of Rani Kot, known as Deewar-e-Sindh. No cultural heritage or religiously important site is located within the Study area.

This district is home to Mr. G.M Syed, a famous political leader, who pioneered the ‘Jeay Sindh Movement’, a nationalist movement in Sindh. He is regarded as one of the founding fathers of modern Sindhi nationalism. He died on April 25, 1995. Currently, his grandson Syed Jalal Mehmood Shah is a prominent nationalist leader of this district. Pakistan People’s Party (PPP) also has strong political base in this district. Talpur family represents PPP in this district. This district is represented by one national assembly and three provincial assembly seats. In the general elections of 2008, PPP won all the national and provincial assembly seats of the district.

3.5 Economically Active Population In Jamshoro district, economically active population comprises the persons of either sex who are engaged in some work for pay or profit including un-paid family helpers, persons not working but looking for as well as laid off, during the reference period i.e., 2013. Economically active population in the district is 20.64% of its total population and 37.37% of the population aged 10 years and above. The %age of children below 10 years is 32.03 while 7.54% are students and 8.22% are all others. Among the inactive population 31.57% are domestic workers including 63.75% housewives/females in the district. The activity or participation rates, % age of population by economic categories and unemployment rates are shown in table 3.2.


Final Report


Table a-3.2: % age of population by economic categories, sex and rural/urban areas in district Jamshoro

Economic Category

All Areas Rural Urban Both sex Male Female Both sex Male Female Both sex Male Female

Labor force 20.64 38.08 1.34 20.65 38.15 1.15 20.62 37.84 2.05 Not in labor force 79.36 61.92 98.66 79.35 61.85 98.85 79.38 62.16 97.95

Children below 10 years 32.03 31.75 32.34 32.41 32.00 32.86 30.64 30.81 30.46 Domestic workers 31.57 2.47 63.75 31.57 2.50 63.96 31.54 2.35 63.01

Students 7.54 12.64 1.90 6.45 11.00 1.38 11.57 18.76 3.80 All others 8.22 15.05 0.66 8.92 16.32 0.66 5.64 10.23 0.68

Labor force participation rate 30.37 55.80 1.98 30.55 56.10 1.71 29.73 54.69 2.94 Unemployment rate 22.07 22.37 12.72 20.57 20.74 14.27 27.64 28.54 9.60

Source: EIA study due to mining activities in Sindh

3.6 Infrastructure Facilities Available in Villages The following Table shows that the infrastructure facilities are available in the villages.

Table a-3.3: Infrastructure Facilities Available in Villages

Villages

Primary School

Middle School

Technical School/

High School

Mosque Madrasah Dispensary

Water Supply

Electricity Boys Girls

Tube well

Hand Pump

Bhora Khan Goth 1 - - - 1 - - 3 erraticMurid Khan Rind Goth 1 - - - 1 - - 4 erratic

Hussain Rind Goth 1 - - - 1 - - 1 erraticManzoorabad 2 - - - 1 1 erratic

means ‘available’Source: Environmental Management Consultants

3.7 Drinking water “Safe” drinking water is not available at the site as may be seen from the following table. There is a water supply line from the WAPDA pumping station at the river bed but the treatment facility has not been provided to the facility at the living areas.

International standards i.e. WHO, USEPA does not provide standards on parameters i.e. Alkalinity, Ca, Mg, Na, Sulfates, Carbonates, Bicarbonates as Carbonates, Bicarbonates, Ca & Mg corresponds to Hardness and Alkalinity corresponds to the pH.

Table 3.4 suggest that all the parameters analyzed meets the National standard except Total Coliform which indicates the contamination from bacteriological sources but not contaminated by sewage as Fecal Coliforms are not present. Coliform bacteria are present in soil and natural water resources and its contamination shows that water is not treated properly.


Final Report


Table a-3.4: Drinking Water Quality S. # Parameters Standards

Units Results NSDWQ - Limits 1 pH value 6.5 – 8.5 SU 7.44 2 Alkalinity NA mg/L 128.0 3 Total Hardness as CaCO3 500 mg/L 125 4 Chloride(as Cl-) 500 mg/L 48 5 Calcium NA mg/L 16.19 6 Magnesium NA mg/L 19.53 7 Lead 0.005 mg/L BDL* 8 Arsenic 1 mg/L BDL* 9 Sodium NA mg/L 27.82 10 Nitrate ( NO2 ) 50 mg/L BDL* 11 Carbonate NA mg/L BDL* 12 Bicarbonate NA mg/L 128.0 13 Sulfate NA mg/L 51 14 Total Coliform 0 cfu/100 ml cfu 14** 15 Faecal Coliform 0 cfu/100 ml cfu 0 *BDL = Below Detection Limit **Total Coliform results exceeds the NSDWQ. Water is not fit for drinking.


3.8 Transportation The Indus Highway N-55 and the Link road to the Project site enclose the microenvironment of the Transmission Line. The Highway is a two track carriageway with asphalt surface. The Link road is however broken at some places due to movement of heavy vehicles. The site is connected by railway from Karachi – Kotri – Jamshoro – Dadu Track. People resident in Hussain Rind Goth, Murid Khan Rind Goth, Bhora Khan Goth and Manzoorabad have at least one motorcycle per household and an automobile with the higher income group. Rickshaws are available for short distance travel. It costs Rs. 10 per person to travel to the Highway. The less privileged villagers who are not many have to take a bus to Jamshoro City & Hyderabad. Most people resident at farther distances travel by any means available and that includes a motorcycle, a donkey cart & a car owned by the privileged people. In case of emergency they have to hire a Datsun truck and pay Rs. 1000 to reach Jamshoro & Rs. 2000 to reach the nearest clinic in Hyderabad.

Figure a-3.2: Rickshaw service in the project area Source: Environmental Management Consultants


Final Report


3.9 Power Supply Facility of Power supply is erratic in the villages in the surrounding viz. Hussain Rind Goth, Murid Khan Rind Goth, Bhora Khan Goth and Manzoorabad (Table 3.3). There is a state power grid at Jamshoro. There is a 500kV regional substation of WAPDA nearby. But due to the power outages, these villages are hardly entertained from this facility.

3.10 Diseases Water borne diseases are common in the villages particularly during the rainy season. Incidence of following diseases is reported from villages in the surrounding of Project site. There are cases of drug addiction and alcohol is freely available even to the children. Incidence of Hepatitis, respiratory and oral ailments can be attributed to the lifestyle change that is apparent from the reported consumption of what is described here as kachi sharab and gutka.

Water borne diseases Malaria Cough Skin Diseases Typhoid Asthma Hepatitis Tuberculosis

3.11 Health Facilities The healthcare services are not available at the villages in the study area (Table 3.3) except Manzoorabad in which a dispensary is located. Habibullah Mor has been provided a well-built hospital that takes good care of the outdoor patients reporting from the nearby villages. The Zainab Habib Hospital (Trust) is provided with up-to-date diagnostic as well as treatment facilities so that the villagers have to travel to Jamshoro or Hyderabad only in case of complicated cases. Cost of treatment is affordable and the villagers are satisfied with the provision of the facility by the Trust.

Figure a-3.3: Zainab Habib Hospital (Trust) Source: Environmental Management Consultants


Final Report


3.12 Literacy Rate and Education Facilities In study area, there are no schools for girls and no middle schools available for the students. There are only primary schools for boys, madrassas are available in the villages for which information could be gathered at the focused group discussions at each village (Table 3.3). All the primary schools are functional. As such the literacy rate among the youngsters is reasonably high.

Male literacy ratio is about 50% and female literacy is less than 30%. Quite a few persons can speak Urdu, the National language and many more can read the Holy Quran. There are mosques in every village. Things have started to change with the emergence of new leadership which has started setting up mosques and madrassas in the area of influence. However, access to easy money is taking away much of the advantage of improvement in quality of life. Television sets, Cellular phones, Motorcycles, are available to everyone in the village and hence the science of improvement in quality of life are more than apparent.

Figure a-3.4: Mosque Source: Environmental Management Consultants

3.13 Professional Affiliations The people in the project area are engaged in low as well as high level occupation, with the members of the nuclear family engaged in mining, farming, and raising livestock. Two or three persons from each village assume the management responsibility and assign different roles to different members of the family and to the families in other villages, if necessary. The persons in the management hierarchy form about 5% of the population; they are responsible to the Sardar/wadera/rais (Leaders) of the area. 85% of the male population is engaged in mining. The household chores are left to the female population.

3.14 Source of Livelihood The project is located in the largely arid zone dominated by stony wasteland. The agricultural practices are limited to the areas beyond the Highway N-55 on the east of the area, where Livestock herding is commonly practiced. The UC has a high per-capita ownership of the livestock of the order of at least 8 heads per household while agricultural practices are limited to subsistence farming. The entire population of the villages is in one way or the other engaged in mining. The male population is engaged in the mines as mining labor or is serving as a driver, mechanic or electrician or as semi-skilled labor. Much of the skill attained by the resident population has been from Lakhra mine itself. The resident population does not have


Final Report


high level manpower but its higher income group has the youngsters being trained at the nearby university at Jamshoro.

Figure a-3.5: Livestock herding Source: Environmental Management Consultants

Before construction of dams the land in this part of the District used to be inundated and there would be loss of crop and property and also recharging of the aquifer. Raising embankment, land clearance and making water available at farm gate has changed the livelihood pattern of the population across Indus Highway N-55. The microenvironment was not in receipt of adequate rainfall and was dependent on subsistent farming. The current incidence of climate change has induced substantial reduction in water availability. The aquifers were not recharged for a considerably long time until the floods of the year 2011. The floods did not have major impact on the microenvironment but it was considerable across the Indus Highway N-55. The environmental impact of climate change of the above kind has had profound impact on living pattern and professional affiliations in the macroenvironment. The wildlife vanished with land clearance while the people had to switch over from agriculture to raising livestock. With reduced availability of water in River Indus, the fisher-folk also switched to fish farming. The population engaged in the agricultural zone across N-55 grows multiple crops: rice, maize and fodder, wheat, tomato, and also owns mango orchards. People own land varying in size from 2 to 5 acres.

3.15 Food & Nutrition The people in villages enjoying prosperity eat three meals and often skip lunch. They generally eat bread with lassi (water yogurt), tea, lentils and potato. Being a nuclear family no one starves. Food is in plenty but people try to live within their means. This may be the reason that the people of these villages do not look malnourished. People in surrounding villages lead an improved quality of life because of the opportunities that are available in the mining area, at the power plant as well as facilities in Jamshoro and Hyderabad.

3.16 Monthly household income and expenditure The focused group discussion at each village showed that the families depend mostly on mining; agricultural activity is limited to subsistence farming at places where alluvial soil is available. The population did not seem to be engaged in activities other than mining which provides them ample income to remain contented at the villages. The average monthly household income is estimated to exceed Rs. 50,000 depending on


Final Report


the size (6-8) and type of engagement (mining or others) and the type of services provided (skilled/unskilled). The household expenditure is estimated at Rs. 35,000 to 40,000.

3.17 Indebtedness None of the respondent at the focus group discussion admitted that he was in debt.

3.18 Poverty The Project area did not show signs of poverty. People did seem concerned about short supply of inputs including water and power but by and large they seemed satisfied with whatever they were getting and whatever they had. Frequent droughts occurring during the past few years were a cause of concern to them but they seemed to have accepted the reality that they have to be careful in excessive use of their resources.

Family income of Rs. 50 thousand, arrived at during focused group discussion, suggests that the families live above the poverty line. All members of the family contribute to sustain their living. There is however room for improvement in quality of life which may be achieved by the following:

Conservation of resources including water Disaster management Promoting sustainable agriculture including livestock farming Improving the literacy rate Promoting skill development Awareness on population control

Degradation of the environment by unsustainable mining practices including waste disposal in the microenvironment will enhance environmental degradation, which is both a cause and a consequence of poverty. Therefore, impoverishment of resources will lead to desertification which in turn will lead to poverty, and the vicious circle will complete when poverty leads to further desertification.

3.19 Gender Issues Women in the project area are restrained from outdoor activities because of ethnic constraints. Their activities are limited to the indoors. Female education in the rural area is low but due to the increasing awareness among parents the enrollment at the primary school level is increasing. Things are changing to the extent that women in the project area take part in decision making and their implementation.

In individual interview and focus group discussions, women identified the following issues, despite ethnic restrictions:

Need for a dispensary and Mother and Child Healthcare Centre for this region of Rural Jamshoro Awareness on education Access to vocational training center for women to earn through working at home Establishment of industrial home type of institution for production of handicraft which has been on the decline Gender discrimination

3.20 Community Expectations from Proponent All respondents i.e. males as well as females expect the following from the add-on project:

Safe drinking water**


Final Report


Healthcare centers particularly for women and children** Job Opportunity* Schools* Black top link roads* Poverty alleviation through sustainable development* Vocational training Land development for suitable crops Protection from droughts

** Highest Priority *High Priority

The resident population did not expect much from Project, yet they were confident that the proposed project would enhance their lifestyle and they will enjoy better quality of life and their young and future generation will not live in poverty, if the company is committed to develop the villages and provide them job opportunities.

3.21 Archaeological and Historical Record No archaeological site was identified/seen within or around the limits demarcated for the Project during the site visit.


Final Report


Chapter 4 Impact of Project

In this chapter, the project potential impacts are analyzed based on the feasibility level design (which will be designed in detail during project implementation stage). As the present practice of NTDC, the impacts/damages caused during the following stages are compensated.

1) Field Survey 2) Tower Foundation Stage 3) Tower Erection Stage and; 4) Wire Stringing Stage

NTDC works closely with the Deputy Commissioner of and the Revenue Department of district government in each stage and any potential damages identified (or damages made) are recorded, evaluated and compensated.

4.1 Project Components and Impact Assessment Survey Based on the NTDC safety consideration described in Section 2.6 and the result of Environmental and Social Impact Assessment study, RoW/Corridor of Impact [CoI] is proposed as 60m width (30 m from the center line) for the project. For the installation of towers, the required land is 6.02 acres for 39 towers in total. The project consists of the components listed in Table 4.1.

Table a-4.1: Project Components No. Project Component Total Required Area Breakdown 1 RoW/CoI of T/Ls 160.12 acres 60 m wide x 10,800 m long 2 Foundation of Towers 6.02 acres 625.6 sq. m for 39 towers

3

Temporary (campsites, borrow material sites and access/drive way from road to RoW/CoI)

Unknown The locations will be determined and set up by the Contractor.

Total 166.14 acres

The proposed RoW/CoI was surveyed by the LARAP study team from the beginning of July 2014 to the end of November 2014. The survey included analysis of satellite image, field investigation, public consultations, focus group discussions (FGDs) and communication with relevant institutional stakeholders and, socio-economic survey within the microenvironment of the 5 km radius study area from the centre of the power plant. The findings of the survey regard to the affected land are given in followings.

4.2 Impact of Project4.2.1 Impact on Land under T/Ls and Towers In this Project, the survey revealed that the land within the RoW/CoI is a state owned barren stony wasteland, flat to mildly hilly tract, consisting of outlying spurs of the Kirthar Range. As shown in Figure 4.1 and Figure 4.2, practical land use was not observed within/along the RoW. None of the Towers of this 500 KV T/Ls are located in an urban area nor they will hinder future cultivation of land in rural areas as shown in Figure 4.3. It is important to mention here that based on the current Pakistani Law and NTDC’s practice, the land under the Tower is not acquired permanently and therefore, compensation is not required for land as long as the tower hinders access to the land under the Tower for cultivation. However, from the field survey, it was found and confirmed that the land/corridor required for the project is not used for cultivation anywhere.


Final Report


Figure a-4.1: View of the Right of Way - Plain with stone lag (known locally as stony waste land). Source: Environmental Management Consultants

Figure a-4.2: Photos of Some of the Proposed Tower Erecting Points Source: Environmental Management Consultants

Figure a-4.3: Image of Existing 500kV Transmission Line (Dadu – Jamshoro) Source: JICA Study Team


Final Report


According to NTDC’s present practice, verification of the ownership status is done by two methods; i) field survey and ii) revenue record. However, the cadastral survey has not been conducted by the revenue department. LARAP study team kept in view of claims, evidences, and any documents from those who has interest in the project land during field survey. During the field survey, two Rais (Community Leaders) claimed that the concerned land under RoW belong to these two leaders. However, these leaders are the residents of Goth Bhora Khan and Goth Murid Khan and not using the concerned land for their living. Both leaders could not evident that could justify formal legal rights to land including customary and traditional rights. During consultation, legal framework and its requirement of rights to land was explained and these two leaders agreed to forgo their claimed rights to the land concerned.

LARAP study team conducted the survey of T/Ls with the help of the Revenue Staff, Patwari5. The land under RoW was identified are determined to be unregistered that falls under the ownership of the provincial government. In particular, the concerned land is unoccupied, non-productive, and uncultivated barren waste land as shown in Table 4.2. Therefore, the towers will be installed without any formal land acquisition and no compensation will be paid.

Table a-4.2: Summary of Land Use under ROW Land Use Category Type Affected Land

(Acres) Percentage of entire

land required Number of Affected

People 1 Cultivated Land 0 0 0 2 Uncultivated / Barren Waste Land 166.14 100% 0

Total 166.14 - 0 Note: Table 4.2 does not include the area of land temporary required during construction period.

Source: LARAP Study Team

4.2.2 Impact on Structures The survey revealed that there are no potential losses or damages on residential assets, crops, livestock, commercial structures, public infrastructures/utilities, cultural/religious structures and fruit/non-fruit trees as summarized in Table 4.4.

Table a-4.3: Type of Losses by the Project No. Type of Structure Affected Number Number of Affected People 1 Residential Structure - - 2 Crops / Livestock - - 3 Commercial Structure, - - 4 Public Utilities - - 5 Cultural/Religious Structures - - 6 Trees/shrubs - -

TOTAL 0 0

Source: LARAP Study Team

The project site is located in the form of semi-arid/arid sand desert and the vegetative growth is limited to shrubs, drought resistant trees and other short grasses and herbs. Within the proposed RoW/CoI, the

5 Hereditary registrar of landed property in a subdivision of a district.


Final Report


vegetation cover is very low as shown in Figure 4.1 and 4.2. In terms of the clearance of the RoW/CoI, trees more than 6 m height were not observed. Therefore, there are no needs of vegetation removal.

4.2.3 Other Impacts during Construction Period During construction period, Contractor will temporally need i) campsite, ii) borrow material site and iii) access (driveway) to the RoW/CoI. However these locations are not determined yet. Following principles shall be applied to avoid impacts on land and social environment.

(i) The campsite of the proposed Lakhra Coal Fired Power Plant project (prime project) will be shared in this project otherwise the workers will be based in the nearby townships such as Jamshoro or Hyderabad;

(ii) The borrow material site shall be set up within the construction site of the prime project and;

(iii) The access (driveway) from the main road to the RoW/CoI shall carefully select the route and avoid any damages to the natural vegetation.

Therefore, impacts of temporary occupation of land during construction period is not significant.

There are potential damages on non-productive natural vegetation (trees/shrubs) during construction period (i.e. access to the RoW/CoI, construction of foundations, erection of towers, and stringing of power cables). Damages to trees/shrubs will be avoided/minimized by carefully selecting the area of use and route of driveway. In case of any unavoidable damages, it is recommended to replant 5 trees against cutting of one tree to maintain the pre-project environmental condition in accordance with the general requirement of Sindh Environmental Protection Agency. The type of shrubs and trees found in the project site is as referred to Table 4.5.

Table a-4.4: Type of Existing Vegetation No Scientific Name Common Name Type 1 Rhazya stricta Shahaer Shrub 2 Calotropis procera Ak Shrub 3 Acacia jacquemontii Banwar Shrub 6 Prosopis glandulosa Devi Shrub 7 Prosopis juliflora Devi Shrub 8 Salvadora oleoides Jar/ Peeron Shrub 9 Acacia nilotica Sindhi Babur Tree 10 Acacia senegal Khor Tree 11 Prosopis cineraria Kandi Tree 12 Zizyphus mauritiana Ber Tree

Source: EIA on 500kV Transmission Lines for Lakhra Coal Fired Thermal Power Plant Construction Project


Final Report


Conclusion

According to the “National Transmission and Dispatch Company Safety Considerations" issued by the Design Directorate of NTDC, Extra High Voltage (EHV: 500 KV and 220 KV) T/Ls must clear all obstructions that fall within the Right of Way (RoW), which is defined as a corridor having a minimum width of 30m on either side of the center line.

This LARAP study, including the analysis of legal framework, field investigations and stakeholder consultations was conducted in order to assess the extent and impact of land acquisition and resettlement in the process of implementation of the proposed “Four 500 kV T/Ls Project”.

According to the current Pakistani Law and NTDC’s practice, the land under the Power Line Tower is usually not acquired permanently unless the presence of the tower hinders access to the cultivated or residential land underneath it. During this Study, the field investigation has revealed that the land within the proposed RoW is uninhabited and non-productive (barren stony wastelands . It was further confirmed through stakeholder consultations that no one has the ownership of the land concerned. As such, it is concluded that the land within the proposed RoW will not be acquired in the implementation of this Project.

To sum up, no household is adversely affected by this Power Line Project, as no displacement or loss of productive assets are suffered, either permanently nor temporarily.


Final Report

Environmental Management Consultants (EMC) Annex – II

ANNEX – II Sindh Environmental Protect Act, 2014


Final Report

Environmental Management Consultants (EMC) Annex – II Page 1 of 30


Final Report



Final Report

Environmental Management Consultants (EMC) Annex – III

ANNEX – III Sindh Environmental Protection Agency (Review of IEE /

EIA) Regulation 2014


Final Report

Environmental Management Consultants (EMC) Annex –III Page 1 of 22


Final Report



Final Report

Environmental Management Consultants (EMC) Annex – IV

ANNEX – IV National Environmental Quality Standards (NEQS)


Final Report

Environmental Management Consultants (EMC) Annex – IV Page 1 of 25


Final Report



Final Report

Environmental Management Consultants (EMC) Annex – V

ANNEX – V JICA guidelines for Environmental and Social

Considerations


Final Report

Environmental Management Consultants (EMC) Annex – V Page 1 of 42


Final Report



Final Report

Environmental Management Consultants (EMC) Annex – VI

ANNEX – VI The Detailed Log of Scoping Consultations


Final Report


EIA Study of 500 kV Transmission Lines for Lakhra Coal Fired Thermal Power Plant Construction Project

Record of the Consultation Meeting

Stakeholder: Village Representatives

Date: July 6, 2014

Time: 10:00-11:00 am at Goth Hussain Rind 11:30-12:30 am at Goth Bhora Khan 1:00-2:00 pm at Goth Murid Khan and, 2:30-3:30 pm at Manzoorabad.

Meeting Venue: Village Autaq at Goth Bhora Khan, Goth Murid Khan and Manzoorabad.

Attended by: 24 Village Representatives of Goth Hussain Rind, Goth Bhora Khan, Goth Murid Khan and Manzoorabad.

Conducted by: Environmental Management Consultant (EMC) Pakistan Pvt. Ltd.

Recorded by: EMC Pakistan Pvt. Ltd

Language: Urdu and Sindhi

Preamble: Each discussion started with the introduction of the public consultation team. The village representatives were briefed on the project, it likely impact during construction of the Transmission Lines (T/Ls) and post operation phase. The community members patiently listened to the briefing. At the end of the informative session, EMC invited the participants to express or share their concerns. The issues, which raised, are discussed below with responses given by concerned persons.

No. Issues Raised By Response Provided

1. Proponents of the LCPP did nothing to help us out during our hard time. We lost our livestock and also the fertility of the land.

Attendee Concern Noted

2. People were highly concerned about the emissions from LCPP and the disposal system of the ash. Some of them were of the view that the ash has besides creating unhygienic conditions in the area, is also responsible for respiratory diseases.

Attendee Concern Noted Mitigation Measures will be provided in the EIA

3. Main concern of villagers is availability of potable water and also electricity.


4. People were of the opinion that ‘poverty’ in the area has been induced by the following factors: Recurring drought Floods Exhaustion of resources due to deforestation and

desertification High cost of living resulting from ever increasing



Final Report



price of fuel and consequently of every other commodity but very little increase in income

Scarcity of water High cost of healthcare Low literacy rate Lack of training High population growth

5. The participants emphasized the need to ensure the appointment of locals in all non-technical and support services through a transparent process.


6. It is suggested that the people from the nearby village who have land rights should be given priority.


7. The participants emphasized the need for establishment of a water purification plant.


8. They also asked for a maternity health care center because at present they and their family have to face great difficulties in taking the patients particularly women and children to Jamshoro in case of any medical emergency that becomes so expensive for them that they can’t bear this cost easily.


9. Participants were not very concerned about acquisition of a small piece of land along the RoW over which the Transmission Line and Tower will be installed. They offered their all-out support for the project and did not raise the issue of compensation of land.

Attendee Support appreciated

10. The communities further expected that the project staff, contractors and security personnel would respect the privacy of the women, sanctity of their mosque and graveyard and sight their camps away from their living area.


11. The villagers suggested that a process should be established with the start of construction so that they could regularly contact officials and address their social and cultural grievances.



Final Report




Stakeholder: Sindh Environmental Protection Agency (SEPA)

Date: July 14, 2014

Time: 10:00 am – 11:00 am

Meeting Venue: Sindh Environmental Protection Agency Office

Attended by: Director General EIA Expert

Conducted by: EMC Pakistan Pvt. Ltd.

Recorded by: EMC Pakistan Pvt. Ltd.

Language: Urdu and English

Preamble: The discussion started with the introduction of the public consultation team. EMC verbally briefed about the purpose of the meeting and gave a comprehensive description of the project and the related activities. At the end of the informative session, he invited the participants to express or share their concerns. The issues raised are discussed below with responses given by concerned persons.

No. Issues Raised / Feedback By Response Provided

1. We offer assurance in the planning and development of the project only if construction activity is started after grant of approval as required by Sindh Environmental Protection Act, 2014. The environmental performance of LCPP in the past was far from being satisfactory.

EPA Support appreciated

2. The local community has submitted several complaints to the EPA but their grievances could not be addressed due to non-cooperation from the proponents of LCPP.

EPA EMC has conducted consultation with local community and their concerns noted

3. The SEPA would only allow the project to be initiated if all provisions of the SEPA regulation are keenly followed. Citing the cases of approval by SEPA to the different coal fired power plants it was emphasized by the regulating authority that the proponent of the LCPP must come-up with reduction of emission from the stacks to levels acceptable to Sindh EQS and to suitable disposal of fly ash and bottom ash.

EPA Concern noted

4. Independent environmental performance monitoring reports must be submitted regularly. EPA emphasized on the need of effective environmental management and monitoring program during the entire development process and on the initiation of Research and Development on aspects emerging from day to day operation of the plant.

EPA Concern noted Detailed EMP will be provided in the EIA report


Final Report



5. EPA was of the view that LCPP has never submitted any audit or third party monitoring report regarding on the existing Lakhra Power Plant. This is worrisome because validity of EIA or IEE approval is subject to compliance of conditions that must be fulfilled. SEPA has started taking strict legal actions against violators of SEP Act 2014.

EPA Concern noted


Final Report




Stakeholder: Sindh Wildlife Department

Date: July 14, 2014

Time: 01:30 pm – 02:30 pm

Meeting Venue: Sindh Wildlife Department Office

Attended by: Conservator Assistant Conservator Assistant Conservator





No. Feedback By Response Provided

1. Sindh Wildlife Department (SWD) official was of the view that proposed project is being initiated in environmentally degraded land. Its ecosystem has been degraded much beyond repair during the floods. Whatever wildlife that was there has either migrated east or west or has been lost.

SWD Concern noted

2. The project during its implementation phase must be very careful in protecting the wildlife. Any assistance that may be required from the SWD to upgrade the quality of the ecosystem would be extended as and when required. He showed his concern with regard to the impoverishment of the precious ecology of the protected areas in Sindh in the name of development.

SWD Concern noted

3. The soil, gravel and stone being removed from such areas is against sustainability principles. This has endangered the wildlife habitat in particular the reptile population.

SWD Concern noted

EIA Study of 500 kV Transmission Lines for Lakhra Coal Fired Thermal


Final Report


Power Plant Construction Project


Stakeholder: IUCN Pakistan

Date: July 14, 2014

Time: 12:30 pm – 01:00 pm

Meeting Venue: IUCN Office

Attended by: IUCN officer






1. It is recommended that the EIA should include an Environmental Management Programme that should have a well laid-out monitoring Programme which is the only way to effectively mitigate the negative impacts, if there are any.

IUCN Feedback noted

2. It is observed that the proposed Lakhra Coal Power Project is on the periphery of the Kirthar Protected Area Complex (KPAC) which is already under serious stress due to anthropogenic activities all entailing impoverishment of the precious resources / ecology.

IUCN Concern noted

3. The proponent should be asked to contribute to enhancement of the environment by introducing sustainable mining practices & power generation activities.

IUCN Concern noted

EIA Study of 500 kV Transmission Lines for Lakhra Coal Fired Thermal


Final Report


Power Plant Construction Project


Stakeholder: WWF Pakistan

Date: July 14, 2014

Time: 02:00 pm – 03:00 pm

Meeting Venue: WWF Office

Attended by: One WWF officer






1. WWF representative was in support of the Project provided all measures for conservation of resources and minimization of their impoverishment are an integral part of mitigation.

WWF Concern noted and support appreciated


Final Report




Stakeholder: Sindh Rural Support Program

Date: July 15, 2014

Time: 03:00 pm – 04:00 pm

Meeting Venue: Sindh Rural Support Program Office

Attended by: Prof. Mushtaq Mirani



Language: English & Urdu



1. SRSP (NGO) was of the view that the proposed project is the need of the hour and it should get initiated at the earliest so that the much needed power is available to the fast developing industrial area of Kotri and Jamshoro.

SRSP Support appreciated

2. The SRSP would emphasize on upgrading the quality of their life by commitment of a sustainable CSR policy by the proponent. The Transmission Lines (T/Ls) should follow the guidelines of NTDC and JICA in letter and spirit suggesting thereby that the involuntary resettlement will be avoided through transparent process.

SRSP Feedback noted


Final Report




Stakeholder: Quaide Awam University

Date: July 15, 2014

Time: 03:00 pm – 04:00 pm

Meeting Venue: Dean Office, Quaide Awam University

Attended by: One Professor of Dean Office

Conducted by: Mr. Saquib Ejaz Hussain, EMC Pakistan Pvt. Ltd. Dr. Mirza Arshad Ali Beg, EMC Pakistan Pvt. Ltd.

Recorded by: Mr. Saquib Ejaz Hussain, EMC Pakistan Pvt. Ltd.

Language: English & Urdu



1. Since most of them are likely to be based on imported coal in the first instance Pakistan is likely to lose the status of a Carbon Sink. This status must be protected by using indigenous coal. This is a subject that should have been dealt through the Strategic Environmental & Social Assessment procedure which is now mandatory for policy related projects.

QUEST Concern noted


Final Report

Environmental Management Consultants (EMC) Annex – VII

ANNEX – VII The Detailed Log of Feedback Consultations


Final Report




Stakeholder: Village Representatives

Date: November 19, 2014

Time: 10:00-11:00 am at Goth Hussain Rind

11:30-12:30 am at Goth Bhora Khan 1:00-2:00 pm at Goth Murid Khan and,

2:30-3:30 pm at Manzoorabad.

Meeting Venue: Village Autaq at Goth Bhora Khan, Goth Murid Khan & Manzoorabad.

Attended by: 24 Village Representatives of Goth Hussain Rind, Goth Bhora Khan, Goth Murid Khan and Manzoorabad.

Conducted by: Environmental Management Consultant (EMC) Pakistan Pvt. Ltd.

Recorded by: EMC Pakistan Pvt. Ltd

Language: Urdu and Sindhi

Preamble: Each discussion started with the introduction of the public consultation team. The village representatives were briefed on the findings of the draft EIA report of the Transmission Lines (T/Ls). The community members patiently listened to the briefing. At the end of the informative session, EMC invited the participants to express or share their concerns. The issues, which raised, are discussed below with responses given by concerned persons.


1. They were of the opinion that the report correctly reflects the views expressed by them during the earlier meeting. They were appreciative of the role of the consultant in highlighting the criticality of the situation with which they were faced.

Attendees -

2. They however were more concerned about the impact of the negative impact of coal fired power plant than the T/Ls. They wished that the EIA on the Power Plant will identify their concern on emission and disposal of ash which they have already communicated to the EPA.

Attendee All concerns have been addressed in EIA of Power Plant

3. They were also hoping that the proponent should be broad minded in the Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) and allocated adequate funds for the welfare & up gradation of the quality of life of the community.

Attendee CSR Plans will be implemented in letter and spirit

4. They repeated the earlier demand for employment of the semi-skilled and un-skilled labor, training of their youngsters, provision of potable water and establishment of mother-child health care center.

Attendee All community expectations have been communicated to the proponent.


Final Report




Stakeholder: Sindh Environmental Protection Agency (SEPA)


Time: 10:00 am – 11:00 am

Meeting Venue: Sindh Environmental Protection Agency Office

Attended by: Director General EIA Expert



Language: Urdu & English

Preamble: The participants were briefed on the findings of the draft EIA report of the Transmission Lines (T/Ls). The community members patiently listened to the briefing. At the end of the informative session, EMC invited the participants to express or share their concerns. The issues, which raised, are discussed below with responses given by concerned persons.


1. The procedures on the EIA review are well laid in the law and the SEPA will proceed according to the procedures framed thereunder.

EPA Noted


Final Report




Stakeholder: Sindh Wildlife Department (SWD)


Time: 01:30 pm – 02:30 pm

Meeting Venue: Sindh Wildlife Department Office

Attended by: Conservator

Assistant Conservator Assistant Conservator






1. SWD was satisfied with the findings of draft report. SWD -


Final Report




Stakeholder: IUCN Pakistan


Time: 12:30 pm – 01:00 pm

Meeting Venue: IUCN Office

Attended by: IUCN officer






1. IUCN agreed with the protective measures identified for the conservation of biodiversity.

IUCN -


Final Report




Stakeholder: WWF Pakistan


Time: 02:00 pm – 03:00 pm

Meeting Venue: WWF Office

Attended by: One WWF Officer






1. WWF agreed with the protective measures identified for the conservation of biodiversity. WWF reiterated their emphasis on establishment of a biodiversity park.

WWF Feedback noted


Final Report




Stakeholder: Sindh Rural Support Program (SRSP)


Time: 03:00 pm – 04:00 pm

Meeting Venue: Sindh Rural Support Program Office

Attended by: One Officer of SRSP






1. SRSP was of the opinion that their concern was duly reflected and their concerns on the impact of flood and other vagaries were correctly identified. They reiterated their emphasis on up-grading the quality of life of the community by commitment of a sustainable CSR policy by the proponent.

SRSP Feedback noted


Final Report




Stakeholder: Quaide-Awam University


Time: 03:00 pm – 04:00 pm

Meeting Venue: Dean Office, Quaid-e-Awam University

Attended by: One Professor of Dean Office






1. The Pro-Vice-Chancellor appreciated that his views on environmental considerations were reflected in the report and was hopeful that the SEA process on National Power Policy will be initiated as soon as possible.

QUEST Feedback noted